advertisement
OEM AND SPECIALTY PRODUCTS
Founded in 1984, AFL is a global leader providing fiber optic products, equipment, and engineering services to the telecommunications, electric utility, wireless, energy, private network and OEM markets. AFL also serves a diverse mix of industry segments that include service providers, military and defense, mining, oil and gas, and biomedical.
AFL brings years of experience in developing solutions for customers, fostering a creative culture to drive and deploy innovative technologies that will improve communications for years to come. Our product line consists of fiber optic cable, transmission and substation accessories, outside plant equipment, connectors, fusion splicers, test equipment and training.
AFL’s service portfolio includes market-leading positions with the foremost communications companies supporting inside plant central office,
EF&I, outside plant, enterprise and wireless areas.
AFL is dedicated to bringing our customers a quality product as well as delivering superior value.
OEM and Specialty Products
Table of Contents
Fusion Splicers and Accessories
Laser Splicing Sytem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
FSM-100M and FSM-100P Fusion Splicers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Fujikura 70S Fusion Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Fujikura 19S Fusion Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Fujikura 70R Fusion Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Fujikura 19R Fusion Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
CT-30 Fiber Cleaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
CT-32 Precision Fiber Cleaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
CT-38 Precision Fiber Cleaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
CT-100 Fiber Cleaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
CT-105 & CT-106 Fiber Cleavers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
CT-105 & CT-106 Fiber Cleavers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
AutoCleaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
AutoCleaver LDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
AutoCleaver LDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
AutoCleaver S1 -80 µm / S1-125 µm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
AutoCleaver S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Hot Jacket Strippers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
High Tensile Stripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
USC-03 Ultrasonic Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
FSR-05, FSR-06 and FSR-07 Optical Fiber Recoaters . . . . . . . . . . .40
FSR-05, FSR-06 and FSR-07 Optical Fiber Recoaters . . . . . . . . . . .41
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
ProofTester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Fiber Arrangement Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Ribbon Forming Adhesive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Splice Protection Sleeves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Cotton Swabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Temporary Joining Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Test & Inspection Equipment and Accessories
M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
OFL280-10x FlexTester OTDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
M710 Multifunction OTDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
DFS1 Digital FiberScope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
NS and NSR Series Fiber Optic Network Simulators . . . . . . . . . . .74
OTDR Fiber Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
OPM1 Optical Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
OPM4-FTTx PON Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
OPM5 and OPM4 Optical Power Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
VOA6-SM Variable Optical Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
C850 Compact QUAD OTDR with QUAD OLS and OPM . . . . . . . .86
C860 QUAD OTDR and Certification Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
C880 QUAD Certification Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Fiber Optic Cable Assemblies
Connector Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Simplex Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Bend Insensitive Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Two-Fiber Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
LC Uniboot Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Quad Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Circular Premise Cable (CPC) Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Trunk Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . .104
SC Angled Pigtail Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Node Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
LightLink Fiber Receiver Service Cable Assemblies (FRSC) . . . . . .108
Loose Tube & Riser Rated Indoor/Outdoor Loose Tube
Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Fiber Management
Future Access Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable for MDU Applications . .112
4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable for the MDU
Splice and Distribution Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
FASTConnect ® Field-Installable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
FASTConnect ® Universal Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
FUSEConnect ® Field-Installable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
FUSEConnect ® MPO Field-Installable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . .119
FUSEConnect ® Tool Kit and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
SpliceConnect with Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Buildout Attenuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Couplers and Modules
Wideband Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Ruggedized Wideband Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Wavelength Division Multiplexer Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Planar Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Optical Coupler Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
2Q15
1
OEM and Specialty Products
Optical Splitter Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Optical FTTx Coupler Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Optical FTTx WDM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
RFoG WDM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
FTTx Splitter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
FTTx WDM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Dense WDM (DWDM) Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Coarse WDM Modules (CWDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Rack Mount Panels
LightLink LANSytem
1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Optical Interconnect Modules
Patch and Splice Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Pigtail Assemblies for Patch and Splice Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
MPO Optical Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Splice Closures and Accessories
Thin Film Filter (TFF) Compact Series CWDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Interchangeable Splice Trays for Fiber Optic Splice Closures
and Fiber Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
(LG) Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures 162
LG-410 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . .163
LG-420 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . .164
LG-420 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
LG-500 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . .166
LG-500 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures . . . .167
LG-600 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . .168
LG-600 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Aerial Splice Closure Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
LightLink Splitter Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Peel & Seal Grommet Systems for Sealed Fiber Optic Closures . . .182
LG-55 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
LG-55-SC Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
LG-150 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
LG-250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . . . . .187
LG-350 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
LG-350-AC Drop Access Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . .190
LG-350XL Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
LG-700 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
LightGuard ® Sealed Splice Closure Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
LightLink Terminal Adapters for Sealed Closures . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
OptiNID
™
Fiber Demarcation
OptiNID ® 500 Optical Demarcation Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
OptiNID ® 760XL Optical Demarcation Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
OptiNID ® 1224 Optical Demarcation Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Downhole, Umbilicial, Sensing, and Security Cables
Hermetic Fiber Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Stainless Steel Fiber Optic Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Traditional Downhole Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Low Profile Downhole Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
High Temperature Downhole Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Tactical Tight Buffered Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Non-Armored Security Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Uniflex ® Security Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Premise Fiber Optic Cables
Simplex Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Zipcord, Dual-link and Micro-Dual Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Multi-Unit Circular Premise Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Cleaning Accessories
Cletop Cassette Cleaner Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
One-Click ® Cleaner Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Cletop Adapter Cleaning Sticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
CCT - Connector Cleaning Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
FCC2 Enhanced Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid .228
Field Portable Duffle Bag Cleaning Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
FiberWipes ™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Fiber Optic Tool Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Cable Preparation Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Emergency Restoration Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Master Splicer Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
2Q15
2
LZM-100 LAZERMaster
™
Laser Splicing Sytem
LZM -100
2 mm to 125 μm Splice
Advanced Adiabatic Tapering
LZM-100
The LZM-100 LAZERMaster is a glass processing and splicing system that uses a CO
2
laser heat source to perform splicing, adiabatic tapering (to create MFAs or pump combiners), lensing, or other glass shaping operations with glass diameters of 2 .3 mm or more .
The high resolution optical analysis system works in conjunction with on-board firmware for fully automatic splicing, tapering and other glass shaping processes .
High precision glass processing is enabled by the intuitive and user-friendly on-board firmware (virtually identical to that of the Fujikura FSM-100 ARCMaster splicers) .
Operations may also be performed manually and by PC control . A SpliceLab PC control GUI is supplied with the LZM-100 to provide additional features, greater flexibility and finer control . The SpliceLab GUI is pre-installed on the All-in-one computer . Customers can also create proprietary PC control algorithms using a complete set of PC control commands .
Features
• CO
2
laser heat source eliminates electrode or filament maintenance, provides extremely stable operation and greatly reduces the need for periodic calibration
• Automated laser beam diameter control to fine tune the size of the heating area
• An advanced configurable system capable of producing tapers, ball lenses, combiners,
MFAs, glass shaping and splicing
• Excellent performance for dissimilar diameter fiber splicing
• Ultra high strength splicing
• Redundant automated laser safety features
• 2 .3 mm maximum fiber diameter (larger fibers may be spliced manually)
• Long travel / high resolution Z motion for long adiabatic tapers
• Automatic operation by on-board LZM-100 splicer firmware, manual operation or operation by PC (PC and SpliceLab GUI included with the LZM-100 system)
• Intuitive SpliceLab PC GUI: Easy to understand, navigate and operate
• Complete set of PC command codes enables users to develop proprietary processes
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
LAZERMaster LZM-100 Glass Processing & Splicing System
(Standard baseline LZM-100 system . Includes AC adapters & cords and SpliceLab PC software)
LAZERMaster LZM-100 (with dual theta motors)
All-in-one Computer (includes keyboard and mouse, monitor stand for mounting all-in-one computer . SpliceLab software pre-installed .) (required)
End-View Observation & Alignment Option
Side Table Work Surface Option (Work surface to provide additional area for accessories such as fiber preparation equipment . May be attached to the left or right side of the LZM-100 or both . Folds down against the side of the LZM-100 chassis when not needed or to allow easy movement through narrow doorways .)
Cylindrical Lens & Lens Holder (optional)
LZM-100 Training (USA)
LZM-100 Training (International)
ITEM NO.
S015871
S015872
S015242
S015244
S015247
S015251
S015867
S015868
Ball Lens 320 μm with
125 Splice to 80 μm Fiber
© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00061, Revision 3, 7.24.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
33
Specifications
Fiber Heating and Splicing Method
Laser Safety Features
Laser Beam Control
Typical Splice Loss
Typical Splice Strength
Camera Field of View
Fiber Observation Methods
CO
2
Laser
Metal cover with interlock, class 1 enclosure
Automatic actuation of safety shutter
Automatic laser power cutoff
Triple redundancy
Proprietary feedback system assures laser beam power stability
Laser beam size and shape may be customized to meet specific user requirements
0 .02 dB for SMF (ITU-T G .652)
>400 kpsi for SMF (ITU-T G .652) using appropriate fiber preparation equipment
2 .7 mm
• PAS (Profile Alignment System) via transverse fiber observation .
• WSI (Warm Splice Image) and WTI (Warm Taper Image)
• End-view observation (Optional)
Applicable Fiber Diameter
V-Groove Clamping System
Fiber Handling
Alignment Methods
80 μm to 2300 μm for automatic alignment by PAS
Larger diameter fibers may be aligned manually or by power meter feedback
Infinitely variable from 80 μm up to 2300 μm
Clamping bare fiber or fiber coating
Patented “split V-groove” system
Fujikura FSM-100, FSM-45 and FSM-40 splicer fiber holders
Custom fixtures to meet specific customer requirements
PAS (Profile Alignment System, automatic alignment by camera observation)
Manual
Other methods by PC control
Power meter feedback via GPIB (Optional)
End-view (Optional)
X/Y Alignment Resolution
Maximum Z Travel Length
Z Travel Resolution
Maximum Taper Length
Maximum Taper Ratio
Maximum Taper Speed
Splicing Control
PC Option
Interface Ports
0 .1 μm
150 mm (both left and right Z units)
0 .125 μm theoretical
130 mm
10:1 standard (For uniform direction, one-pass tapering)
Dual direction tapering offers greatly increased taper ratios, as does tapering with more than one tapering pass .
1 mm/sec standard (Optional 5 mm/sec)
Internal firmware or operation by PC
Fiber Tapering & Glass Shaping Control Internal firmware or operation by PC
PC Control SpliceLab software will be provided
Complete command set for PC control
An all-in-one computer is required . Use of the SpliceLab software on a PC provides finer control and additional features compared to the LZM-100 internal firmware . Using another software application, the PC interface also allows for advanced maintenance functions such as the ability to confirm laser beam alignment, and align if required .
USB 2 .0 (For PC communications, data and image download, etc .)
GPIB (Optional, for power meter feedback)
Electrical Power
Operating Conditions
Rotation Motors
PM Fiber Alignment Methods
100-240 VAC
15-40oC
Optional: Provides theta rotational motion for PM alignment for both left and right sides
• PAS (For PANDA and other PM fibers)
• IPA (Interrelation Profile Alignment, applicable to almost all PM fibers . Three distinct IPA methods available .)
• End-view (Optional)
• Power meter feedback (Requires polarizer and analyzer, as well as optional GPIB interface)
• Manual
• Other methods by PC control
End-View Observation & Alignment Optional internal end-view system
Preliminary Specifications, subject to revision and refinement
© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00061, Revision 3, 7.24.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
44
FSM-100M
FSM-100P
Features
• Split V-groove clamping system
• “Plasma Zone” fiber positioning
• PAS and WSI
• New IPA alignment method for PM fibers
• Enhanced sweep arc technology
• Zero degree fiber handling for LDF
• Special functions for glass processing capability
• Fiber profile memory function
• New arc calibration technology
• Short cleave length capability
• Fast and accurate PANDA splice mode
• Ergonomic, production friendly design
• User selectable display on dual
LCD monitors
• Internet firmware updates
FSM-100M and FSM-100P Fusion Splicers
Whether splicing similar fiber types or double clad LDF fibers for high power lasers, the ARCMaster series splicers provide multiple solutions for diverse production needs .
With State of the ARC ™ technology, the ARCMaster sets the standard for fusion splicing with a multitude of new features designed to make splicing easier .
The patent-pending “split V-groove” fiber clamping system accommodates optical fiber ranges from 60 to 2000 μm for cladding or coating without changing V-grooves or fiber clamps . The “Plasma Zone” fiber positioning system incorporates multiple fiber and electrode positioning techniques to provide unprecedented versatility for splicing LDF, heat sensitive or small diameter fibers .
With a new fiber imaging technology, Interrelation Profile Alignment (IPA), alignment and splicing capabilities are possible with virtually any PM fiber type . Longer fiber tapering application is possible with Fujikura’s Sweep Arc technology . Incorporating
PAS (cold fiber image) and WSI (warm image) technologies, the optical analysis system provides a number of advanced features including improved loss estimation capabilities, fiber image performance with both LDF, small or heat sensitive fibers .
Users can program multi-step glass processing operations to include non-splicing operations such as generating tapers or lenses . Dual LCD monitors provide enhanced data and graphical information that is user-selectable during each stage of the splicing process . Both units are designed with the needs for production in mind and are suitable for the most popular production workstations .
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
ARCMaster FSM-100M Fusion Splicer (machine only)
Includes: FH-100-250 fiber holders (pair), FH-100-900 fiber holders (pair), spare electrodes (pair), ADC-15 AC adapter, ACC-02 AC power cord, USB cable, dust cleaning swab set, operation manual and software on CD, and transit case
ARCMaster FSM-100M Fusion Splicer Kit *
ARCMaster FSM-100P Fusion Splicer (machine only)
Includes: FH-100-250 fiber holders (pair), FH-100-400 fiber holders (pair), FH-100-900 fiber holders (pair), spare electrodes (pair), ADC-15 AC adapter, ACC-02 AC power cord,
USB cable, dust cleaning swab set, operation manual and software on CD, and transit case
ARCMaster FSM-100P Fusion Splicer Kit *
One year extended warranty (extends factory warranty by one year)
Two year extended warranty (extends factory warranty by two years)
AFL NO.
S014821
S014822
S014823
S014824
S012996
S013000
* Each splicer kit includes an HJS-02 Hot Jacket Stripper, a CT-32 Cleaver and a SPA-HJS-030 Spacer for
HJS-02 in addition to the items listed above .
5
© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00017, Revision 3, 2.3.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
FSM-100M and FSM-100P Fusion Splicers
Specifications
PARAMETER
Applicable Fiber
Fiber Dimension
Cleave Length
Typical Splice Loss
Splicing Time
VALUE
Silica based Single-mode and Multimode glass fiber:
SMF (G .652), MMF (G .651), NZDSF (G .655), EDF,
DCF, LDF and PMF, etc .
Cladding diameter: 60 to 500 µm
Coating diameter: 100 to 2,000 µm
Glass clamping: 8 to 10 mm (standard 9mm)
Coating clamping: 3 to 5 mm (standard 4mm)
SMF: 0 .03 dB
MMF: 0 .02 dB
NZDSF/LDF: 0 .05 dB
PMF: 0 .06 dB (FSM-100P)
SMF/MMF: 15 sec .
NZDSF/LDF: 25 sec .
PMF (PANDA): 35 to 50 sec . (FSM-100P)
PMF (IPA): 90 to 300 sec . (FSM-100P)
Polarization Cross-Talk PMF (PANDA): -40 dB / 0 .6 degree (FSM-100P)
PMF (IPA): -32 dB / 1 .4 degree (FSM-100P)
Return Loss
Heating Time
60 dB or more
FP-03 (40 mm): 30 sec .
FP-03 (60 mm): 35 sec .
Micro sleeves: 55 sec .
Sweep Length
Electrode Life
Electrode Gap
Electrode Offset
±5 mm
2,500 Arc Discharges (SMF G .652 splicing at 1mm gap)
1 to 3 mm
-0 .3 to +0 .1 mm
Proof Test
Dimensions (mm)
1 .96 N to 2 .45 N
311W x 232D x 160H
Weight
(excluding AC adapter)
FSM-100M: 7 .7 kg
FSM-100P: 7 .9 kg
Operation Temperature 0°C to 40°C at 0 to 95% RH (Non-Dew)
Storage Temperature -40°C to 80°C
Monitor Type
Magnification
Dual 4 .1 inch TFT color LCD monitors
125 µm: 187 to 300 X
250 µm: 58 to 300 X
400 µm: 58 to 93 X
Accessories for the FSM-100M and FSM-100P
DESCRIPTION
High Strength Accessories
High Strength Preparation Kit
Includes: USC-02, AFL PowerStrip and AFL PowerCleave
Ultrasonic Cleaner (USC-02)
HTS-12 High Tensile Stripper - includes 250 µm blades
(400 µm available)
AFL PowerStrip High Tensile Stripper
AFL PowerCleave High Strength Cleaver
Strippers
HJS-02 Hot Jacket Stripper
SPA-HJS-030 Spacer
HJS-02-80 Hot Jacket Stripper (80 µm cladding)
JS-02-900 (900 µm)
Electrodes
ELCT2-25 Spare Electrodes (pair)
Cleavers
CT-32 Cleaver
CT-38 Cleaver ( for 80 µm cladding)
Fiber Holders (Pairs)
FH-100-060 Fiber Holder (55 µm - 71 µm)
FH-100-100 Fiber Holder (94 µm - 117 µm)
FH-100-125 Fiber Holder (118 µm - 139 µm)
FH-100-150 Fiber Holder (140 µm - 169 µm)
FH-100-180 Fiber Holder (170 µm -199 µm)
FH-100-210 Fiber Holder (200 µm -239 µm)
FH-100-250 Fiber Holder (240 µm -289 µm)
FH-100-300 Fiber Holder (290 µm -339 µm)
FH-100-350 Fiber Holder (340 µm -389 µm)
FH-100-400 Fiber Holder (390 µm -489 µm)
FH-100-500 Fiber Holder (490 µm -589 µm)
FH-100-600 Fiber Holder (590 µm -689 µm)
FH-100-700 Fiber Holder (690 µm -789 µm)
FH-100-800 Fiber Holder (790 µm -889 µm)
FH-100-900 Fiber Holder (890 µm -989 µm)
FH-40-LT900 Fiber Holder
Power and Cords
ADC-15 AC Adapter (FSM-100M/P)
ACC-02 AC Power Cord
ADC-09 AC Adapter for HJS-02
ACC-09 AC Power Cord (for ADC-09)
Miscellaneous
CC-27 Transit Case (100 M/P)
DCS-01 Dust Cleaning Swab
HP Power Meter Coupling Adapter
ILX Power Meter Coupling Adapter
Fiber Holder Adapter for HP/ILX PM
AFL NO.
S013632
S014783
S012094
S012808
S009972
S010340
S012086
S013264
S010908
S002068
S014348
S014349
S014826
S001171
S014389
S014390
S014825
S014827
S012180
S012184
S012188
S014977
S014828
S014829
S014861
S014830
S014831
S014832
S014833
S014834
S014835
S014836
S014837
S014838
S014839
S014840
S013584
© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00017, Revision 3, 2.3.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
6
Fusion Splicing Systems
70S
In case with lid detached
Fujikura 70S Fusion Splicer
The Fujikura 70S is the world’s fastest and most robust core alignment fusion splicer .
Incorporating the proven ruggedized features pioneered by Fujikura, the 70S has added automated and enhanced user control features to increase splicing efficiency .
A user programmable, automated wind protector expedites the splicing process by automatically closing to initiate the splice process, and opening upon splice completion .
Fully programmable “auto open sheath clamps” open one or both sheath clamps, after the tensile test, to prepare the fiber for removal . A new automated “clamshell design” tube heater applies heat to both sides of the splice protection sleeve resulting in a
14-second shrink time . The result is a total splice process time of approximately 21 seconds! Ruggedness and durability are greatly enhance by a mirror-less optical system and "severe-impact resistant" monitor . Battery capacity is now 200 splices/shrinks .
An innovative transit case doubles as a built-in or mobile workstation and makes splicing easier than ever before .
Features
• Automated and programmable wind protector
• 14-second automated tube heater
• Fully ruggedized for shock, dust and moisture
• Li-ion battery with 200 splices/shrinks per charge
• 5 mm cleave length for splice on connector or small package needs
• Sheath clamp or fiber holder operation
• On-board training and support videos
• Internet software upgrades
• Multi-function transit case with integrated workstation
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
70S Fusion Splicer (machine only)
Includes: ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair),
S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Pot, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap,
Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap
70S Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver)
Includes: CT30A Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord,
ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser,
Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual, and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap
70S Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver, battery and cord)
Includes: BTR-09 Battery, DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord, CT30A Cleaver,
ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair),
S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap,
Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap
One Year Extended Warranty
Two Year Extended Warranty
AFL NO.
S015580
S015590
S015591
S012996
S013000
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00059, Revision 3, 5 .26 .2015
Specifications are subject to change without notice .
7
Fujikura 70S Fusion Splicer
Recommended Accessories for the 70S
DESCRIPTION
Cleavers
CT-06A Cleaver
CT-30A Cleaver
Fiber Holders
FH-60-250 Fiber Holder (pair)
FH-60-900 Fiber Holder (pair)
FH-60-160 Fiber Holder (pair)
FH-60-LT900 Fiber Holder (pair)
FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder
FUSEConnect ® Accessories
FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each)
FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair)
FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each)
CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair)
CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair)
Sheath Clamps
CLAMP-S70C Sheath Clamp
(Coating diameter from 100 µm - 1000 µm (5-16 mm cleave))
CLAMP-S70D Sheath Clamp
(900 µm diameter loose tube fiber (5-16 mm cleave))
AFL NO.
S015276
S014080
S014548
S014549
S014690
S015181
S015275
S014696
S014695
S014697
S014705
S014704
S015586
S015862
DESCRIPTION
Batteries and Power Cords
ADC-18 AC Adapter
ACC-14 AC Power Cord
BTR-09 Battery
DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord
DCC-12 Power Cord
(connects AC Adapter to cigarette lighter socket)
DCC-13 Power Cord
(connects AC Adapter to power source via alligator clips)
Miscellaneous
AFL NO.
S015585
S014536
S015581
S015582
S013552
S013556
ELCT2-20A Electrodes
Portable Tripod Workstation (see product profile for more detail)
S013532
S014773
ASW-02 Splicing Workstation (see product profile for more detail) S010532
JP-06 J-PLATE (70/19 Series) S016100
SL-01 Sleeve Loader
Worktable Upper
S015674
S015779
Worktable Lower
Inner Box Set
USB Cable
CC-30 Transit Case
S015780
S015979
S014777
S015587
Specifications
PARAMETER
Model
Applicable Fibers
Cladding Diameter
Coating Diameter
Fiber Cleave Length
Typical Average Splice Loss
Splicing Time
Arc Calibration Method
Splicing Modes
Splice Loss Estimate
Storage of Splice Result
Fiber Display
Magnification
Viewing Method
Operating Condition
Mechanical Proof Test
Tube Heater
Tube Heating Time
Protection Sleeve Length
VALUE
70S Fusion Splicer
Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DS (G .653), NZDS (G .655)
80 - 150 μm
100 μm to 1,000 μm
5 to 16 mm
0 .02 dB with SM, 0 .01 dB with MM, 0 .04 dB with DS, 0 .04 dB with NZDS, measured by cut-back method relevant to ITU-T standards
SM FAST mode — 7 seconds; SM AUTO mode — 10 seconds; AUTO mode — 15 seconds with SM fiber
Automatic, real-time and by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available
100 preset and user programmable modes
Based upon dual camera core axis alignment data
Last 2,000 results stored in the internal memory
X or Y, or both X and Y simultaneously . Front or rear monitor display options with automated image orientation
320X for single X or Y view, or 200X for X and Y view
Dual cameras with 4 .7 inch TFT color LCD monitor
0 to 5,000 m above sea level, 0 to 95%RH and -10 to 50°C respectively
1 .96 to 2 .25N
Built-in tube heater with 30 heating modes; auto-start function
Typical 14 seconds with FP-03 sleeve, 17 seconds with FP3 (40), 5-16 seconds with Fujikura micro sleeves
60 mm, 40 mm, micro
Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 200 cycles with power save functions activated
Electrode Life
Power Supply
Terminals
Wind Protection
Dimensions
Weight
3,000 Arc Discharges
Auto voltage selection from 100 to 240 V AC or 10 to 15 V DC with ADC-18, 14 .8 V DC with BTR-09 battery
USB 1 .1 (USB-B type) for PC communication . Mini-DIN (6-pin) for HJS-02/03
Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s . (34 mph)
146 W x 159 D x 150 H (mm) / 5 .75 W x 6 .25 D x 5 .9 H (inches)
2 .5 kg (5 .5 lbs) with AC adapter ADC-18; 2 .7 kg (5 .95 lbs) with BTR-09 battery
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00059, Revision 3, 5 .26 .2015
Specifications are subject to change without notice .
8
21S (with Cleaver for scale)
Workstation in Transit Case
Workstation on Transit Case
Fujikura 21S Kit 1
Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer
The Fujikura 21S active cladding alignment fusion splicer bridges the long standing gap between core alignment and fixed v-groove fusion splicer technology . Moveable v-grooves eliminate splicer errors due to dust and other contaminants . Despite its incredibly small size, this ruggedized, full-featured unit offers unmatched versatility for splicing in the most challenging environments . The innovative transit case and work tray provide multiple options for the best utilization of available work space while the long life battery provides power for up to 200 splice cycles which include application of the splice protection sleeve .
The Fujikura 21S incorporates features typically found only in more expensive models .
Removable sheath clamps allow the use of fiber holders if desired . The large 4 .7" monitor provides a crystal clear image, even in the brightest sunlight, for evaluating splice quality . The electrode life has been extended to 3,000 splices, minimizing downtime for replacement and stabilization . Software updates are accomplished via the internet allowing users to quickly update their software as new splice programs become available . The fully ruggedized chassis provides for shock, dust and moisture protection while the two camera observation system provides for accurate fiber alignment and loss estimation calculations . The Fujikura 21S is also fully compatible with the FUSEConnect
®
line of fusion installable connectors .
Backed by the best service team in the industry, the Fujikura 21S is the ideal splicer to use when portability, ruggedness, versatility and reliability are needed for your splicing application .
Features
• Dual camera, active cladding alignment technology
• World’s smallest active clad alignment splicer at 4 .72"W x 7 .44"D x 2 .8"H
• Fully ruggedized for shock, moisture and dust resistance
• Transit case converts to easy to use workstation
• Extended life electrodes
• Long life battery (200 splices/shrinks per charge)
• Auto start tube heater
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer
Includes: Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer, S21A Sheath Clamp, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-11 Battery
Pack (installed), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD,
Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container,SD01 Screwdriver and CC-32 Transit Case
Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer Kit 1
Includes: Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer, CT-30A Cleaver, S21A Sheath Clamp, ADC-19 AC Adapter,
BTR-11 Battery Pack (installed), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair),
Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-32 Transit Case
Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer Kit 2
Includes: Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer, CT-06A Cleaver, S21A Sheath Clamp, ADC-19 AC Adapter,
BTR-11 Battery Pack (installed), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair),
Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-32 Transit Case
One Year Extended Warranty
Two Year Extended Warranty
AFL NO.
S016111
S016155
S016154
S012996
S013000
© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00082, Revision 0, 1 .22 .15
Specifications are subject to change without notice .
99
Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer
Recommended Accessories for the 21S
DESCRIPTION
Cleavers
CT-06A Cleaver
CT-30A Cleaver
Fiber Holders
FH-60-250 Fiber Holder (250 µm single fiber)
FH-60-900 Fiber Holders (900 µm single fiber)
FH-60-LT900 (900 µm loose buffer tube)
FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder
Sheath Clamps
CLAMP-S21A Sheath Clamp
CLAMP-S21B Sheath Clamp
Batteries
BTR-11 Battery Pack
AFL NO.
S015276
S014080
S014548
S014549
S015181
S015275
S016160
S016161
S016156
DESCRIPTION
FUSEConnect
®
Accessories
FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each)
FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair)
FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each)
CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair)
CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair)
Miscellaneous
Worktable Set
TS-01 Tripod Screw
ELCT2-12 Electrodes
ADC-19 AC Adapter
ACC-09 Power Cord
AP-01 Alcohol Container
SD-01 Screwdriver
CC-32 Transit Case
Specifications
PARAMETER
Applicable Fibers
Cladding Diameter
Coating Diameter
Fiber Cleave Length
Typical Average Splice Loss
Splicing Time
Arc Calibration Method
Splicing Modes
Splice Loss Estimate
Storage of Splice Result
Fiber Display
Magnification
Viewing Method
VALUE
Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DSF (G .653), NZDS (G .655)
125 μm
100 μm to 3000 μm
5 mm to 16 mm
0 .03 dB (SM), 0 .01 dB (MM), 0 .05 dB (DS) and 0 .05 dB (NZDS)
Typical 9 sec with SM
Automatic, real-time and by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available
Total 100 splice modes
Based on dual camera cladding alignment data
Last 2,000 splices
4 .7 inch TFT color LCD with X or Y view or both X and Y view simultaneously
200X magnification for X/Y view
2 axis CMOS camera
Operating Condition
Mechanical Proof Test
Tube Heater
Altitude: 0 to 3,660 m above sea level, -10° to 50° C, Humidity: 0 to 95% RH, non-dew
1 .96 N
30 heating modes
Tube Heating Time
Protection Sleeve Length
Typical 30 sec with FP-60 (60 mm) sleeve
60 mm, 40 mm, micro
Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 200 cycles with BTR-11
Electrode Life
Power Supply
Terminals
Wind Protection
Dimensions
Weight
3,000 splices
Auto select from 100 V to 240 V with AC adapter, 14 .8 V DC with installed battery
USB 2 .0
Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s . (34 mph)
120 x 189 x 71 (mm) / 4 .72" x 7 .44" x 2 .8" (inches)
1 .14 kg (2 .51 lbs) with battery
AFL NO.
S014696
S014695
S014697
S014705
S014704
S016157
S015895
S014028
S015523
S014390
S015525
S015526
S016158
© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00082, Revision 0, 1 .22 .15
Specifications are subject to change without notice .
FU
SION
SPLICER
S
Fiber Optic Cable
19S
In case with lid detached
Fujikura 19S Fusion Splicer
The Fujikura 19S is a low cost, fixed v-groove single fiber splicer with similar features found on the Fujikura 70S . Incorporating the proven ruggedized features pioneered by
Fujikura, the 19S has added automated and enhanced user control features to increase splicing efficiency . A user programmable, automated wind protector expedites the splicing process by automatically closing to initiate the splice process, and opening upon splice completion . Fully programmable “auto open sheath clamps” open one or both sheath clamps, after the tensile test, to prepare the fiber for removal . A new automated “clamshell design” tube heater applies heat to both sides of the splice protection sleeve resulting in a faster shrink time . Ruggedness and durability are greatly enhance by a mirror-less optical system and "severe-impact resistant" monitor . An innovative transit case doubles as a built-in or mobile workstation and makes splicing easier than ever before .
Features
• Automated and programmable wind protector
• Fully ruggedized for shock, dust and moisture
• Li-ion battery with 180 splice/heat cycles per charge
• 5 mm cleave length for splice on connector or small package needs
• Sheath clamp or fiber holder operation
• On-board training and support videos
• Internet software upgrades
• Multi-function transit case with integrated workstation
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
19S Fusion Splicer (machine only)
Includes: ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair),
S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Pot, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap,
Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap
19S Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver)
Includes: CT30A Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord,
ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser,
Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual, and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap
19S Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver, battery and cord)
Includes: BTR-09 Battery, DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord, CT30A Cleaver,
ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair),
S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap,
Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap
One Year Extended Warranty
Two Year Extended Warranty
AFL NO.
S015679
S015680
S015681
S012996
S013000
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
11
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00072, Revision 3, 10 .15 .2014
Specifications are subject to change without notice .
FU
SION
SPLICER
S
Fiber Optic Cable
Fujikura 19S Fusion Splicer
Recommended Accessories for the 19S
DESCRIPTION
Cleavers
CT-06A Cleaver
CT-30A Cleaver
Fiber Holders
FH-60-250 Fiber Holder (pair)
FH-60-900 Fiber Holder (pair)
FH-60-LT900 Fiber Holder (pair)
FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder
FUSEConnect
™
Accessories
FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each)
FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair)
FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each)
CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair)
CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair)
Sheath Clamps
CLAMP-S70C Sheath Clamp
(Coating diameter from 100 µm - 1000 µm (5-16 mm cleave))
CLAMP-S70D Sheath Clamp
(900 µm diameter loose tube fiber (5-16 mm cleave))
AFL NO.
S015276
S014080
S014548
S014549
S015181
S015275
S014696
S014695
S014697
S014705
S014704
S015586
S015862
DESCRIPTION
Batteries and Power Cords
ADC-18 AC Adapter
ACC-14 AC Power Cord
BTR-09 Battery
DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord
DCC-12 Power Cord
(connects AC Adapter to cigarette lighter socket)
DCC-13 Power Cord
(connects AC Adapter to power source via alligator clips)
Miscellaneous
AFL NO.
S015585
S014536
S015581
S015582
S013552
S013556
ELCT2-20A Electrodes
Portable Tripod Workstation (see product profile for more detail)
S013532
S014773
ASW-02 Splicing Workstation (see product profile for more detail) S010532
JP-06 J-PLATE (70/19 Series) S016100
SL-01 Sleeve Loader
Worktable Upper
S015674
S015779
Worktable Lower
Inner Box Set
CC-30
USB Cable
S015780
S015979
S015587
S014777
Specifications
PARAMETER
Model
Applicable Fibers
Cladding Diameter
Coating Diameter
Fiber Cleave Length
Typical Average Splice Loss
Splicing Time
Arc Calibration Method
Splicing Modes
Splice Loss Estimate
Storage of Splice Result
Fiber Display
Magnification
Viewing Method
Operating Condition
Mechanical Proof Test
Tube Heater
Tube Heating Time
Protection Sleeve Length
VALUE
19S Fusion Splicer
Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DS (G .653), NZDS (G .655)
125 μm
100 μm to 1,000 μm
5 to 16 mm
0 .05 dB with SM, 0 .02 dB with MM, 0 .08 dB with DS, 0 .08 dB with NZDS, measured by cut-back method relevant to ITU-T and IEC standards
SM FAST mode — 9 seconds; SM AUTO mode — 11 seconds; AUTO mode — 11 seconds
Automatic, real-time and by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available
100 preset and user programmable modes
Based upon dual camera cladding axis offset alignment data
Last 2,000 results to be stored in the internal memory
X or Y, or both X and Y simultaneously . Front or rear monitor display options with automated image orientation
320X for single X or Y view, or 200X for X and Y view
Dual cameras with 4 .73 inch TFT color LCD monitor
0 to 3,660 m above sea level, 0 to 95%RH and -10 to 50°C respectively
1 .96 to 2 .25N
Built-in tube heater with 30 heating modes; auto-start function
17 seconds with FP3 (40), 5-16 seconds with Fujikura micro sleeves
60 mm, 40 mm, micro
Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 180 cycles with power save functions activated
Electrode Life
Power Supply
3,000 Arc Discharges
Auto voltage selection from 100 to 240 V AC or 10 to 15 V DC with ADC-18, 14 .8 V DC with BTR-09 battery
Terminals
Wind Protection
Dimensions
Weight
USB 1 .1 (USB-B type) for PC communication . Mini-DIN (6-pin) for HJS-02/03 and SH-8 tube heater
Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s . (34 mph)
146 W x 159 D x 150 H (mm) / 5 .75 W x 6 .25 D x 5 .9 H (inches)
2 .3 kg (5 .1 lbs) with AC adapter; 2 .5 kg (5 .5 lbs) with battery
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00072, Revision 3, 10 .15 .2014
Specifications are subject to change without notice .
12
FU
SION
SPLICER
S
Fiber Optic Cable
12S (with Cleaver for scale)
Workstation in Transit Case
Workstation on Transit Case
Fujikura 12S Kit 1
Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer
The Fujikura 12S is the world’s smallest, lightest and most portable fusion splicer available today . Despite its incredibly small size, this ruggedized, full-featured unit offers unmatched versatility for splicing in the most challenging environments . The innovative transit case and work tray provide multiple options for the best utilization of available work space while the long life battery provides power for up to 100 splice cycles which include application of the splice protection sleeve .
The Fujikura 12S incorporates features typically found only in more expensive models .
The large 4 .5" monitor provides a crystal clear image, even in the brightest sunlight, for evaluating splice quality . The electrode life has been extended to 3,000 splices, minimizing downtime for replacement and stabilization . Software updates are accomplished via the internet allowing users to quickly update their software as new splice programs become available . The fully ruggedized chassis provides for shock, dust and moisture protection while the two camera observation system provides for accurate fiber alignment and loss estimation calculations . The Fujikura 12S is also fully compatible with the FUSEConnect
®
line of fusion installable connectors .
Backed by the best service team in the industry, the Fujikura 12S is the ideal splicer to use when portability, ruggedness, versatility and reliability are needed for your splicing application .
Features
• World’s smallest splicer at 4 .76"W x 6 .38"D x 2 .24"H
• Fully ruggedized for shock, moisture and dust resistance
• Transit case converts to easy to use workstation
• Dual camera, fixed v-groove alignment technology
• Extended life electrodes
• Long life battery (100 splices/shrinks per charge)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer
Includes: Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery Pack (installed),
FH-60-250 Fiber Holders (pair), FH-60-900 Fiber Holder, ACC-09 Power Cord,
ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide,
AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case
Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer Kit 1
Includes: Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer, CT-30 Cleaver, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery
Pack (installed), FH-60-250 Fiber Holders (pair), FH-60-900 Fiber Holders (pair),
ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD,
Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case
Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer Kit 2
Includes: Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer, CT-06 Cleaver, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery
Pack (installed), FH-60-250 Fiber Holders (pair), FH-60-900 Fiber Holders (pair),
ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD,
Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case
One Year Extended Warranty
Two Year Extended Warranty
AFL NO.
S015521
S015522
S015530
S012996
S013000
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00028, Revision 4, 1 .22 .2015
Specifications are subject to change without notice .
FU
SION
SPLICER
S
Fiber Optic Cable
Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer
Recommended Accessories for the 12S
DESCRIPTION
Cleavers
CT-06 Cleaver (for single fibers)
CT-30 Cleaver (for single to 12 ribbon fibers)
Fiber Holders
FH-60-250 Fiber Holder (pair)
FH-60-900 Fiber Holder (pair)
FH-60-LT900 Fiber Holder (pair)
FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder
FUSEConnect
®
Accessories
FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each)
FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair)
FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each)
CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair)
CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair)
AFL NO.
S015588
S014076
S014548
S014549
S015181
S015275
S014696
S014695
S014697
S014705
S014704
DESCRIPTION
Batteries
BTR-10 Battery Pack
Miscellaneous
Worktable Set
TS-01 Tripod Screw
ELCT2-12 Electrodes
ADC-19 AC Adapter
ACC-09 Power Cord
AP-01 Alcohol Container
SD-01 Screwdriver
CC-29 Transit Case
USB Cable
AFL NO.
S015527
S015817
S015895
S014028
S015523
S014390
S015525
S015526
S015524
S014777
Specifications
PARAMETER
Model
Applicable Fibers
Cladding Diameter
Coating Diameter
Fiber Cleave Length
Typical Average Splice Loss
Splicing Time
Arc Calibration Method
Splicing Modes
Splice Loss Estimate
Storage of Splice Result
Fiber Display
Magnification
Viewing Method
Operating Condition
Mechanical Proof Test
Tube Heater
Tube Heating Time
Protection Sleeve Length
VALUE
12S Fusion Splicer
Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DSF (G .653), NZDS (G .655)
125 μm
250 μm or 900 μm
5 mm to 13 mm
0 .05 dB (SM), 0 .02 dB (MM), 0 .08 dB (DS) and 0 .08 dB (NZDS)
Typical 15 sec with SM
Automatic, real-time and by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available
Total 100 splice modes
Based on dual camera cladding alignment data
Last 2,000 splices
4 .5 inch TFT color LCD with X or Y view or both X and Y view simultaneously
100X magnification for X/Y view
2 axis CMOS camera
Altitude: 0 to 3,660 m above sea level, -10° to 50° C, Humidity: 0 to 95% RH, non-dew
1 .96 N
30 heating modes
Typical 30 sec with FP-03 (60 mm) sleeve
60 mm, 40 mm, micro
Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 100 cycles with BTR-10
Electrode Life
Power Supply
3,000 splices
Auto select from 100 V to 240 V with AC adapter, 14 .8 V DC with installed battery
Terminals
Wind Protection
Dimensions
Weight
USB 2 .0
Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s . (34 mph)
121 x 162 x 57 (mm) / 4 .76 x 6 .38 x 2 .24 (inches)
.776 kg (1 .71 lbs) with battery
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00028, Revision 4, 1 .22 .2015
Specifications are subject to change without notice .
FU
SION
SPLICER
S
Fiber Optic Cable
70R
In case with lid detached
Fujikura 70R Fusion Splicer
The Fujikura 70R is equipped with a precision, fixed v-groove for splicing single fibers or ribbon fiber up to 12 fibers . Incorporating the proven ruggedized features pioneered by Fujikura, the 70R has added automated and enhanced user control features to increase splicing efficiency . A user programmable, automated wind protector expedites the splicing process by automatically closing to initiate the splice process, and opening upon splice completion . A new auto-start “clamshell design” tube heater applies heat to both sides of the splice protection sleeve resulting in a 40-second shrink time for
12-fiber ribbon . The result is a total splice process time of approximately 55 seconds!
Ruggedness and durability are greatly enhanced by a mirror-less optical system and
"severe-impact resistant" monitor . Battery capacity is now 110 splices/shrinks .
An innovative transit case doubles as a built-in or mobile workstation and makes splicing easier than ever before .
Features
• Automated and programmable wind protector
• 40-second automated tube heater
• Fully ruggedized for shock, dust and moisture
• Li-ion battery with 110 splices/shrinks per charge
• On-board training and support videos
• Internet software upgrades
• Multi-function transit case with integrated workstation
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
70R Fusion Splicer (machine only)
Includes: ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair),
FH-50-12 Fiber Holder, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader,
Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and
CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap
70R Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver)
Includes: CT30 Cleaver, HJS-02 Stripper, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord,
ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), FH-50-12 Fiber Holder, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser,
Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap
70R Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver, battery and cord)
Includes: BTR-09 Battery, DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord, CT30 Cleaver, HJS-02 Stripper,
ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), FH-50-12 Fiber Holder,
USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader, Splicer Carrying Strap,
Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap
One Year Extended Warranty
Two Year Extended Warranty
AFL NO.
S015669
S015670
S015671
S012996
S013000
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
15
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00071, Revision 3, 5.26.2015
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
FU
SION
SPLICER
S
Fiber Optic Cable
Fujikura 70R Fusion Splicer
Accessories Recommended for the 70R
DESCRIPTION
Cleavers and Strippers
CT-30 Cleaver
HJS-02 Hot Jacket Stripper
Fiber Holders (pairs)
FH-50-12
FH-50-10
FH-50-8
FH-50-6
FH-50-4
FH-50-2
FH-50-250 (250 μm coated single fiber)
FH-50-900 (900 μm jacketed single fiber)
FH-60-LT900 (pair)
FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder
FUSEConnect
®
Accessories
FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each)
FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair)
FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each)
CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair)
CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair)
AFL NO.
S014076
S014080
S013828
S013824
S013820
S013816
S013812
S013808
S013800
S013804
S015181
S015275
S014696
S014695
S014697
S014705
S014704
DESCRIPTION
Batteries and Power Cords
ADC-18 AC Adapter
BTR-09 Battery
DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord
DCC-12 Power Cord (connects ADC-13 to cigarette lighter socket)
DCC-13 Power Cord
(connects ADC-13 to power source via alligator clips)
ACC-14 AC Power Cord
Miscellaneous
ELCT2-20A Electrodes
Portable Tripod Workstation (see product profile for more detail)
ASW-02 Splicing Workstation (see product profile for more detail)
JP-06 J-PLATE (70/19 Series)
FST-12 Fiber Separation Tool
FAT-04 Fiber Arrangement Tool
FAA-03A Ribbon Forming Adhesive (4 oz . bottle)
FAA-03A Ribbon Forming Adhesive (0 .5 liter bottle)
CC-30 Transit Case
AFL NO.
S015585
S015581
S015582
S013552
S013556
S014536
S013532
S014773
S010532
S016100
S014012
S010212
S008720
S008622
S015587
Specifications
PARAMETER
Model
Applicable Fibers
Fiber Count
Cladding Diameter
Coating Diameter
Fiber Cleave Length
Typical Average Splice Loss
Splicing Time
Arc Calibration Method
Splicing Modes
Splice Loss Estimate
Storage of Splice Result
Fiber Display
Magnification
Viewing Method
VALUE
FSM-70R Fusion Splicer
Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DS (G .653), NZDS (G .655)
Single, 2, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12
125 µm
Ribbon: 0 .25 mm to 0 .4 mm, Single: 250 µm and 900 µm
10 mm
0 .05 dB with SM, 0 .02 dB with MM, 0 .08 dB with DS, 0 .08 dB with NZDS; measured by cut-back method relevant to ITU-T standards
Typical 15 seconds with standard single-mode fiber
Automatic, real-time by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode; manual arc calibration function available
100 preset and user programmable modes
Based upon dual camera cladding alignment data
Last 2000 splice results stored in the internal memory
X or Y, or both X and Y simultaneously; front or rear monitor display options with automatic image orientation
35X to 90X
Dual cameras with 4 .7 inch TFT color LCD monitor with anti-reflective coating
Operating Condition
Mechanical Proof Test
Tube Heater
Tube Heating Time
0 to 3,660 m above sea level, 0 to 95% RH, and -10 to 50°C respectively
1 .96 to 2 .25 N
Built-in tube heater with 30 heating modes; auto-start function
Typical 40 seconds with FP-5 sleeve, 17 seconds with FP3 (40), 5-15 seconds with Fujikura micro sleeves
Protection Sleeve Length 60 mm, 40 mm, Micro
Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 110 cycles with power save functions activated
Electrode Life 1,500 Arc Discharges
Power Supply
Terminals
Wind Protection
Dimensions
Weight
Auto voltage selection from 100 to 240V AC or 10 to 15V DC with ADC-18, 14 .8V DC with BTR-09 battery
USB 2 .0 (USB-B type) for PC communication and Mini-DIN (6-pin) for HJS-02/03
Maximum wind velocity of 15m/s (34 mph)
146 W x 159 D x 150 H (mm) / 5 .7 W x 6 .3 D x 5 .9 H (inches)
2 .3 kg (5 .1 lbs) with AC adapter; 2 .5 kg (5 .5 lbs) with battery
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00071, Revision 3, 5.26.2015
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
16
19R
In case with lid detached
Fujikura 19R Fusion Splicer
The Fujikura 19R is equipped with a precision, fixed v-groove for splicing single fibers or ribbon fiber up to 4 fibers . Incorporating the proven ruggedized features pioneered by Fujikura, the 19R has added automated and enhanced user control features to increase splicing efficiency . A user programmable, automated wind protector expedites the splicing process by automatically closing to initiate the splice process, and opening upon splice completion . A new auto-start “clamshell design” tube heater applies heat to both sides of the splice protection sleeve resulting in a 18-second shrink time for
4-fiber ribbon . The result is a total splice process time of approximately 29 seconds!
Ruggedness and durability are greatly enhance by a mirror-less optical system and
"severe-impact resistant" monitor . Battery capacity is now 140 splices/shrinks .
An innovative transit case doubles as a built-in or mobile workstation and makes splicing easier than ever before .
Features
• Automated and programmable wind protector
• 18-second automated tube heater
• Fully ruggedized for shock, dust and moisture
• Li-ion battery with 140 splices/shrinks per charge
• On-board training and support videos
• Internet software upgrades
• Multi-function transit case with integrated workstation
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
19R Fusion Splicer (machine only)
Includes: ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair),
FH-50-4 Fiber Holder, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader,
Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and
CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap
19R Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver)
Includes: CT30 Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair),
FH-50-4 Fiber Holder, FH-50-250 Fiber Holder, FH-50-900 Fiber Holder, HJS-02 Stripper,
USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader, Splicer Carrying Strap,
Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap
19R Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver, battery and cord)
Includes: BTR-09 Battery, DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord, CT30 Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter,
ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), FH-50-4 Fiber Holder, FH-50-250 Fiber Holder,
FH-50-900 Fiber Holder, HJS-02 Stripper, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader,
Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and
CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap
One Year Extended Warranty
Two Year Extended Warranty
AFL NO.
S015659
S015660
S015661
S012996
S013000
17
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00073, Revision 3, 5.26.2015
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Fujikura 19R Fusion Splicer
Recommended Accessories for the 19R
DESCRIPTION
Cleavers and Strippers
CT-06 Cleaver
CT-30 Cleaver
HJS-02 Hot Jacket Stripper
Fiber Holders
FH-50-250
FH-50-900
FH-50-4
FH-50-2
FH-60-LT900 (pair)
FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder
FUSEConnect
®
Accessories
FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each)
FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair)
FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each)
CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair)
CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair)
AFL NO.
S015588
S014076
S010340
S013800
S013804
S013812
S013808
S015181
S015275
S014696
S014695
S014697
S014705
S014704
DESCRIPTION
Batteries and Power Cords
ADC-18 AC Adapter
ACC-14 AC Power Cord
BTR-09 Battery
DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord
DCC-12 Power Cord
(connects AC Adapter to cigarette lighter socket)
DCC-13 Power Cord
(connects AC Adapter to power source via alligator clips)
Miscellaneous
AFL NO.
S015585
S014536
S015581
S015582
S013552
S013556
ELCT2-20A Electrodes S013532
Portable Tripod Workstation (see product profile for more detail) S014773
ASW-02 Splicing Workstation (see product profile for more detail) S010532
JP-06 J-PLATE (70/19 Series) S016100
FST-12
FAT-04 Fiber Arrangement Tool
S014012
S010212
FAA-03A Ribbon Forming Adhesive (4 oz . bottle)
FAA-03A Ribbon Forming Adhesive (0 .5 liter bottle)
USB Cable
CC-30 Transit Case
S008720
S008622
S014777
S015587
Specifications
PARAMETER
Model
Applicable Fibers
Fiber Count
Cladding Diameter
Coating Diameter
Fiber Cleave Length
Typical Average Splice Loss
Splicing Time
Arc Calibration Method
Splicing Modes
Splice Loss Estimate
Storage of Splice Result
Fiber Display
Magnification
Viewing Method
Operating Condition
Mechanical Proof Test
Tube Heater
Tube Heating Time
Protection Sleeve Length
Splice/Heat with Battery
Electrode Life
Power Supply
Terminals
Wind Protection
Dimensions
Weight
VALUE
FSM-19R Fusion Splicer
Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DS (G .653), NZDS (G .655)
Single, 2, 4
125 µm
Ribbon: 0 .25 mm to 0 .4 mm; Single: 250 µm and 900 µm
10 mm
0 .05 dB with SM, 0 .02 dB with MM, 0 .08 dB with DS, 0 .08 dB with NZDS, measured by cut-back method relevant to ITU-T standards
SM FAST mode - 11 seconds; SM AUTO mode - 15 seconds; Auto mode - 15 seconds
Automatic, real-time by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available
100 preset and user programmable modes
Based upon dual camera cladding alignment data
Last 2000 splice results stored in the internal memory
X or Y, or both X and Y simultaneously; front or rear monitor display options with automatic image orientation
90X
Dual cameras with 4 .7 inch TFT color LCD monitor with anti-reflective coating
0 to 5,000 m above sea level, 0 to 95% RH, -10 to 50°C respectively
1 .96 to 2 .25 N
Built-in tube heater with 30 heating modes; auto-start function
Typical 40 seconds with FP-5 sleeve, 17 seconds with FP3 (40), 5-16 seconds with Fujikura micro sleeves
60 mm, 40 mm, micro
Typical 140 cycles with power save functions activated
2,000 Arc Discharges
Auto voltage selection from 100 to 240V AC or 10 to 15V DC with AC Adapter, 13 .2V DC with battery
USB 2 .0 (USB-B type) for PC communication, Mini-DIN (6-pin) for HJS-02/03
Maximum wind velocity of 15m/s (34 mph)
146 W x 159 D x 150 H (mm) / 5 .7 W x 6 .3 D x 5 .9 H (inches)
2 .3 kg (5 .1 lbs) with AC adapter; 2 .5 kg (5 .5 lbs) with battery
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00073, Revision 3, 5.26.2015
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
18
12R (with Cleaver for scale)
Workstation in Transit Case
Workstation on Transit Case
Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer
The Fujikura 12R is the world’s smallest, lightest and most portable fusion splicer available today . Despite its incredibly small size, this ruggedized, full-featured unit offers unmatched versatility for splicing in the most challenging environments . The innovative transit case and work tray provide multiple options for the best utilization of available work space while the long life battery provides power for up to 100 splice cycles which include application of the splice protection sleeve .
The Fujikura 12R incorporates features typically found only in more expensive models .
The large 4 .5" monitor provides a crystal clear image, even in the brightest sunlight, for evaluating splice quality . The electrode life has been extended to 1,500 splices, minimizing downtime for replacement and stabilization . Software updates are accomplished via the internet allowing users to quickly update their software as new splice programs become available . The fully ruggedized chassis provides for shock, dust and moisture protection while the two camera observation system provides for accurate fiber alignment and loss estimation calculations . The Fujikura 12R is also fully compatible with the FuseConnect line of fusion installable connectors .
Backed by the best service team in the industry, the Fujikura 12R is the ideal splicer to use when portability, ruggedness, versatility and reliability are needed for your splicing application .
Features
• World’s smallest splicer at 4 .76"W x 6 .38"D x 2 .24"H
• Fully ruggedized for shock, moisture and dust resistance
• Transit case converts to easy to use workstation
• Dual camera, fixed v-groove alignment technology
• Extended life electrodes
• Long life battery (100 splices/shrinks per charge)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer
Includes: ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery Pack (installed), FH-50-4 Fiber Holders
(Pair), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (Pair), Operation Manual on CD,
Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case
Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer Kit
Includes: CT-30 Cleaver, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery Pack (installed),
FH-50-4 Fiber Holders (Pair) FH-50-250 Fiber Holders (Pair), FH-50-900 Fiber Holders
(Pair), ACC-09 Power Cord, HJS-03 Hot Jacket Stripper, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (Pair),
Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container,
SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case
AFL NO.
S015571
S015667
Fujikura 12R Kit
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00060, Revision 1, 2.3.2014
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer
Recommended Accessories for the 12R
DESCRIPTION
Cleavers & Strippers
CT-30 Cleaver (for single to 12 ribbon fibers)
HJS-03 Battery Powered Hot Jacket Stripper
Fiber Holders
FH-50-2 (2 ribbon fiber)
FH-50-4 (4 ribbon fiber)
FH-50-250 (250 µm single fiber)
FH-50-900 Fiber Holders (900 µm single fiber)
FH-60-LT900 (900 µm loose buffer tube)
FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder
FUSEConnect ™ Accessories
FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each)
FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair)
FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each)
CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair)
CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair)
AFL NO.
S014076
S013996
S013808
S013812
S013800
S013804
S015181
S015275
S014696
S014695
S014697
S014705
S014704
Specifications
PARAMETER
Model
Applicable Fibers
Fiber Count
Cladding Diameter
Coating Diameter
Fiber Cleave Length
Typical Average Splice Loss
Splice Time
Arc Calibration Method
Splicing Modes
Splice Loss Estimate
Storage of Splice Result
Fiber Display
Magnification
Viewing Method
Operating Condition
Mechanical Proof Test
Tube Heater
Tube Heater Time
Protection Sleeve Length
Splice/Heat with Battery
Electrode Life
Power Supply
Terminals
Wind Protection
Dimensions
Weight with Battery
DESCRIPTION
Batteries
BTR-10 Battery Pack
Miscellaneous
Worktable Set
TS-01 Tripod Screw
ELCT2-12 Electrodes
ADC-19 AC Adapter
ACC-09 Power Cord
AP-01 Alcohol Container
SD-01 Screwdriver
CC-29 Transit Case
VALUE
Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer
Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DS (G .653), NZDS (G .655)
Single to 4-fiber ribbon
125 μm
250 μm and 900 μm
10 mm
0 .05 dB (SM), 0 .02 dB (MM), 0 .08 dB (DS) and 0 .08 dB (NZDS)
Typical 20 sec with SM
Automatic, real-time by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available
Total 100 splice modes
Based upon dual camera cladding alignment data
Last 2,000 splices
4 .5 inch TFT color LCD with X or Y view or both X and Y view simultaneously
66X magnification in X or Y view; 33X magnification in X and Y view
2 axis CMOS camera
0 to 3,660 m above sea level (single fiber),0 to 95% RH non-dew, -10 to 50°C respectively
1 .96 to 2 .25 N
30 heating modes
Typical 30 sec with FP-03 (60 mm) and FP-04 sleeves
60 mm, 40 mm, micro
Typical 100 cycles with BTR-10
1,500 splices
Auto select from 100V to 240V with AC adapter, 14 .8 V DC with installed battery
USB 2 .0
Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s . (34 mph)
121W x 162D x 57H (mm) / 4 .76 W x 6 .38 D x 2 .24 H (inches)
776 g / 1 .71 lbs .
AFL NO.
S015527
S015817
S015895
S014028
S015523
S014390
S015525
S015526
S015524
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00060, Revision 1, 2.3.2014
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
FU
SION
SPLICER
S
Fiber Optic Cable
*Delivered as shown
Shown in CC-21 Carrying Case
CT-30 Fiber Cleaver
The CT-30 Cleaver sets the standard for portability, reliability and ease of use . Available for either single fiber or ribbon splicing (up to 12 fiber ribbons) applications, the CT-30
Cleavers are compatible with all AFL fusion splicers . The improved version offers a larger base for a more stable platform, improved visibility when placing the fiber, and three scrap collection options . Designed for excellent portability, the CT-30 is equally at home in a splicing van or in a bucket truck and is ideal for FTTx applications . The 16-position blade yields 48,000 single-fiber cleaves, or 4,000 12-fiber ribbon cleaves before requiring replacement, and the built-in scrap collector conveniently stores fiber shards until they can be safely discarded .
The CT-30 Cleaver is packaged with three scrap collection options that allow the user to tailor it to their cleaving preferences . The CT30 is delivered with the SC-01 Side Cover installed for users that prefer not to use an automated scrap collection system . For those that prefer an automated scrap collection system, the FC-02 Fiber Collector and two scrap box options are included . The FDB-02 Scrap Box is a smaller bin for users seeking a compact profile . The FDB-03 Scrap Box is a larger bin with sweeping brush and static resistant surfaces for those users seeking to maximize scrap capacity . All scrap options are easily configured by the user .
Specifications
PARAMETER
Applicable Fiber
Fiber Count
Coating Diameter
Cladding Diameter
Cleave Angle Capability
Blade lifetime
Dimensions (W x D x H)
Weight
VALUE
Conventional silica optical fiber
Single and up to 12 fiber ribbon
250 μm to 900 μm
125 μm typically <0 .5˚
48,000 fiber cleaves (4,000 12-fiber cleaves)
69 mm x 82 mm x 41 mm (2 .7" x 3 .2" x 1 .6")
180 g (0 .4 lbs)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION APPLICATION
CT-30
CT-30A
Fiber Ribbons
(up to 12 fibers)
Single Fibers:
250-900 µm coating,
125 µm cladding
FIBER HANDLING SYSTEM
Fiber Holders for the following:
FH-XXX, FH-50-XXX or FH-60-XXX versions
AD-30A Adapter Plate
CLEAVE LENGTH AFL NO.
10 mm S014076
900 µm: 10-20 mm
250 µm: 6-20 mm
S014080
Included with Cleaver:
• AD-30A Adapter Plate (CT30A only)
• FC-02 Fiber Collector
• FDB-02 Scrap Box (small)
• FDB-03 Scrap Box (large)
• SC-01 Side Cover (installed)
• CC-21 Carrying Case
• Hex Wrench (1 .5 mm)
• Instruction Manual
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
Replacement Blade for CT-30 Series Cleavers
FC-02 Fiber Collector
AD-30A Adapter Plate
AD-30B Adapter Plate (Fixed 16 mm cleave length)
AD-30C Adapter Plate for 2 & 3mm Cord
FDB-02 Fiber Collector Scrap Box
FDB-03 Large Fiber Collector Scrap Box
SC-01 Side Cover
HBA-01 Fiber Holder Base Attachment
CC-21 Carrying Case for CT-30 Series Cleaver
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
21
AFL NO.
S012828
S014092
S014096
S014100
S015896
S014104
S014483
S014353
S014388
S014484
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00011, Revision 3, 2 .3 .14
Specifications are subject to change without notice .
*Delivered as shown
Shown in CC-21 Carrying Case
CT-32 Precision Fiber Cleaver
The CT-32 is a modified version of our standard cleaver model CT-30 . The modifications allow use of a spacer system that provides for the full range of acceptable cleave lengths for use with our factory fusion splicer models FSM-45F and 45PM . The CT-32 also allows for a reduced cleave length of 8 mm on 900 µm jacketed fibers and as short as 3 mm on
250 µm and 400 µm coated fibers . Included with the CT-32 is a 1 mm spacer that allows for the recommended cleave lengths for use with our factory fusion splicer models .
An optional 2 mm spacer can be purchased to expand cleave length options .
Specifications
PARAMETER
Dimensions (W x D x H)
Weight
Blade lifetime
Cleave angle capability
Fiber count
Fiber type
Cladding diameter
Coating diameter
VALUE
69 mm x 82 mm x 41 mm (2 .7" x 3 .2" x 1 .6")
180 g (0 .4 lbs)
48,000 cleaves (1,000 x 3 heights x 16 positions ) typically <0 .5˚
Single
Silica Optical Fiber
125 µm
0 .25 mm to 0 .9 mm depending on fiber holder (FH-40 series)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
CT-32
Includes: CT-32 cleaver, SPA-40-CT-040 cleaver spacer,
FC-02 fiber collector, FDB-02 scrap box (small),
FDB-03 scrap box (large), SC-01 side cover, hex wrench, carrying case and instruction manual
APPLICATION
Single Fibers:
250 µm to 900 µm coating,
125 µm cladding
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
SPA-40-CT-050 Spacer (2 mm)
Replacement Blade for CT-30 Series Cleavers
FC-02 Fiber Collector
FDB-02 Fiber Collector Scrap Box
CC-21 Carrying Case for CT-30 Series Cleaver
AFL NO.
S014351
S012828
S014092
S014104
S014484
Application
CLEAVE LENGTH
(mm)
4
3
10
9
8
5
REQUIRED CLEAVER SPACER
PROVIDED OPTIONAL
—
SPA-40-CT-040
—
—
SPA-40-CT-040
—
SPA-40-CT-050
—
—
SPA-40-CT-050
—
—
AFL NO.
S014348
NOTE
—
—
—
Short cleave length of 3 mm to
5 mm available by stripping with
HJS-02 and SPA-040-HJS-030 .
(sold separately)
© 2006, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00012, Revision 2, 8 .30 .12
Specifications are subject to change without notice .
22
CT-38 Precision Fiber Cleaver
The CT-38 cleaver is designed for cleaving silica fibers with 80µm cladding . Utilizing the same one step design of our popular CT-30 cleaver, the CT-38 is quick, easy, and dependable . The 16 position blade yields 48,000 cleaves by providing for blade height and position adjustments . The cleaver can be used with either the FSM-45F and 45PM fiber holder system or with the optional AD-30A adapter plate for other applications .
Application
DESCRIPTION
CT-38
CT-38A
FIBER
PLACING
Fiber
Holder
CLEAVE
LENGTH
(MM)
10
9
REQUIRED CLEAVER SPACER
PROVIDED OPTIONAL
NOTE
— SPA-40-CT-050 —
SPA-40-CT-040 — —
8
5
4
3
— — —
— SPA-40-CT-050 Short cleave length of 3 mm to
SPA-40-CT-040 —
5 mm available by stripping with
— —
HJS-02 and SPA-040-HJS-030 .
(sold separately)
Fiber Plate 6 to 20 SPA-40-CT-050 — Requires purchase of CT-38 and optional AD-30A .
Specifications
PARAMETER
Dimensions (W x D x H)
Weight
Blade lifetime
Cleave angle capability
Fiber count
Fiber type
Cladding diameter
VALUE
69 mm x 82 mm x 41 mm (2 .7" x 3 .2" x 1 .6")
180 g (0 .4 lbs)
48,000 cleaves (1,000 x 3 heights x 16 positions ) typically <0 .5˚
Single
Silica Optical Fiber
80 µm
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
CT-38 (fiber holder)
Includes: CT-38 cleaver, SPA-40-CT-040 cleaver spacer, hex wrench, carrying case and instruction manual
APPLICATION
Single Fibers:
165 µm coating,
80 µm cladding
AFL NO.
S014349
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
Replacement Blade for CT-30 Series Cleavers
CC-21 Carrying Case for CT-30 Series Cleaver
AD-30A Adapter Plate
SPA-40-CT-050 Spacer
AFL NO.
S012828
S014484
S014096
S014351
23
© 2006, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00013, Revision 3, 8 .30 .12
Specifications are subject to change without notice .
Model
AFL Part #
Style
Size (inches)
Approx . weight (lbs)
Total Splice Capacity
Single Fusion
Mass Fusion
Recommended Splice Tray
Model
AFL Part #
Max Trays Per Closure
Fiber Splice Capacity Per Tray
Single Fusion
Ribbon Fusion
SEALED CLOSURES
LG-350-AC
FC001058
Dome / Butt
10 dia . 19 .8 L
12
144
N/A
LL-4808L
FA000018
4
36
N/A
Cable Entry Capacity
Total Number of Entry Ports
Number of Express Ports
Number of Drop Ports
5
2
3
Single-cable Grommet Scenario - Max 1 Cable per Entry Port
(Absolute Maximum Cable Diameter Capactiy)
Max Number of Cables
Single Cable Express Port Grommet AFL Part #
Single Cable Express Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters
Single Cable Drops Port Grommet AFL Part #
Single Cable Drop Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters
5 Total (2 Express Cables / 3 Drop Cables)
FC000726
1 .00” - 0 .40”
FC000727
0 .80” - 0 .30”
Dual-cable Grommet Scenario - Max 2 Cables per Entry Port
Max Number of Cables
Dual Cable Express Port Grommet AFL Part #
Dual Cable Express Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters
Dual Cable Drops Port Grommet AFL Part #
Dual Cable Drop Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters
Multi-port Grommet Scenario - More than 2 Cables per
Entry Port (Absolute Maximum Cable Count Capacity)
Total Number of Cables
Multi-port Express Port Grommet AFL Part #
Multi-port Express Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters
Multi-port Drops Port Grommet AFL Part #
Multi-port Drop Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters
Mounting Hardware
Hanger/Mount Support
AFL Part #
Ground kit
AFL Part #
Drop Cables
Single-fiber OSP Flat Drop Cable with Toning Wire, SC/APC on one end, other end unterminated, singlemode fiber
Tools Required
Items needed by Construction and I&R teams
WEATHERTIGHT TERMINALS
CT-100 Fiber Cleaver
Precise cleaving is required for photonic splicing applications as the types of optical fiber become more diversified to meet new applications . In addition, angled cleaving is often required for low back-reflection fiber end preparation . The CT-100 has been developed to offer adjustability and versatility for these various fiber types and applications while offering superior cleaving performance beyond conventional cleavers that utilize a circular blade . The CT-100 is equipped with a motorized diamond blade that touches the fiber after tension has been applied providing high-strength cleaving capability .
Features
• Diamond blade with long blade life
• Large diameter fiber cleaving capability (fiber diameter range 80 to 250 µm)
• Angle cleaving capability (0 to 15 degrees)
• Cleave counter
• Adjustable cleave length
• Dual power sources (4 “AA” batteries or AC adapter)
Specifications
PARAMETER
Applicable Fiber
Cleaving Performance
Cladding Diameter
Coating Diameter
Cleave Angle Capability
Cleave Length
Dimensions
Weight
Blade Lifetime
DC Power Supply
AC Power Supply
Operating Conditions
Storage Conditions
VALUE
Conventional silica optical fiber
Typical 0 .5 degrees
80 to 250 µm
160 to 2000 µm
0 to 15 degrees (adjustable)
0 to 40 with Fiber Holder, FH-100 series or FH-40 series
140 mm (W) x 110 mm (D) x 95 mm (H)
900 g or less (excluding batteries)
20,000 fibers (1,000 fibers x 20 positions)
4 “AA” size batteries (approx . 2000 cleaves)
100 to 240 VAC / 50 to 60 Hz using ADC-16
Temperature: 0 to 40°C, Humidity: 0 to 95% RH (Non-condensing)
Temperature: -40 to 80°C, Humidity: 0 to 95% RH (Non-condensing)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
CT-100 Advance Optical Fiber Cleaver
Includes: ADC-16 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, 1 .5 mm hex wrench,
2 .5 mm hex wrench and instruction manual
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
ADC-16 AC Adapter
ACC-09 AC Power Cord
CB-03 Cleaver Blade
AFL NO.
S014972
AFL NO.
S015017
S014390
S015214
© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00008, Revision 3, 5 .24 .13
Specifications are subject to change without notice .
24
Cleavers
CT-105
CT-106
Features
•
Applicable up to
1,250 μm diameter fibers
•
Automatic clamping system
•
Up to 100 program modes can be stored
•
Angled cleaving function on CT-106
•
20,000 cleave per blade for 125 μm fiber
•
Fiber backstop standard on all cleavers
CT-105 & CT-106 Fiber Cleavers
When exceptional cleave quality is required for fibers up to 1,250 μm, the new large diameter CT-105/CT-106 cleaver family provides both flat and angled cleaves using an automatic clamping system with programmable force . The color LCD shows cleaving progress and recommended insert size depending on fiber coating and cladding diameter .
Saving and storing cleaving programs to a PC or tablet is accomplished using a USB port .
The LDF cleaver’s extensive programming features allow for optimal results .
Specifications
PARAMETER
Applicable optical fiber
Number of fibers
Cladding diameter
Coating diameter
Fiber clamping
Cleaving length
Angled cleaving
Blade life
Number of cleaving mode
Language
Monitor
Dimensions
Weight
Power supply
Operation condition
Storage condition
Terminal
CT-105 CT-106
Glass optical fibers, capillary
Single
80 - 1,250 μm
160 - 3,000 μm
Automatic clamping
-
5 - 40 mm
0 - 15° (up to 800 μm cladding fiber)
20,000 fibers (Cladding diameter 125 μm)
Maximum 100
English/Japanese
4 .7 inches color LCD
240(W)×134(D)×155(H) mm 240(W)×134(D)×162 .5(H) mm
3 .5 kg 3 .8 kg
AC adapter : ADC-19 Input : AC100 to 240 V (50 to 60 Hz) (max . 20 W)
0 to 95% RH and 0 to 40°C (non-dew)
0 to 95% RH and -40 to 80°C (non-dew)
USB2 .0 (Mini-B type) for PC communication
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
CT-105 Large Diameter Optical Fiber Cleaver
Includes: ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, HEX-01 hex wrench, USB-01 USB Cable and M-CT105 instruction manual
CT-106 Angled Large Diameter Optical Fiber Cleaver
Includes: ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, HEX-01 hex wrench, USB-01 USB Cable and M-CT105 instruction manual
AFL NO.
S016076
S016077 clamp
backstop
blade fiber backstop
Angled Cleaving
Angled cleaving from 0-15° is possible for fibers up to 800 µm (only for CT-106)
Automatic Clamp Function
Clamping optical fiber with programmable force automatically . No compressed air or torquewrenches required .
Backstop
A back stop is important for cleaving both very small and large diameter fibers and is standard on all CT-105/CT-106 cleavers .
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00080, Revision 0, 1.5.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
25
Cleavers
CT-105 & CT-106 Fiber Cleavers
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
CB-06 Replacement Blade
AC adapter ADC-19
AC power cord ACC-09
Fiber Holder Inserts
Master fiber holder insert kit
(includes all available inserts listed below)
INSERT-L-80
INSERT-L-125
INSERT-L-160
INSERT-L-250
INSERT-L-400
INSERT-L-500-750
AFL NO.
S016078
S015523
S014390
S016098
S016085
S016086
S016087
S016088
S016089
S016090
DESCRIPTION
Fiber Holder Inserts
(continued)
INSERT-L-1000-1250
INSERT-L-1500-1750
INSERT-L-2000-2250
INSERT-L-2500-3000
INSERT-U-80-400
INSERT-U-500-750
INSERT-U-1000-1250
INSERT-U-1500-1750
INSERT-U-2000-2250
INSERT-U-2500-3000
AFL NO.
S016091
S016092
S016093
S016094
S016079
S016080
S016081
S016082
S016083
S016084
DESCRIPTION AFL NO.
Height adjusting spacer (10 piece pack)
SPA-CT105-30 (30 μm)
SPA-CT105-50 (50 μm)
SPA-CT105-100 (100 μm)
S016095
S016096
S016097
Insert Selection Guide
INSERT-L-80
INSERT-L-125
INSERT-L-160
INSERT-L-250
INSERT-L-400
INSERT-L-500-750
INSERT-L-1000-1250
INSERT-L-1500-1750
INSERT-L-2000-2250
INSERT-L-2500-3000
F
R
F
R
F
R
F
R
F
R
INSERT-U-80-400
60-100
90-160
115-200
180-300
280-500
INSERT-U-500-750
F
475-700
R
675-950
INSERT-U-1000-1250 INSERT-U-1500-1750 INSERT-U-2000-2250 INSERT-U-2500-3000
F
925-1150
R F
1125-1400
1375-1700
R F R F R
1675-1900
1875-2200
2175-2450
2425-2750
2725-3175
Upper and lower inserts can be changed up or down depending on required fiber fit into the V-groove.
F & R denote the end of the insert that is visible in the cleaver . Inserts 500 μm and above are double-sided . Therefore, the F & R determine which side of the insert you are using .
Upper and lower inserts are necessary for both left and right side clamps.
Case 1: Cleaving fiber with a coating Case 2: Cleaving glass rod
L: INSERT-U-xxx-xxx R: INSERT-U-xxx-xxx
L: INSERT-L-xxx-xxx
According to coating diameter
R: INSERT-L-xxx-xxx
According to cladding diameter
Inserts according to both coating diameter and cladding diameter are necessary.
L: INSERT-U-xxx-xxx R: INSERT-U-xxx-xxx
L: INSERT-L-xxx-xxx R: INSERT-L-xxx-xxx
According to coating diameter According to cladding diameter
Two insert pairs of the same size according to rod diameter are necessary.
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00080, Revision 0, 1.5.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
26
photo
PowerCleave
®
To complement the line of world class splicing systems, AFL’s PowerCleave combines the precision of an ultrasonic cleaver with the ease and improved fiber management of the Fujikura fiber holder system . The PowerCleave utilizes the tensile stress method to avoid touching or damaging the bare glass surface during cleaving, ensuring highly robust, reliable and durable splice results . The PowerCleave provides consistent flat ends even at cleave lengths as short as 3 mm . Specially designed for use with Fujikura’s specialty market splicers, this advanced cleaving system allows for more reliability and greater splicing consistency with less dependence on operator technique .
Features
• Tensile cleaving with ultrasonic blade
• Consistent, low-angle cleaves of short cleave-length fibers
• Fiber holder system reduces fiber handling
• Clean, reliable quality
Specifications
PARAMETER
Fibers Cleaved
Minimum Cleave Length
Cleave Angle
Blade
Clamping System
Case
Battery
Dimensions (L x W x D)
Weight
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
CE Conformity
VALUE
80 µm - 200 µm (cladding diameter)
3 mm
<0 .6 typical (95% of cleaves)
Diamond with an estimated life of over 20,000 cleaves
Compatible with Fujikura specialty market fiber holder systems
ABS impact resistant with non-slip feet and a 6 .25 mm ( .24 inch)
BSW thread tripod mount for hard mounting to a workstation
9V alkaline (MN 1604), battery life approximately 10,000 cleaves
75 mm x 153 mm x 150 mm (3 .0 x 6 .0 x 5 .9 inches)
1 .1 kg (2 .4 lbs)
0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F)
-20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
Fully complies with all EC equipment guidelines according to the CE declaration of conformity
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
PowerCleave Kit
Includes: PowerCleave, Instruction manual, 2 .5 mm x 60 mm screwdriver,
2 mm Allen wrench
AFL NO.
S009972
27
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00063, Revision 3, 5.29.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Features
• Fully automatic
• Low cleave angles of < 0 .3º
• Very flat end faces
• Designed for production environment
• Waste fiber deposition
• Long diamond life of > 26,000
• PC controllable
AutoCleaver
The AutoCleaver is a fully automatic, ultra high precision fiber cleaver with a typical cleave angle of less than 0 .3° . Designed for industrial applications where high accuracy, reliability and production yield are required, the AutoCleaver has a built-in microprocessor which controls all vital parameters and settings such as fiber positioning, clamping, fiber tension and the exact position and speed of the diamond blade . The cleaver can be connected to an external PC from which all programmable parameters and settings can be accessed .
The AutoCleaver has a diamond blade with an extensive life, generating typically more than 26,000 cleaves per blade . With interchangeable adapters to fit all commercially available fiber holders, the AutoCleaver’s adapter is easily adjustable for desired cleave lengths and the automatic fiber waste disposal system removes any hazardous fiber scraps .
The AutoCleaver comes in a small bench top design, workbench-mountable or ready to be integrated into different subsystems .
Specifications
PARAMETER
Fiber Cladding
Fiber Coating
Cleave Angle
Cycle Time
# of Cleaves/Blade
Fiber Waste
Power Supply
Compressed Air
PC Connection
Dimensions
Weight
* Fiber specific handling kits required
** Not included in delivery
VALUE
80-230 µm*
160 - 900 µm*
Typical < 0 .3º
Typical <12 sec
>30,000
Typical < 20 mm
External 12V DC
External Compressor**, 6 bar, 4 mm instant push-in fitting
RS-232
175 mm (W) x 138 mm (D) x 104 mm (H)
1 .4 kg
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
AutoCleaver with Power Supply and Cord
(Includes: V-groove and Height Adjuster for 125 µm fiber, PC software,
RS-232 cable, Adapter Plate FJK, AC STD, manual and tools)
AFL NO.
50000000-US
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
Adaptor Plate FJK, AC STD
V-groove, STD, Cla 80 µm (Blue)
V-groove, STD, Cla 125-199 µm (Yellow)
V-groove, STD, Cla 200-349 µm (Orange)
Height Adjuster STD, Cla 80 µm (Blue)
Height Adjuster STD, Cla 125-159 µm (Yellow)
Height Adjuster STD, Cla 160-199 µm (Blank/Grey)
Height Adjuster STD, Cla 200-349 µm (Orange)
Diamond blade
Cleaver Blade Replacement Tool
Power Supply, 100-240V, 1 .25A
Adapter for Power Supply, US
AFL NO.
50000020
51030010
51030020
51030030
51040010
51040020
51040030
51040040
50000010
50000050
50100240
50100241
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00033, Revision 2, 2.9.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
28
Features
• Fully automatic
• Low cleave angles: < 0 .50°
• Very flat end faces
• Operator independent
• Designed for production and laboratory environments
• Automatic scrap fiber collection
• Long diamond life
• PC controllable
• Adaptable for fiber holders of the
Fujikura FSM-45F-LDF and
FSM-45PM-LDF fusion splicer
AutoCleaver LDF
The AutoCleaver LDF is a high precision fiber cleaver, designed for cleaving of Large
Diameter Fibers . It provides outstanding cleaving performance for large diameter fibers from 250 μm up to 1200 μm in diameter . It also supports cleaving of fibers as small as 125 μm . The unique and patent-pending cleaving process generates typical cleave angles of less than 0 .5 degrees with LDF fibers .
The AutoCleaver LDF can be configured for use with the Fujikura FSM-45 series of fusion splicers and therefore supports splicing operations with large diameter fibers .
The cleaved fiber is transferred from the cleaver to the Fujikura splicer using a standard
Fujikura fiber holder . The built in Microprocessor controls all vital parameters and settings, such as fiber alignment, clamping, tension and the exact position and speed of the diamond blade . This control of sensitive parameters guarantees a high cleaving repeatability and accuracy . During cleaving, the fiber coating is clamped by a touchoperated tension clamp . The clamp is quickly interchangeable based on the fiber coating diameter . A v-groove clamping block and a fiber height adjuster are selected based upon the diameter of the fiber cladding . The fiber coating tension clamp as well as the V-groove clamp block and height adjuster work together as a fiber handling kit to ensure optimum cleaving performance for a particular fiber . These parts may be selected at the time of cleaver purchase from the selection guide matrix . Other sets are easily exchanged by the operator to set the cleaver up for another fiber size .
The AutoCleaver LDF also accepts the use of NYFORS fiber holders in place of the tension clamps normally used for coating clamping . This provides versatile use of the cleaver for operations when splicing is not required . The cleaver is designed to generate minimum amounts of fiber waste, typically less than 20 mm . An automatic waste disposal system removes any hazardous fiber scraps . The cleaver can be connected to an external PC that gives access to all programmable parameters and settings .
The AutoCleaver LDF comes in a small bench top design . It has been designed to easily permit recessed mounting for ergonomic workbench operations in a production environment and is therefore ready to be integrated into different subsystems .
Specifications
PARAMETER
Fiber Cladding
Fiber Coating
Cycle Time
Cleave Angle
Cladding Diameter
Coating Diamter
Fiber Waste
Power Supply
Compressed Air
PC Connection
Dimensions
Weight
* Fiber specific handling kits required
** Not included in delivery
VALUE
250 - 1000 µm*
300 - 1500 µm*
Typical < 14 seconds
Typical < 0 .5º
230 - 1000 µm
250 - 1500 µm
Typical < 20 mm
External 12V DC
External Compressor**, 6 bar 4 mm instant push-in fitting
RS-232
175 mm (W) x 138 mm (D) x 104 mm (H)
2 .5 kg
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00035, Revision 4, 2.3.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
29
AutoCleaver LDF
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
AutoCleaver LDF with Power Supply and Cord
Includes: Adaptor Plate FJK, PC software, RS-232 cable, manual and tools
Nyfors AutoCleaver LDF w/Universal Stage
Includes: Long Rail, Power Supply & Cord Adaptor Plate FJK, PC software, RS-232 cable, manual and tools
* See Fiber Handling matrix below for additional required items .
Selection Guide Matrix for Determining Fiber Handling Kit
DESCRIPTION LABEL
V-Groove (Used with all splicer brands) Select size based on fiber cladding diameter
V-groove, LD, Cladding 200-349 µm
V-groove, LD, Cladding 350-699 µm
Orange
Green
V-groove, LD, Cladding 700-1000 µm Red
Height Adjuster (Used with all splicer brands) Select size based on fiber cladding diameter
Height Adj . LD, Cladding 200-349 µm
Height Adj . LD, Cladding 350-529 µm
Height Adj . LD, Cladding 530-699 µm
Orange
White
Black
Height Adj . LD, Cladding 700-1000 µm Red
Linear Insert (Used only with Fujikura splicers) Select size based on fiber coating diameter
Linear Insert, Coating 210-699 µm
Linear Insert, Coating 700-1000 µm
210-699
700-1000
Misc. Accessories
DESCRIPTION
Diamond blade
Cleaver Blade Replacement Tool
Power Supply, 100-240V, 1 .25A
Adapter for Power Supply, US
Universal Stage NFF FH Base
AFL NO.
50100000-US
S015274
AFL NO.
51030030
51030040
51030050
51040040
51040050
51040060
51040070
51050010
51050020
AFL NO.
50000010
50000050
50100240
50100241
S014770
30
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00035, Revision 4, 2.3.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Features
• Variable angle cleaving,
0 to >15 degrees
• Semi automatic
• Easy handling
• Operator independent
• Designed for production and laboratory environments
• Automatic fiber waste collection
• Long-lasting diamond
• PC controllable
AutoCleaver LDA
The AutoCleaver LDA is a high precision fiber cleaver, designed for angle cleaving of large diameter fibers (LDF) . It is a special version of the well-known AutoCleaver LDF which provide outstanding cleaving performance for fibers from 230 μm up to 1000 μm in diameter . The unique and patent pending cleaving process generates typical cleave angles of less than 0 .5 degrees . The AutoCleaver LDA is capable of cleaving fibers with a coating diameter up to 1000 μm, achieving cleave angles from 0 up to more than
15 degrees with very consistent ±0 .5 degrees cleave angles . The cleave angle is set using a micrometer screw positioner allowing the operator to quickly setup the cleaver for different fiber sizes or cleave angles .
The V-groove clamp block and the fiber height adjuster are selected to match the diameter of the fiber cladding . The V-groove clamp block and the height adjuster work together as a fiber handling kit to ensure optimum cleaving performance for a particular fiber range . These parts have to be be selected from the Selection Guide Matrix when you purchase the cleaver . The parts are easily exchanged by the operator to set the cleaver up for a different fiber size .
The built-in microprocessor controls all parameters and settings, such as clamping, tension and the exact position and speed of the diamond blade . This control of sensitive parameters guarantees a high cleaving repeatability and accuracy .
The cleaver is designed to generate a minimum amount of fiber waste, typically less than 20 mm . An automatic waste disposal system removes any hazardous fiber scraps .
The cleaver can be connected to a PC that gives access to all programmable parameters and settings . The AutoCleaver LDA comes in a small bench top design .
Specifications
PARAMETER
Cycle time
Cladding diameter
Coating diameter
Cleave angle
Fiber waste length
Power supply
VALUE
Typical < 18 seconds
230-800+ μm*
250-1000 μm
0 to >15 degrees
Typical < 20 mm, automatic disposal
External 12 V DC, 15 W
Compressed air supply
PC Interface
Dimensions
External compressor**, 6-8 bar, 4 mm instant push-in fitting
RS-232
175 mm (W) x 138 mm (D) x 104 mm (H)
Weight 2 .5 kg
* Fiber specific handling parts required . See the Selection Guide Matrix for more information .
31
© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00034, Revision 0, 8.30.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
AutoCleaver LDA
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
AutoCleaver LDA with Power Supply and Cord
Includes: AutoCleaver LDA unit for angle cleaving, PC software, RS-232 cable, Manual and Tools
* See Fiber Handling matrix below for additional required items .
Selection Guide Matrix for Determining Fiber Handling Kit
DESCRIPTION LABEL
V-Groove (Used with all splicer brands) Select size based on fiber cladding diameter
V-groove, LD, Cladding 200-349 µm
V-groove, LD, Cladding 350-699 µm
V-groove, LD, Cladding 700-1000 µm
Orange
Green
Red
Height Adjuster (Used with all splicer brands) Select size based on fiber cladding diameter
Height Adj . LD, Cladding 200-349 µm
Height Adj . LD, Cladding 350-529 µm
Height Adj . LD, Cladding 530-699 µm
Height Adj . LD, Cladding 700-1000 µm
Orange
White
Black
Red
Misc. Accessories
DESCRIPTION
Diamond blade
Cleaver Blade Replacement Tool
Power Supply, 100-240V, 1 .25A
Adapter for Power Supply, US
AFL NO.
50400000
AFL NO.
51030030
51030040
51030050
51040040
51040050
51040060
51040070
AFL NO.
50000010
50000050
50100240
50100241
32
© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00034, Revision 0, 8.30.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Features
• Fully automatic
• Low cleave angles of < 0 .3º
• Very flat end faces
• Operator independent
• Designed for production environment
• Waste fiber deposition
• Long diamond life
• Available for 80 or 125 µm fibers
• PC controllable a +/ - 10 µm
AutoCleaver S1 -80 µm / S1-125 µm
When a specific and accurate bare fiber length is required, the AutoCleaver S1 provides the perfect cleave every time . Sensing the edge of the coating and adjusting the bare fiber length according to the customers’ specifications, the AutoCleaver S1 cleaves
80 µm and 125 µm fibers automatically . Cleave angles are typically under 0 .3° with excellent end face quality .
A built-in microprocessor controls all the vital parameters and settings such as fiber positioning, clamping, fiber tension and the exact position and speed of the diamond blade . The cleaver can be connected to an external PC, enabling access to all programmable parameters and settings .
The AutoCleaver S1 is available in a small bench top design, workbench-mountable or ready to be integrated into different sub-systems . At the time of order, the desired cleave length must be specified . The minimum cleave length possible is 3 mm and the maximum is 6 .5 mm . The bare fiber length can be fine-tuned by software between 0 and 500 µm .
Specifications
PARAMETER
Fiber Cladding
Fiber Coating
Cleave Angle
Cycle Time
Cladding diameter
# of Cleaves/Blade
Fiber Waste
Power Supply
Compressed Air
PC connection
Dimensions
Weight
* Fiber specific handling kits required
** Not included in delivery
VALUE
80 - 125 µm*
160 - 400 µm*
Typical < 0 .3º
Typical < 14 seconds
80 and 125 µm
> 30,000
Typical < 20 mm
External 12V DC
External Compressor**, 6 bar 4 mm instant push-in fitting
RS-232
175 mm (W) x 138 mm (D) x 104 mm (H)
1 .4 kg
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
AutoCleaver S1-80 µm with Power Supply and Cord
(Includes: V-groove & Height Adjuster, Adaptor Plate, PC software, manual and tools)
AutoCleaver S1-125 µm with Power Supply and Cord
(Includes: V-groove & Height Adjuster, Adaptor Plate, PC software, manual and tools)
AFL NO.
50100029
50100028
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
Adaptor Plate FJK, AC STD
Adaptor Plate NYF/ECA, AC STD
V-groove, STD, Cla . 80 µm
V-groove, STD, Cla . 125-199 µm
Height Adj . STD, Cla . 80 µm
Height Adj . STD Cla . 125-159 µm
Diamond blade
Cleaver Blade Replacement Tool
Power Supply, 100-240V, 1 .25 A
Adapter for Power Supply, US
AFL NO.
50000020
50000030
51030010
51030020
51040010
51040020
50000010
50000050
50100240
50100241
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00036, Revision 3, 10.15.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
33
Features
• Fully automatic
• Low cleave angles of < 0 .5º
• Very flat end faces
• Operator independent
• Automatic fiber waste collection
• Long-lasting diamond
• PC controllable
Specifications
PARAMETER VALUE
Fiber Cladding 125 - 1000 µm*
Fiber Coating 250 - 1500 µm*
Cycle Time Typical < 14 seconds
Cleave Angle Typical < 0 .5º
Fiber Waste Typical < 20 mm
Power Supply External 12V DC
Compressed Air 4mm instant push-in fitting
PC Connection RS-232
Dimensions 175 mm(W) x 138 mm(D) x 104 mm(H)
Weight 2 .5 kg
* Fiber specific handling kits required
AutoCleaver S2
The AutoCleaver S2 contains special fiber clamps with air pressure-controlled clamping forces, designed for cleaving air-clad fiber . Coupled with modified software, these features enable the AutoCleaver S2 to handle otherwise difficult-to-cleave fibers .
The clamping force of the fiber clamps is set individually by changing the air pressure .
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
AutoCleaver S2 - Small Cylinder/FJK
Includes: 12 mm v-groove clamping cylinder, FJK Fiber Holder Adapter LDF, RS-232 cable,
PC software, tools and manuals
AutoCleaver S2 - Large Cylinder/FJK
Includes: 20 mm v-groove clamping cylinder, FJK Fiber Holder Adapter LDF, RS-232 cable,
PC software, tools and manuals
AFL NO.
50100030
50100092
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
V-groove, STD, Cladding 125-199 µm
V-groove, LD, Cladding 200-349 µm
V-groove, LD, Cladding 350-699 µm
V-groove, LD, Cladding 700-1000 µm
Height Adjuster LD, Cladding 200-349 µm
Height Adjuster LD, Cladding 350-529 µm
Height Adjuster LD, Cladding 530-699 µm
Height Adjuster LD, Cladding 700-1000 µm
Holder, LD, Coating 200-299 µm
Holder, LD, Coating 300-399 µm
Holder, LD, Coating 400-499 µm
Holder, LD, Coating 500-599 µm
Holder, LD, Coating 600-699 µm
Holder, LD, Coating 700-799 µm
Holder, LD, Coating 800-899 µm
Holder, LD, Coating 900-999 µm
Holder, LD, Coating 1000-1099 µm
Holder, LD, Coating 1100-1199 µm
Holder, LD, Coating 1200-1299 µm
Holder, LD, Coating 1300-1399 µm
Holder, LD, Coating 1400-1499 µm
Distance Plate LD Cladding 200-349 µm
Distance Plate LD Cladding 350-699 µm
Distance Plate LD Cladding 700-1000 µm
Diamond blade
Cleaver Blade Replacement Tool
Power Supply, 100-240 V, 1 .25 A
Adapter for Power Supply, US
650 µm
750 µm
850 µm
950 µm
1050 µm
1150 µm
1250 µm
1350 µm
1450 µm
Orange
Green
Red
—
—
—
—
LABEL
Yellow
Orange
Green
Red
Orange
White
Black
Red
250 µm
350 µm
450 µm
550 µm
51010050
51010060
51010070
51010080
51010090
51010100
51010110
51010120
51010130
51020010
51020020
51020030
50000010
50000050
50100240
50100241
AFL NO.
51030020
51030030
51030040
51030050
51040040
51040050
51040060
51040070
51010010
51010020
51010030
51010040
34
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00037, Revision 4, 10.15.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Features
• Documents images from critical end-faces during production
• Precise results
• Fast and easy handling
CleaveMeter 3D
LDF
The CleaveMeter 3D
LDF
is a non-contact (Michelson) interferometer used to examine all types of large diameter fibers with a cladding diameter of 250-1200µm . The optical system consists of a CCD camera with two user-selectable magnifications . Connected to the USB-port of an external PC, parameters and settings are programmed from the PC .
A small bench-top design, the CleaveMeter
LDF
is designed to be compatible with all
NYFORS’ automatic large diameter fiber (LDF) cleavers such as the AutoCleaver
LDF
and the CleaveMaster
LDF
. The CleaveMeter
LDF
accepts the fiber holders used by the NYFORS cleavers without mechanical adjustments . For other types of holders, customized adapters must be provided .
Specifications
PARAMETER
Fiber Cladding
Curing Coating
Power Supply
PC Connection
Dimensions
Weight
* Fiber specific adaptor plates required
VALUE
250 - 1200µm
300 - 1500µm
USB port
USB port
95mm (W) x 160mm (D) x 140mm (H)
1 .5kg
Ordering Information
PART NO.
30000005
MISC. ACCESSORIES
30010010
30020010
DESCRIPTION
CleaveMeter LDF/Excluding Adapter Plate
Adapter Plate, FJK, 200-259µm
Adapter Plate, NYFORS, Generic
Octagon 400µm
0 .38˚
Circular 550µm
0 .17˚
35
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00039, Revision 2, 2.10.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
FU
SION
SPLICER
S
Fiber Optic Cable
HJS-02
HJS-03
HJS-03-24 with Power Assist Tool
Hot Jacket Strippers
The HJS-02, HJS-03 and HJS-03-24 hot jacket strippers provide superior ribbon andfield-ribbonized stripping performance . They conserve energy with a Power
Save feature when the splicer is operated by battery power . A temperature selection switch provides easy field optimization for different fibers or operating conditions .
An optional single-fiber adapter may be used to provide easy single-fiber capability for difficult-to-strip fibers . These strippers accept all Fujikura field and factory splicer designed fiber holders . The HJS-03 is a battery powered hot jacket stripper specifically designed for use withthe SpliceMate fusion splicer but it can be used in other applications . The HJS-03-24 hot jacket stripper is designed for smooth and controlled stripping of 24-fiber ribbon .
Specifications
MODEL
Applicable Fiber Count
Ribbon Thickness
Stripping Length
Typical Heating Time
Standard Heating Temperature
Dimensions (W x D x H)
Weight
Power Supply
Operating Conditions
Storage Conditions
HJS-02, HJS-03
1 to 12 Fiber Ribbon
250 µm to 400 µm
35 mm maximum
3 second Normal Mode
8 second Power Save Mode
100ºC
107 mm x 40 mm x 29 mm
195 g (0 .43lb)
12V DC
-10ºC to 50ºC
-40ºC to 80ºC
HJS-03-24
1 to 24 Fiber Ribbon
250 µm to 400 µm
35 mm maximum
3 second Normal Mode
30 second Power Save Mode
100ºC
149 mm x 58 mm x 36 mm
300 g (0 .66 lb)
12V DC
-10ºC to 50ºC
-40ºC to 80ºC
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Strippers
HJS-02 Hot Jacket Stripper (12 fibers max .) Includes DCC-11
HJS-02-80 Hot Jacket Stripper (80 µm cladding) Includes DCC-11
HJS-03 Battery Powered Hot Jacket Stripper
HJS-03-24 Hot Jacket Stripper (24 fibers max .)
AFL NO.
S010340
S013264
S013996
S012960
S012964 HJS-03-24PA Power Assist Tool for HJS-03-24
AC Power Operation
ADC-09 AC Adapter (for HJS-02, HJS-03 and HJS-03-24)
ACC-09 AC Power Cord (for ADC-09)
DC Power Operation
S014389
S014390
DCC-11 DC Power Cord for HJS-02/HJS-03 (for FSM-17R/50R/18R/60R) S013852
DCC-03 DC Power Cord for HJS-02/HJS-03 (for FSM-30R/40R24) S006126
Miscellaneous
SAD-01 Single Fiber Adapter for HJS-02 S010428
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00031, Revision 4, 8 .7 .12
Specifications are subject to change without notice .
Features
• 250 µm and 900 µm fiber capability
• Short cycle time
• Lightweight and portable
AFL PowerStrip
™
AFL PowerStrip is a thermal stripper used in high strength splicing . Using the proven blade and centering design of the Schleuniger FiberStrip 7030 in addition to the fiber holder system, the AFL PowerStrip automatically centers the fiber, heats the buffer or coating and strips the buffer at a controlled rate with perfect alignment . The fiber holder system reduces fiber handling, making this tool ideal for any production environment .
Specifications
PARAMETER VALUE
Fibers Stripped - Single Buffered Fiber Cladding diameter: 125 µm standard, 80 µm optional
Coating diameter: 250 µm and 900 µm standard, 160 µm and 400 µm optional
Clamping System Fujikura fiber holder clamp; compatible with FSM-45F/PM and 100 series fiber holders
Stripping Length
Heater Temperature Range
Heating Time
Up to 35 mm
110°C to 150°C (230°F to 302°F)
1 .5 to 13 seconds
Cycle Time
Power Supply
Dimensions (L x W x D)
Weight
CE Conformity
Approximately 5 seconds/cycle (after heating)
Input: 100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 ± 3 Hz; Output: 12 V DC, 12 W, 1 A
209 mm x 57 mm x 45 mm (8 .25 x 2 .25 x 1 .8 inches)
0 .7 kg (1 .5 lbs)
Complies with all CE equipment guidelines
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
AFL PowerStrip Kit
Carrying case, fiber holder clamping system, blades and centralizers for 125/250 µm and 125/900 µm fiber, power supply 230 V AC or 100/120 V AC, power cord 2 m
(6 .5 feet), cleaning brush and tool set (hex keys, adjustment screwdriver)
Coating Blades
80/160 µm
125/250 µm
125/400 µm
125/900 µm
250/400 µm
Centralizers
160 µm
250 µm
400 µm
900 µm
Power Supply
12 V DC W/PLUG ADPT
* Custom blades and centralizers available on request .
AFL NO.
S012808
S012656
S012596
S012628
S012604
S014400
S012652
S012600
S012624
S012608
S015185
37
High Tensile Stripper
The Fujikura high tensile stripper HTS-12 provides excellent strength performance when removing 250 µm and 400 µm buffer from optical fibers . Heating temperature and duration are fully adjustable for a variety of buffer materials . Self centering blades eliminate the need for an external guide and make replacement quick and easy .
Designed for use with the FSM-40F/PM fiber holder system, the HTS-12 is an ideal solution for stripping when high strength fusion splices are a must .
Specifications
PARAMETER
Applicable Fiber:
Cladding Diameter
Coating Diameter
Stripping Length
Temperature Settings
Heating Time
Power Supply
Dimensions (W x D x H)
Weight
Operating Conditions
VALUE
125 µm
250 µm / 400 µm (optional)
35 mm max
120º, 140º, 160º, or 180º C (adjustable)
3 seconds approximate
100 to 240 VAC (50 to 60 Hz)
140 x 60 x 60 (mm) / 5 .51 x 2 .36 x 2 .36 (inches)
600 g / 1 .3 lbs
0ºC to 40ºC, 10% to 85% RH (non-condensing)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
HTS-12 High Tensile Stripper w/ 250 µm Blades
400 µm Blade for HTS-12
250 µm Blades for HTS-12
AFL NO.
S012094
S011946
S011942
38
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00030, Revision 1, 2 .10 .11
Specifications are subject to change without notice .
Included Accessories
USC-03 Ultrasonic Cleaner
The Fujikura ultrasonic cleaner model USC-03 provides a simple and cost effective method for cleaning optical fibers when high strength fusion splices are required .
This ultrasonic cleaner readily accepts all FH-40-XXX, FH-50-XXX, FH-60-XXX and
FH-100-XXX series fiber holders . The Universal Fiber Holder Adapter, available as an optional accessory, enables the use of FH-XXX series fiber holders .
The high frequency ultrasonic action cleans debris and coating residue without damaging the exposed cladding and a built-in timer ensures that the required cleaning time is consistently used for all fibers processed . This cleaner, when used in conjunction with high strength stripping and cleaving accessories, produces outstanding results for the most demanding high strength applications .
Features
• Built-in timer assures correct cleaning time
• Adjustable high intensity vibratory cleaning action
• Adjustment knob allows fine-tuning of fiber submersion depth
• Alcohol bath lid prevents cleaning fluid evaporation when machine is idle
Specifications
PARAMETER
Applicable Fibers
Applicable Fiber Holders
Recommended Fluid
Tank Capacity
Ultrasonic Frequency
Fiber Cleaning Length
Output Power
Timer Range
Power Requirement
Operating Environment
Storage Environment
Dimensions (W x D x H)
Weight
VALUE
Single optical fiber
FH-40, 50, 60 and 100 series
Ethyl-alcohol
24 cc to 45 cc
50 kHz
54 mm (max), adjustable
10 W (max)
1 to 99 seconds
AC 100 to 240 V / 50 Hz to 60 Hz
0oC to 40oC, 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing
-20˚C to 60˚C, non-condensing humidity
95 x 190 x 157 (mm) / 3 .74 x 7 .48 x 6 .18 (inches)
1 kg / 2 .2 lbs
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
USC-03
Universal Fiber Holder Adapter
ADC-10 Power Adapter
ACC-09 Power Cord
AFL NO.
S014783
S013568
S012548
S014390
39
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00064, Revision 3, 5 .14 .15
Specifications are subject to change without notice .
Cleavers
FSR-05
FSR-05, FSR-06 and FSR-07
Optical Fiber Recoaters
AFL offers a complete lineup of high quality fiber recoaters to address the small packaging needs of the fiber optic industry . The FSR series recoaters provide automatic operation with an easily exchangeable, low cost, mold design . A quick change resin bottle and pump assembly make messy, cumbersome, and time consuming acrylate changes a thing of the past . The pump system also provides a purge cavity for elimination of bubbles in the acrylate material . A programmable resin injection system provides an exact volume of resin to the mold cavity to ensure consistent and repeatable recoat performance . While the base model FSR-05 provides only recoating functions, the FSR-06 and FSR- 07 also provide programmable rate and force proof-testing capabilities up to 2 kgf or 10 kgf respectively .
All of the recoaters are compatible with special recoating resins to provide higher stiffness recoating for 900 μm jacketed fibers, as well as specialty low-index resins for recoating of double-clad fibers . A USB - PC interface allows the user to control and store key parameters associated with the recoating process . The quartz mold technology provides very consistent recoating quality and have an estimated lifetime of 10,000 recoats per mold set .
FSR-06
FSR-07
Features
•
Easy mold, resin and pump exchange
•
Quartz molds for high-quality, consistent recoating
•
Wide selection of available mold sizes
•
Automated operation
•
Bubble elimination system
•
Programmable resin injection
•
Selectable proof–tester
•
PC interface with USB
Specifications
PARAMETER
Applicable fiber coating
Recoating diameter
Recoating length
Recoating time
Resin injection
Recoat material
Material of mold
Recoat modes
Proof-test modes
Load application
Tension
Dimensions
Weight
Power source
LCD monitor
PC interface
Operating condition
Storage condition
FSR-05 FSR-06
Colored and non-colored
FSR-07
195 μm, 255 μm, 280 μm, 450 μm, 670 μm, 1000 μm
Custom sizes are available
4 to 50 mm
Injection 20 sec/Curing 4 sec
(Jacket diameter 250 μm with 280 μm MOLD)
Volume and speed are programmable
UV curable Acrylate
Recommended specification for other viscosity 2000-6000 cps
Curing wavelength 365± 15 nm
DSM Desotech DesoLite(R) 950-200 recommended
—
Quartz
100 modes
All variables programmable
30 modes
Speed, force, time programmable
—
—
252 mm (W) x 135 mm (D) x 169 mm (H)
Linear Clamp
0 .5 kgf ~ 2 .0 kgf
Mandrel
0 .5 kgf ~ 10 .0 kgf
252 mm (W) x 175 mm (D) x 169 mm (H)
2 .9 kg 4 .3 kg 4 .5 kg
AC 100 to 240 C /50 to 60 Hz (External AC adaptor ADC-19)
4 .7 inch, Tilt angle
USB 2 .0 Type B mini
10 to 30°C, 0 to 90% (non dew)
-40 to 60°C (non dew, no resin)
© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00081, Revision 2, 5.26.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
40
Cleavers
FSR-05, FSR-06 and FSR-07 Optical Fiber Recoaters
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
FSR-05
Includes: 280 μm mold, ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, USB-01 USB Cable and M-FSR05 instruction manual .
FSR-06 with 280 μm mold
Includes: 280 μm mold, 2 kgf Proof Tester, ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, USB-01 USB Cable, PC-02 Fiber protect cover and M-FSR05 instruction manual .
FSR-06 with 450 μm mold
Includes: 450 μm mold, 2 kgf Proof Tester, ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, USB-01 USB Cable, PC-02 Fiber protect cover and M-FSR05 instruction manual .
FSR-07
Includes: 10 kgf Proof Tester, 280 μm mold, ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, USB-01 USB Cable, PC-03 Fiber protect cover and M-FSR05 instruction manual .
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
Fiber protect cover for FSR-06: PC-02
Fiber protect cover for FSR-07: PC-03
Tube set: FSR-05-TUBE-01
Pump head: FSR-05-PUMP-01
UV resin bottle: FSR-05-BTL-01
Force gauge adaptor: FGA-02
MOLDS
FSR-05-MOLD-195
FSR-05-MOLD-255
FSR-05-MOLD-280
FSR-05-MOLD-450
FSR-05-MOLD-670
FSR-05-MOLD-1000
•
Easy mold, resin, and pump exchange
•
Factory installation is not required
Bubble Separator
AFL NO.
S016103
S016104
S016186
S016105
AFL NO.
S016107
S016108
S016109
S016110
S016112
S016113
S016133
S016134
S016106
S016135
S016136
S016137
Mold exchange
Bubble Separator Performance
Resin and pump exchange
41
Spare Pump for quickly changing
UV resin type: FSR-05-pump-01
© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00081, Revision 2, 5.26.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Dispensing Robot is easily removed from the rear of the AutoCoater for rapid recoat resin exchange
Uniform Diameter
Over-Mold (Over-Coating)
Undersize Recoating
AutoCoater 2
™
Designed for high strength applications, the AutoCoater 2 restores the protective coating on spliced acrylate-coated optical fibers . It is fully automatic, allowing for operator skill independence in factory environments with high productivity and cost advantages .
Recoating compound is injected automatically into soft silicone recoating molds identical to those used in NYFORS manual recoaters . These silicone molds are easily & rapidly exchangeable with no realignment required . With different sizes and custom molds available, the operator can not only easily exchange molds to meet requirements for different fiber and fiber coating diameters, but he can also choose whether to (a) recoat to a uniform diameter that exactly matches the original fiber coating diameter, (b) recoat with a cross section slightly smaller in diameter than the original fiber coating (undersize), or (c) recoat with a larger diameter that moverlaps the primary coating at each end of the recoat section (over-coating) .
With easy and rapid reconfiguration and simple setup, the AutoCoater 2 is the ideal choice for fully automatic skill-independent recoating operations where flexibility is required to meet many different recoating needs and specifications .
Rapid exchange of recoating resin type
The customer selected recoating compound is automatically injected from an easily attached 1 oz Nalgene bottle, functioning as the recoater reservoir tank . This greatly simplifies refilling in high volume production .
This bottle as well as the injection pump, supply lines, and injection needle comprise an easily exchangeable recoating compound “Dispensing Robot” . The dispensing robot may be rapidly removed with only 2 screws and one electrical interface connection . Since it can be removed and exchanged as a single unit, the need to purge or cleanse the injection pump and supply lines when changing from one type of recoating resin to another is completely eliminated . Another option when using several compounds in parallel is to operate the recoater in manual mode, using a syringe for manual resin injection of recoating compound into the mold .
The combination of mold sizes and mold types (for uniform and undersize recoating as well as overcoating) and the simplicity of exchanging recoating compounds underscores the flexibility of the soft mold AutoCoater 2 as the most versatile and easily adaptable automatic recoater in the world .
Features
• Consistent, high quality recoating
• Automatic and skill independent
• Short cycle time
• Linear and mandrel strength testing
• Uniform diameter, overcoating and undersize recoating capability
• Easy exchange of recoating resin type
• No need for compressed air or vacuum
• Compatible with all common recoating resins including low-index and high temperature materials
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00067, Revision 1, 2.4.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
42
AutoCoater 2
™
Other features
Short curing times are achieved through an efficient UV LED array arranged along the length of the mold . Curing times depend on the fiber and fiber coating diameter as well as the properties of the customer-selected recoating resin, but are typically as short as 3 seconds which allows for very fast recoating operations with total cycle times of 15 seconds or less – faster than any competing recoater on the market .
Besides standard
High-index materials, low-index recoating compounds can be rapidly cured, typically with a curing time of no more than 30 seconds .
High temperature (200°C) acrylate recoating compounds useful for oil and gas down-hole applications are also compatible, as well as stiffer recoat resins suitable for recoating 900 µm jacketed fibers .
Strength tests can be carried out with the linear clamps or mandrels (optional) . Linear proof tests can be performed up to 22 N, while the mandrels allow for tensile tests with forces up to 100 N . Level of force, pulling rate and hold times at maximum force are programmable .
The AutoCoater 2 comes in an ergonomic, bench-top design for comfortable operation . The main operator interface is a user-friendly and easy-to-navigate GUI on the touch screen control panel . System software supports storable and user-defined programs for easy process change . Remote monitoring and supervision can be carried out through an Ethernet interface .
Specifications
PARAMETER
Curing time
Cycle time
Light source
Wavelength
Injection
Mold mounting
Mold length
Recoating diameter (μm)
Linear proof test
Mandrel Tensile Test (optional item)
Hold time
Pull rate
Display units
PC connection
Compressed air
Power supply
Dimensions
Weight
VALUE
Programmable, 3 s typical
15 seconds typical
UV LED
380-385 nm
Automatic from 1 oz bottle
Exchangeable
34 mm and 55 mm
165, 250, 300, 400, 550 and 900 μm
Programmable, 0-22 N
Programmable, 0-100 N
Programmable
0 .5-20 N/s lbs, kg, N, kpsi, GPa
Ethernet and USB flash drive
Not needed
External 12 V DC, 60 W
270 mm (W) x 210 mm (D) x 115 mm (H)
4 .5 kg
43
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00067, Revision 1, 2.4.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
AutoCoater 2
™
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
AutoCoater 2 w/ Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU Adapter), Fiber Tensioner-Standard,
Packet of 250 µm Molds (34 mm length), Mold Guide Pins, Manual and Tools
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
Mold Options
Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Custom molds are available upon request
Miscellaneous
Mold Guide Pins
Fiber Tensioner, 900 µm (left and right)
Mandrels (Rotary Tensile Test)
Dispenser Robot
Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU Adapter)
AFL NO.
10100035
AFL NO.
10100036
10100037
10100038
10100039
10100040
10100078
10100041
10100042
10100043
10100044
10100045
10100046
10100079
10100047
10100070
10100061
10100056
10100069
90100409
44
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00067, Revision 1, 2.4.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Uniform Diameter
Over-Mold (Over-Coating)
Undersize Recoating
MiniCoater 2
™
This compact and easy-to-use recoater is based on NYFORS proven silicone mold technology which has been developed and refined in the course of the last twenty years .
Molds are available in different sizes to cover a range of coating diameters and can easily be exchanged by the operator with no realignment required . Custom molds are available on request .
With the standard molds the recoated part of the fiber is round with a cross section that perfectly and uniformly matches that of the original fiber coating, but molds can also be selected for both over-coating and undersize recoating of optical fibers . These features makes the MiniCoater 2 well suited for research and development operations and small scale production where the fiber type and dimensions need to be changed frequently .
The cordless battery operation enables easy movement from lab-to-lab, or from one production area to another .
Injection of the recoating compound is performed manually . While this does require a manual user operation, it also ensures flexibility because the user can immediately switch from one type of recoating compound to another (e .g . from a high-index recoating material to a low-index material) without any need to flush out a recoater reservoir and injection pumping system . This, in addition to the rapidly exchangeable mold sizes and shapes (for uniform diameter and undersize recoating as well as overcoating), ensures the flexibility and adaptability of the MiniCoater 2 .
Short curing times are achieved through a highly efficient UV LED array, which also has the ability to cure low-index recoating compounds used in fiber laser manufacturing .
In addition, the MiniCoater 2 is compatible with recoating materials that can withstand
200°C high temperature applications such as down-hole applications in oil and gas wells .
The MiniCoater 2 has a simple two button control with a three digit display and comes in a very compact package . The small size and light weight of the MiniCoater 2™ makes it ideal for situations where the recoater must be frequently moved from one lab or production area to another . The small size also facilitates easy ergonomic integration into a production work bench where space is at a premium . In addition, since the
MiniCoater 2 may be operated by battery power, and also due to the small size and weight, it is well suited to recoating in a remote field environment where a high degree of portability is required .
Features
• Ideal recoater for remote sites such as on oil rigs
• Very compact design
• Small, lightweight, highly portable
• Runs on built-in rechargeable battery or AC adapter
• Battery provides power for hours of remote-site operation
• Compatible with high-temperature recoating compounds
• Easy mold exchange and replacement
• Handles most fiber dimensions with custom molds available
• Uniform high quality recoating
• Short curing times
• High and low-index recoating
• Uniform diameter, over-coating and undersize recoating capability
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00070, Revision 2, 10.15.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
45
MiniCoater 2
™
Specifications
PARAMETER
Curing time
Light source
Wavelength
Mold material
Mold length
Recoating diameter (μm)
Power supply
Dimensions
Weight
VALUE
Programmable, 3 seconds typical
UV LED
380-385 nm
Silicone
34 mm and 55 mm
165, 250, 300, 400, 550 & 900 μm
Battery or external 12 V DC, 40 W
150 mm (W) x 77 mm (D) x 60 mm (H)
0 .7 kg
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
MiniCoater 2 w/ Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU adapter), Fiber Clamps (for 165-330 µm & 330-900 µm),
Packet of 250 µm Molds (34 mm length), Mold Guide Pins, Manual and Tools
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
Mold Options
Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Custom molds are available upon request
Miscellaneous
Mold Guide Pins
Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU Adapter)
FIBER CLAMPS,MINIC 2,165-330 µm
FIBER CLAMPS,MINIC 2,330-900 µm
AFL NO.
10100033
AFL NO.
10100036
10100037
10100038
10100039
10100040
10100078
10100041
10100042
10100043
10100044
10100045
10100046
10100079
10100047
10100070
90100409
10100074
10100058
46
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00070, Revision 2, 10.15.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
ReCoater 2 XL™ with optional Mandrels attached
Features
• Extended length recoating up to more than 100 mm
• Easy mold exchange and replacement
• Handles most fiber dimensions, with custom molds available
• Uniform diameter, overcoating and undersize recoating capability
• Short curing times
• High and low-index recoating
• Linear or mandrel strength testing
Uniform Diameter
Over-Mold (Over-Coating)
Undersize Recoating
ReCoater 2 XL
™
The extended length ReCoater 2 XL is used to restore the protective coating on acrylate-coated optical fibers in high strength applications . Designed to process long sections of stripped fiber, it accepts silicone molds of up to 110 mm length .
Molds are available in different sizes to cover a range of fiber coating diameters and can easily be exchanged with no realignment required . With standard molds the recoated part of the fiber is round with a cross section that perfectly and uniformly matches that of the original coating, but molds can also be selected for both overcoating and undersize recoating of optical fibers . These features as well as the ability to recoat very long stripped fiber sections makes the ReCoater 2 XL ideal for research and development operations and small scale production where the fiber type and length need to be changed frequently .
Injection of the recoating compound is performed manually . While this does require a manual user operation, it also ensures flexibility because the user can immediately switch from one type of recoating compound to another (e .g . from a high-index recoating material to a low-index material) without any need to flush out a recoater reservoir and injection pumping system .
This, in addition to the rapidly exchangeable mold sizes and shapes (for uniform diameter and undersize recoating as well as overcoating), ensures the flexibility and adaptability of the extended length ReCoater 2 XL .
Short curing times are achieved through an efficient UV LED array, arranged along the length of the mold . Curing times depend on the fiber and fiber coating diameter as well as the properties of the customer-selected recoating resin, but are typically as short as 3 seconds which allows for very fast recoating operations . The highly efficient light source also makes it possible to cure low-index recoating compounds used in fiber laser manufacturing .
Strength tests can be carried out with linear clamps or mandrels (optional) . Linear proof tests can be performed up to 22 N, with programmable levels of force, pulling rates and hold time at maximum force . With the mandrels, tensile tests can be performed with forces up to 100 N . Linear clamps are carefully designed so that the primary coating is not damaged .
The ReCoater 2 XL comes in an ergonomic, bench-top design for comfortable operation .
The main operator interface is an easy-to-navigate and user-friendly GUI on the touch screen control panel . System software supports storable and user-defined programs for easy process change . Remote monitoring and supervision can be carried out through an
Ethernet interface .
47
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00071, Revision 1, 2.3.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
ReCoater 2 XL
™
Specifications
PARAMETER
Curing time
Light source
Wavelength
Mold material
Mold mounting
Mold length
Recoating diameter (μm)
Linear proof test
Rotary tensile test (optional item)
Resolution
Hold time
Pulling speed
Pulling rate
Display units
PC connection
Power supply
Compressed air
Dimensions
Weight
VALUE
Programmable, 3 seconds typical
UV LED
380-385 nm
Silicone
Exchangeable
34 mm, 55 mm and 110 mm
165, 250, 300, 400, 550 & 900 μm
Programmable, 0-22 N
Programmable, 0-100 N
0 .01 N
Programmable
Programmable
0 .5-20 N/s lbs, kg, N, kpsi, GPa
Ethernet and USB flash drive connection
External 12 V DC, 60 W
Not needed
270 mm (W) x 170 mm (D) x 98 mm (H)
3 .9 kg
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
ReCoater 2 XL w/ Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU Adapter), Fiber Tensioners, Standard, Packet of 250 µm Molds (110 mm length),
Mold Guide Pins (Extended length), Manual and Tools
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
Mold Options
Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 55 mm (10 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)
AFL NO.
10100036
10100037
10100038
10100039
10100040
10100078
10100041
10100042
10100043
10100044
10100045
10100046
10100079
10100047
DESCRIPTION
Mold Options (continued)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces)
Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 110 mm (5 pieces)
Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces)
Custom molds are available upon request
Miscellaneous
Mold Guide Pins (Extended)
Fiber Tensioner, 900 µm (left and right)
Mandrels
Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU Adapter)
AFL NO.
10100068
AFL NO.
10100048
10100049
10100050
10100051
10100052
10100080
10100053
10100071
10100061
10100056
90100409
48
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00071, Revision 1, 2.3.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Features
• Fully automatic
• High pulling force
• Easy to operate
• Compact size
• PC controlled
• Logging of test data
ProofTester
The ProofTester is a compact and lightweight instrument ideal for strength testing of optical fibers up to 30 N . The ProofTester is developed to meet all types of applications where a strength test has to be performed . The ProofTester is designed with the user in mind . The fibers are easily placed in the correct position by guided linear clamps, and with a “One Touch” go button, the testing starts automatically . The built-in microprocessor controls all the important parameters such as pulling force, pull speed and hold time . This allows for a completely controlled test every time . The ProofTester can be connected to an external PC, which enables access to all programmable parameters and settings . The ProofTester is adapted for stand alone use or to be integrated in different subsystems .
Specifications
PARAMETER
Fiber Buffers
Tensile Test
Resolution
Pulling Speed
Hold Time
Power Supply*
Compressed Air
Dimensions
Weight
* Not included in delivery
VALUE
160 - 900 µm
1 - 30 N
0 .1 N
20 - 100 mm/min
0 - 10 sec
External 12V DC
External Compressor*, 5-7 bar, 4 mm tube instant push-in fitting
210 mm (W) x 138 mm (D) x 110 mm (H)
2 .3 kg
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
ProofTester (Includes: PC software, RS-232 cable, manual and tools)
Power Supply (Purchased separately)
Power Adapter (Purchased separately)
AFL NO.
10100027
50100075
50100009
49
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00042, Revision 3, 11.21.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
FAT-04
Fiber Arrangement Tool
The FAT-04 features an easy-to-use fiber arrangement method utilizing linear travel .
The FAT-04 includes a spare paste applicator to allow ribbon making to continue even if one of the paste applicators needs cleaning .
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
FAT-04 Fiber Arrangement Tool*
SP-1 Foam Pads for FAT-04
(One set = 5 sheets of 25 pads each)
Paste Applicator Blocks for FAT-04 (2 pieces)
AFL NO.
S010212
S009016
S010952
* FAT-04 includes 4 oz . FAA-03A ribbon forming adhesive, paste applicator blocks, cleaning swabs,
CL-02 clips and SP-1 foam pads
FAA-03A
Ribbon Forming Adhesive
A key advantage of our fiber arrangement tool is the use of the ribbon forming adhesive .
Ribbons formed with this adhesive have excellent stripability, especially compared to ribbonizing methods using tape . Unlike tape methods, the paste does not “gum-up” the stripping tool and cause broken fibers . The paste holds the stripped coating residue into a single piece of debris that is easily cleaned from the stripper . If needed, the ribbon can be easily separated into individual fibers using alcohol .
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
FAA-03A ribbon-forming adhesive (0 .5 liter bottle)
FAA-03A ribbon-forming adhesive (4 oz . dispensing bottle)
AFL NO.
S008622
S008720
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00015, Revision 4, 5 .15 .15
Specifications are subject to change without notice .
Splice Protection Sleeves
AFL offers a wide selection of fiber protection sleeves to meet any application . The FP series is the industry standard for durable and lasting protection of single fiber splices in field installations, while the FP-04(T) and FP-05 provide the same durable protection for 8 and 12 fiber ribbon respectively .
The FPS01 and FPS04 series are specially designed for optical components, where small packaging is a priority . These micro sleeves provide the known reliability of Fujikura sleeves in the smallest possible lengths . This easy and cost effective method is a great alternative to recoating . The FPS01 and FPS04 series offer a wide range of options to accommodate various coating sizes, and are manufactured in a variety of lengths . This gives great flexibility in designing optical modules .
Standard Sleeves: Dimensions & Applicable Fiber
SLEEVES FOR SINGLE FIBERS UP TO 900 MICRONS
DESCRIPTION
FP-60
FP-40
FP-03(34)
SLEEVE LENGTH
60 mm
40 mm
34 mm
FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH
16 mm
10 mm
10 mm
SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK
3 .1 mm (max .)
3 .1 mm (max .)
3 .1 mm (max .)
PACKAGING AFL NO.
1000 Box/100 Pack S015915
1000 Box/100 Pack S015916
500 Box/10 Pack S000453
SLEEVES FOR TFOCA CABLE (DUAL 900 μm)
DESCRIPTION FIBER COUNT SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH
FP-D900 2 40 mm 10 mm
SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK
3 .6 mm (max .)
PACKAGING AFL NO.
1000 Box & 50 Pack S014413
SLEEVES FOR RIBBON FIBERS
DESCRIPTION FIBER COUNT SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH
FP-04(T) Up to 8 fibers 40 mm 10 mm
FP-05
FP-05-28
Up to 12 fibers
Up to 12 fibers
40 mm
28 mm
10 mm
10 mm
FPS04-30
FPS08-28
FPS24-40
Up to 4 fibers 30 mm
Up to 8 fibers 28 mm
Up to 24 fibers 40 mm
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK
4 .1 mm (max .)
4 .5 mm (max .)
4 .5 mm (max .)
2 .4 mm (max .)
3 .4 mm (max .)
8 mm (max .)
Specifications
PARAMETER
Outer tube
Inner tube
Strength member
Operation condition (after shrink)
Storage condition (before shrink)
DESCRIPTION
FP-60/40/03 series
FP-04(T) / FP-05
VALUE
Polyethylene
FP-60/40/03 series
FP-04(T) / FP-05
Ethylene-Vinyl Acetate (Polyolefin Copolymer)
Stainless steel
Quartz glass
-40 to 75°C, 0 to 95% RH (Non dew)
-40 to 60°C, Non dew
PACKAGING
250 Box/25 Pack
250 Box/5 Pack
250 Box/25 Pack
AFL NO.
S002105
S003027
S014720
1,000 Box/25 Pack S010848
500 Box/25 Pack
200 Box/5 Pack
S013560
S013004
FP-03 series
FPS01 series
FP-40 series
FP-60 series
FP-04(T)/05
FPS04-30
FPS08-28
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00051, Revision 5, 8.1.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
51
Splice Protection Sleeves
Micro Sleeves: Dimensions & Applicable Fiber
FPS01-400 SERIES FOR SINGLE FIBERS UP TO 400 MICRON FIBER
DESCRIPTION
FPS01-400-12
FPS01-400-15
FPS01-400-20
FPS01-400-25
FPS01-400-34
FPS01-400-40
SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK
12 mm
15 mm
20 mm
25 mm
34 mm
40 mm
4 mm
4 mm
8 mm
10 mm
15 mm
16 mm
1 .5 mm
1 .5 mm
1 .5 mm
1 .5 mm
1 .5 mm
1 .5 mm
PACKAGING
50 Pack
50 Pack
50 Pack
50 Pack
50 Pack
1,250 Box
AFL NO.
S014088
S012668
S012672
S012676
S012680
S011914
FPS01-900 SERIES FOR SINGLE FIBERS UP TO 900 MICRON FIBER
DESCRIPTION
FPS01-900-15
FPS01-900-20
FPS01-900-25
FPS01-900-34
FPS01-900-45
SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK
15 mm
20 mm
25 mm
34 mm
45 mm
4 mm
6 mm
6 mm
13 mm
16 mm
2 .3 mm
2 .3 mm
2 .3 mm
2 .3 mm
2 .3 mm
Specifications
PARAMETER
Outer tube
Inner tube
Strength member
Operation condition (after shrink)
Storage condition (before shrink)
PACKAGING
50 Pack
50 Pack
50 Pack
50 Pack
50 Pack
MODEL VALUE
FPS01 series / FPS04-30 Polyethylene
FPS01 series
FPS04-30 / FPS08-28
Ethylene-Vinyl Acetate (Polyolefin Copolymer)
Stainless steel
Quartz glass
-40 to 75°C, 0 to 95% RH (Non dew)
-40 to 60°C, Non dew
AFL NO.
S012684
S012688
S011954
S012692
S012696
Type Variations
52
FULL SCALE
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00051, Revision 5, 8.1.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Cotton Swabs
Thorough cleaning of a fusion splicer’s optical elements and alignment V-grooves is critical to ensure successful trouble-free splicing operations . CS-1 Cotton Swabs are especially useful for such cleaning operations . The small size of the CS-1 swabs ensures accessibility in tight places and will not leach out chemicals or lint and contaminate optical elements .
DESCRIPTION
CS-1 Cotton Swabs (pack of 25 each)
PART #
S003719
Features
• Precision ceramic V-groove alignment
• Built-in magnifier and lamp to inspect fiber placement in V-grooves
Temporary Joining Tools
The TJ-03 and TJ-24 provide a temporary fiber splice for fiber and cable connections to test equipment such as OTDRs . The TJ-03 uses a precision ceramic V-groove to align up to 12 fibers simultaneously and the TJ-24 aligns up to 24 fibers . The fibers are prepared for joining by using standard mass fusion fiber preparation tools (fiber holders, hot jacket stripper, and cleaver .) Using the TJ-03 or TJ-24 in conjunction with an OTDR equipped with an optical switch provides rapid one button optical tests of 12 or 24 fibers .
DESCRIPTION
TJ-03 Temporary Splice Kit:
Fiber Holders (1 pair) FH-50-12, CT-30 Cleaver, HJS-02 Hot Jacket
Stripper, ADC-09 AC Adapter for HJS-02, and the ACC-09 Power Cord
TJ-03 Temporary Splice (without fiber preparation tools)
TJ-24 Temporary Splice Kit:
Fiber Holders (1 pair) FH-24, CT-20 Cleaver, HJS-03 Hot Jacket Stripper,
ADC-09 AC Adapter for HJS-03, Power Assist Lever for HJS-03, and the
ACC-09 Power Cord
TJ-24 Temporary Splice (without fiber preparation tools)
PART #
S012772
S010456
S013080
S011666
53
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00005, Revision 2, 1.17.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR
Test, Troubleshoot and Document Single-mode and Multimode Fiber Networks
Features
• 30 dB dynamic range single-mode
• 16-hour battery life
• Remote display capable
• Touch and Test
®
intuitive user interface
• New faster processor
• Crisp bright display for indoor/outdoor viewing
• Integrated OPM standard; integrated VFL standard
• Inspection capable with DFS1 Digital FiberScope
• Rugged, hand-held, lightweight (<1 kg)
• Prepaid Calibration plans, Cal and Cal Plus
Test Modes
•
Full Auto OTDR – Normal (point-to-point) fiber cable construction testing and fault location
•
Expert OTDR – Full function OTDR for experienced users includes
Auto and Auto-Once setup
•
Real-Time OTDR – Fault location, splice verification
•
Optical Power Meter – Measure optical power or fiber loss
•
Visual Fault Locator – Red laser for fiber bend and break location
Languages supported
•
•
•
English
French
German
• Italian
• Polish
• Spanish
• Portuguese
• Turkish
• Chinese (Simplified, Traditional)
M210 OTDR with DFS1 Digital FiberScope
AFL’s M210 is the only inspection ready QUAD OTDR that combines OTDR, OPM and VFL capability with a proven, easy-to-use and easy-to-learn user interface. The M210 is the latest addition to the M200 family of OTDRs. Like other members of the M200 family, the
M210 offers the intuitive Touch and Test user interface in a rugged, lightweight, easy-to-hold package ready for field use. The M210 features a more powerful processing engine, a higher resolution display and, for the first time in an OTDR of its size, an integrated
Optical Power Meter.
Touch and Test simplifies the M210 user experience, minimizes human errors and reduces training time by providing one-touch access to the Full-Auto, Expert and Real-Time OTDR test modes, OPM measurement mode as well as the Results Management and Job
Creation menus. The M210 allows setting Pass/Fail thresholds to industry standard TIA/ISO or user-values and will automatically alert users of failing fibers. Touch and Test enables both experts and novices alike to complete jobs more accurately and in less time.
54
© 2012-2013, AFL, all rights reserved. M210-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2013-05-17
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
M210 QUAD Certification Kit (Tier 1 and Tier 2)
M210 QUAD Test and Inspection Kit (Tier 2)
M210 OTDR in Hard Transit Case
M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR
M210 OTDR Soft and Hard Case Options
The M210 micro OTDR is available as a single-mode, multimode or single-mode/ multimode model in either a soft or hard case and as part of a QUAD Certification kit or QUAD Test and Inspection kit. M210 OTDRs are ideal for testing, analyzing and troubleshooting enterprise, LAN/WAN, campus and military single-mode and multimode
(62.5 and 50 micron) fiber networks.
All M210 models support IEC 61300-3-35 fiber end-face visual inspection practices using a DFS1 Digital FiberScope. OTDR traces (.sor format), OPM measurement results and fiber end-face images can be saved together in a job. These results can be downloaded to a computer for analyzing and editing using the included companion, Test Results Manager,
TRM
®
2.0 Basic application software.
M210 QUAD Certification Kit in Hard Transit Case
This kit is designed for integrated single-mode and multimode Tier 1 and Tier 2 testing with fiber end-face image capture. The M210 stores OTDR traces, loss readings and end-face images in a logical Job Structure for each fiber. Review results on the M210 and transfer to a PC for analysis and acceptance report documentation using included companion TRM ® (Test Results Manager) software. In TRM, apply standards and applications to loss readings to assure fibers meet the increasing bandwidth needs of fiber networks such as 10 GbE. This kit includes the QUAD M210, OLS4 LED/Laser
Source, DFS1 FiberScope and cleaning accessories in a compact hard transit case.
The hard transit case is a rugged, injection molded ABS case with a full length hinge, padlock loops, secure latches and O-ring seal to protect the contents from dust and water. The case is large enough to hold test, inspection and cleaning accessories and small enough to carry on an airplane. See accessories page.
M210 QUAD Test and Inspection Kit in Hard Transit Case
This kit is designed for performing Tier 2 OTDR testing and troubleshooting and end-face inspection. This kit includes the QUAD M210, DFS1 FiberScope and cleaning accessories in a compact rugged hard transit case. See accessories page.
M210 OTDR in Hard Transit Case
Available in SM, MM or QUAD OTDR models. The hard transit case is large enough for optional test, inspection and cleaning accessories. See accessories page.
M210 OTDR in Soft Case
Available in SM, MM or QUAD OTDR models. The soft case has a shoulder strap and a large pocket to simplify carrying equipment in the field. The pocket is large enough to accommodate cleaning and test accessories. See accessories page
M210 OTDR in Soft Case
© 2012-2013, AFL, all rights reserved. M210-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2013-05-17
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
55
M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR
Test Results Manager Software
Using TRM
®
(Test Results Manager), the companion PC software included with all M210 OTDRs, users can create acceptance reports conforming to industry guidelines. TRM allows users to create customized cover pages with their company logos and generate results pages showing dual wavelength traces and event tables, end-face image, Event Map and loss data for each fiber.
Test, Inspection and Cleaning Accessories
DFS1 FiberScope Inspection Kit FCP2-00-0900 Basic Cleaning Kit
TRM
®
(Test Results Manager) Certification report page
SC, ST, FC LC/MU D-LC Ultra 2.5
Mini-100 SC, ST, FC, LC/MU
One-Click Cleaner Series
Accessories Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC inspection kit
DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC inspection kit
DFS1 Digital FiberScope kit without adapters
Fiber Ring, 50/125 µm multimode, 150 m
Fiber Ring, Laser Optimized, 50 µm multimode, 150 m
Fiber Ring, 62.5/125 mm multimode, 150 m
Fiber Ring, single-mode, 150 m
AFL NO.
DFS1-00-04XU
DFS1-00-04XA
DFS1-00-04XN
FR1-M5-150-x1-x2
FR1-L5-150-x1-x2
FR1-M6-150-x1-x2 a
Wet Cleaning kit for SC/FC/ST/LC connectors
Dry Cleaning kit
Basic Cleaning kit with carry case (includes One-Clicks,
FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB)
Basic Cleaning kit with MPO Cleaners and carry case
(includes One-Clicks, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes,
Cletop SB, MPO/MTP Cleaner)
One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500+ cleans)
FR1-SM-150-y1-y2 a
8500-20-0900
8500-20-0901
FCP2-00-0900
FCP2-00-0901
One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (500+ cleans)
One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100+ cleans)
One-Click Mini-100 LC/MU (100+ cleans)
8500-05-0001MZ
8500-05-0002MZ
8500-05-0005MZ
8500-05-0006MZ
One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 SC, ST, FC (enlarged cleaning) 8500-05-0007MZ
One-Click Ultra Cleaner D-LC (Duplex LC, 500 cleans x 2) 8500-05-0008MZ a a
Note: a. When ordering Fiber Rings, specify connector types (x1, x2, y1, y2).
56
© 2012-2013, AFL, all rights reserved. M210-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2013-05-17
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR
Specifications a
OTDR
Emitter Type
Safety Class
Center Wavelengths
Wavelength Tolerance
Dynamic Range (SNR = 1)
Event Dead Zone
Linearity g
Loss Threshold
Loss Resolution
Units
OTDR Modes
Trace File Format c
Attenuation Dead Zone
Pulse Widths
Range Settings
Reflectance Resolution
Reflectance Accuracy h
Real Time Refresh Rate d
Trace File Storage Medium
Trace File Storage Capacity
Trace File Transfer to PC b
Sampling Points
Minimum Data Point Spacing e
Distance Uncertainty/Accuracy f
MULTIMODE
Laser
SINGLE-MODE
Laser
Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11; IEC 60825-1:2007-03 Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11; IEC 60825-1:2007-03
850/1300 nm 1310/1550 nm
±20/±30 nm
26 dB
±20/±30 nm
30 dB
1.5 m
9 m
10, 30, 100, 300 ns, 1 µs, 3 µs m
250 m to 32 km
Up to 16,000
0.25 m
Group Index of Refraction (GIR) 1.4000 to 1.6000
±(1 + 0.005 % x distance + data point spacing)
±0.05 dB/dB
0.02 dB
0.01 dB
0.01 dB
±2 dB
1 Hz j
1.5 m
9 m
10, 30, 100, 300 ns, 1, 3, 10 µs
250 m to 208 km
Up to 16,000
0.25 m
1.4000 to 1.6000
±(1 + 0.005 % x distance + data point spacing)
±0.05 dB/dB
0.02 dB
0.01 dB
0.01 dB
±2 dB
1 Hz k m, km, ft, kft, mi
Full Auto, Expert, Real-Time
Bellcore GR-196 Version 1.1
Internal and USB
>1000 internal, 1000s on USB
USB
Notes:
a. All specifications valid at 23°C ±2°C (73.4°F ±3.6°F) unless otherwise specified.
b. Longest Range and Pulse Width, 3 minutes Averaging Time, Filter on.
c. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 dB down each side of a reflective spike caused by a -40 dB (multimode) or -45 dB (single-mode) event using 10 ns pulse width. d. Typical distance from event location to point where trace is within 0.5 dB of backscatter.
e. Range <8 km.
f. Does not include GIR uncertainty.
g. Typical.
h. For a non-saturated event.
j. 16 km Range, Filter off.
k. 32 km Range, Filter off.
m. 3 µs @ 1300 nm
© 2012-2013, AFL, all rights reserved. M210-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2013-05-17
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR
Specifications a
OPM (STANDARD)
Calibrated Wavelengths
Detector Type
Display Range b
Accuracy @ -10 dBm
Resolution
Measurement Units
Wavelength ID c
Set Reference
Data Storage
Tone Detection d
VFL (STANDARD)
Emitter Type
Safety Class
Wavelength
Output Power (nominal)
GENERAL
Display Type
Size (in boot)
Weight
Power
850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625, 1650 nm (displays up to 3 simultaneously)
InGaAs 2mm
+6 to -70 dBm
±0.25 dB
0.01 dB dB, dBm, mW
Yes
Yes
Yes
270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz
Laser
Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11; IEC 825-1:1993, 60825-1:2007-03
635 nm ±20 nm
0.8 mW
Battery Life e
Recharge Time f
Auto Shut Off
Connectivity
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
DFS1 DIGITAL FIBERSCOPE SUPPORT
Field of View
Optical Resolution
Detection Capability
3.5-inch transflective color, high contrast, high reflectivity (20%) for optimum indoor/outdoor viewing , QVGA with touchscreen
23 x 11 x 7 cm (8.8 x 4.3 x 2.8 in)
<1.4 kg (3 lb)
Removable Li-ion or AC/DC power adapter (input 100-240 V, ~1.5 A 47-63 Hz) output 18 V DC/3.6 A (can test while charging, can operate on AC with battery removed)
16 hours
4 hours
0-60 minutes
USB host/full speed 1.1
-10°C to +50°C
-20°C to +60°C
0 to 95 % RH (non-condensing)
400 x 300 µm
4 µm
2 µm
Notes:
a. All specifications valid at 23°C ±2°C (73.4°F ±3.6°F) unless otherwise specified.
b. Measurement Range:
+3 to -65 dBm for 1300 to 1625 nm, and +3 to -60 dBm for 850 nm c. Wavelength ID Range:
+3 to -50 dBm for 1300 to 1625 nm, and +3 to -40 dBm for 850 nm d. Tone Detect Range:
+3 to -50 dBm 1300 to 1625 nm, and +3 to -40 dBm for 850 nm e. Typical with new battery, per GR-196-Core Issue 2.
f. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating.
58
© 2012-2013, AFL, all rights reserved. M210-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2013-05-17
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR
M210 Models and Included Adapters
WAVELENGTHS (nm)
850 1300 1310 1550
DYNAMIC
RANGE (dB)
OTDR PORT
ADAPTERS
OPM PORT
ADAPTERS
30/30
26/26
SC, FC
SC, ST
SC, 2.5 mm Universal
SC, 2.5 mm Universal
26/26/30/30 SC, FC, ST SC, 2.5 mm Universal
AFL BASE
MODEL NO.
M210-20
M210-22
M210-25
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
M210 QUAD Certification Kit (Tier 1 and 2): M210 QUAD, OLS4, DFS1* in hard case
M210 QUAD Test and Inspection Kit (Tier 2): M210 QUAD, DFS1* in hard case
AFL NO.
M210-25K-01-HC2
M210-25K-01-HC1
* When ordering, specify DFS1 model. The DFS1 FiberScope kit is available as either PC/UPC inspection kit
(DFS1-00-04XU model) or APC inspection kit (DFS1-004XA model).
M210 OTDR, SM (1310/1550), OPM, VFL in hard case
M210 OTDR, MM (850/1300) OPM, VFL in hard case
M210 OTDR, QUAD (850/1300/1310/1550), OPM, VFL in hard case
M210 OTDR, SM (1310/1550) OPM, VFL in soft case
M210 OTDR, MM (850/1300) OPM, VFL in soft case
M210 OTDR, QUAD (850/1300/1310/1550), OPM, VFL in soft case
M210-20U-01-HC
M210-22U-01-HC
M210-25U-01-HC
M210-20U-01
M210-22U-01
M210-25U-01
All M210 OTDRs include a USB flash drive, an AC adapter, UCI switchable adapters for OTDR and OPM ports, trace analysis and documentation software and a quick reference guide.
When ordering, select options as follows:
Optical Configuration (NN), (U) for UPC connection and Language (LL). Add (HC) only if ordering the hard case option.
Example: M210-25U-01-HC -> This model number indicates M210 QUAD with the English/European language pack in the optional hard case.
M210
NN
Optical Configuration (NN)
20 = 1310/1550 nm SM
22 = 850/1300 nm MM
25 = 850/1300 nm MM and 1310/1550 nm SM
OTDR port ferrule (U = UPC)
U LLL
HC
Hard Case option (HC)
(Select (HC) only if ordering hard case option)
Quick Reference Guide Language (LLL)*
ENG = English
CHS = Chinese, Simplified
CHT = Chinese, Traditional
DEU = German
FRA = French
ITA = Italian
POL = Polish
*Specify Language for OTDR Quick Reference Guide
POR = Portuguese
SPA = Spanish
TUR = Turkish
Calibration Plans
M210 OTDR AND/OR KIT
MODEL
M210-25K-01-HC1
M210-25K-01-HC2
M210-20U-01-HC
M210-22U-01-HC
M210-25U-01-HC
M210-20U-01
M210-22U-01
M210-25U-01
2 YR CAL PLAN
AFL NO.
CAL2-00-M210-25K-HC1
CAL2-00-M210-25K-HC2
CAL2-00-M210-20
CAL2-00-M210-22
CAL2-00-M210-25
CAL2-00-M210-20
CAL2-00-M210-22
CAL2-00-M210-25
2 YR CAL PLUS PLAN
AFL NO.
CAL2-01-M210-25K-HC1
CAL2-01-M210-25K-HC2
CAL2-01-M210-20
CAL2-01-M210-22
CAL2-01-M210-25
CAL2-01-M210-20
CAL2-01-M210-22
CAL2-01-M210-25
Prepaid Cal plans offer two annual calibrations at a discounted price, a convenient calibration expiration email service, express calibration services and access to our product knowledge base.
Cal Plus plans offer the same services as the Cal plans with the addition of a two year extended warranty (three years total coverage).
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2012-2013, AFL, all rights reserved. M210-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2013-05-17
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
OFL280-10x FlexTester OTDR
Hand-held Multifunction OTDR and Loss Test Set
Features
• Patented in- or out-of-service OTDR testing from a single port
• Icon-based LinkMap
™
display with pass/fail for easy network analysis
• ServiceSafe
®
live PON detection and OTDR test without service disruption
• Wave ID reduces insertion loss test time and eliminates setup errors
• 34/32 dB dynamic range at 1310/1550 nm
• Best-in-class 0.8/3.5 m event/attenuation dead zones
• Rugged, hand-held, lightweight (<1 kg)
• High-contrast, backlit display: Easily viewed, even in direct sunlight
• Industry-leading battery life: >12 hours continuous operation
• Instant On: Ready to test in <5 seconds
Applications
• Cost-effective point-to-point and FTTH PON testing
• Troubleshoot in-service FTTH networks, including live PON power measurements plus
PON OTDR testing at 1625 nm.
• Complete multi-wavelength insertion loss tests faster and eliminate setup errors using
Wave ID source and power meter.
• Generate fiber-identifying tones and stable CW signals using integrated optical source.
• Trace fibers or locate faults using the Visual Fault Locator (VFL).
The AFL OFL280-10x FlexTester family offers an unmatched combination of optical fiber test functions, ease-of-use, portability, and value. All OFL280 FlexTester models include an integrated single-mode 1310/1550 nm OTDR with PON-optimized and standard test modes, optical power meter, 1310/1550 nm laser source, and visual fault locator.
With new LinkMap, pass/fail analysis, macro-bend and splitter detection, launch quality check, plus AFL’s unique ServiceSafe and
Wave ID features, OFL280 FlexTesters enable even novice users to troubleshoot like pros.
The OFL280 FlexTester family offers four models to best suit your application needs:
• OFL280-103: Verify both in-service and out-of-service FTTx networks from a single port. Includes 1310/1550/1625 nm live PON OTDR with integrated PON Power Meter.
• OFL280-102: Most complete out-of-service FTTx PON testing at all PON wavelengths (1310/1490/1550 nm).
• OFL280-100: Cost-effective 1310/1550 nm OTDR for out-of-service installation testing or troubleshooting both FTTx PON and pointto-point fiber optic networks.
Over 1000 OTDR test results (Telcordia SR-4731 .SOR file format) may be saved in the OFL280’s internal memory. Stored OTDR and
OPM results may be transferred to PC via wireless Bluetooth
®
or USB cable. Windows
®
compatible TRM 2.0
®
Test Results Manager software is included for OTDR and OPM results viewing, analysis, and professional report generation.
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OFL2-28-2000 Revision 1U, 2014-12-17
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
60
OFL280-10x FlexTester OTDR
New LinkMap
™
Simplifies Network Troubleshooting
Using the OFL280’s new LinkMap capability, even novice users can troubleshoot optical networks like a pro! LinkMap interprets the tested network and presents an icon-based view of network elements clearly identifying fiber start, end, connectors, splices, splitters, and macro-bends. Loss and reflectance of network elements is compared to usersettable pass/fail thresholds and displayed with clear pass/fail indications. Users can instantly toggle between LinkMap and Trace view at the press of a button.
With launch quality check, integrated macro-bend and splitter event detection, OFL280
OTDRs offer even greater ease-of-use. OFL280s also provide a Link Summary showing end-to-end link length, loss, loss/distance and ORL.
ServiceSafe
®
Testing on Live PONs
In FTTx PONs, troubleshooting a faulty fiber connection from one out-of-service subscriber’s location using a 1310/1550 nm OTDR could disrupt service to active subscribers. AFL’s ServiceSafe feature alerts the OTDR user to the presence of live traffic and prevents the initiation of service-disrupting 1310/1550 nm OTDR tests. The
OFL280-103 additionally measures downstream power levels at 1490 and/or 1550 nm, and allows the user to initiate an OTDR test using the non-disruptive 1625 nm OTDR wavelength. To eliminate unnecessary connector wear, 1625 nm live PON OTDR testing and PON power measurements are performed through the same optical port used for
1310/1550 OTDR testing (US patent 8,411,259).
Fast, error-free Loss Tests using Wave ID
OFL280s integrate an Optical Laser Source (OLS) and Optical Power Meter (OPM) supporting AFL’s unique Wave ID capability. With Wave ID, the OPM automatically synchronizes to a single or multi-wavelength Wave ID optical signal sent by another
OFL280, FLX380, or AFL hand-held OLS. The OPM automatically measures power and loss at each wavelength, saving significant test time and eliminating setup errors.
The integrated OLS and OPM also generate and detect fiber-identifying tones to enable positive fiber identification before disconnecting fibers during maintenance.
Create Professional Test Reports using TRM
®
2.0
Stored OTDR and/or OPM results may be uploaded to a PC via USB or Bluetooth
®
.
Uploaded results may be viewed and analyzed using TRM 2.0 Test Results Manager software included with each OFL280 FlexTester. The TRM report generation wizard enables users to easily generate professional, custom acceptance test reports conforming to industry guidelines.
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OFL2-28-2000 Revision 1U, 2014-12-17
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
61
OFL280-10x FlexTester OTDR
OFL280 Features and Applications by Model
FEATURES
Compatible with all AFL optical power meters and laser sources, including tone and Wave ID features
Compatible with AFL optical fiber identifiers (OFI)
Integrated high-power optical power meter
Integrated visual fault locator (red laser)
1310 nm – OTDR, PON OTDR, laser source (CW, wave ID, tone)
1550 nm – OTDR, PON OTDR, laser source (CW, wave ID, tone)
1490 nm – OTDR, PON OTDR, laser source (CW, wave ID, tone)
1625 nm – FTTx live fiber OTDR with filtered detector for in-service PON testing
1490/1550 nm – FTTx PON Power Meter (Detects and measures downstream PON power levels)
-100
OFL280 MODELS
-102 -103
FIBER TESTING APPLICATIONS
Point-to-point cable construction and troubleshooting.
Verify end-to-end length, loss, and ORL. Verify splice and connector loss and reflectance. Locate sources of excess loss and/or reflections, including macro-bends.
FTTx PON construction.
Test to or through splitters. Verify end-to-end length, loss and ORL. Verify splitter, splice and connector loss and reflectance. Locate sources of excess loss and/or reflections, including macro-bends.
FTTx customer fiber troubleshooting - dark fibers (hard faults).
Locate cable cuts, open splices, and bad connections.
FTTx in-service (Live PON) troubleshooting.
Automatically detect live PONs. Prevent service-disrupting 1310/1550 nm OTDR tests on live PONs. Locate macrobends, poor splices or high-loss connections without disrupting service to active PON subscribers.
FTTx service turn-up (commissioning).
Verify PON power levels at the ONT (subscriber) location. Locate faults in the distribution or drop cables, or between splitters in PONs built using distributed splitter architecture, all without disrupting service to active PON subscribers.
-100
OFL280 MODELS
-102 -103 a
Note:
a. Adds ability to perform OTDR and loss tests at 1490 nm. However, testing at 1310 and 1550 nm is recommended and generally is all that is needed to test or fault-locate inactive (dark) FTTx PONs during construction.
OFL280-100 and -102 models OFL280-103 model
Visual Fault Locator
Visual Fault Locator
Optical Power Meter
Dark Fiber OTDR
Laser Source
Optical Power Meter
Dark Fiber OTDR
Laser Source
Live Fiber OTDR
PON Power Meter
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OFL2-28-2000 Revision 1U, 2014-12-17
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
62
OFL280-10x FlexTester OTDR
OFL280 FlexTester Kit Configurations
OFL280 FlexTesters are available in the following kit configurations:
• OFL280 FlexTester Soft Carry Case Kits
• OFL280 FlexTester PRO/PRO2 Kits
• OFL280 FlexTester Complete/Complete2 Kits
All FlexTester kits include a rechargeable, replaceable Li-Ion battery pack, AC charger with country-specific power cord, tool-free interchangeable connector adapters with dust caps, TRM
®
2.0 Test Results Manager software, USB cable, and a quick reference guide.
OFL280 FlexTester PRO Test kit
FlexTester PRO2 & Complete2 include FOCIS Flex Inspection
OFL280 FlexTester PRO/PRO2 Test and Inspection Kit
FlexTester PRO & PRO2 Kits combine a user-selected OFL280 with either the FOCIS PRO or FOCIS Flex Fiber Optic Connector Inspection System, UPC or APC connector inspection adapter tips, cleaning supplies, and a rugged, waterproof hard carry case with room for additional fiber rings and cleaning supplies. FOCIS PRO and FOCIS Flex enable inspection of ferrule ends of patch cord connectors and end-faces of connectors mounted inside bulkhead adapters. PRO/PRO2 Kits include LinkMap
™
plus TRM 2.0 Advanced.
PRO Kits include FOCIS PRO comprising the DFS1 Digital FiberScope and hand-held
DFD1 Touchscreen Tablet. FOCIS PRO includes image capture, save, AFL’s unique imagepairing capability, plus IEC and user-adjustable pass/fail analysis. With FOCIS PRO’s dedicated Touchscreen Tablet, the OFL280 is available for OTDR and optical loss testing.
PRO2 Kits include a 150 m fiber ring plus FOCIS Flex, a hand-held and auto-focusing inspection probe with integrated display, rechargeable battery, internal storage and pass/fail analysis. Its Bluetooth communications enable FOCIS Flex to instantly transfer captured images and pass/fail results to a paired FlexTester for display and/or storage.
OFL280 FlexTester Soft Case Kit
OFL280 Complete/Complete2 Installation & Maintenance Kit
Select a FlexTester Complete or Complete2 Kit to add an Optical Fiber Identifier for an even more complete network installation and maintenance test solution. FlexTester
CMP/CMP2 Kits include LinkMap with Pass/Fail plus TRM 2.0 Advanced.
Complete Kits combine an OFI-200D Optical Fiber Identifier with a user-selected
OFL280, 150 m single-mode fiber ring (launch cable), FOCIS PRO with UPC or APC adapter tips, two One-Click Cleaners, standard FlexTester accessories, hard carry case.
Complete2 Kits combine a user-selected OFL280 and choice of Optical Fiber Identifier with 150 m fiber ring, FOCIS Flex, UPC or APC adapter tips, cleaning supplies, standard
FlexTester accessories, and rugged, waterproof, hard carry case.
OFL280 FlexTester Soft Carry Case Kit
OFL280 FlexTester Soft Carry Case kits include the user-selected OFL280, standard accessories plus a One-Click Cleaner, packaged in a convenient soft carry case.
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OFL2-28-2000 Revision 1U, 2014-12-17
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
63
OFL280-10x FlexTester OTDR
Specifications a
OTDR
Emitter Type
Safety Class
Fiber Type
Available Wavelengths
Wavelength Tolerance
Dynamic Range (SNR=1)
Laser
Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
IEC 60825-1: 2007-03
Single-mode
1310/1490/1550/1625 nm
±20/±20/±20/±10 nm
34/32/32/30 dB
Event Dead Zone
b
Attenuation Dead Zone
Pulse Widths
Range Settings
c
0.8 m
3.5 m
5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns, 1, 3, 10 µs
250 m to 240 km
Data Points
Data Point Spacing
Up to 30,000
5.0 cm (range <1.5 km),
Range/30,000 (range >1.5 km)
Group Index of Refraction (GIR) 1.4000 to 1.7000
Distance Uncertainty (m)
Linearity
Trace File Format
Trace File Storage Medium
Data Transfer to PC
PON OTDR Modes
Standard OTDR Modes
LASER SOURCE
±(1 + 0.005 % x distance + data point spacing)
±0.05 dB/dB
.SOR per Telcordia SR-4731 Issue 2
4GB internal memory (>1000 traces)
USB cable
Test to splitter or through splitter
Full Auto, Expert, Real Time
Emitter Type
Fiber Type
Available Wavelengths
Wavelength Tolerance
Spectral Width (FWHM)
Internal Modulation
Wavelength ID (one, two, or three wavelengths)
Output Power Stability
Output Power
Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
IEC 60825-1: 2007-03
Single-mode
1310, 1490, 1550 nm
±20 nm
5 nm (maximum)
270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, CW
Compatible with AFL Optical Power Meters and
Light Sources
0.25 dB
-1 dBm (1310, 1550 nm) ±1.5 dB;
+3 dBm (1490 nm ) ±1.5 dB
PON POWER METER FOR SINGLE-MODE ONLY
Calibrated Wavelengths
Detector Type
Isolation
Measurement Range
Accuracy
d
Resolution
Measurement Units
OPTICAL POWER METER
1490, 1550 nm
Filtered InGaAs
> 40 dB
+23 to – 50 dBm
±0.5 dB
0.01 dB dBm or Watts (nW, µW, mW)
Calibrated Wavelengths
Detector Type
Measurement Range
Tone Detect Range
Wavelength ID Range
Accuracy
e
Resolution
Measurement Units
VISUAL FAULT LOCATOR
1310, 1490, 1550, 1625, 1650 nm
InGaAs
+23 to -50 dBm
+3 to -35 dBm
+3 to -35 dBm
±0.25 dB
0.01 dB dB, dBm or Watts (nW, µW, mW)
Emitter Type
Safety Class
Wavelength
Output Power (nominal)
Modes
GENERAL
Size (in boot)
Weight
Operational Temperature
Storage Temperature
Power
Battery Life
Display
Visible red laser
Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
IEC 60825-1: 2007-03
650 ±20 nm
0.8 mW into single-mode fiber
CW, 2 Hz flashing
20.1 x 13.0 x 5.3. cm (7.9 x 5.1 x 2.1 in)
0.8 kg (1.8 lb)
-10 °C to +50 °C, 0 to 95 % RH (non-condensing)
-20 °C to +60 °C, 0 to 95 % RH (non-condensing)
Rechargeable Li-Ion or AC adapter
12 hours, backlight ON, continuous operation
LCD, 320 x 240, 3.5 inch (89 mm), color, high-contrast transflective with backlight and AR coating
Notes:
a. All specifications valid at 25 °C unless otherwise specified.
b. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 dB down each side of a reflective spike caused by a -45 dB event using 5 ns pulse width. c. Typical distance from the location of a -45 dB reflective event to the point where the trace falls and stays within 0.5 dB of backscatter, using a 5 ns pulse width. d. At calibration wavelengths and power levels of approximately -5 dBm for 1550 nm and -10 dBm for 1490 nm.
e. At 1310/1550 nm wavelengths with CW power level of approximately -10 dBm.
64
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OFL2-28-2000 Revision 1U, 2014-12-17
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
OFL280-10x FlexTester OTDR
Ordering Information
ORDER ENTRY FORMAT INCLUDING OPTIONS
OFL280-1xx[C]-[LNG]-[AC]
OFL280-1xx[C]-LM-[LNG]-[AC]
OFL280-1XX-LM-[LNG]
OFL280-1xx[C]-PRO-[LNG]-[AC]
OFL280-1xx[C]-PRO2-[LNG]-[AC]-[TIP]-[FR]
OFL280-1xx[C]-CMP-[LNG]-[AC]-[FR]
OFL280-1xx[C]-CMP2-[LNG]-[AC]-[TIP]-[FR]-[OFI]
KIT CONFIGURATION
OFL280-1xx Basic Kit
OFL280-1xx Basic Kit with LinkMap
™
Upgrade with Pass/Fail plus TRM
®
2.0 Advanced
LinkMap Upgrade with Pass/Fail plus TRM 2.0 Advanced (for previously shipped OFL280)
OFL280-1xx PRO Kit (with FOCIS PRO and cleaning supplies)
OFL280-1xx PRO2 Kit (with FOCIS Flex, fiber ring, cleaning supplies)
OFL280-1xx Complete Kit (with FOCIS PRO, OFI-200D, fiber ring, cleaning supplies)
OFL280-1xx Complete2 Kit (with FOCIS Flex, OFI choice, fiber ring, cleaning supplies)
Select OFL280 Options:
[C]
U
A
OTDR/Source Connector Type
UPC
APC
[LNG] Language Option
ENG
English
CHS
Simplified Chinese
CHT
DEU
FRA
ITA
Traditional Chinese
German
French
Italian
[LNG] Language Option
JPN
KOR
POL
Japanese
Korean
Polish
POR
SPA
Portuguese
Spanish
TUR Turkish
Select OFL280 PRO, PRO2, CMP, CMP2 Kit Options:
[FR]
Blank
SC/SC
SC/FC
150 m SMF Fiber Ring
N/A in PRO & CMP kits
FR1-SM-150-SC-SC
FR1-SM-150-SC-FC
SC/LC
SC/ST
FR1-SM-150-SC-LC
FR1-SM-150-SC-ST
SC/ASC
FR1-SM-150-SC-ASC
SC/AFC
FR1-SM-150-SC-AFC
SC/ALC
FR1-SM-150-SC-ALC
LC/LC
FR1-SM-150-LC-LC
LC/ASC
FR1-SM-150-LC-ASC
LC/ALC
FR1-SM-150-LC-ALC
[FR] 150 m SMF Fiber Ring
ASC/FC
FR1-SM-150-ASC-FC
ASC/ST
FR1-SM-150-ASC-ST
ASC/ASC FR1-SM-150-ASC-ASC
ASC/AFC FR1-SM-150-ASC-AFC
ASC/ALC FR1-SM-150-ASC-ALC
ALC/ALC FR1-SM-150-ALC-ALC
FC/FC
FR1-SM-150-FC-FC
FC/ST
FC/LC
FR1-SM-150-SC-ST
FR1-SM-150-FC-LC
FC/AFC
FR1-SM-150-FC-AFC
AFC/AFC FR1-SM-150-AFC-AFC
IT
IL
DK
JP
CH
[AC]
US
EU
UK
CN
Destination
Country
FlexTester
AC Plugs
FOCIS PRO FOCIS Flex
USA 3-wire, 115V, Type K US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, US
European Union 3-wire, 250V, Type B US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, EU
United Kingdom 3-wire, 250V, Type D US, EU, UK, SAA 3-pin, UK
China, Australia 3-wire, 250V, Type C US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, SAA
IN
Denmark
Japan
Switzerland
Italy
Israel
India
3-wire, 250V, Type E US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, EU
3-wire, 125V, Type M US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, US
3-wire, 250V, Type L US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, EU
3-wire, 250V, Type I US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, EU
3-wire, 250V, Type H US, EU, UK, SAA Select (US,
EU, UK, SAA)
3-wire, 250V, Type G US, EU, UK, SAA Select (US,
EU, UK, SAA)
[TIP] FOCIS Flex Tips & Cleaning (PRO2 and CMP2 kits only)
Blank
Option not available in standard soft case, PRO and CMP kits
SC
FC
LC
SC-UPC bulkhead tip, 2.5 mm UPC ferrule tip, 2.5 mm cleaning
FC-UPC bulkhead tip, 2.5 mm UPC ferrule tip, 2.5 mm cleaning
LC-UPC bulkhead tip, 1.25 mm UPC ferrule tip, 1.25 mm cleaning
ASC
AFC
ALC
SC-APC bulkhead tip, 2.5 mm APC ferrule tip, 2.5 mm cleaning
FC-APC bulkhead tip, 2.5 mm APC ferrule tip, 2.5 mm cleaning
LC-APC bulkhead tip, 1.25 mm APC ferrule tip, 1.25 mm cleaning
[OFI] Optical Fiber Identifier Option Description (CMP2 kit only)
Blank Option only available in CMP2 kit
200D
OFI-200D - Jacketed & buffered fiber; 2 kHz only
400
OFI-400 - Jacketed & buffered fiber; power & tone display
400C
OFI-400C - Jacketed fiber only OFI-400
400HP OFI-400HP - High-power OFI-400
FTTx
OFI-FTTx - Active ONT Detector (FTTx PON systems)
NO
YES F
IBER SYSTEM
S
I S O
9 0 0 1
CERTIFIED
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OFL2-28-2000 Revision 1U, 2014-12-17
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
65
M710 Multifunction OTDR
Test, Troubleshoot and Report Single-mode and Multimode Fiber Networks
M710 Compact QUAD OTDR
Features
• TruEvent
™
advanced event analysis
• Inspection capable with DFS1 Digital FiberScope
• Live fiber detection prevents damage to network equipment
• Up to 13 hours battery life
• Dynamic range up to 44 dB for long range testing
• Automatic Pass/Fail analysis
• Large 6.5 inch full color touchscreen display
• Integrated Optical Power Meter (OPM) and
Visual Fault Locator (VFL)
• Front Panel and First Connector Check features ensures accurate measurements
Applications
• Test and certify campus & central office networks and
Distributed Antenna Systems (DAS) fiber infrastructure
• Tier 1 and Tier 2 testing and certification of SM and MM networks
• Document and create standards compliant acceptance reports with TRM
®
2.0, companion PC software
• Inspection of fiber end-faces using DFS1 Digital FiberScope
• Real-Time OTDR - fault location and splice verification
M710 OTDR with DFS1 Digital FiberScope
The M710 OTDR from AFL combines ease of use (Touch and Test
™
) and high performance in a rugged, large display package. With singlemode dynamic ranges up to 44 dB and a MM/SM QUAD option, the M710 OTDR is ideal for testing and troubleshooting
LAN/WAN, metro and long haul networks. Industry leading dead zones enhance the user’s ability to locate and measure events.
The M710 models utilize AFL’s industry leading TruEvent technology to provide a new level of accuracy and reliability in event analysis.
Touch and Test simplifies the M710 user experience, minimizes human errors and reduces training time by providing one-touch access to all OTDR test modes, OPM testing, Results Management and Job Creation menus. The M710 allows setting Pass/Fail thresholds to industry standard TIA/ISO values or user defined criteria and will automatically alert users of failing fibers. Touch and Test enables any technician to complete jobs more accurately and in less time, making it the ideal field test tool.
*M710 series languages supported: English, Chinese, French, German, Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish. Please specify language when ordering.
© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. M710-00-2000 Revision 1A, 2015-01-23
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
66
M710 Multifunction OTDR
Specifications a
OTDR MODEL
Emitter Type
Safety Class
Center Wavelengths
Wavelength Tolerance
Dynamic Range (SNR = 1)
b
Event Dead Zone
Attenuation Dead Zone
Pulse Widths
Range Settings
Sampling Points
Minimum Data Point Spacing
Group Index of Refraction (GIR)
Distance Uncertainty (m)
Linearity
g
Loss Threshold
Loss Resolution
Reflectance Accuracy
Trace File Format
h
Trace File Storage Media
f
M710-40
1310/1550 nm
±25/25 nm
44/42 dB
0.8 m
4 m e
d
±0.03 dB/dB
SINGLE-MODE OTDR OPTIONS
M710-20
Laser
Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, IEC 60825-1: 2007-03
1310/1550 nm
±25/25 nm
41/39 dB
0.8 m
4 m
e d
M710-21
1310/1550/1625 nm
±25/25/10 nm
41/39/39 dB
0.8 m
4 m
e d
QUAD OTDR OPTION
M710-24
850/1300/1310/1550 nm
±25/25/25/25 nm
25/24/40/38 dB
0.8 m
d
4 m
e c
5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns;
1, 3, 10, 20 µs
MM 5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns;
1 µs
SM 5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns;
1, 3, 10, 20 µs
250 m to 256 km
MM 250 m to 64 km
SM 250 m to 256 km
Max. 64,000 points
0.125 m
1.4000 to 1.6000
±(1 + 0.0005 % x distance + data point spacing)
±0.05 dB/dB ±0.05 dB/dB
0.05 dB
0.01 dB
±2 dB
SR-4731 (GR-196-CORE Appendix A & B and SR-4731)
Internal flash memory
USB flash drive (2 USB host ports)
Downloadable from OTDR directly to PC
Internal 1000 fibers
USB
Full Auto, Real Time, Expert
SC/ST/FC/LC
±0.05 dB/dB
Trace File Storage Capacity
Data Transfer to PC
OTDR Modes
Tool Free Adapters
Notes:
a. All specifications valid at 23°C ±2°C (73.4°F ±3.6°F) unless otherwise specified.
b. Longest Range and Pulse Width, 3 minutes Averaging Time, Filter on, Typical.
c. 62.5 µm fiber for multimode test.
d. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 dB down each side of an unsaturated event with reflection <-45 dB for SM and <-40 dB for MM using a 5 ns pulse width.
e. Typical distance from event location to point where trace is within 0.5 dB of backscatter caused by an unsaturated event with reflection <-45 dB for SM and <-40 dB for MM using a 5 ns pulse width.
f. Does not include GIR uncertainty.
g. Typical.
h. For a non-saturated event.
© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. M710-00-2000 Revision 1A, 2015-01-23
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
67
M710 Multifunction OTDR
Specifications a
POWER METER
Calibrated Wavelengths
Detector Type
Measurement Range (dBm)
Accuracy
b
Measurement Units
Wavelength ID
c
Set Reference
Data Storage
Tone Detection
M710-40
SINGLE-MODE OTDR OPTIONS
M710-20 M710-21
850, 980, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm (displays up to 3 simultaneously)
Filtered InGaAs detector
+26 to -50 dBm
±0.25
dB, dBm, mW
Yes
Yes
Yes
270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz
QUAD OTDR OPTIONS
M710-24
850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm
(displays up to 3 simultaneously)
InGaAs 2 mm
+3 to -70 dBm
VISUAL FAULT LOCATOR
Emitter Type
Safety Class
Wavelength
Output Power (nominal)
ALL M710 OTDR MODELS
Laser
Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, IEC 60825-1: 2007-03
635 ±20 nm
0.8 mW
GENERAL
Display
Anti-Reflective (AR) Coating
Size
Weight
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Power
Battery Life
d, f
Recharge Time
e, f
ALL M710 OTDR MODELS
16.51 cm (6.5 in), color, transflective (indoor/outdoor) touch screen display
Yes
190.5 x 269.2 x 69.8 mm (7.5 x 10.6 x 2.75 in)
2.36 kg ( 5.22 lb)
-10°C to+50°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing)
-20°C to+60°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing)
Rechargeable Li-Ion or AC power adapter
13 hours continuous OTDR testing
4 hours
Notes:
a. All specifications valid at 25°C unless otherwise specified.
b. Accuracy measured at -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards.
c. Automatic wavelength identification and switching when used with AFL’s Wave ID Series Light Sources.
d. Typical, per GR-196-CORE issue 2, depending on display brightness.
e. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating.
f. External battery charger available.
68
© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. M710-00-2000 Revision 1A, 2015-01-23
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
M710 Multifunction OTDR
Ordering Information
The M710 OTDRs work with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope (the DFS1 includes a software update for the OTDR). The M710 models come with an integrated Visual Fault Locator (VFL, 650 nm), Optical Power Meter (OPM), and a large transflective touch screen display. Each model includes an OTDR, USB Flash drive, PC software for OTDR trace analysis and OPM loss reporting, AC adapter
a
, switchable test port adapters, and cleaning accessories in a soft carry case. When placing an order, select options as follows: Optical Configuration (NN), OTDR port ferrule (F), and Language (LL). Example: The model number M710-21U indicates M710 SM with UPC OTDR port ferrule, and English language option. Language option will be selected during ordering process.
M710
NN F LL
Optical Configuration (NN)
24 = QUAD LR (long range):
850/1300 nm MM and 1310/1550 nm SM
21 = 1310/1550/1625 nm SM
20 = 1310/1550 nm SM
40 = 1310/1550 nm SM
OTDR Port Ferrule (F)
U = UPC
A = APC
b
Language (LL) c
01 = English, French, German,
Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish
08 = English, Traditional and Simplified Chinese
Accessories
Custom kits may be created by ordering an M710 OTDR model, a pre-configured accessories kit (M700 - H1) and accessories from the table below. The hard carry case has room for up to 6 Fiber Rings, test leads/jumpers, the DFS1 Digital FiberScope kit, OLS2-Dual or OLS4 optical light source, and cleaning accessories (items must be ordered separately).
AFL NO.
M700 - H1
DESCRIPTION
Pre-configured Accessories Kit
Includes hard case with One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC (2.5 mm), One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (1.25 mm), and CleanConnect 500
Hard carry case,M7x0/C SERIES,W/FOAM
DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC Inspection Kit
DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC Inspection Kit
DFS1 USB Digital Fiber Inspection Kit without Adapters
OLS2-Dual laser light source with Wave ID, 1310/1550 nm
OLS4 integrated LED and laser light source with Wave ID, 850/1300/1310/1550 nm
Fiber Ring, standard, 1 fiber, 50/125 µm multimode, 150 m
Fiber Ring, standard, 1 fiber, Laser Optimized, 50 µm multimode, 150 m
Fiber Ring, standard, 1 fiber, 62.5/125 µm multimode, 150 m
Fiber Ring, standard, 1 fiber, single-mode, 150 m
Zippered Jumper Carry Case
All types of fiber optic cleaning supplies are available. Visit www.AFLglobal.com/Cleaning or call factory for details.
Notes:
a. Specify power cord type (country) when ordering an OTDR. One power cord is included with each AC adapter at no charge.
b. Available on the SM port for -20, -21, -24 models only.
c. When ordering OTDR, indicate language preference for the OTDR Quick Reference Guide.
d. When ordering Fiber Rings, specify connector types (x1, x2).
1400-01-0090PZ
DFS1-00-04XU
DFS1-00-04XA
DFS1-00-04XN
OLS2-Dual
OLS4
FR1-M5-150-x1-x2
d
FR1-L5-150-x1-x2
d
FR1-M6-150-x1-x2
d
FR1-SM-150-x1-x2
d
1400-01-0086PZ
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. M710-00-2000 Revision 1A, 2015-01-23
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
69
TE
ST E
QUIPMEN
T
DFS1 Digital FiberScope
Dirty connector
DFS1 Digital FiberScope with M210 OTDR
Features
• Ergonomic, hand-held design
• Single-handed operation
• 400x magnification
• Fast, easy focus and display capture
• Video output via USB port to M- and C-series or user PC
• Powered from USB; no batteries required
• Extensive assortment of interchangeable fiber connector and bulkhead adapter tips
• Adapter tips easily changed; no tools required
• Use AFL SimpleView PC software with DFS1 to inspect connectors using a laptop PC
Clean connector
DFS1 Digital FiberScope
The DFS1 Digital FiberScope supports magnified video inspection of optical fiber connector end-faces during fiber optic cable and connector installation and maintenance. The ergonomically designed hand-held unit illuminates fiber end-faces and delivers magnified images via USB port to AFL’s M-series OTDRs,
C-series OTDRs and Certification Testers. FiberScope software displays, labels and stores captured images as part of connector installation and/or maintenance records.
A large adjustment knob permits easy focusing using real-time view. Once focused, a conveniently located trigger button signals the attached display device to capture the image for analysis and archiving. The scope’s ergonomic shape and control locations support comfortable, single-handed operation.
The DFS1 is powered through the USB port, eliminating the need for an additional battery or AC power supplies. Electronic video inspection eliminates all danger of eye damage from active (lit) fibers carrying either visible or infrared wavelengths.
An extensive assortment of adapters supports inspection of a wide range of optical jumper cable connector ferrules and bulkhead adapters. Bulkhead adapter tips are available in multiple lengths as well as 60° angle. Connector adapters are available for PC, UPC or APC polished ferrules in 1.25 mm,
2.5 mm and other diameters. The DFS1 is available in three different kits which provide either PC/UPC adapters, APC adapters or no adapters.
AFL SimpleView ™ Fiber Inspection Software is an application, which permits the DFS1 Digital FiberScope to be used with
Windows ® XP or Windows ® 7 computers. AFL SimpleView software displays a live, high-resolution video image of the endface of an optical fiber on the PC’s display. SimpleView software is a free download www.AFLglobal.com.
Applications
• Ideal for telco, broadband and enterprise applications
• Optical connector and bulkhead adapter inspection
• Display and analyze fiber end-face quality on C- and M-series
• Visually inspect fiber end-faces for damage or contamination impairing optical transmission
• Generate installation inspection records, associating captured digital photo with fiber ID
www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780
70
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. DFS1-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2014-10-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
TE
ST E
QUIPMEN
T
DFS1 Digital FiberScope with M700 OTDR
DFS1 Digital FiberScope Kit
DFS1 Digital FiberScope
Specifications a
PARAMETERS
400X
~400 µm x 300 µm
0.5 μm detectable
0°C to 50°C
-20°C to 70°C
Manual adjustment, 2 mm max travel
35 mm diameter x 175 mm length (without tip)
200 g
Blue LED
USB port of M-series OTDRs or C-series OTDRS and Certification Testers
Note:
a. All specifications valid at 23°C ±2°C (73.4°F ±3.6°F) unless otherwise specified.
VALUE
Magnification
Field of View
Resolution
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Focus
Dimensions
Weight
Light Source
Power Supply
Ordering Information
The DFS1 is available in three different kits which provide either PC/UPC adapters, APC adapters, or no adapters. All kits include soft carry case, a storage box to hold up to six adapter tips, FiberScope display software update for M-series OTDRs (M200, M700) or C-series OTDRs and Certification Testers (C840, C850, C860, C880), and a quick reference guide.
DESCRIPTION
DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC Inspection Kit includes:
(1) DFS1-00-04X0MR DFS1 USB Digital FiberScope
(1) DFS1-00-0001MR Universal 1.25 mm male PC adapter tip
(1) DFS1-00-0002MR Universal 2.5 mm male PC adapter tip
(1) DFS1-00-0003MR SC and FC female bulkhead adapter tip
(1) DFS1-00-0004MR LC female bulkhead adapter tip
(1) DFS1-04-0001MZ soft carry case for scope and adapters
(1) 8500-05-0001MZ One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC
(1) 8500-05-0002MZ One-Click Cleaner LC/MU
(1) 1400-01-0093MZ 6-compartment adapter tip storage box
(1) DFS1-001-00 DFS1 software update for M200, M210, M700, C840, C850, C860, C880
DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC Inspection Kit includes:
(1) DFS1-00-04X0MR DFS1 USB Digital FiberScope
(1) DFS1-01-0002MR Universal 2.5 mm male APC adapter tip
(1) DFS1-01-0003MR SC/APC and FC/APC bulkhead adapter tip
(1) DFS1-01-0011MR SC/APC bulkhead adapter tip
(1) DFS1-04-0001MZ soft carry case for scope and adapters
(1) 8500-05-0001MZ One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC
(1) 1400-01-0093MZ 6-compartment adapter tip storage box
(1) DFS1-001-00 DFS1 software update for M200, M210, M700, C840, C850, C860, C880
DFS1 USB Digital Fiber Inspection Kit without Adapters includes:
(1) DFS1-00-004X0MR DFS1 USB Digital FiberScope
(1) Soft carry case for scope and adapters
(1) 6-compartment adapter tip box
(1) DFS1-001-00 DFS1 software update for M200, M210, M700, C840, C850, C860, C880
DFS1 FiberScope display software update for M200, M210, M700, C840, C850, C860,
C880
AFL NO.
DFS1-00-04XU
DFS1-00-04XA
DFS1-00-04XN
DFS1-001-00 www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780
71
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. DFS1-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2014-10-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
TE
ST E
QUIPMEN
T
DFS1-00-0001MR
DFS1-00-0002MR
DFS1-00-0004MR
DFS1-00-0013MR
DFS1 Digital FiberScope
Ordering Information (continued)
DFS1 Accessories
DESCRIPTION
Soft carry case for DFS1 Digital FiberScope and adapters
6-compartment adapter tip storage box
11-compartment adapter tip storage box
One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC
One-Click Cleaner LC/MU
AFL SimpleView PC viewer software
DESCRIPTION
PC FERRULE CONNECTOR ADAPTER TIPS
Universal 1.25 mm tip for PC ferrule connector
Universal 2.5 mm tip for PC ferrule connector
Universal 2.0 mm tip for PC ferrule connector
Slim 1.6 mm tip for PC ferrule (termini)
Slim 1.25 mm probe tip for LuxCis and termini
Slim 2.5 mm PC ferrule tip for ELIO and termini
Tip for ELIO 1.25 mm ferrule connector
SC/PC AND FC/PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS
Tip for SC/PC and FC/PC bulkhead adapter
Short extended tip for SC/PC and FC/PC bulkhead adapter
Medium extended tip for SC/PC and FC/PC bulkhead adapter
Long extended tip for SC/PC and FC/PC bulkhead adapter
60° angled tip for SC/PC and FC/PC bulkhead adapter
60º angled tip for SC/PC bulkhead adapter
ST/PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS
Tip for ST/PC bulkhead adapter
Short extended tip for ST/PC bulkhead adapter
Medium extended tip for ST/PC bulkhead adapter
Long extended tip for ST/PC bulkhead adapter
60° angled tip for ST/PC bulkhead adapter
LC/PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS
Tip for LC/PC bulkhead adapter
Short extended tip for LC/PC bulkhead adapter
Medium extended tip for LC/PC bulkhead adapter
Long extended tip for LC/PC bulkhead adapter
60° angled tip for LC/PC bulkhead adapter
AFL NO.
DFS1-04-0001MZ
1400-01-0093MZ
1400-01-0094MZ
8500-05-0001MZ
8500-05-0002MZ
Free download from www.AFLglobal.com
DFS1 Adapter Tips
The following table identifies commonly required adapter tips. Other adapter tips available. Please consult the factory for additional adapter tips and prices.
AFL NO.
DFS1-00-0001MR
DFS1-00-0002MR
DFS1-00-0005MR
DFS1-00-0006MR
DFS1-00-0038MR
DFS1-00-0039MR
DFS1-00-0008MR
DFS1-00-0003MR
DFS1-00-0010MR
DFS1-00-0011MR
DFS1-00-0012MR
DFS1-00-0013MR
DFS1-00-0040MR
DFS1-00-0014MR
DFS1-00-0015MR
DFS1-00-0016MR
DFS1-00-0017MR
DFS1-00-0018MR
DFS1-00-0004MR
DFS1-00-0019MR
DFS1-00-0020MR
DFS1-00-0021MR
DFS1-00-0022MR
www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780
72
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. DFS1-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2014-10-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
TE
ST E
QUIPMEN
T
DFS1 Digital FiberScope
Ordering Information (continued)
DESCRIPTION
E2000/PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS
Short extended tip for E2000/PC bulkhead adapter
Medium extended tip for E2000/PC bulkhead adapter
Long extended tip for E2000/PC bulkhead adapter
MU/PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS
Tip for MU/PC bulkhead adapter
Short extended tip for MU/PC bulkhead adapter
Medium extended tip for MU/PC bulkhead adapter
Long extended tip for MU/PC bulkhead adapter
60° angled tip for MU/PC bulkhead adapter
MTP/PC MULTI-FIBER ADAPTER TIPS (FERRULE & BULKHEAD)
MTP/PC bulkhead adapter extended tip; includes base plus MTP/PC front end tip.
Test ferrules using adapter tip with bulkhead adapter.
Front end tip for MTP/PC ferrule and bulkhead adapter
MTP/PC and MTP/APC bulkhead adapter extended tip kit; includes base plus MTP/PC and MTP/APC front end tips. Test ferrules using adapter tip with bulkhead adapter.
Multi-row MTP/PC bulkhead adapter extended tip; Includes base plus MTP/PC front end tip. Test multi-row MTP/PC ferrules using this adapter tip with multi-row bulkhead adapter
MISCELLANEOUS PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS
Tip for LEMO 2.0 mm bulkhead adapter
Tip for LX.5/PC bulkhead adapter
Tip for 2.0 mm termini bulkhead adapter
Tip for 1.6 mm termini bulkhead adapter
Tip for ELIO 1.25 mm bulkhead adapter
APC TIPS
Universal 1.25 mm tip for APC ferrule connector
Universal 2.5 mm tip for APC ferrule connector
Tip for SC/APC and FC/APC bulkhead adapter
Tip for SC/APC bulkhead adapter
Tip for LC/APC bulkhead adapter
Short extended tip for SC/APC bulkhead adapter
60° angled tip for SC/APC bulkhead adapter
Tip for E2000/APC bulkhead adapter
Tip for LX.5/APC bulkhead adapter
MTP/APC bulkhead adapter extended tip kit; includes base plus MTP/APC front end tip.
Test ferrules using adapter tip with bulkhead adapter.
Front end tip for MTP/APC ferrule and bulkhead adapter
AFL NO.
DFS1-00-0023MR
DFS1-00-0024MR
DFS1-00-0025MR
DFS1-00-0026MR
DFS1-00-0027MR
DFS1-00-0028MR
DFS1-00-0029MR
DFS1-00-0030MR
DFS1-00-0037MR
DFS1-00-0041MR
DFS1-00-0042MR
DFS1-00-0050MR
DFS1-00-0031MR
DFS1-00-0032MR
DFS1-00-0033MR
DFS1-00-0034MR
DFS1-00-0036MR
DFS1-01-0001MR
DFS1-01-0002MR
DFS1-01-0003MR
DFS1-01-0011MR
DFS1-01-0004MR
DFS1-01-0005MR
DFS1-01-0006MR
DFS1-01-0008MR
DFS1-01-0009MR
DFS1-01-0010MR
DFS1-01-0012MR
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780
73
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. DFS1-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2014-10-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Network Simulators
NSR-Series Rack-mountable Network Simulators
NS-Series NS Bench Top Network Simulators
Features
• User-specified fiber type
• User-specified fiber types and lengths
• User-specified events such as mechanical or fusion splices
• OTDR trace provided for documentation
• Variety of connector styles available
• NSR models are Rack-mountable
• The NS models are rugged, field-portable
• The NSR models can accommodates up to 100 km of fiber
(NSR Models)
• N.I.S.T. Traceable
Applications
• Laboratory testing
• Classroom training
• Field troubleshooting
• OTDR calibration
NS and NSR Series Fiber Optic
Network Simulators
Fiber Optic Network Simulators from AFL are custom built “fiber boxes” intended to duplicate installed fiber optic facilities.
Training schools, laboratory testing or field troubleshooting are just few of the many applications for units. Network simulators may be ordered with customer-specified lengths of multimode or single-mode fiber. Events such as connections, fusion splices and mechanical splices can be added at various points within the fiber to duplicate installed networks. A full range of connector types are available including SC, ST, FC and LC. Angled or nonangled connectors can be specified. Each network simulator includes full documentation for insertion loss, attenuation/km and event location/value.
The NS models network simulators are housed in rugged field-portable, bench top cases. The NS models accommodates up to 15 km of optical fiber.
The NSR models network simulators are custom built rackmountable fiber boxes. The NSR models are housed in either
18 or 23-inch rack-mountable box. These network simulators can accommodate multiple lengths.
Ordering Information
Contact AFL at (800) 321-5298 or (603) 528-6278 for a quote for your custom Network Simulator.
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. NSR1-00-2000 Revision 1E, 2014-10-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
74
OTDR Fiber Rings
FR1-M6-150-SC-ST
FR1-SM-1000-SC-ST
OTDR Fiber Rings
Measuring an insertion loss of the near-end and/or far-end connection of a fiber optic link with an OTDR requires a launch and/or receive test cable. A launch cable, which connects the OTDR to the link under test, reveals the insertion loss and reflectance of the near-end connection. A receive cable, which connects to the far-end of the link, reveals the insertion loss and reflectance of the far-end connection. Launch and receive test cables can range from 150 m to 1 km (or longer) in length. Because very long test cables are impractical to transport and use, AFL offers coiled lengths of 50 µm multimode, 62.5 µm multimode, or single-mode fiber packaged in compact rings.
Fiber Rings of 150 m of fiber are ideal for premises fiber network test applications.
Fiber Rings of 500 m and 1 km of single-mode fiber are designed for broadband, long haul fiber network test applications.
Fiber Ring Models
CONFIGURATION FIBER TYPE FIBER LENGTH AFL NO.
Standard, one fiber Multimode, 50 µm, OM2 150 m (492 ft) FR1-M5-150- x1- x2
Standard, one fiber, Laser Optimized Multimode, 50 µm, OM3 150 m (492 ft) FR1-OM3-150-x1-x2
Standard, one fiber, Laser Optimized Multimode, 50 µm, OM4 150 m (492 ft) FR1-OM4-150-x1-x2
Standard, one fiber Multimode, 62.5 µm 150 m (492 ft) FR1-M6-150- x1- x2
Standard, one fiber Single-mode 150 m (492 ft) FR1-SM-150-y1-y2
Standard, one fiber
Standard, one fiber
Single-mode
Single-mode
Standard, one fiber, Bend Insensitive Single-mode, G.657.
A2 BIF
Standard, one fiber, Bend Insensitive Single-mode, G.657.
A2 BIF
Standard, one fiber, Bend Insensitive Single-mode, G.657.
A2 BIF
500 m (1640 ft)
150 m (492 ft)
FR1-SM-500-y1-y2
1000 m (3280 ft) FR1-SM-1000-y1-y2
FR1-BIF-150-y1-y2
500 m (1640 ft) FR1-BIF-500-y1-y2
1000 m (3280 ft) FR1-BIF-1000-y1-y2 x1, x2 — connectors for multimode cables, specify type [ST, SC, ASC (angled SC), FC, AFC (angled FC), LC] y1, y2 — connectors for single-mode cables, specify type [ST, SC, ASC (angled SC), FC, AFC (angled FC), LC]
Other connector types, fiber types, and fiber lengths will be quoted upon request.
FR1-SM-150-SC-SC
75
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. FR00-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2014-10-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
OTDR Fiber Rings
How to Generate a Baseline Trace Using Fiber Rings
• Use the Fiber Ring as a launch cable.
Connect the Fiber Ring between your OTDR and the fiber link under test. This will allow you to measure the loss of the near-end connection.
• Use the Fiber Ring as a receive cable.
Connect the Fiber Ring to the far-end connector of your fiber link under test. This will allow you to measure the loss of the far-end connection.
• By using Fiber Rings as both launch and receive cables, as shown in the diagram below, you can measure total insertion loss of the fiber link under test.
Fiber ring - launch cable
Fiber ring connector
2
1
OTDR port
OTDR
3
6
Fiber link under test
4
Fusion splice
Near-end connection
5
Far-end connection
7
Fiber ring - receive cable
8
End of receive cable
Example OTDR Test Configuration with Launch and Receive Cables
OTDR port
Near-end connection
1
2
Fiber ring - launch cable
Fusion splice
3
4
8
6
5
7
End of receive cable
Fiber link under test
Far-end connection
Fiber ring - receive cable
OTDR Trace Made using Launch and Receive Cables
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. FR00-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2014-10-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
76
OPM1 Optical Power Meter
This portable optical power meter may be used to measure optical power in premises, telco, or broadband fiber optic networks. When used with an LED or laser light source, the
OPM1 can also measure the attenuation (insertion loss) of multimode or single-mode cables.
With only two controls–ON/OFF and wavelength–the OPM1 is our simplest to use optical power meter. Power is displayed in dBm only - making the OPM1 an ideal meter for fiber optic training courses.
Optical power in dBm and the calibration wavelength setting are displayed on an easy-to-read LCD display. The optical input port accepts AFL thread-on style connector adapter caps. Adapter caps are required and must be ordered separately.
The OPM1 is fully N.I.S.T. traceable and runs on a standard 9-volt alkaline battery.
Features
• 850, 1300, 1310, 1550 nm
• Premises (Ge) and broadband (InGaAs) models
• Displays optical power (dBm)
• Our simplest to use optical power meter
• N.I.S.T. traceable
Applications
• OPM1-2C for testing multimode and single-mode networks
• OPM1-3C optimized for WAN, CATV, and Telco systems
• Fiber Optic Training courses
77
© 2002-2012, AFL, all rights reserved. OPM1-00-2001 Revision R, 2012-07-06
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
OPM1 Optical Power Meter
Specifications a
OPTICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
OPM1-2C
Calibration Wavelengths 850, 1300, 1310,
Detector Type
1550 nm
Germanium (Ge)
OPM1-3C
850, 1300, 1310, 1550,
1625 nm
InGaAs
+6 to -70 dBm Measurement Range
Accuracy b
+6 to -60 dBm
±0.25 dB
Measurement Units dBm
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Power
Adapter Caps
Typical 60 hours with 9V battery
2.5 mm Universal Included for FC, ST, SC
Connector specific adapters available
Operating Temperature -10 °C to 50 °C
Relative Humidity 0 to 95 % (non-condensing)
Storage Temperature -30 °C to 60 °C
Size (H x W x D)
Weight
14.0 x 8.1 x 3.8 cm (5.5 x 3.2 x 1.5 in)
0.26 kg (0.58 lb)
Note:
a. All specifications valid at 25°C unless otherwise specified.
b. Accuracy measured at 25ºC and -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards.
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
FC adapter
SC adapter
ST
®
adapter
LC adapter
* See www.AFLglobal.com for full list of adapter caps
AFL NO.
8800-00-0200
8800-00-0209
8800-00-0202
8800-00-0225
Ordering Information
INCLUDES
Protective rubber boot, 9V battery, manual, 2.5 mm Universal Adapter cap and carrying case.
AFL NO.
All OPM1 models
Optical power meters and optical light sources can be packaged together as a kit.
Calibration Plans
AFL recommends annual calibrations on AFL Test and Inspection products. Prepaid Cal plans offer two annual calibrations at a discounted price, a convenient calibration expiration email service, express calibration services and access to our product knowledge base. Cal Plus plans offer the same services as the
Cal plans with the addition of a two year extended warranty
(three years total coverage).
MODEL
OPM1-2C
OPM1-3C
2 YR CAL PLAN
AFL NO.
CAL2-00-OPM1-2
CAL2-00-OPM1-3
2 YR CAL PLUS PLAN
AFL NO.
CAL2-01-OPM1-2
CAL2-01-OPM1-3
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2002-2012, AFL, all rights reserved. OPM1-00-2001 Revision R, 2012-07-06
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
78
Power Meters
OPM4-FTTx PON Power Meter
AFL’s OPM4-FTTx measures downstream signals in FTTH and other passive optical networks (PON) that use 1490 nm for data and 1550 nm for video traffic. Equipped with PON specific wavelength filters and a dual photo detector, the OPM4-FTTx can separately and simultaneously measure 1490 and 1550 nm power at the ONT or other points in an FTTx PON. Measurements are clearly visible on the dual-wavelength display – even in direct sunlight.
Visual Fault Locator
(VFL) - 650 nm (red) standard on all OPM4-FTTx units. A majority of fiber failures occur in the first few meters of the fiber – at connection points. The integrated VFL allows technicians to quickly perform short-range fault location and connectivity testing without extra tools.
The power meter and VFL ports accept thread-on style adapter caps and are compatible with angled or non-angled connectors. The OPM4-FTTx offers an automatic power shut-off feature, long battery life from standard AA alkaline batteries, and is fully N.I.S.T. traceable.
Features
• BPON, GPON, and EPON compatible
• Simultaneous power measurement at 1490 and 1550 nm
• Power shown in units of dBm or µW
• Comparison of power levels in dB
• Integrated VFL
• Auto power shut-off feature
• Dual-wavelength, sunlight readable LCD display
• Compatible with APC or UPC connectors
• Standard alkaline AA batteries
• Handheld, rugged, lightweight
• N.I.S.T traceable
Applications
• ONT splitter installation testing
• Designed for rapid ONT troubleshooting
• Supports BPON, EPON, and GPON configurations
• Fault-locating drop cables and F2 fibers from FDH to ONT
79
© 2008-2012, AFL, all rights reserved. OPM4-14-2000 Revision 1E, 2012-07-06
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
OPM4-FTTx PON Power Meter
Specifications a
POWER METER
Calibrated Wavelengths 1490 nm, 1550 nm
Signal Format CW or downstream BPON, GPON, or EPON
Detector Type
Measurement Range
Filtered InGaAs
+10 to -50 dBm @ 1490 nm; +20 to -50 dBm @
1550 nm
Accuracy b
Resolution
Measurement Units
VFL LASER
±0.5 dB (±0.35 dB typical)
0.01 dB dB, dBm, μW
Output Power (typical) 0.8 mW
Wavelength (nominal) 650 nm
Safety Class II, FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 & 1040.11, IEC 60825-
1: 2007-3
GENERAL
Power 2 AA batteries
Battery Life (typical) Power meter - 100 hours; Power meter (backlight on)
- 16 hours;
Power meter and VFL - 6 hours; Power meter (backlight on) and VFL - 5 hours
Operating Temperature -10°C to 50°C, 90 % RH (non-condensing)
Storage Temperature
Size (H x W x D)
Weight
-30°C to 60°C, 90 % RH (non-condensing)
14.0 x 8.1 x 3.8 cm (5.5 x 3.2 x 1.5 in)
0.26 kg (0.58 lb)
Notes:
a. All specifications valid at 25°C unless otherwise specified.
b. At calibration power levels of approximately -5 dBm for 1550 nm and -10 dBm for 1490 nm.
Ordering Information
INCLUDES
OPM4-FTTx PON power meter, 2 AA batteries, protective rubber boot, SC adapter for power meter port, 2.5 mm universal adapter for VFL port, user’s guide, and carry case
AFL NO.
OPM4-FTTx
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
FC adapter
SC adapter
ST® adapter
LC adapter
AFL NO.
8800-00-0200
8800-00-0209
8800-00-0202
8800-00-0225
Calibration Plans
AFL recommends annual calibrations on AFL’s Test and Inspection products. Prepaid Cal plans offer two annual calibrations at a discounted price, a convenient calibration expiration email service, express calibration services and access to our product knowledge base. Cal Plus plans offer the same services as the
Cal plans with the addition of a two year extended warranty
(three years total coverage).
MODEL
OPM4-FTTH
2 YR CAL PLAN
AFL NO.
CAL2-00-OPM4-FTTH
2 YR CAL PLUS PLAN
AFL NO.
CAL2-01-OPM4-FTTH
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2008-2012, AFL, all rights reserved. OPM4-14-2000 Revision 1E, 2012-07-06
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
80
Optical Power Meters
OPM5 Optical Power Meter
OPM4 Optical Power Meter
OPM5 and OPM4 Optical Power Meters
Features
• Rugged, dependable, tools backed with 5-Year Warranty
• Single-mode and multimode applications
• Wave ID supports testing up to three wavelengths simultaneously
• Field swappable connector adapters provide flexibility
• Large display visible in direct sunlight. Backlight for dim conditions
• Stores optical reference at each calibrated wavelength
• Detection of multiple test tones for fiber identification
• Equipped with five-minute auto-off feature
• Long battery life from globally available 2 x AA (Mignon) batteries
• Fully N.I.S.T. traceable.
Applications
• Passive Optical Networks (PON) testing
• Save test data for Report Generation (OPM5)
• OPM(5/4)-4D (Filtered-InGaAs) for high power (+26 dBm) CATV Broadband networks or DWDM system applications
• OPM(5/4)-3D (InGaAs) for Telecommunications networks
• OPM(5/4)-2D (Ge) for Premises LAN/WAN multimode or single-mode networks
• OPM4-1D (Silicon) for multimode / plastic optical fiber applications
With more than 25 years of experience in the optical testing industry and thousands of units in use around the world, AFL is a trusted supplier of optical power meters. Backed by
5-year product warranties, these are the quality products you can trust.
Designed for use in outside plant environments
• Splash resistant controls
• Withstands one-meter drop test
• Controls designed for easy operation with gloves
• Field swappable optical adapters allow access for cleaning optical port and supports multiple connector styles
• Efficient design provides long test time from globally available AA batteries
OPM5 with Data Storage of Test Results
File Management system allows technicians to organize test results into multiple files and transfer stored results via USB to a PC for analyzing, generating reports, and printing.
The supplied powerful PC Analysis and Reporting Tool (TRM
®
2.0) allows users to apply industry-standards-based rules to test results and create comprehensive certification reports. Users can generate network Pass/Fail results demonstrating compliance to industry standards and illustrate headroom.
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OPM0-00-2000 Revision 1B, 2014-10-08
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
81
OPM5 and OPM4 Optical Power Meters
Specifications a
OPTICAL
MODEL OPM5-4D, OPM4-4D
Calibrated Wavelengths 850, 980, 1300, 1310, 1490,
1550, 1625 nm
Detector Type Filtered InGaAs
Measurement Range +26 to -50 dBm
Tone Detect Range +6 to -30 dBm
+6 to -25 dBm for 850 nm
Wavelength ID Range +6 to -30 dBm
+6 to -25 dBm for 850 nm
Accuracy
b
Resolution
Measurement Units
OPM5-3D, OPM4-3D
850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550,
1625 nm
InGaAs
+10 to -75 dBm
+10 to -50 dBm
+10 to -45 dBm for 850 nm
+10 to -50 dBm
+10 to -45 dBm for 850 nm
OPM5-2D, OPM4-2D
850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550 nm 650, 660, 780, 850 nm
Germanium (Ge)
+6 to -60 dBm
+6 to -50 dBm
+6 to -45 dBm for 850 nm
+6 to -50 dBm
+6 to -45 dBm for 850 nm
±0.25 dB
0.01 dB dB, dBm, μW
OPM4-1D
Silicon (Si)
+6 to -70 dBm
+6 to -45 dBm
—
GENERAL
Power
Adapter Caps
Battery Life
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Size (H x W x D)
Weight
2 x AA batteries, accepts standard mini-USB power adapter
Order with one: 1.25 mm Universal, 2.5 mm Universal, FC, SC, ST, LC. Other connector adapters available
300 hours
-10 °C to 50 °C, 90 % RH (non-condensing)
-30 °C to 60 °C, 90 % RH (non-condensing)
14.0 x 8.1 x 3.8 cm (5.5 x 3.2 x 1.5 in)
0.26 kg (0.58 lb)
Notes:
a. All specifications valid at 25°C unless otherwise specified.
b. Accuracy measured at 25 ºC and -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards.
Ordering Information
All OPM models include optical power meter, 2 AA batteries, protective rubber boot, customer specified adapter cap, and carry case.
OPM5 models also include TRM
®
2.0 software (Basic License). Quick Ref Guides (PDF format) are available in Chinese Simplified, Chinese
Traditional, French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Turkish on www.AFLglobal.com/OPMQRG.
When placing an order, select options as follows:
• Model Number (M),
• Detector Type (N),
• Connector Configuration (CC)
Model Number (M)
M = 5, 4
Detector Type (N)
N = 4, 3, 2, 1
OPM
M N CC
Connector (CC)
CC = FC, SC, ST, LC, 2.5 mm,
1.25 mm (ONE ONLY!)
MODEL
OPM5-4D
OPM5-3D
OPM5-2D
OPM4-4D
OPM4-3D
OPM4-2D
OPM4-1D
CALIBRATED WAVELENGTHS (nm)
650 660 780 850 980 1300 1310 1490 1550 1625
DETECTOR TYPE
InGaAs
InGaAs
Germanium
InGaAs
InGaAs
Germanium
Silicon
MEASUREMENT
RANGE (dBm)
+26 to -50
+10 to -75
+6 to -60
+26 to -50
+10 to -75
+6 to -60
+6 to -70
PC SOFTWARE
TRM 2.0
TRM 2.0
TRM 2.0
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OPM0-00-2000 Revision 1B, 2014-10-08
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
82
OPM5 and OPM4 Optical Power Meters
OPM Accessories
DESCRIPTION
ADAPTER CAPS
2.5 mm Universal (accepts FC, SC, and ST ferrules)
1.25 mm Universal (accepts LC and MU ferrules)
FC
SC
ST ®
LC simplex/duplex
E-2000
MU simplex
2.5 mm open Universal. Accepts SC duplex, OptiTap connector for measuring optical power.
SMA
D4
Biconic
DIN 47256
Radiall PFO/VFO
ADAPTERS FOR PLASTIC OPTICAL FIBER (POF)
1000 mm bare fiber (plastic)
HP-HFBR-45XX POF Universal
USB CABLE
USB Cable: PC (USB-A) to OPM (USB-MINI B):
• Connect OPM to PC for data upload to TRM ® 2.0
• External Power for OPM (when used with customer supplied USB-A power source)
OPM5 MODEL OPM4 MODEL
Connect to PC and External power External power only
AFL NO.
8800-00-0214
8800-00-0224
8800-00-0200
8800-00-0209
8800-00-0202
8800-00-0225
8800-00-0221
8800-00-0226
8800-00-0219
8800-00-0203
8800-00-0201
8800-00-0204
8800-00-0211
8800-00-0212
8800-00-0223
8800-00-0271PR
6000-00-0024MR
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OPM0-00-2000 Revision 1B, 2014-10-08
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
83
Attenuators and Network Activation Kits
VOA6-SM Variable Optical Attenuator
The VOA6-SM is a rugged, lightweight variable optical attenuator that is ideal for use in a wide range of single-mode fiber link certification and engineering test applications.
Managers will appreciate its simplicity, which minimizes training requirements and speeds deployment. Field technicians will appreciate the simple thumbwheel attenuation control, which allows precise, one-hand operation. Engineers will appreciate the accuracy and return loss performance of the VOA6-SM.
The VOA6-SM is a two-port passive optical device that, when inserted in an optical link, allows a technician to perform several important certification tasks. For example, when the fixed output level of a laser transmitter is too high for downstream devices, the VOA6-SM can be used to determine the amount of fixed attenuation required to match power levels. Alternately, during activation and certification of a new circuit, the VOA6-SM can be used to vary the amount of link loss and determine the optical headroom of the circuit. The 45 dB optical return loss of the VOA6-SM makes it ideal for use with sensitive DFB laser transmitters and other devices that can be degraded or damaged by reflected power.
The VOA6-SM is calibrated at key FTTx wavelengths including 1310, 1490, 1550 and
1625 nm and can be used in the calibration, engineering and production test lab as well as in the field. Its rugged construction ensures many years of service.
The VOA6-SM operates on an internal Li-Ion battery and includes a 10-minute auto power down and 60-second backlight power off capabilities. An AC adapter and battery charger is standard with every unit.
Features
• 9 µm /125 µm fiber applications
• 2 dB to 60 dB attenuation
• Thumbwheel for one-handed operation
• Maintains attenuation setting with power on/off.
• Calibrated for key FTTx wavelengths
• 45 dB return loss for use with DFB Lasers
Applications
• BER testing
• System tolerance to signal attenuation
• New equipment turn-ups
• Simple to operate lab attenuator
• Validate link budgets and optical margin
• Determine optical pad value
• Characterize optical components, modules, and systems
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. VOA6-00-2000 Revision 1E, 2014-10-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
84
VOA6-SM Variable Optical Attenuator
Specifications a
OPTICAL
Fiber Type
Wavelength Range
Calibrated Wavelengths
Measurement Range
Insertion Loss
Resolution
Linearity
Repeatability
Accuracy
Setting Type
Function
Return Loss b
Max Input
GENERAL
Connector Adapters
9/125 µm single-mode
1260 – 1650 nm
1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm
2 – 60 dB
2 dB (max)
0.05 dB
±0.5 dB
±0.2 dB
±0.8 dB
Continuous over entire range
Bi-directional
45 dB
+20 dBm
Battery
Battery Life c
Auto-Off Feature
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
Dimensions
Weight
FC/PC standard
SC/PC, ST/PC (available – switchable)
Li-Ion rechargable
100 hrs
10 min
-10 °C to 55 °C (14 °F to 131 °F)
-40 °C to 70 °C (-40 °F to 158 °F)
0 % to 90 % (non-condensing)
210 x 115 x 55 mm (8.27 x 4.53 x 2.17 in)
450 g (1.0 lb)
Notes:
a. All specifications valid at 23 °C ±2 °C (73.4 °F ±3.6 °F) unless otherwise specified.
b. Typical.
c. Unit powered off in between level changes. Typical time spent changing level <20 minutes per hour.
Ordering Information
VOA6-SM Variable Optical Attenuator comes with a protective rubber boot, AC adapter, Li-Ion battery, battery charger and a soft carry case.
DESCRIPTION
VOA6-SM Variable Optical Attenuator
AFL NO.
VOA6-SM-FC
Accessories and Connector Adapters
DESCRIPTION
FC Connector (order 2)
SC Connector (order 2)
ST Connector (order 2)
Protective Rubber Boot
Carry Case
One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC
Cletop-SB
Visual Fault Identifier, 650 nm
AFL NO.
2900-FT-LS-FC MR
2900-FT-LS-SC MR
2900-FT-LS-ST MR
1400-10-0220PZ
1400-01-0087PZ
8500-05-0001MZ
8500-10-0016MZ
HiLite
* VOA6-SM Attenuator has two ports. Order connector adapters in pairs
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. VOA6-00-2000 Revision 1E, 2014-10-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
85
C850 Compact QUAD OTDR with QUAD OLS and OPM
C850 Compact QUAD OTDR with QUAD OLS and OPM
C850 Compact QUAD OTDR
Features
• OTDR dynamic range: 22 dB (MM), 26 dB (SM)
• Inspection capable with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope
• Integrated OPM, OLS, and VFL (650 nm)
• Full Auto, Expert, Real-Time OTDR test modes
• Touch and Test
™
user interface
• Automatic Pass/Fail analysis (TIA/ISO/EN)
• Internal (1000s tests) and USB storage
• Wave ID detect if used with Wave ID series light sources
• >8 hours battery life or AC power
• TRM
®
2.0 reporting software
• Available in seven languages
C850 OTDR with DFS1 Digital FiberScope
Applications
• Tier 1 and Tier 2 testing of premise networks
• Bi-directionally measure loss and length of fiber links
• Perform Pass/Fail Event and Link measurements
• Certify fibers using Pass/Fail criteria of industry standards, applications and user-defined limits
• Create professional certification reports
The C850 Certification OTDR from AFL combines ease of use (Touch and Test
™
) and multiple functionality in a hand-held test set designed for testing and inspecting multimode and single-mode fibers. The C850 integrates an OTDR with Optical Light Sources (OLS), an Optical Power Meter (OPM), Visible Fault Locator (VFL) and inspection capability for testing and troubleshooting enterprise networks.
OTDR Auto modes, OPM Wave ID, and Pass/Fail thresholds simplify the user experience, reduce training time and testing errors enabling even novice users to get the job done quickly and accurately.
The C850 OTDR combines ease-of-use and functionality for performing OTDR and loss testing of optical fibers in enterprise networks
(campus and buildings). OTDR and OPM test results for the same fibers are stored in logical job folders by cables allowing for easy review, selection, maintenance, and report generation using supplied Windows
®
compatible software.
The C850 OTDR can be used in pairs or with a C840 to perform Tier 1 dual-wavelength, two fiber bi-directional tests. Loss and length can be measured and compared to ISO/TIA/EN or User standards or applications to provide Pass/Fail feedback regarding the fibers ability to meet the acceptance criteria to be certified.
The C850 supports visual inspection per IEC 61300-3-35 using the DFS1 Digital FiberScope allowing users the ability to view and document connector end-face images with their OTDR traces and loss results.
Thousands of OTDR test results may be saved as standard .SOR files, which can be stored internally or on the supplied USB drive. Test results are transferable via a USB cable or USB drive to a computer for viewing, printing, and analyzing with the supplied Windows
® compatible software - TRM
®
2.0 (Test Results Manager). Acceptance reports generated using TRM can include OTDR traces with summary and event information with or without Pass/Fail indication, Event maps, and end-face images.
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C850-00-2000 Revision 1H, 2014-10-08
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
86
C850 Compact QUAD OTDR with QUAD OLS and OPM
Specifications a
OTDR
Emitter Type
Safety Class
Center Wavelengths
Wavelength Tolerance
Dynamic Range (SNR = 1)
Event Dead Zone
b
Attenuation Dead Zone
c
Pulse Widths
n
Range Settings
Sampling Points
Minimum Data Point Spacing
Group Index of Refraction
(GIR)
Distance Uncertainty (m)
d
Linearity
e
Loss Threshold
Loss Resolution
Reflectance Accuracy
f
VISUAL FAULT LOCATOR
Emitter Type
Safety Class
MULTIMODE
Laser
Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
IEC 60825-1: 2007-03
850/1300 nm
±20/30 nm
22 dB
1310/1550 nm
±20/30 nm
26 dB
1.5 m
9 m
±(1 + 0.005 % x distance + data point spacing)
±0.05 dB/dB
0.05 dB
0.01 dB
±2 dB
SINGLE-MODE
10, 30, 100, 300 ns; 1, 3, 10 µs
250 m to 64 km 250 m to 208 km
Up to 16,000
0.25 m
1.4000 to 1.6000
Wavelength
Output Power (nominal)
LIGHT SOURCE
Available Wavelengths
(nominal)
Emitter Type
Safety Class
Output Power
Stability (after 15-minute warm-up)
Wave ID Transmit
Tone Generation
Laser
Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
IEC 60825-1: 2007-03
650 nm ±20 nm
0.8 mW
MULTIMODE PORT
850/1300 nm
SINGLE-MODE PORT
1310/1550 nm
LED
>-20 dBm, 62.5 µm MM
g
Laser
Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
IEC 60825-1: 2007-03
0 dBm, 9 µm SM
±0.1 dB over 1 hour ±0.07 dB over 1 hour
±0.15 dB over 8 hours
Yes
270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz
Notes:
a. All specifications valid at 25°C unless otherwise specified.
b. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 dB down each side of a reflective spike caused by a -45 dB event using 10 ns pulse width. c. Typical distance from event location to point where trace is within 0.5 dB of backscatter caused by a -45 dB event using 10 ns pulse width.
d. Does not include GIR uncertainty.
e. Typical.
f. For a non-saturated event.
POWER METER
Calibrated Wavelengths
Detector Type
Measurement Range
Accuracy
h
Measurement Units
Wavelength ID
j
Set Reference
Data Storage
Tone Detection
GENERAL
850, 1300 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm
InGaAs 2 mm
+6 to -60 dBm
±0.25
dB, dBm, mW
Yes (to -47 dBm)
Yes
Yes
Yes (to -47 dBm)
Test Modes OTDR (Full Auto, Expert, Real-Time), Auto Test,
OPM, OLS, VFL, DFS
SR-4731 (GR-196-CORE Appendix A, B; SR-4731) Trace File Format
Length Measurement Range 5 km (MM);
200 km (SM)
Data Storage Internal flash memory
USB flash drive (2.0)
Data Storage Capacity
Downloadable from unit directly to PC
Internal >1000 fibers
Data Transfer to PC
Tool Free Adapters
Size
Weight
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Power
Battery Life
k, m
Recharge Time
l, m
Display
USB
Modular cleanable SC/ST/LC
27.4 x 19.3 x 7.1 cm
(10.8 x 7.6 x 2.8 in)
2.3 kg ( 5 lb)
-10°C to +50°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing)
-20°C to +60°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing)
Rechargeable Li-Ion or AC power adapter
>8 hours continuous testing
4 hours
16.51 cm (6.5 in), color, transflective g. Output power will be approximately 3 dB less if a 50 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper is used instead of a 62.5 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper.
h. Accuracy measured at -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards.
j. Automatic wavelength identification and switching when used with Wave ID
Series Light Sources.
k. Typical, depending on display brightness.
l. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating. m. External battery charger available.
n. 3 µs not available at 850 nm. 10 µs not available at 850/1300 nm.
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C850-00-2000 Revision 1H, 2014-10-08
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
87
C850 Compact QUAD OTDR with QUAD OLS and OPM
The C850 OTDR kits and options allow users to buy the test equipment functionality needed today and grow to meet the demands of certification testing.
The C850 combined with an OLS optical light source will allow users to test and generate detailed reports with both OTDR and
Loss results shown for each fiber and in charts by cable.
Users can add a C840 or another C850 to perform Certification testing. Two C850s or a C840 Tester and C850 can be used together to perform Tier 1 dual wavelength MM (850/1300 nm) and SM (1310/1550 nm) auto tests of one or two fibers in one or both directions as well as measure both loss and length of the fibers and compare to industry standards
(TIA/ISO/EN), applications and user-defined threshold values to certify the fibers.
The C850 OTDR and C840 Certification Tester work with the
DFS1 Digital FiberScope.
Ordering Information
When placing an order, select options as follows: Model, Optical Configuration, Language, and Case.
Example: C850 — 100 — LP1 — H2
C850
NNN LLL CC
Model
C850
Optical Configuration (NNN)
100 = QUAD 850/1300 nm MM
and 1310/1550 nm SM
Language (LLL)
LP1 = Language: English, French German,
Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish
Case (CC)
S1 = Soft case
H1 = Hard case and soft case with cleaning accessories
Specify Language when ordering a C850 to indicate language preference of OTDR Quick Reference Guide.
Specify power cord type (country) when ordering a C850. One power cord is included with each AC adapter at no charge.
Additional power cords may be purchased separately.
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C850-00-2000 Revision 1H, 2014-10-08
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
88
C850 Compact QUAD OTDR with QUAD OLS and OPM
Ordering Information (continued)
Each C850 kit includes the C850 QUAD OTDR with integrated OLS, OPM, VFI, USB Flash drive, PC software for OTDR trace analysis and certification or OPM loss reporting, AC adapter, switchable test ports adapters and accessories (see table below). The C850 hard carry case kit has room for up to 6 Fiber Rings, jumpers in a jumper carry case, and the DFS1 Digital FiberScope kit (accessory items must be ordered separately).
ADAPTERS
OTDR/OLS
SC, ST, LC
SC, ST, LC
OPM VFI
AFL NO.
SC, 2.5 mm, 1.25 mm 2.5 mm 1.25 mm C850-100-LP1-S1
SC, 2.5 mm, 1.25 mm 2.5 mm 1.25 mm C850-100-LP1-H1
CARRY CASE AND ACCESSORIES
Soft case
Soft and hard cases
CLEANING PRODUCTS
One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm
One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm
One-Click Cleaner LC, 1.25 mm
CleanConnect 500
C850—100—LP1—H1 Kit Contents
ITEM
C850
DESCRIPTION
QUAD OTDR/Auto Test Certification Tester
Adapters
Miscellaneous
Accessories
OTDR and OLS ports — SC, ST, LC
OPM port — SC, 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal
VFI port — 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal
Mandrel — 62.5 µm, 3 mm jacket and 50 µm, 3 mm jacket
Stylus pen for touch screen
USB thumb drive, 1G; USB to mini-USB cable
Small plastic parts box (2) to store adapter caps and mandrels
AC adapter (1), specify country of use
One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm Cleaning
Accessories
Cases
One-Click Cleaner LC/MU, 1.25 mm
CleanConnect 500
Hard transit case — holds C850, and above accessories
Soft case for C850
Report Software PC software
OTDR, Inspection, and Cleaning Accessories
DESCRIPTION
DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC Inspection Kit
DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC Inspection Kit
DFS1 USB Digital Fiber Inspection Kit without Adapters
Fiber Ring, 50/125 µm multimode, 150 m
Fiber Ring, Laser Optimized, 50 µm multimode, 150 m
AFL NO.
DFS1-00-04XU
DFS1-00-04XA
DFS1-00-04XN
FR1-M5-150-x1-x2
a
FR1-L5-150-x1-x2
a
FR1-M6-150-x1-x2
a
FR1-SM-150-y1-y2
a
Fiber Ring, 62.5/125 mm multimode, 150 m
Fiber Ring, single-mode, 150 m
Wet Cleaning Kit (shown) for SC/FC/ST/LC connectors
Dry Cleaning Kit
One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500+ cleans)
One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (500+ cleans)
One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100+ cleans)
8500-20-0900
8500-20-0901
8500-05-0001MZ
8500-05-0002MZ
8500-05-0005MZ
One-Click Mini-100 LC/MU (100+ cleans) 8500-05-0006MZ
One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 SC, ST, FC (enlarged cleaning) 8500-05-0007MZ
Zippered Jumper Carry Case 1400-01-0086PZ a. When ordering Fiber Rings, specify connector types (x1, x2, y1,y2).
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C850-00-2000 Revision 1H, 2014-10-08
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
89
Certification Products
C860 QUAD OTDR and Certification Test Kit
Features
•
OTDR dynamic range: 22 dB (MM); 26 dB (SM)
•
Inspection capable with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope
•
Integrated OPM, OLS, and VFL (650 nm)
•
OLS sources: LED - 850/1300 nm; Laser - 1310/1550 nm
•
Full Auto, Expert, Real-Time OTDR test modes
•
>8 hours battery life or AC power
•
Touch and Test ™ user interface; TRM ® reporting software
•
Automatic Pass/Fail analysis (TIA/ISO/EN)
•
Internal (1000s tests) and USB storage
•
Wave ID detect if used with Wave ID series light sources
•
Available in Seven languages
Applications
• Tier 1 and Tier 2 testing of premise networks
• Bi-directionally measure loss and length of fiber links
• Perform Pass/Fail Event and Link measurements using OTDR
• Measure loss and length of fiber links
• Certify SM and MM fibers using Pass/Fail criteria of industry standards, applications and user-defined thresholds
• Create professional certification reports
C860 with DFS1 Digital FiberScope
The C860 QUAD Certification and OTDR Test Kit from AFL includes one hand-held C840 QUAD OLTS Tester and one C850 QUAD OTDR/
OLTS with built-in auto test functionality. With this kit, technicians can troubleshoot and perform both Tier 1 and Tier 2 certification tests of MM and SM fiber networks, store results and create professional test reports.
The C850 is both a QUAD Certification Tester and full-featured QUAD OTDR in a compact case with a large transflective touch screen display suitable for both indoor and outdoor operation. The C850 features single-mode and multimode OTDR, Optical Light Sources
(OLS), Visual Fault Locator (VFL, 650 nm), and an Optical Power Meter (OPM). As an OTDR, the C850 supports Full Auto, Expert
(manual) and Real-Time test modes, simultaneous dual and single wavelength testing, and Event and Pass/Fail analysis based on default or user-defined thresholds. The C840 QUAD Certification Tester includes VFL, OPM, and both single-mode (1310/1550 nm) and multimode (850/1300 nm) OLS. The C840 may be used alone as a traditional power meter or light source to measure fiber loss or as a visual fault locator to find fiber breaks.
The C860 kit combines ease of use (Touch and Test
™
) with multiple functionality and supports visual inspection per IEC 61300-3-35 using the DFS1 Digital FiberScope allowing users the ability to view and document connector end-face images with their OTDR traces and loss results. Thousands of test results may be stored internally or on the supplied USB drive. Test results are transferable via a USB cable or USB drive to a computer for viewing, printing, and analyzing with the supplied Windows
®
compatible software - TRM
®
(Test
Results Manager). Acceptance reports generated using TRM can include OTDR traces with summary and event information with or without pass/fail indication, Event maps, and end-face images.
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C860-00-2000 Revision 1L, 2014-10-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
90
C860 QUAD OTDR and Certification Test Kit
Specifications a
OTDR
Emitter Type
Safety Class
Center Wavelengths
Wavelength Tolerance
Dynamic Range (SNR = 1)
Event Dead Zone
b
Attenuation Dead Zone
c
Pulse Widths
Range Settings
Sampling Points
Minimum Data Point Spacing
Group Index of Refraction
(GIR)
Distance Uncertainty (m)
d
Linearity
e
Loss Threshold
Loss Resolution
Reflectance Accuracy
f
VISUAL FAULT LOCATOR
Emitter Type
Safety Class
Wavelength
Output Power (nominal)
MULTIMODE
±20/30 nm
22 dB
1.5 m
9 m
0.25 m
±(1 + 0.005 % x distance + data point spacing)
±0.05 dB/dB
0.05 dB
0.01 dB
±2 dB
SINGLE-MODE
Laser
Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
IEC 60825-1: 2007-03
850/1300 nm 1310/1550 nm
±20/30 nm
26 dB
10, 30, 100, 300 ns; 1, 3, 10 µs
250 m to 64 km 250 m to 208 km
Up to 16,000
1.4000 to 1.6000
Laser
Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
IEC 60825-1: 2007-03
650 ±20 nm
0.8 mW
POWER METER
Calibrated Wavelengths
Detector Type
Measurement Range
Accuracy
h
Measurement Units
Wavelength ID
j
Set Reference
Data Storage
Tone Detection
LIGHT SOURCE
Available Wavelengths (nom.)
Emitter Type
Safety Class
Output Power
Stability (after 15 minutes warm up)
Wave ID Transmit
Tone Generation
MM PORT
850/1300 nm
LED
SM PORT
1310/1550 nm
Laser
Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
IEC 60825-1: 2007-03
>-20 dBm, 62.5 µm MM
g
0 dBm, 9 µm SM
±0.1 dB over 1 hour ±0.07 dB over 1 hour
±0.15 dB over 8 hours
Yes
270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 KHz, 2 kHz
Notes:
a. All specifications valid at 25 °C unless otherwise specified.
b. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 dB down each side of a reflective spike caused by a -45 dB event using 10 ns pulse width. c. Typical distance from event location to point where trace is within 0.5 dB of backscatter caused by a -45 dB event using 10 ns pulse width.
d. Does not include GIR uncertainty.
e. Typical.
f. For a non-saturated event.
850, 1300 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm
InGaAs 2 mm
+6 to -60 dBm
±0.25
dB, dBm, mW
Yes (to -47 dBm)
Yes
Yes
Yes (to -47 dBm)
GENERAL
Test Modes
Trace File Format
Length Measurement Range
Data Storage
Data Storage Capacity
Data Transfer to PC
Tool Free Adapters
Size
Weight
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Power
Battery Life
k, m
Recharge Time
l, m
Display
C850 OTDR C840 TESTER
OTDR (Full Auto, Expert,
Real-Time), Auto Test,
OPM, OLS, VFL, DFS
SR-4731 (GR-196-CORE
Appendix A, B; SR-4731)
Auto Test,
OPM, OLS, VFL, DFS
N/A
5 km (MM); 200 km (SM)
Internal flash memory
USB flash drive (2.0)
Downloadable from unit directly to PC
Internal >1000 fibers
USB
Modular cleanable SC/ST/LC
27.4 x 19.3 x 7.1 cm
(10.8 x 7.6 x 2.8 in)
23 x 11 x 7 cm
(8.8 x 4.3 x 2.8 in)
2.3 kg ( 5 lb) 0.9 kg (2 lb)
-10 °C to +50 °C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing)
-20 °C to +60 °C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing)
Rechargeable Li-Ion or AC power adapter
>8 hours continuous testing
4 hours
16.51 cm (6.5 in), color, transreflective
8.9 cm (3.5 in), color, transreflective g. Output power will be approximately 3 dB less if a 50 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper is used instead of a 62.5 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper.
h. Accuracy measured at 25 ºC and -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards.
j. Automatic wavelength identification and switching when used with Wave ID
Series Light Sources.
k. Typical, depending on display brightness.
l. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating. m. External battery charger available.
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C860-00-2000 Revision 1L, 2014-10-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
91
C860 QUAD OTDR and Certification Test Kit
The C840 and C850 can be used together to perform Tier 1 dual wavelength MM (850/1300 nm) and SM (1310/1550 nm) auto loss tests of one or two fibers in one or both directions as well as measure both loss and length of the fibers and compare to industry standards (TIA/ISO/EN), applications and userdefined thresholds values to certify the fibers. Either unit can be identified as the Main or Remote.
The user may test two fibers at two wavelengths bi-directionally and store the results into the main unit. Featuring rich file naming, the Job setup wizard allows the user to define both the cable and fiber end locations, creating easily identifiable trace files, which are managed into Job and Cable folders.
The C850 OTDR and C840 Certification tester work with the
DFS1 Digital FiberScope.
Ordering Information
When placing an order, select options as follows: Model, Optical Configuration, Language, and Case.
Example: C860 — 100 — LP1 — H1
C860
NNN LLL CC
Model
C860
Optical Configuration (NNN)
100 = QUAD 850/1300 nm MM
and 1310/1550 nm SM
Case (CC)
H1 = Hard and soft case with SC-LC cleaning accessories
Language (LLL)
LP1 = Language: English, French, German,
Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish
Specify Language when ordering a C860 Kit to indicate language preference of OTDR Quick Reference Guide.
Specify power cord type (country) when ordering a C860 Kit. One power cord is included with each AC adapter at no charge.
Additional power cords may be purchased separately.
92
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C860-00-2000 Revision 1L, 2014-10-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
C860 QUAD OTDR and Certification Test Kit
Ordering Information (continued)
Each kit includes one compact C850 QUAD OTDR/OLTS, one hand-held C840 QUAD Certification Tester, USB Flash drive, PC software for OTDR trace analysis and certification or OPM loss reporting, (2) AC adapters, switchable test ports adapters, and accessories (see below). The C860 hard carry case kit has room for up to 6 Fiber Rings, jumpers in a jumper carry case, and the DFS1 Digital FiberScope kit (accessory items must be ordered separately).
CARRY CASE
Soft (C850) and hard cases
OTDR/OLS
SC, ST, LC
ADAPTERS
OPM
SC, 2.5, 1.25 mm
C860—100—LP1—H1
ITEM
C850
C840
Adapters
DESCRIPTION
QUAD OTDR/Auto Test Certification Tester
QUAD Auto Test Certification Tester
Miscellaneous
Accessories
OTDR and OLS ports — SC, ST, LC
OPM ports — SC, 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal
VFI ports — 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal
Mandrels (2) 62.5 µm, 3 mm jacket and (2) 50 µm, 3 mm jacket
Stylus pens for touch screen. USB thumb drive, 1G.
USB to mini-USB cable
Small plastic parts box (2) to store adapter caps and mandrels
AC adapter (2), specify country of use
Cleaning
Accessories
Cases
(2) One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm; One-Click Cleaner LC/
MU, 1.25 mm (H2 kit only); CleanConnect 500
Hard transit case — holds C850, C840, and above accessories
Soft case for C850
Report Software PC software and user guide
VFI
2.5, 1.25 mm
CLEANING PRODUCTS
One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5mm
One-Click Cleaner LC, 1.25 mm
CleanConnect 500
AFL NO.
C860-100-LP1-H1
OTDR, Inspection, and Cleaning Accessories
DESCRIPTION
DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC Inspection Kit
AFL NO.
DFS1-00-04XU
DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC Inspection Kit
DFS1 USB Digital Fiber Inspection Kit without Adapters
Wet Cleaning Kit (shown) for SC/FC/ST/LC connectors.
DFS1-00-04XA
DFS1-00-04XN
Fiber Ring, 1 fiber, 50/125 µm multimode, 150 m
FR1-M5-150-x1-x2 a
Fiber Ring, 1 fiber, Laser Optimized, 50 µm multimode, 150 m FR1-L5-150-x1-x2 a
Fiber Ring, 1 fiber, 62.5/125 mm multimode, 150 m
FR1-M6-150-x1-x2 a
Fiber Ring, 1 fiber, single-mode, 150 m
FR1-SM-150-y1-y2
8500-20-0900 a
Dry Cleaning Kit
One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500+ cleans)
One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (500+ cleans)
8500-20-0901
8500-05-0001MZ
8500-05-0002MZ
One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100+ cleans)
One-Click Mini-100 LC/MU (100+ cleans)
8500-05-0005MZ
8500-05-0006MZ
One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 SC, ST, FC (enlarged cleaning) 8500-05-0007MZ
Zippered Jumper Carry Case 1400-01-0086PZ
Notes:
a. When ordering Fiber Rings, specify connector types (x1, x2, y1,y2).
NO
YES F
IBER SYSTEM
S
ISO
CERTIFIED
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C860-00-2000 Revision 1L, 2014-10-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
93
C880 QUAD Certification Test Kit
Features
• Hand-held, 0.9 kg (2 lb)
• Inspection capable with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope
• Integrated OPM, OLS, and VFL (650 nm)
• OLS sources: LED - 850/1300 nm; Laser - 1310/1550 nm
• Dual-wavelength certification Pass/Fail
• Two fibers bi-directional and single fiber testing
• >8 hours battery life or AC power
• Touch and Test
™
user interface
• TRM
®
(Test Results Manager) reporting software
• Internal (1000s tests) and USB storage
• USB host and function ports
• Available in seven languages
C860 with DFS1 Digital FiberScope
Applications
• Tier 1 testing of premise networks
• Bi-directionally measure loss and length of fiber links
• Save time simultaneously testing two fibers at two wavelengths
• Verify polarity
• Certify SM and MM networks to industry standards (ISO/TIA/EN) and applications
• Find faults using integrated Visual Fault Locator
• Create and test to user defined rules
• Review Pass/Fail feedback after each test
• Review fibers by cable and retest fiber pairs if needed
• Create professional certification reports
Combining two C840 Certification Testers, the C880 QUAD Certification Test Kit from AFL is designed for testing and troubleshooting both multimode and single-mode fiber links. Each tester includes an integrated Visual Fault Locator (VFL, 650 nm), both single-mode
(Laser 1310/1550 nm) and multimode (LED 850/1300 nm) Optical Light Sources (OLS), and an Optical Power Meter (OPM). Each tester may be used alone as a traditional power meter, light source, or visual fault locator.
In Auto Test mode, the user may perform certification tests to one of the industry cabling standards (TIA, ISO, EN), one or more application standards, or a user-defined loss/length limit. Certification reports may be generated based on the selected standards and rules using PC reporting software. The transflective touch-screen display of the C840 tester is suitable for both indoor and outdoor operation.
The C840 supports visual inspection per IEC 61300-3-35 using the DFS1 Digital FiberScope allowing users the ability to view and document connector end-face images. Thousands of test results may be stored internally for transfer to a computer via a USB cable or a standard USB drive for viewing, printing, and analyzing with the supplied Windows
®
compatible software - TRM
®
(Test Results
Manager). Acceptance reports generated using TRM can include certification reports and end-face images.
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C880-00-2000 Revision 1J, 2014-10-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
94
C880 QUAD Certification Test Kit
Ordering Information
Each C880 kit or C840 kit includes two (2) C840s or one (1) C840 Tester respectively, USB flash drive, PC software for OTDR trace analysis and certification or OPM loss reporting, AC adapters (two (2) with C880 kit, one (1) with C840 kit), switchable test ports adapters, and accessories (see table below).
CARRY CASE AFL NO.
Soft case
Soft case
Soft case
TEST CORDS
a
ADAPTERS
SC/LC
OLS
SC, ST, LC
SC/ST
—
SC, ST, LC
SC, ST, LC
CLEANING PRODUCTS
OPM VFI
SC, 2.5, 1.25 mm 2.5, 1.25 mm One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm
One-Click Cleaner LC, 1.25 mm
SC, 2.5, 1.25 mm 2.5, 1.25 mm One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm
SC, 2.5, 1.25 mm 2.5, 1.25 mm One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm
C880-100-LP1-S1
C880-100-LP1-S2
C840-100-LP1-S1
The C840 Certification Tester works with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope.
When placing an order, select options as follows: Model, Optical Configuration, Language, and Case.
Example: C880 — 100 — LP1 — S1
C880
NNN
Model
C880
Optical Configuration (NNN)
100 = QUAD 850/1300 nm MM
and 1310/1550 nm SM
C880—100—LP1—S1 (or S2) C880 Kit Contents
ITEM
C840
Adapters
Jumpers (12)
Miscellaneous
Accessories
Cleaning
Accessories
Cases
Report Software
DESCRIPTION
QUAD Auto Test Certification Tester (2 ea)
OLS Ports — SC, ST, LC
OPM port — SC, 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal
VFI port — 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal
2 m (62.5 mm, 50 mm, SM)
Mandrels (2) — 62.5 mm, 3 mm jacket
Mandrels (2) — 50 mm, 3 mm jacket
Stylus pens for touch screen
USB flash drive -1G, USB to mini-USB cable
AC adapters (2), specify country of use
(2) One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm (S1 and S2 kit)
One-Click Cleaner LC/MU, 1.25 mm (S1 kit only)
Soft case (2)
PC software and user guide
Notes:
a. (4) each - 2 m (62.5µm, 50 µm, SM).
LLL CC
Case (CC)
S1 = Soft case for C840 (two units) with SC-LC test and cleaning accessories
S2 = Soft case for C840 (two units) with SC-ST test and cleaning accessories
Language (LLL)
LP1 = Language: English, French, German,
Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish
Inspection and Cleaning Accessories
DESCRIPTION
DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC Inspection Kit
DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC Inspection Kit
DFS1 USB Digital Fiber Inspection Kit without Adapters
Wet Cleaning Kit (shown) for SC/FC/ST/LC connectors
AFL NO.
DFS1-00-04XU
DFS1-00-04XA
DFS1-00-04XN
8500-20-0900
Dry Cleaning Kit
One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500+ cleans)
One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (500+ cleans)
One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100+ cleans)
8500-20-0901
8500-05-0001MZ
8500-05-0002MZ
8500-05-0005MZ
One-Click Mini-100 LC/MU (100+ cleans) 8500-05-0006MZ
One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 SC, ST, FC (enlarged cleaning) 8500-05-0007MZ
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C880-00-2000 Revision 1J, 2014-10-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
95
C880 QUAD Certification Test Kit
Specifications a
POWER METER
Auto Test Wavelengths 850/1300 nm (MM), 1310/1550 nm (SM)
Detector Type InGaAs 2 mm
Measurement Range
Accuracy
b
Measurement Units
+6 to -60 dBm
±0.25
dB, dBm, mW
Yes (to -47 dBm)
Wavelength ID
c
Set Reference
Data Storage
Tone Detection
Yes
Yes
Yes (to -47 dBm)
LIGHT SOURCE
Available Wavelengths
Emitter Type
Safety Class
Output Power
Stability (after 15- minute warm-up)
Wave ID Transmit
Tone Generation
MULTIMODE PORT SINGLE-MODE PORT
850/1300 nm (nominal) 1310/1550 nm (nominal)
LED Laser
Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
IEC EN60825-1: 2007-03
>-20 dBm, 62.5 µm MM
d
0 dBm, 9 µm SM
±0.1 dB over 1 hour ±0.07 dB over 1 hour
±0.15 dB over 8 hours
Yes
270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 KHz, 2 kHz
GENERAL
Test Modes Auto Test, OPM, OLS, VFL, DFS
Length Measurement Range 5 km (MM); 200 km (SM)
Data Storage Internal flash memory
Data Storage Capacity
USB flash drive (2.0)
Downloadable from unit directly to PC
Internal >1000 fibers
Data Transfer to PC
Tool Free Adapters
Size
Weight
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Power
Battery Life
e, g
Recharge Time
f, g
Display
USB
Modular cleanable SC/ST/LC
23 x 11 x 7 cm (8.8 x 4.3 x 2.8 in)
0.9 kg (2 lb)
-10°C to +50°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing)
-20°C to +60°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing)
Rechargeable Li-Ion or AC power adapter
>8 hours continuous testing
4 hours
8.9 cm (3.5 in), color, transreflective
VISUAL FAULT LOCATOR
Emitter Type
Safety Class
Wavelength
Laser
Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,
IEC 60825-1: 2007-03
650 ±20 nm
Output Power (nominal) 0.8 mW
Notes:
a. All specifications valid at 25°C unless otherwise specified.
b. Accuracy measured at -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards.
c. Automatic wavelength identification and switching when used with Wave ID
Series Light Sources.
d. Output power will be approximately 3 dB less if a 50 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper is used instead of a 62.5 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper.
e. Typical, depending on display brightness.
f. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating. g. External battery charger available.
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C880-00-2000 Revision 1J, 2014-10-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
96
CON
NECTORS
Fiber Optic Cable
Connector Specifications
PARAMETER CONNECTOR
SC
Single-mode Assemblies
Image
FC ST LC MTP MT-RJ MU
Ultra Angle Ultra Angle Ultra Angle Ultra Angle Flat
Insertion loss (dB)
Maximum
Typical
0 .2
0 .15
0 .25
0 .2
0 .2
0 .25
0 .25
0 .2
0 .2
0 .15
—
—
Return Loss (dB)
Minimum -55 dB -65 dB -55 dB -65 dB -55 dB —
Temp Range (°C) -40 to +85
Durability Cycles 500
-40 to +85
500
-40 to +85
500
0 .2
0 .15
-55 dB
-40 to +85
500
0 .25
0 .15
-65 dB
—
—
—
-40 to +75
200
Angle
0 .75
0 .35
Ultra
0 .5
0 .25
-40 to +75
200
Angle
—
—
-55 dB -35 dB —
Ultra
0 .25
0 .2
-55 dB
-40 to +85
500
Angle
—
—
—
Multimode Assemblies
Insertion loss (dB)
Maximum
Typical
0 .5
0 .25
—
—
Return Loss (dB)
Minimum -30 dB —
Temp Range (°C) -40 to +85
Durability Cycles 500
Cable Options
Applications
Simplex/Duplex
900 µm
1 .6 mm
2 .0 mm
2 .4 mm
3 .0 mm
Telephony
CATV/Broadband
Telco Backplanes
LAN/WAN
0 .5
0 .25
-40 to +85
500
—
—
-30 dB —
Simplex/Duplex
900 µm
1 .6 mm
2 .0 mm
2 .4 mm
3 .0 mm
Telephony
CATV/Broadband
Telco Backplanes
LAN/WAN
0 .5
0 .25
—
—
-30 dB —
-40 to +85
500
Simplex/Duplex
900 µm
1 .6 mm
2 .0 mm
2 .4 mm
3 .0 mm
Telephony
CATV/Broadband
Telco Backplanes
LAN/WAN
0 .5
0 .25
-30 dB
-40 to +85
500
—
—
—
Simplex/Duplex
900 µm
1 .6 mm
2 .0 mm
Telephony
CATV/Broadband
Telco Backplanes
LAN/WAN
0 .75
0 .35
-30 dB
-40 to +75
200
Bare Ribbon
Jacketed Ribbon
8-12 Fiber Count
Telephony
CATV/Broadband
Telco Backplanes
LAN/WAN
—
—
—
0 .5
0 .25
-20 dB
-40 to +75
200
Dual Link
Zipcord
Telephony
LAN/WAN
—
—
—
Bare Ribbon
Jacketed Ribbon
CATV/Broadband
Telco Backplanes
0 .5
0 .25
-20 dB
-40 to +85
500
900 µm
2 .0 mm
Telephony
—
—
—
CATV/Broadband
Telco Backplanes
LAN/WAN
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
97
© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00047, Revision 2, 5.19.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Cable Assemblies – Indoor
BL
E
PA
TC
H &
TRUNK AS
SEM
BL
Fiber Optic Cable
Simplex Cable Assemblies
Simplex cable assemblies are offered with a variety of combinations . Connectors include
SC, FC, ST, LC and MU . 3 .0 mm, 2 .0 mm, 1 .6 mm, and 900 μm simplex cables in riser and plenum are available .
Features
• 3 .0 mm, 2 .0 mm, 1 .6 mm, and 900 μm cable diameter available
• RoHS compliant – Riser, Plenum, and LSZH rated cables available
• Cable compliant with Telcordia
®
GR-409
• Connectors compliant with Telcordia GR-326
Applications
• Building interconnections (campus LAN)
• Trunking lines direct to telecommunications closet
• Fiber patch panels within communications closets
• Links between electronic equipment and fiber patch panels
Cable Components
Connector End A
Single-mode
ASC = Angle SC
AFC = Angle FC
ALC = Angle LC
USC = Ultra SC
UFC = Ultra FC
UST = Ultra ST
ULC = Ultra LC
UMA = Ultra MU
UMJ = Ultra MU-J
Multimode
PSC = SC MM
PFC = FC MM
PLC = LC MM
PST = ST MM
Ordering Information
ASC ASC RS 001
Connector End B Cable Type Fiber Count
Single-mode
ASC = Angle SC
AFC = Angle FC
ALC = Angle LC
USC = Ultra SC
UFC = Ultra FC
UST = Ultra ST
ULC = Ultra LC
UMA = Ultra MU
UMJ = Ultra MU-J
XXX = No connector
RS = 3 .0 mm Riser
PS = 3 .0 mm Plenum
RM = 1 .6 m Riser
PM = 1 .6 mm Plenum
RT = 2 .0 mm Riser
PT = 2 .0 mm Plenum
JH = 900 µm
001 = 1
Multimode
PSC = SC MM
PFC = FC MM
PLC = LC MM
PST = ST MM
XXX = No connector
Q 0010
Fiber Type Cable Length (meters)
Q = Single-mode
R = Multimode 50/125
2 = Multimode 62 .5/125
L = 10G Laser Link 300
0010 = 10 meters
(specify length)
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00102, Revision 2, 5.19.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
98
Applications
• Service provider networks
• Central office and equipment buildings
• CATV carrier video systems
Features
CONNECTORS
• Ceramic ferrule utilized for precision fiber alignment
• Ribbed boot design on SC insures protected cable bending
• 40 degree LC boot option allows guided cable routing in DMX and DMXtend system applications
• Meets connector interface specifications of EIA .TIA-455 (FOCIS)
• All component materials are compliant to UL94 V-0
• Premium performance at standard grade prices
• Color-coded blue cable jacket identifies enhanced performance
• Tested in accordance with
Telcordia GR-326, issue 3 specifications
CABLE
• Fujikura fiber enables tight bend radius control and low loss
• Long term performance at a bend radius <15 mm
• Simplex, Duplex Dual-link, Quad and
8-fiber cable constructions are RoHS compliant
• Cable constructions meet or exceed
Telcordia GR-409
Bend Insensitive Cable Assemblies
AFL’s single-mode bend insensitive cable assemblies enable tight bend radii and routing to minimize signal loss due to high traffic and/or densely packed patch panel routing installations . Available in simplex, duplex, quad (4 fiber) and octo (8 fiber) cable configurations, either ultra or angled polished interfaces can be requested, thereby meeting low insertion loss and high return loss system requirements .
Various standard connector interface options are available and meet Telcordia
®
GR-326 performance requirements .
Specifications
PARAMETER
Insertion Loss
Return Loss
Cable Bend Radius
Durability
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature max typical max typical minimum
Ordering Information
SIMPLEX CABLE ASSEMBLIES,
2 MM JACKET DIAMETER
DESCRIPTION
USC-USC
ULC-ULC
ASC-ASC
UFC-UFC
AFC-AFC
USC-ULC
USC-ASC
USC-UFC
USC-AFC
ASC-AFC
USC-ULC (40° LC boot)
AFL NO.
C063770B-XXXX
C213707B-XXXX
C202687B-XXXX
C185200B-XXXX
C202691B-XXXX
C213712B-XXXX
C202702B-XXXX
C167091B-XXXX
C202705B-XXXX
C202696B-XXXX
CS001104B-XXXX
XXXX = Length (meters)
Example: 0010 = 10
VALUE
0 .25 dB
0 .15 dB
-65 dB (APC), -55 dB (UPC)
-68 dB (APC), -58 dB (UPC)
< 15 mm
200 cycles
-40°C to +85°C
-40°C to +85°C
DUPLEX DUAL-LINK CABLE ASSEMBLIES,
3.2 MM JACKET DIAMETER
DESCRIPTION
USC-USC
ULC-ULC
USC-ULC
USC-UFC
AFL NO.
C141246B-X
CS000813B-XXXX
CS000812B-XXXX
C124414B-XXXX
QUAD 4-FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES,
4.7 MM JACKET DIAMETER
DESCRIPTION
USC-USC
ULC-ULC
USC-ULC
USC-UFC
AFL NO.
C183518B-XXXX
CS000818B-XXXX
CS000661B-XXXX
C178379B-XXXX
OCTO 8-FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES,
5.2 MM JACKET DIAMETER
DESCRIPTION
USC-USC
ULC-ULC
USC-ULC
AFL NO.
CS000619B-XXXX
CS00815B-XXXX
CS000814B-XXXX
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .
© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00043, Revision 5, 5.19.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
99
Cable Components
Two-Fiber Cable Assemblies
Zipcord, Dual-Link and Ribbon cables are used to meet the requirements for two-fiber cable assemblies, utilizing SC, FC, ST, LC, MU and MT-RJ connectors .
Features
• Flexible, 2-fiber design
• RoHS compliant – Riser, Plenum and
LSZH rated cables available
• Cable compliant with Telcordia ® GR-409
• Connectors compliant with
Telcordia GR-326
Applications
• FDDI, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, ATM and
Fiber Channel protocols
• Communications closet to wall outlet
• Wall outlet to desk
• Interconnect and cross-connect applications
Ordering Information
UST
Connector End A
Single-mode
ASC = Angle SC
AFC = Angle FC
USC = Ultra SC
UFC = Ultra FC
UST = Ultra ST
ULC = Ultra LC
USF = Ultra SC Duplex
UDL = Ultra LC Duplex
SJF = MT-RJ Female
SJM = MT-RJ Male
Multimode
PSC = SC MM
PFC = FC MM
PLC = LC MM
PST = ST MM
PSF = SC Duplex MM
PDL = LC Duplex MM
PJF = MT-RJ Female MM
PJM = MT-RJ Male MM
UST RD 002
Connector End B
Single-mode
ASC = Angle SC
AFC = Angle FC
USC = Ultra SC
UFC = Ultra FC
UST = Ultra ST
ULC = Ultra LC
USF = Ultra SC Duplex
UDL = Ultra LC Duplex
SJF = MT-RJ Female
SJM = MT-RJ Male
XXX = No connector
Multimode
PSC = SC MM
PFC = FC MM
PLC = LC MM
PST = ST MM
PSF = SC Duplex MM
PDL = LC Duplex MM
PJF = MT-RJ Female MM
PJM = MT-RJ Male MM
XXX = No connector
Cable Type
RZ = 3 .0 mm Riser Zipcord
PZ = 3 .0 mm Plenum Zipcord
R20Z = 2 .0 mm Riser Zipcord
P20Z = 2 .0 mm Plenum Zipcord
R16Z = 1 .6 mm Riser Zipcord
P16Z = 1 .6 mm Plenum Zipcord
RD = Riser Dual Link
PD = Plenum Dual Link
Fiber Count
002 = 2
Q 0010
Fiber Type
Q = Single-mode
ITU-T G .652D
X = Single-mode
ITU-T G .657A BIF
2 = Multimode
62 .5/125 µm OM1
R = Multimode
50/125 µm OM2
L = Multimode
50/125 µm OM3/10G
Cable Length (meters)
XXXX (specify length)
0010 = 10 meters
NOTES: 1 . Refer to Connector Specifications page .
*
Single connector options, quantity two per end .
Duplex connectors are assembled with
removable clip .
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00106, Revision 2, 5.19.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
100
BL
E
PA
TC
H &
TRUNK AS
SEM
BL
Fiber Optic Cable
LC Uniboot Cable Assemblies
AFL’s LC Uniboot terminated cable assemblies offer a more compact design when compared to traditional duplex zipcord assemblies . These assemblies contain two LC connectors encased in a common housing with one boot, terminated on a single, round, two-fiber cable . Utilizing AFL’s DUAL-Link 2 .8 mm premise cable, LC Uniboot assemblies condenses the cable management to half the space used by regular zipcord assemblies .
AFL’s LC Uniboot cable assemblies offer the best solution for high-density applications .
Cable Components
Features
• LC duplex connector uses a single housing and single boot
• 2 .8 mm DUAL-Link cable; Riser, Plenum, and LSZH rated cables available
• RoHS compliant
• Connectors compliant with Telcordia ®
GR-326, TIA/EIA-604-10A(FOCIS 10)
• Cable compliant with Telcordia GR-409
Applications
• Private networks
• Data centers
• High density applications
• Interconnect and cross-connect
• Premise installations
Specifications
PARAMETER
Insertion Loss (typical)
Return Loss (typical)
Durability
Operating Temperature
Ferrule
VALUE
0 .15 dB (SM/MM)
-55 dB (SM), -30 dB (MM)
500 cycles
-40°C to +85°C
Zirconia
Ordering Information:
LC Uniboot to LC Uniboot, 2.8 mm Riser DUAL-Link Cable
FIBER TYPE
62 .5/125 µm (OM1)
50/125 µm (OM2)
50/125 µm 10gig 300 (OM3)
50/125 µm 10gig 550 (OM4)
Single-mode
AFL NO.
CS007814-XXXX
CS008116-XXXX
CS007783-XXXX
CS009233-XXXX
CS009234-XXXX
XXXX = Length (meters)
Example: 0010 = 10
Contact AFL Customer Service for information regarding plenum and LSZH rated assemblies .
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
101
© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00082, Revision 1, 5.19.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Quad Cable Assemblies
Quad cable assemblies are available in a wide variety of configurations, to fit exact application needs . These assemblies are offered using four 900um coated fibers in one circular cable, featuring a 4 .8mm outer diameter .
Features
• 4 .8mm cable diameter allows flexibility and easy routing
• RoHS compliant - Riser, Plenum, and LSZH rated cables available
• 900um tight buffered fibers allow direct termination (no furcation needed)
• Cable tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-A/GR-409-CORE
• Connectors compliant with Telcordia GR-326
Cable Components Applications
• Loaded Panels
• Communications cables with both sendand-receive in a single unit
• Routing between communications closets and equipment rooms
• Intrabuilding backbones
Ordering Information
ASC ASC
Connector End A
Single-mode
ASC = Angle SC
AFC = Angle FC
USC = Ultra SC
UFC = Ultra FC
UST = Ultra ST
ULC = Ultra LC
USF = Ultra SC Duplex
UDL = Ultra LC Duplex
SJF = MT-RJ Female
SJM = MT-RJ Male
Connector End B
Single-mode
ASC = Angle SC
AFC = Angle FC
USC = Ultra SC
UFC = Ultra FC
UST = Ultra ST
ULC = Ultra LC
USF = Ultra SC Duplex
UDL = Ultra LC Duplex
SJF = MT-RJ Female
SJM = MT-RJ Male
XXX = No connector
Multimode
PSC = SC MM
PFC = FC MM
PLC = LC MM
PST = ST MM
PSF = SC Duplex MM
PDL = LC Duplex MM
PJF = MT-RJ Female MM
PJM = MT-RJ Male MM
Multimode
PSC = SC MM
PFC = FC MM
PLC = LC MM
PST = ST MM
PSF = SC Duplex MM
PDL = LC Duplex MM
PJF = MT-RJ Female MM
PJM = MT-RJ Male MM
XXX = No connector
RQ
Cable Type
RQ = Quad Riser
PQ = Quad Plenum
004
Fiber Count
004 = 4
Q 0010
Fiber Type
Q = Single-mode
ITU-T G .652D
X = Single-mode
ITU-T G .657A BIF
2 = Multimode
62 .5/125µm OM1
R = Multimode
50/125µm OM2
L = Multimode
50/125µm OM3/10G
Cable Length
(meters)
XXXX (specify length)
0010 = 10 meters
NF
Leg Diameter
NN = Non-furcated, both ends 900µm
FF = Furcated both ends
NF = 900µm end A,
Furcated end B
NOTES: 1 . Refer to Connector Specifications page .
2 . Duplex connectors are assembled with
removable clip .
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00098, Revision 2, 5.19.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
102
Ordering Information
ASC ASC
Connector End A
Single-mode
ASC = Angle SC
AFC = Angle FC
USC = Ultra SC
UFC = Ultra FC
UST = Ultra ST
ULC = Ultra LC
Connector End B
Single-mode
ASC = Angle SC
AFC = Angle FC
USC = Ultra SC
UFC = Ultra FC
UST = Ultra ST
ULC = Ultra LC
XXX = No connector
Multimode
PSC = SC MM
PFC = FC MM
PLC = LC MM
PST = ST MM
Multimode
PSC = SC MM
PFC = FC MM
PLC = LC MM
PST = ST MM
XXX = No connector
RC
Cable Type
RC = Riser (CPC)
PC = Plenum (CPC)
Circular Premise Cable (CPC) Assemblies
High-fiber count Circular Premise Cable (CPC) assemblies provide safe and cost effective installation for many applications . These assemblies help eliminate labor-intensive field termination, yet guarantee reliable performance . Featuring a unified construction for easy fiber identification and rapid installation, these assemblies are built to exceed all
TIA and Telcordia
®
requirements .
Features
• 6-144 fibers with aramid yarn reinforcement for rugged protection
• Highly flexible for ease of routing
• RoHS compliant - Riser, Plenum and
LSZH rated cables available
• Pre-installed pulling eye kits available on certain products
• 1 meter standard breakout (other lengths are custom)
• 900 µm tight buffered fibers allows direct termination; 2 .0 mm furcation available
• Cable tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA
568-A/GR-409-CORE
• Telcordia GR-326 compliant connectors
Applications
• Head-end termination to a fiber "backbone"
• Termination of fiber rack systems
• Multi-floor deployment where select fibers are used at each floor
• Intrabuilding "backbones"
012
Fiber Count
006 = 6
012 = 12
024 = 24
036 = 36
048 = 48
072 = 72
096 = 96
144 = 144
Q 0010 NN
Fiber Type
Q = Single-mode
ITU-T G .652D
X = Single-mode
ITU-T G .657A BIF
2 = Multimode
62 .5/125 µm OM1
R = Multimode
50/125 µm OM2
L = Multimode
50/125 µm OM3/10G
Cable Length (meters)
XXXX (specify length)
0010 = 10 meters
Leg Diameter
N = 900 µm End A / XXX End B
NN = 900 µm End A and B
F = Furcated End A / XXX End B
FF = Furcated Ends A and B
FN = Furcated Ends A / 900 µm End B
NF = 900 µm End A / Furcated Ends B
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .
103
NOTES: 1 . Refer to Connector Specifications page .
2 . Duplex SC and LC available
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00045, Revision 2, 5.19.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Sub-Unitized MicroCore
®
Trunk Cable Assemblies
BL
E
PA
TC
H &
TRUNK AS
SEM
BL
Features
• Sub-unitized design, with (12) 250 µm colored fibers per tube
• 12, 24, and 72 fiber counts (SM or 50
µm LOMMF) with active part numbers
• Small diameter provides superior bend performance
• Standard 2 .0 mm zipcord furcation for single fiber connectors
• One meter standard breakout
• Cable jackets & connector housings color-coded for easy identification
• Sub-unit legs identified for ease of channel routing/traceability
• Cable tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA
568-A/GR-409-CORE
• Telcordia ® GR-326 compliant connectors
Applications
• Data center systems wiring
• MTP-MTP or MTP-Fanouts, and Single
Fiber Connector Terminations
• Head-end termination to a fiber
"backbone"
• Termination of fiber rack systems
• Multi-floor deployment where select fibers are used at each floor
• Intrabuilding "backbones"
Sub-Unitized MicroCore
®
Trunk Cable Assemblies
Sub-unitized MicroCore trunk cable assemblies provide high performance for premise installations where space is a premium . The small diameter, sub-unitized design offers twelve 250 µm colored fibers per tube, with aramid strength members enclosed by a
PVC jacket, enabling high density architecture . The cable allows quick and efficient termination of MTP connectors, as well as, breakout capability to single fiber connectors .
Specifications
PARAMETER
SINGLE-MODE ASSEMBLIES
LC SC MTP
ULTRA ANGLED ULTRA ANGLED ANGLED
Insertion Loss (Typical dB)*** 0 .15
0 .15
Insertion Loss (Maximum dB) 0 .3
0 .3
Return Loss (Typical dB)*** -60 -70
0 .15
0 .3
-60
0 .15
0 .3
-70
0 .35
0 .75
-65
Return Loss (Minimum dB) -55
Temperature Range (°C) -40 to
+85
Durability Cycles 500
-65
-40 to
+85
500
-55
-40 to
+85
-65
-40 to
+85
500 500
-55
-40 to
+75
200
***
Typical values based on equal quality connectors
.
MULTIMODE ASSEMBLIES
LC SC
MTP
(LOW LOSS)
0 .15
0 .5
-35
-30
-40 to
+85
500
0 .15
0 .5
-35
-30
-40 to
+85
500
0 .15
0 .2
-30
-20
-40 to
+75
200
Ordering Information – MTP-MTP Assemblies
(Female MTPs on both ends – no pins)
(Polarity: Key Up/Key Up, Straight Through)
24
72
72
12
12
24
12
24
24
72
72
72
72
12
FIBER COUNT
12
12
24
24
NOTE: XXXX is length in meters
.
FIBER
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3)
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3)
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3)
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3)
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3)
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3)
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4)
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4)
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4)
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4)
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4)
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4)
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
PULLING EYE
No
Yes
No
Yes
Contact AFL Customer Service for additional polarity schemes available .
AFL NO.
CS009980-XXXX
CS009981-XXXX
CS009984-XXXX
CS009985-XXXX
CS009996-XXXX
CS009997-XXXX
CS010649-XXXX
CS010650-XXXX
CS003700-XXXX
CS009912-XXXX
CS003720-XXXX
CS010016-XXXX
CS008420-XXXX
CS010165-XXXX
CS010100-XXXX
CS010066-XXXX
CS010101-XXXX
CS010067-XXXX continued on next page
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .
© 2010, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00105, Revision 5, 5.18.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
104
BL
E
PA
TC
H &
TRUNK AS
SEM
BL
Sub-Unitized MicroCore
®
Trunk Cable Assemblies
72
12
12
24
24
72
FIBER
COUNT
12
12
72
12
12
24
24
24
24
72
72
72
Ordering Information – MTP Fanout Assemblies
(Male MTPs — Duplex Connectors)
FIBER
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
No
Yes
No
Single-mode Yes
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes
PULLING
EYE
No
Yes
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes
AFL NO.
MALE MTP-LC
DUPLEX
CS009521-XXXX
CS0010017-XXXX
CS003796-XXXX
CS010018-XXXX
CS003811-XXXX
CS010019-XXXX
CS011510-XXXX
CS010027-XXXX
CS003795-XXXX
CS010028-XXXX
CS003810-XXXX
CS010029-XXXX
CS009519-XXXX
CS010068-XXXX
CS010069-XXXX
CS010070-XXXX
CS010071-XXXX
CS010072-XXXX
MALE MTP-SC DUPLEX
CS010020-XXXX
CS010021-XXXX
CS010022-XXXX
CS010023-XXXX
CS010024-XXXX
CS010025-XXXX
CS010030-XXXX
CS010031-XXXX
CS010032-XXXX
CS010033-XXXX
CS010034-XXXX
CS010035-XXXX
CS010073-XXXX
CS010074-XXXX
CS010075-XXXX
CS010076-XXXX
CS010077-XXXX
CS010078-XXXX
Ordering Information – LC and SC Trunk Assemblies
(Duplex LC and SC Connectors)
24
24
72
72
12
12
12
24
24
72
FIBER
COUNT FIBER
12 Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode Yes
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No
PULLING
EYE
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
72
12
12
50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes
24
24
72
72
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No
50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes
NOTE: XXXX is length in meters
.
AFL NO.
LC DUPLEX-
LC DUPLEX
LC DUPLEX-
SC DUPLEX
SC DUPLEX-
SC DUPLEX
CS010036-XXXX CS010038-XXXX CS010042-XXXX
CS010037-XXXX CS010039-XXXX CS010043-XXXX
CS004602-XXXX CS007203-XXXX CS007201-XXXX
CS004603-XXXX CS007204-XXXX CS007202-XXXX
CS004618-XXXX CS010040-XXXX CS010044-XXXX
CS004619-XXXX CS010041-XXXX CS010045-XXXX
CS010046-XXXX CS010048-XXXX CS010052-XXXX
CS010047-XXXX CS010049-XXXX CS010053-XXXX
CS004608-XXXX CS007221-XXXX CS007219-XXXX
CS004609-XXXX CS007222-XXXX CS007220-XXXX
CS004624-XXXX CS010050-XXXX CS010054-XXXX
CS004625-XXXX CS010051-XXXX CS010055-XXXX
CS010079-XXXX CS010085-XXXX CS010091-XXXX
CS010080-XXXX CS010086-XXXX CS010092-XXXX
CS010081-XXXX CS010087-XXXX CS010093-XXXX
CS010082-XXXX CS010088-XXXX CS010094-XXXX
CS010083-XXXX CS010089-XXXX CS010095-XXXX
CS010084-XXXX CS010090-XXXX CS010096-XXXX
© 2010, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00105, Revision 5, 5.18.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
105
Applications
• Multi-Dwelling Unit (MDU) drop cables for FTTH systems
• CATV Video systems
• LAN Networks
Features
CONNECTORS:
• Tested in accordance with Telcordia
GR-326, issue 3 specifications
• Meets SC interface specifications of
EIA .TIA-455-3 (FOCIS 3)
• All component materials are compliant to UL94 V-0
• Ceramic ferrule utilized for precision fiber alignment
• Keyed push-pull latching mechanism
• Connector housings are color coded
(Green) for APC identification and
-65 dB return loss
CABLE:
• Cable constructions meet or exceed
Telcordia GR-409
• 3 .0 mm cable diameter available in
Riser and Plenum grade
• Simplex and Duplex zipcord cable construction, RoHS compliant
• Cable manufactured using Corning
SMF-28e single-mode fiber
SC Angled Pigtail Assemblies
AFL single-mode SC Angled Pigtail Assemblies are designed to meet stringient performance requirements of the latest FTTH (Fiber to the Home) applications . Available in either simplex (one fiber) or duplex zipcord (two fiber) construction, the SC angled connector guarantees the high performance return loss required of video signals . Assemblies are tested and qualified to Telcordia
®
GR-326, Issue 3 requirements and meet all
EIA .TIA 455-3 (FOCIS 3) interface standards for SC connectors . The assemblies are provided in easy-to-install disposable packaging reels up to 300 feet, in 50-foot increments .
Specification
PARAMETER
Insertion loss maximum
typical
Return Loss maximum
typical
Durability
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
VALUE
0 .25 dB
0 .15 dB
-65 dB
-68 dB
200 cycles
-40°C to + 85°C
-40°C to + 85°C
Cable Components
Simplex
Duplex Zipcord
Ordering Information
RISER GRADE, SINGLE-ENDED, 3 MM
LENGTH
(FEET)
50
100
150
200
250
300
AFL NO.
SIMPLEX
DUPLEX
ZIPCORD
CS000686-0050 CS000688-0050
CS000686-0100 CS000688-0100
CS000686-0150 CS000688-0150
CS000686-0200 CS000688-0200
CS000686-0250 CS000688-0250
CS000686-0300 CS000688-0300
PLENUM GRADE, SINGLE-ENDED, 3 MM
LENGTH
(FEET)
50
100
150
200
250
300
AFL NO.
SIMPLEX
DUPLEX
ZIPCORD
CS000698-0050 CS000700-0050
CS000698-0100 CS000700-0100
CS000698-0150 CS000700-0150
CS000698-0200 CS000700-0200
CS000698-0250 CS000700-0250
CS000698-0300 CS000700-0300
PLENUM-RISER GRADE, SINGLE-ENDED, 3MM
LENGTH
(FEET)
50
100
150
200
250
300
SIMPLEX
AFL NO.
DUPLEX
ZIPCORD
CS000704-0050 CS000706-0050
CS000704-0100 CS000706-0100
CS000704-0150 CS000706-0150
CS000704-0200 CS000706-0200
CS000704-0250 CS000706-0250
CS000704-0300 CS000706-0300
Duplex Single-Jacket
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .
© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00101, Revision 2, 5.19.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
106
Features
• Field proven, durable, connecting hardware
• High-quality optical terminations meet all geometric and optical performance requirements
• Ordering flexibility; available in standard and custom lengths and connector counts
• Mini-central core type cable ≤12 fibers; stranded cable >12 fibers
• Installed hard-line entry connector with anti-twist design
• Individualized serial numbers for easy identification
• SC/UPC, FC/UPC, SC/APC, FC/APC,
LC/UPC, and MPO
• Rugged polyurethane riser-rated indoor/ outdoor loose tube single-mode uniflex cable; armored polyethylene jacket or heavy duty polyurethane uniflex
• 900 µm or 2 .0 mm / 3 .0 mm upjacketed color-coded furcation, breakout length 1 meter
Ordering Information
ASC XXX
Connector End A
Single-mode
ASC = Angle SC
AFC = Angle FC
USC = Ultra SC
UFC = Ultra FC
UST = Ultra ST
ULC = Ultra LC
MPO = Angle MPO
Connector End B
Single-mode
XXX = No connector
NC
Cable Type
NC = Uni-Flex
AN = Armored PE
HD = Heavy Duty
Uniflex
Node Cable Assemblies
AFL’s Node Cable Assemblies are factory tested to meet stringent installation performance demands . These assemblies make splicing from an optical node to a closure fast, easy and reliable . This connection is critical to the installation and requires an environmental seal between the cable and the node housing . AFL’s assembly comes with node fitting pre-installed on the cable, featuring an anti-twist design enabling easy mounting without twisting the cable . The mounting thread is an industry standard size of 5/8-24 UNEF .
AFL’s Node assembles feature loose-tube outdoor cable with a water-blocked cable design .
An assortment of industry standard connector styles are available such as SC/APC, SC/UPC,
FC/APC, FC/UPC, LC/UPC, and MPO . Standard or custom breakout lengths are available with standard fiber counts of 1 thru 12 terminations (>12 fibers also available), with all fibers color coded for quick/easy fiber identification .
Specifications
PARAMETER
Operating Temperature °F (°C)
Storage Temperature °F (°C)
Crush Resistance lbs (kg)
Impact Resistance
Flexing
Fiber Core Diameter (microns)
Maximum Insertion Loss (dB)
UPC Return Loss (dB)
APC Return Loss (dB)
Outer Jacket Material
Finish
Cable Pullout Tensile Strength lbs (kg)
Entry Threads in .
Dimensions in . (cm)
COLOR FURCATION - FIBER NUMBER REFERENCE
1
2
3
Blue
Orange
Green
4
5
6
Brown
Slate
White 9
7
8
VALUE
-40 to 158 (-40 to 70)
-58 to 158 (-50 to 70)
1000 (453 .5 kg)
25 lbs @ 2 .2 lbs per foot (11 .25 kg @ 0 .99 kg)
25 lbs @ 5 in . (11 .25 kg @ 12 .7 kg)
8 .3
0 .25 (UPC), 0 .35 (APC), 0 .5 (MPO)
-55
-65
Riser-rated PU / PE
Alumnium, Anodized
247 (112 .04)
0 .625 x 24
4 .25 long x 0 .875 diameter (10 .8 x 2 .22)
Red
Black
Yellow
10
11
12
Violet
Rose
Aqua
GROMMET SPECIFICATIONS - STANDARD D
Inner Diameter
Active Pull Test
0 .375"
35 lbs
Overall length
Hex Nut Size
45 mm
7/8"
Length from Hex Nut to end of front body 6 mm
Material Aluminum, Anodized
012 Q
002 = 2
004 = 4
006 = 6
008 = 8
010 = 10
012 = 12
Fiber Count
MPO (only)
008 = 8
012 = 12
(Higher fiber counts available upon request)
Fiber Type
Q = Single-mode
0010
Cable Length (meters)
XXXX (specify length)
0010 = 10 meters
N
Leg Diameter
N = 900 µm End A
F = 2 .0 mm Furcated
End A
M = 3 .0 mm Furcated
End A
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00158, Revision 2, 9.23.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
107
Features
• Field proven, durable connecting hardware
• High quality optical terminations meet all geometric and optical performance requirements
• Ordering flexibility; available in standard and custom lengths and connector counts
• Mini-central core type cable
• Installed hard-line entry connector
• Gel-filled cable
• Individualized serial numbers
• SC/UPC, FC/UPC, SC/APC, FC/APC,
LC/UPC
• Two to twelve fiber counts available
LightLink Fiber Receiver Service
Cable Assemblies (FRSC)
AFL’s LightLink Fiber Receiver Service (Node Service) cable assemblies are factory tested to meet stringent installation performance demands . These assemblies make splicing from an optical node to a closure fast, easy and reliable . This connection is critical to the installation and requires an environmental seal between the cable and the node housing . AFL’s assembly comes with this node fitting pre-installed on the cable, featuring an anti-twist design enabling easy mounting without twisting the cable . The mounting thread is an industry standard size of 5/8-24 UNEF .
AFL’s FRSC assembles feature loose-tube outdoor cable with a water-blocked cable design . An assortment of industry standard connector styles are available such as
SC/APC, SC/UPC, FC/APC, FC/UPC, and LC/UPC . Standard or custom breakout lengths are available with fiber counts of 1 thru 12 terminations, with all fibers color coded for quick/easy fiber identification .
Fiber Receiver Service Cable with Armored PE Jacket
Specifications
PARAMETER
Operating Temperature °F (°C)
Storage Temperature °F (°C)
Crush Resistance lbs . (kg)
Impact Resistance
Flexing
Fiber Core Diameter (microns)
Maximum Insertion Loss (dB)
UPC Return Loss (dB)
APC Return Loss (dB)
Outer Jacket Material
Finish
Cable Pullout Tensile Strength lbs . (kg)
Entry Threads in .
Dimensions in . (cm)
VALUE
-40 to 158 (-40 to 70)
-58 to 158 (-50 to 70)
1000 (453 .5 kg)
25 lbs . @ 2 .2 lbs . per foot (11 .25 kg @ 0 .99 kg)
25 lbs . @ 5 in . (11 .25 kg @ 12 .7 kg)
8 .3
0 .25 (UPC), 0 .35 (APC)
-55
-65
Riser-rated PVC
Nickel-tin plated brass
247 (112 .04)
0 .625 x 24
4 .25 long x 0 .875 diameter (10 .8 x 2 .22)
108
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00086, Revision 1, 1.25.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightLink Fiber Receiver Service
Cable Assemblies (FRSC)
Fiber Receiver Service Cable with
Non-Armored All-Dielectric UniFlex
™
Features
• Polyurethane riser rated indoor/outdoor loose tube single-mode cable
• Polyurethane jacket reinforced with aramid yard for exceptional durability
• Easy installation
• Design eliminates movement of cable components
• 900µm or 2 .4mm upjacketed color-coded legs, 2 .0mm LC
• Breakout length 1 meter
• Available in single-mode pigtails
• Pulling strength in excess of 150 lbs .
• Anti-twist crimp
• Flexible bend radius of 19cm for installation and 10cm for operation
• Variety of single-mode connector styles
(not available in multimode)
• Cable cut and terminated to custom lengths
• Connector ends clearly labeled for quick identification
• Available in fiber counts from 2-12 fibers
• Ultra Polish available for all connector types
• Angle Polish available on FC and SC connectors
Specifications
2
3
COLOR FURCATION - FIBER NUMBER REFERENCE
1 Blue 4 Brown 7
Orange
Green
5
6
Slate
White
8
9
Red
Black
Yellow
10
11
12
Violet
Rose
Aqua
GROMMET SPECIFICATIONS - STANDARD D
Inner Diameter 0 .375”
Active Pull Test 35 lbs .
Overall length
Hex Nut Size
Length from Hex Nut to end of front body
Material
45mm
7/8”
6mm
Aluminum Gold Anodized
Ordering Information
ASC XXX
Connector End A
Single-mode
ASC = Angle SC
AFC = Angle FC
USC = Ultra SC
UFC = Ultra FC
UST = Ultra ST
ULC = Ultra LC
Connector End B
Single-mode
XXX = No connector
NC
Cable Type
NC = Uni-Flex
AN = Armored PE
012
Fiber Count
002 = 2
004 = 4
006 = 6
008 = 8
010 = 10
012 = 12
Q
Fiber Type
Q = Single-mode
0010
Cable Length (meters)
XXXX (specify length)
0010 = 10 meters
N
Leg Diameter
N = 900µm End A
F = Furcated End A
109
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00086, Revision 1, 1.25.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Applications
• Outdoor Cabinets
• External-Building Runs
• Vaults
• CEV’s
Specifications
Riser Rated Indoor/Outdoor Loose Tube
Riser Rated stranded design loose tube cable is moisture and U .V . resistant, S-Z stranded for easy mid-span access, UL-listed type OFNR (UL1666) riser-rated, and can be used in both duct and lashed applications .
Loose Tube & Riser Rated Indoor/Outdoor
Loose Tube Cable Assemblies
High fiber count Loose Tube & Riser Rated Indoor/Outdoor Loose Tube Cable assemblies provide a safe and proven method of utilizing preterminated connector technology for outside plant applications . These assemblies help control cost by eliminating labor- intensive field termination and provide the same factory terminated reliability the industry has trusted for many years . Cable assemblies are available in Indoor/Outdoor Loose
Tube, suitable for use in both indoor and outdoor applications . Each unit is manufactured to exceed all TIA and Telecordia requirements .
Features
• Fiber counts from 6 to 144 fibers
• Available with ST, SC, FC, and LC connectors single-mode
• Pigtail assemblies, standard configuration (nonstandard configurations available)
• ST, SC, FC and LC connectors available in both single-mode and multimode
• Pre-installed pulling eye kits available
• 1 meter standard breakout length
• 2 .4mm standard furcation for
SC, FC, and ST
• 1 .6mm standard furcation for LC
• UV resistant outer jacket
• Gel-filled loose buffer tubes (RL),
Gel-filled Loose Tube (LT)
• Meets Telcordia GR-20-CORE
Cable Components
binder binder rip cord rip cord
Temperature Range
PARAMETER
Operating
Storage
Installation
VALUE
-40°C to +70°C
-40°C to +75°C
0°C to +70°C
Loose Tube
Loose Tube stranded design cables feature fiber counts up to 432, compliance with EIA/TIA and REA/RUS
PE-90, and are S-Z stranded for easy mid-span access .
Cable Components
polyethylene jacket polyester tape optical fiber
FRP central member rip cord water-blocking system gel-filled loose buffer tube
Temperature Range
PARAMETER
Operating
Storage
Installation
VALUE
-40°C to +70°C
-40°C to +75°C
-30°C to +70°C
NOTE: Refer to page on Connector Specifications .
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00090, Revision 2, 11.22.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
110
Loose Tube & Riser Rated Indoor/
Outdoor Loose Tube Cable Assemblies
Dimensions
Ordering Information
ASC ASC
Connector End A
Single-mode
ASC = Angle SC
AFC = Angle FC
USC = Ultra SC
UFC = Ultra FC
UST = Ultra ST
ULC = Ultra LC
Connector End B
Single-mode
ASC = Angle SC
AFC = Angle FC
USC = Ultra SC
UFC = Ultra FC
UST = Ultra ST
ULC = Ultra LC
XXX = No connector
LT 024
Cable Type
LT = Loose Tube
RL = Riser Rated Indoor/Outdoor
Loose Tube
Fiber Count
006 = 6
012 = 12
024 = 24
036 = 36
048 = 48
072 = 72
096 = 96
144 = 144
Lengths Available
Cable lengths are dependent on fiber cable type and count . Consult customer service for maximum lengths available .
Q
Fiber Type
Q = Single-mode
X = Single-mode
ITU-T G .657A BIF
0010 NN
Cable Length (meters)
XXXX (specify length)
0010 = 10 meters
Leg Diameter
N = 900µm End A / XXX End B
NN = 900µm End A and B
F = Furcated End A / XXX End B
FF = Furcated Ends A and B
FN = Furcated Ends A / 900µm End B
NF = 900µm End A / Furcated Ends B
111
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00090, Revision 2, 11.22.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Future Access Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable for MDU Applications
Used in MDU applications, the Future Access Single-Fiber HFOC (Hardened Fiber Optic
Connector) Drop Cable provides a quick and easy installation from the pre-installed
HFOC terminal residing on a pole, pedestal or hand-hole to a far end termination .
With environmentally-sealed SC/APC connectors, the Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable is factory terminated using dielectric or toneable flat cables in customer specified lengths, single or doubled-ended . The single-fiber drop cable saves time and money with faster deployments in the optical FTTx network .
Specifications
PARAMETER
Connector Type
Max . Insertion Loss
Min . Return Loss
VALUE
SC/APC
<0 .35 dB
-65 dB
Features
• Environmentally sealed SC/APC connectors equipped with protective cap
• Factory termination – single or doubleended
• Faster deployment, saving time and money
• Cable available in dielectric or toneable flat drop and in varying lengths
• Tested to Telcordia GR-3120 requirement
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – Single-ended Dielectric
Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – Single-ended Toneable
Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – Double-ended Dielectric
Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – Double-ended Toneable
NOTE: XXXX is the length in feet .
Application
AFL NO.
CS002823-XXXXFT
CS008995-XXXXFT
CS008994-XXXXFT
CS008993-XXXXFT
FutureAccess is a registered trademark of Fujikura Ltd .
112
© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00126, Revision 1, 4.5.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable for the
MDU Splice and Distribution Enclosure
The Future Access 4-Fiber HFOC (Hardened Fiber Optic Connector) Drop Cable is used in MDU application where FTTP services are to be provisioned using indoor single family unit (SFU) ONTs . The use of the 4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable allows quick and easy installation from the pre-installed HFOC terminal usually residing on a pole, pedestal or hand-hole run to the side of the MDU building . Used in conjunction with the LightLink™ LL-500-DS MDU Splice and Distribution Enclosure, the output of the
4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable is spliced inside the LL-500-DS to (4) 2 mm pigtails which than terminate to SC-APC adapters . The output fibers will be standard MDU drop cables running to each individual dwelling unit inside the building . This enclosure is mounted on the outside of an MDU building allowing splicing and distribution for up to 12 SFU dwellings in 4-fiber increments .
Features
• Four environmentally sealed SC/APC connectors
• Each connector marked for fiber identification and equipped with protective cap
• Fully sealed transition fan-out into individual 48” long single fiber HFOC tethers
• Tested to Telcordia GR-3120 and GR-771 requirements
• Available in dielectric or toneable flat drop cable
• Available in 200 or 500 foot lengths
Specifications
PARAMETER
Connector Type
Max . Insertion Loss
Min . Return Loss
VALUE
SC/APC
<0 .35 dB
-65 dB
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – 200 Feet Dielectric
4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – 500 Feet Dielectric
4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – 200 Feet Toneable
4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – 500 Feet Toneable
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
LL-500-DS Enclosure
LL-500-DS Expansion Kit (allows additional 4-fiber splices and terminations)
AFL NO.
CS004232-0200FT
CS004232-0500FT
CS004233-0200FT
CS004233-0500FT
AFL NO.
FC000570
FC000574
113
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00166, Revision 2, 11.3.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Future Access™
4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable for the
MDU Splice and Distribution Enclosure
Application
114
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00166, Revision 2, 11.3.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Connectors and Accessories
Features
• No Epoxy, No Polish
• Low Insertion Loss
• Fiber Can Be Reinserted up to Three Times
• 3 .0 mm, 2 .0 mm and 900 μm
Cordage Compatibility
• VFI Accessory to Confirm
Proper Installation
Applications
• Premise/Enterprise Networks
• LAN/WAN Connections
• Patch Panels
• Equipment Termination
• FTTx Applications
• Field Repair/Replacement
• Equipment Test Leads
FASTConnect
®
Field-Installable Connectors
FASTConnect are factory pre-polished, field-installable connectors that completely eliminate the need for hand polishing in the field . Proven mechanical splice technology ensuring precision fiber alignment, a factory pre-cleaved fiber stub and a proprietary index-matching gel combine to offer an immediate low loss termination to either single-mode or multimode optical fibers . FAST Connectors are compatible with
250 µm and 900 µm optical fibers, as well as 900 µm, 2 mm and 3 mm cordage .
All primary fiber types are supported, and each connector is color coded per industry standard requirements to aide in identification during and after installation .
A factory-installed wedge clip (included with each connector) is removed and discarded upon completion of the termination . Incorporated into this device is an innovative, translucent wedge enabling the use of a common VFI to provide a "pass/fail" signal once physical contact is achieved .
Specifications
PARAMETER
Insertion Loss:
Return Loss at Room Temperature:
Single-mode - UPC
Single-mode - APC
Multimode - PC
Single-mode - UPC
Single-mode - APC-AU*
Single-mode - APC-AA**
Multimode
Operating Temperature
*Angle/Flat Cleaves
**Angle/Angle Cleaves
TIA/EIA-568-C .3 Compliant
TIA/EIA-604 (FOCIS) Compliant
VALUE
Average: 0 .2 dB, Maximum: 0 .5 dB
Average: 0 .3 dB, Maximum: 0 .6 dB
Average: 0 .1 dB, Maximum: 0 .5 dB
Average: -55 dB, Maximum: -45 dB
Average: -55 dB, Maximum: -50 dB
Average: -65 dB, Maximum: -60 dB
Average: -25 dB, Maximum: -20 dB
-40°C to +75°C
Ordering Information
FIBER TYPE
HOUSING
COLOR
CABLE
SIZE
FASTCONNECT SC
Multimode 62 .5/125 µm, OM1
Multimode 50/125 µm, OM2
Beige
Black
Multimode 50/125 µm, OM3/OM4 compatible Aqua
Single-mode, UPC Blue
Single-mode, APC-AU
Single-mode, APC-AA
Green
Green
FASTCONNECT ST
Multimode 62 .5/125 µm, OM1
Single-mode, UPC
FASTCONNECT LC
Beige
Multimode 50/125 µm, OM2 Black
Multimode 50/125 µm, OM3/OM4 compatible Aqua
Blue
Multimode 62 .5/125 µm, OM1
Multimode 50/125 µm, OM2
Beige
Black
Multimode 50/125 µm, OM3/OM4 compatible Aqua
Single-mode, UPC Blue
900 µm
900 µm
900 µm
AFL NO.
PACKAGE OF 6 PACKAGE OF 100
FAST-SC-MM62 .5-6 FAST-SC-MM62 .5-100
FAST-SC-MM50-6 FAST-SC-MM50-100
FAST-SC-MM50L-6 FAST-SC-MM50L-100
FAST-SC-SM-6 FAST-SC-SM-100
FAST-SC-SMAU-6 FAST-SC-SMAU-100
FAST-SC-SMAA-6 FAST-SC-SMAA-100*
FAST-ST-MM62 .5-6 FAST-ST-MM62 .5-100
FAST-ST-MM50-6 FAST-ST-MM50-100
FAST-ST-MM50L-6 FAST-ST-MM50L-100
FAST-ST-SM-6 FAST-ST-SM-100
FAST-LC-MM62 .5-6 FAST-LC-MM62 .5-100
FAST-LC-MM50-6 FAST-LC-MM50-100
FAST-LC-MM50L-6 FAST-LC-MM50L-100
FAST-LC-SM-6 FAST-LC-SM-100
* Requires FAST APC Tool Kit for installation
U.S. Patents: 5,963,699 / 5,984,532 / 6,179,482 / 7,003,208 / 7,258,496
© 2005 AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00052, Revision 10, 3.18.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
115
FASTConnect
®
Field-Installable Connectors
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
BOOT KITS FOR 2 MM AND 3 MM CORDAGE COLOR
2 mm Boot Kit, SC/LC/ST
3 mm Boot Kit, SC/LC/ST
DUPLEX CLIPS
Black
Black
LC Duplex Clip (LC only) Transparent
CABLE SIZE
2 mm
3 mm
AFL NO.
PACK OF 6
FAST-BOOT-2MM-6
FAST-BOOT-3MM-6
CS010437-06
TOOL KITS
FAST UPC Tool Kit
FAST UPC Tool Kit
FAST APC Tool Kit
VISUAL FAULT IDENTIFIERS
AFL NOYES ® VFI 2
AFL NOYES HiLite
1 .25 mm Universal Adapter (LC Connectors)
For all UPC style connectors and SC/ APC-AU (CT-30A Cleaver)
For all UPC style connectors and SC/APC-AU (CT-06A Cleaver)
For SC/APC-AA connectors (CT-11A Cleaver)
Testing
1
>POM<
2
Before Fiber Insertion
1
>POM<
2
After Fiber Insertion
AFL NO.
PACK OF 100
FAST-BOOT-2MM-100
FAST-BOOT-3MM-100
CS010437-100
AFL NO.
CS001201
CS010975
CS012290
AFL NO.
VFI2-00-0900
VFI3-00-0900
2900-50-0010MR
116
© 2005 AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00052, Revision 10, 3.18.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
CON
NECTORS
Fiber Optic Cable
Tool Kit Contents
CT-30A Cleaver
FASTConnect
®
Universal Tool Kit
The FASTConnect Universal Tool Kits provide all the necessary installation tools required for fiber preparation of 250 μm or 900 μm fibers, or 900 μm, 2 mm or 3 mm cordage for AFL’s pre-polished FASTConnect . Featuring either the CT-30A, CT-06A or CT-11A fiber cleaver, the FASTConnect Universal Tool Kit contains all the industry standard termination tools required for fiber preparation . Additionally, the carrying case has adequate storage for extra FASTConnect for on-site convenience .
Applications
• Premise environments
• LAN Fiber to the Desk environments
• Patch panel/wiring closets
• FTTx applications
• Quick repair/replacement areas
Features
• Industry standard fiber preparation tools
• Compact design, flexible yet rugged case
• Complete instructions provided
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
FASTConnect High Precision UPC/PC Tool Kit with CT-30A Cleaver
FASTConnect High Precision UPC/PC Tool Kit with CT-06A Cleaver
FASTConnect APC (Angle/Angle Connector) Tool Kit with CT-11A Cleaver
AFL NO.
CS001201
CS010975
CS012290
Tool Kits include: Cleaver, FAST SC Assembly Tool, FAST LC Assembly Tool, 3 mm Cable Clamp, 2 mm Cable
Clamp, 0 .25/0 .9 mm Cable Clamp, Fiber Stripper, Kevlar Scissors, Fiber Preperation Fluid, Lint-free Cloth Wipes,
Marker Pen, Installation Instructions, Strip Length Template and a Carrying Case .
CT-06A Cleaver
CT-11A Cleaver
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
117
© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00053, Revision 8, 3.13.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
FUSEConnect
®
Field-Installable Connectors
FuseConnect Connectors (SC, FC, LC, ST)
FuseConnect in Fusion Splicer
FUSEConnect
®
Fusion-Spliced,
Field-Installable Connectors
AFL’s FUSEConnect fusion-spliced, field installable connectors are uniquely designed and feature only four to five components. The factory pre-polished ferrule eliminates the need for polishing, adhesives, and crimping in the field, which minimizes the potential for operator error and expensive connector scrap.
FUSEConnect utilizes a fusion splicer to terminate the connector in the field, addressing return loss concerns present in analog optical networks. This advanced process yields true APC performance for SC/APC and LC/APC configurations, and is compliant to
GR-326-CORE. FUSEConnect is compatible with Fujikura fusion splicers and most other fiber holder-based fusion splicing platforms.
Features
• Field installable
• No adhesives, crimping or polishing
• True APC performance
• MM compliant to TIA/EIA568C.3
• Compatible with most fusion splicers
Applications
• Connectorization in:
- RF-overlay FTTP networks
- Cable TV backbone networks
- Outside plant
- FTTD
- MDU FTTP Cabling
• Central office connector replacement
• Data center installation
Specifications
PARAMETER
Connector Type
Cable Type
Polish
Insertion Loss
VALUE
SC, LC, FC, ST
900 µm, 2 mm, 3 mm
APC, UPC, PC
SM: 0.15 dB (average), 0.3 dB (maximum) / MM: 0.10 dB (average), 0.3 dB (maximum)
Return Loss SM: ≤ -65 dB (APC), ≤ -55 dB (UPC) / MM: ≤ -35 dB (PC)
Operating Temperature -40°C to +75°C
Ordering Information
CONN.
TYPE
SC
LC
FC
ST
BOOT
TYPE
UPC SM
(Blue)
APC SM
(Green)
AFL NO.*
PC 62.5 µm MM
(Beige)
PC 50 µm MM
(Black)
PC 50 µm LOMMF
(AQUA) **
900 µm FUSE-SC9SMU-6 FUSE-SC9SMA-6 FUSE-SC9M62-6 FUSE-SC9M50-6 FUSE-SC9M50L-6
3 mm FUSE-SC3SMU-6 FUSE-SC3SMA-6 FUSE-SC3M62-6 FUSE-SC3M50-6 FUSE-SC3M50L-6
900 µm FUSE-LC9SMU-6 FUSE-LC9SMA-6 FUSE-LC9M62-6 FUSE-LC9M50-6 FUSE-LC9M50L-6
2 mm FUSE-LC2SMU-6 FUSE-LC2SMA-6 FUSE-LC2M62-6 FUSE-LC2M50-6 FUSE-LC2M50L-6
900 µm FUSE-FC9SMU-6 —
2 mm FUSE-FC2SMU-6 —
3 mm FUSE-FC3SMU-6 —
900 µm FUSE-ST9SMU-6 —
2 mm FUSE-ST2SMU-6 —
3 mm FUSE-ST3SMU-6 —
FUSE-FC9M62-6 FUSE-FC9M50-6 FUSE-FC9M50L-6
FUSE-FC2M62-6 FUSE-FC2M50-6 FUSE-FC2M50L-6
FUSE-FC3M62-6 FUSE-FC3M50-6 FUSE-FC3M50L-6
FUSE-ST9M62-6 FUSE-ST9M50-6 FUSE-ST9M50L-6
FUSE-ST2M62-6 FUSE-ST2M50-6 FUSE-ST2M50L-6
FUSE-ST3M62-6 FUSE-ST3M50-6 FUSE-ST3M50L-6
*
AFL NO. is for one pack of 6 pieces
**
Laser Optimized MM Fiber (LOMMF) compatible with OM3 and OM4 fibers
FuseConnect Kits—ST (blue), SC (green), LC (blue)
© 2007, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00056, Revision 6, 11.20.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
118
FUSEConnect
®
MPO Field-Installable Connectors
CON
NECTORS
Fiber Optic Cable
FUSEConnect MPO Connectors, Cable
FUSEConnect MPO Connectors, Ribbon
FUSEConnect
®
MPO Fusion-Spliced,
Field-Terminated Connectors
AFL’s FUSEConnect MPO fusion-spliced, field-terminated connectors are uniquely designed and feature just six components. With a factory pre-polished ferrule, its innovative field-termination process eliminates polishing, adhesives and crimping in the field minimizing the potential for operator error and expensive connector scrap.
Designed to Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard (FOCIS), Type MPO, FOCIS-5,
TIA-604-5-C, AFL’s FuseConnect MPO performs as an equivalent to the standard factory terminated MPO/MTP
®
assemblies. Designed to utilize either ribbon or loose tube cable, this connector helps to minimize the complexity involved in the termination of a multi-fiber connection, allowing for a reliable and repeatable termination in field applications.
FUSEConnect MPO is part of the FUSEConnect series splice-on connector which includes the SC, LC, ST and FC that require a fusion splicer and accessories for installations.
The AFL FUSEConnect MPO Termination Kit specifically provides all the necessary accessories required for field termination of the FUSEConnect MPO.
Features
• Field installable splice-on connector
• Only six components
• No adhesives, crimping or polishing
• TIA-568-C.3, IEC-61754-7, and
TIA/EIA-604-5 FOCIS 5 Compliant
• Field MPO polarity customization
• Include 3.0 mm round and optical fiber ribbon flat boots in each pack
Specifications
PARAMETER
Insertion Loss
Return Loss
Single-mode (OS1)
62.5/125 (OM1)
50/125 (OM2)
50/125 LO (OM3)
Single-mode (OS1)
62.5/125 (OM1)
50/125 (OM2)
50/125 LO (OM3)
Operating Temperature
Applications
• Connectorization in:
- RF-overlay FTTP networks
- Cable TV backbone networks
- Outside plant
- MDU FTTP Cabling
• Connector restoration in the field
• Data center installation
• Patch cord customization in the field
VALUE
Average: 0.25 dB; Max: 0.75 dB
Average: 0.10 dB; Max: 0.35 dB
Average: 0.10 dB; Max: 0.35 dB
Average: 0.10 dB; Max: 0.35 dB
> 65 dB
> 30 dB
> 30 dB
> 30 dB
-40°C to +75°C continued on next page
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
119
© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00059, Revision 1, 8.11.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
CON
NECTORS
Fiber Optic Cable
FUSEConnect
®
MPO Fusion-Spliced,
Field-Terminated Connectors
Ordering Information
AFL NO.* CONNECTOR TYPE
FUSEMPO-SMA-3-M-6 MPO, Male (guide pins)
FUSEMPO-SMA-3-F-6 MPO, Female (No Guide Pins)
FUSEMPO-MM6-3-M-6 MPO, Male (guide pins)
FUSEMPO-MM6-3-F-6 MPO, Female (no guide pins)
FUSEMPO-MM5-3-M-6 MPO, Male (guide pins)
FUSEMPO-MM5-3-F-6 MPO, Female (no guide pins)
FUSEMPO-MM5L-3-M-6 MPO, Male (guide pins)
FUSEMPO-MM5L-3-F-6 MPO, Female (no guide pins)
*Pack of 6 pieces
Ordering Information – Accessories
DESCRIPTION
TOOL KIT
FuseConnect MPO Tool Kit
ACCESSORIES
FuseConnect Ribbonize Tool
FuseConnect Stripping Tool (3.0 mm, 2.8 mm, 2.0 mm, and 1.6 mm)
FuseConnect MPO Assembly Tool
FIBER TYPE
Single-mode (OS1)
Single-mode (OS1)
Multimode 62.5 µm (OM1)
Multimode 62.5 µm (OM1)
Multimode 50 µm (OM2)
Multimode 50 µm (OM2)
Multimode 50 µm 10Gig (OM3)
Multimode 50 µm 10Gig (OM3)
AFL NO.
FUSEMPO-TL-KT
FUSE-RB-TL
FUSE-ST-TL
FUSE-AS-TL
POLISH
APC
APC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
CABLE SIZE
ROUND FLAT
3.0 mm 250 µm
3.0 mm
3.0 mm
3.0 mm
3.0 mm
250 µm
250 µm
250 µm
250 µm
3.0 mm
3.0 mm
3.0 mm
250 µm
250 µm
250 µm
HOUSING COLOR
Green
Green
Beige
Beige
Black
Black
Aqua
Aqua
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
120
© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00059, Revision 1, 8.11.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
FUSEConnect Tool Kit Contents
FUSEConnect Accessory Kit
Cord Splitter Tool
FUSEConnect
®
Tool Kit and Accessories
The FUSEConnect tool kit provides all the necessary installation tools required for fiber preparation of 900 μm fiber, 2 mm or 3 mm cordage for AFL’s FUSEConnect Fusion
Spliced Field Installable Connectors except for a fusion splicer and precision cleaver.
Included in the kit are standard fiber preparation tools and cleaning supplies as well as a FUSEConnect accessory kit and cord splitter tool, which can be bought separately from the tool kit. The cord splitter tool is uniquely designed to open the cordage of
2 mm and 3 mm cable allowing the termination of the ST and FC type connectors on simplex cordage.
Applications
• Premise environments
• LAN Fiber to the Desk environments
• Patch panel/wiring closets
• FTTx applications
• Quick repair/replacement areas
Features
• Industry standard fiber preparation tools
• Compact design, flexible yet rugged case
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
FUSEConnect Tool Kit (includes items below)
Tool Case
Fiber Stripper
Kevlar Scissors
Lint-Free Wipes
Fiber Preparation Fluid
Permanent Marker
Cord Splitter Tool
FUSEConnect Accessory Kit
FUSEConnect Accessory Kit (includes items below)
Utility Storage Box
Clamp for holding 3 mm Simplex Cordage
Clamp for holding 2 mm Simplex Cordage
250 μm / 900 μm Fiber Clamp
3 mm FUSEConnect Fiber Holder
2 mm FUSEConnect Fiber Holder
900 μm FUSEConnect Fiber Holder
CLAMP-S70D Sheath Clamp
CLAMP-S60D Sheath Clamp (Left side)
Cord Splitter Tool
AFL NO.
FUSE-TL-KT
CS001202
CS001205
C095257
FM000413
FPF1-00-0900
C015830
FUSE-ST-TL
FUSE-AC-KT
FUSE-AC-KT
CS012351
S014704
S014705
CS004442
S014695
S014696
S014697
S015862
S014752
FUSE-ST-TL
121
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00145, Revision 2, 6.5.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
SpliceConnect with Tool Kit
AFL’s SpliceConnect is a mechanical splice that provides an inexpensive, quick alternative to mating fibers. Using V-groove technology, this splice maintains physical contact between the fibers. An assembly tool is used to ensure the fibers are mated correctly, resulting in <0.1 dB insertion loss (typical for single-mode). The SpliceConnect secures both fiber and coating independently with the U-shaped sleeve, enhancing the strength against fiber twist.
Features
• Quick splicing time
• Minimal tools
• 250 µm and/or 900 µm fiber capabilities
• Both fiber and coating are secured independently
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
SpliceConnect Mechanical Splices (Bag of 6)
SpliceConnect Mechanical Splice Tool Kit
Kit Includes:
SpliceConnect Mechanical Splicing Tool
Fiber Holder, 250 µm x2
Fiber Holder, 900 µm x2
Manual
Carrying
Template, Strip/Cleave Length
SpliceConnect Mechanical Splicing Tool
Fiber Holder, 250 µm
Fiber Holder, 900 µm
Applications
• Restoration
• Premise environments
• Fiber-to-the-Subscriber (FTTx) applications
AFL NO.
CS004154
CS004162
CS004155
CS004442
CS004443
CS004159
CS004161
CS004573
CS004155
CS004442
CS004443
Dimensions and Structure
4 mm
Clamping
Clamping Force from U-Shaped Crimp
4 mm
40 mm
Fiber
Fiber
Index Mating Gel
V-groove Plate
122
© 2007, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00104, Revision 3, 3.19.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Features
• SC, FC, ST, and LC connector styles
(Ultra & Angled Polish)
• Long-term reliability
• Low ripple, wavelength independent attenuation
• Certified to >125 mW continuous power handling capability with no performance degradation
• Polarization insensitive
• Telcordia approved
Application
• Broadband Network
• Fiber in the Loop
• Local Area Networks (LAN)
• Long Haul Telecommunications
(CLEC, CAPS)
• Network Testing
• Passive Optical Networks
• Telco
Buildout Attenuators
Buildout attenuators provide superior performance for all single-mode in-line attenuation requirements. Standard attenuation values are 5, 10, 15, and 20 dB, available in SC, FC, ST, and LC connector styles. Using no air gap, filters, or light path discontinuities, attenuation is achieved by controlled absorption of light energy.
This results in a polarization insensitive device with high power handling capability, environmentally stable, and exceptionally responsive, across a wide bandpass range.
Specifications
PARAMETER
Standard Attenuation Values
Attenuation Tolerance
Vibration resistance
Operating Temperature Range:
Storage Temperature Range:
VALUE
5, 10, 15 and 20 dB
Standard at 10%
<0.1X attenuation value
-40°C to +75°C
-40°C to +85°C
Ordering Information
OFA
—
Connector
SCA = SC/APC
SCU = SC/UPC
LCA = LC/APC
LCU = LC/UPC
STU = ST/UPC
FCA = FC/APC
FCU = FC/UPC
—
BO
24DB
25DB
26DB
27DB
28DB
29DB
30DB
16DB
17DB
18DB
19DB
20DB
21DB
22DB
23DB
08DB
09DB
10DB
11DB
12DB
13DB
14DB
15DB
01DB
02DB
03DB
04DB
05DB
06DB
07DB
123
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00044, Revision 3, 12.03.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Couplers and WDM Modules
Features
• Dual window wideband operation
• Low insertion loss over entire bandwidth and temperature (typical IL change <±0.1 dB)
• Ultra-low PDL and temperature sensitivity
• High directivity
• Compact design
• Environmentally stable, over 10 years of proven field reliability
• Standard operating temperature range
-4O°C to +85°C
• Fully tested to Telcordia 1209 and
1221 criteria
Applications
• Telecommunications
• CATV
• LAN
• Monitoring of Networks
Wideband Couplers
The dual window Wideband Couplers (WBC) split or couple optical power in two wavelength regions while maintaining a very broad operating bandwidth. Split and coupling ratios are available from 5% to 50%. WBCs are widely considered one of the most cost-effective solutions to optical power management. The WBC is an all-fiber device, based on AFL’s fused biconic technology, and is designed and manufactured to meet military and Telcordia ® requirements.
Specifications
STANDARD AND PREMIUM GRADES
PARAMETER
Operating Wavelength
Return Loss
Directivity
Package Dimension
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
VALUE
1310 nm + 50 and 1550 nm + 50
55 dB
55 dB
3.2 mm (dia.) x 55 mm (L)
-40° to +85°C
-40° to +85°C
Ordering Information
SINGLE-MODE PREMIUM GRADE SPECIFICATIONS (MAX. INSERTION LOSS AND MAX. PDL)
RATIO
50/50
55/45
60/40
65/35
67/33
70/30
75/25
80/20
85/15
90/10
95/5
SPECIFICATIONS (DB)
PRIMARY/SECONDARY PORT PDL (DB)
3.6/3.6
0.15
3.2/4.1
2.7/4.7
2.3/5.3
2.2/5.7
0.15
0.14
0.14
0.14
2.0/6.0
1.8/6.8
1.3/7.8
1.0/9.2
0.8/11.2
0.5/14.4
0.13
0.13
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
AFL NO.
C198364-P
C198358-P
C198353-P
C198349-P
C198904-P
C198346-P
C198340-P
C198335-P
C198331-P
C198328-P
C198322-P
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
124
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00110, Revision 2, 5.24.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Ruggedized Wideband Couplers
Enhancing AFL’s wideband coupler offering are two package styles for ruggedized versions of these reliable, standardized couplers – 3 mm and 900 µm furcated pigtail options and a variety of connector styles are offered in both single-mode and multimode applications. All AFL couplers conform to stringent environmental and mechanical standards to provide high reliablity in a variety of customer applications.
Features
• Dual window wideband operation
• Low insertion loss
• Low PDL
• High Directivity
• Long term field application
• Environmentally stable over range of
-40°C to +85°C
Applications
• Telecommunications
• CATV
• LAN
• Fiber in the Loop
• Network monitoring
Ordering Information
T
0102
Package Type
T = 900 µm Diameter Leads
3 = 3 mm Diameter Leads
Output Leads
0102 = 1 x 2
50
Split Ratio
50 = 50/50%
45 = 45/55%
40 = 40/60%
35 = 35/65%
30 = 30/70%
25 = 25/75%
20 = 20/80%
15 = 15/85%
10 = 10/90%
5 = 5/95%
S
Configuration
S = Single-mode
M = Multimode
ASC 01
Input Connector
Options
ASC = Angle SC
AFC = Angle FC
Input Pigtail
Length (M)
(Examples)
01 = 1 meter
USC = Ultra SC
UFC = Ultra FC
SST = Super ST
ULC = Ultra LC
000 = Non-connectorized
02 = 2 meters
ASC 01
Output Connector/
Adapter
ASC = Angle SC
AFC = Angle FC
Output Pigtail
Length (M)
(Examples)
01 = 1 meter
USC = Ultra SC
UFC = Ultra FC
SST = Super ST
ULC = Ultra LC
000 = Non-connectorized
02 = 2 meters
125
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00100, Revision 1, 5.24.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Features
• Low insertion loss
• Ultra-wide bandwidth
• Wide operating temperature
• Low PDL
• Highly stable and reliable
• Epoxy-free optical path
Applications
• Telecommunications
• CATV
• Fiber Optic Sensors and Instruments
• Subscriber Loops
• Military Systems, Fiber Optic Gyros
• FTTH
Wavelength Division Multiplexer Couplers
The WDM separates or combines wavelengths in the 1310 and 1550 nm bands over an ultra-wide bandwidth (+ 20 nm) and temperature range while maintaining excellent stability and optical performance. The device, which is fabricated using an advanced fused biconical taper technology, is designed to meet Telcordia ® 1209 and 1221 requirements.
Specifications (Single-Mode Premium)
PARAMETER
Model Number
Configuration
Wavelength
Directivity
Operating Temperature
Typical Temperature Stability
Typical Polarization Stability (passband)
Isolation
VALUE
S004794
1 x 2
1310 / 1550 nm
<-65 dB
-40º to +85ºC
<0.1 dB
<0.1 dB
20 dB
*Isolation of 32 dB and higher not available in 63 mm L or 69 mm L x 3 mm OD
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
126
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00109, Revision 1, 5.24.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Features
• Low insertion loss
• Compact design
• Stable optical performance
• Dual Window (1310 & 1550 nm)
• Low insertion loss
• Low back reflection
• High output uniformity
• Telecordia
®
GR-1029 and
GR-1221 qualified
Applications
• Telecommunications Networks
• Datacom
• LAN & CATV Networks
• FTTH, FTTB, & FTTC
Planar Couplers
The Planar Coupler provides the uniform division of an optical signal by having one input port and multiple output ports. Compact packaging and stable optical parameters allow these couplers to be integrated into Telecommunications, Local Area Network
(LAN), and Cable Television (CATV) networks.
Specifications
PARAMETER
AFL NO.
Operating Wavelength (Grade)
Optical Split Ratio
Maximum Insertion Loss (dB)
Typical Insertion Loss (dB)
Maximum Uniformity (dB)
Typical Uniformity (dB)
PDL (dB)
VALUE
CM000034
1260-1360 nm and 1480-1580 nm (Standard)
1 x 4 1 x 8 1 x 16
7.5
7.3
1.0
0.8
<0.3
CM000033
11.0
10.8
1.0
0.8
<0.3
Return Loss (dB)
Directivity (dB)
Fiber Type
Input/Output Fiber Length
>55
>55
Operating Temperature -40° to +85°C
Package Dimensions (LxWxH) (mm) 40 x 4 x 4
>55
>55
SMF28e 250 µm equivalent
1 meter 1.5 meters
40 x 4 x 4
C198299
14.2
13.9
1.5
1.3
<0.4
>55
>55
1.5 meters
40 x 4 x 4
CS001470
1 x 32
17.8
17.5
2.0
1.8
<0.4
>55
>55
1.5 meters
50 x 6.5 x 4
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
127
© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00097, Revision 1, 5.24.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Applications
• CATV
• Telco
• Wide Area Networks
• Fiber Monitoring Systems
• Military systems
Optical Coupler Modules
The optical coupler module offers management of optical power and wavelength, packaged in the LGX ® design. Each module is comprised of Telcordia ® -compliant
PLC or concatenated fused biconic components. Once assembled and terminated, the module is fully tested for environmental, mechanical, and optical integrity.
Features
• Telcordia GR-1209 & GR-1221 compliant
• Telcordia GR-326 compliant connectors and adapters
• Telcordia GR-20 compliant singlemode optical fiber
Specifications
• Optical bandpass: 1310 ± 40 nm /
1550 ± 40 nm
• RoHS compliant
• Packaged individually / tamper-proof seal
PARAMETER
Return Loss (Minimum dB)
Directivity
Operating Temperature/ Relative Humidity
Storage Temperature/ Relative Humidity
VALUE
Single-mode
Ultra
> -45
> -55
-40 to +85°C / 90%
-40 to +85°C / 90%
Angled
> -50
Ordering Information
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
I/O PORTS
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
1 x 2
ALC
ALC
ALC
ALC
ALC
ALC
ASC
ASC
ULC
ULC
ULC
ULC
ULC
ULC
USC
USC
ASC
ASC
ASC
ASC
I/O CONN
USC
USC
USC
USC
CM000175
CM000176
CM000315
CM000325
CM000323
CM000321
CM000319
CM000317
CM000310
CM000324
CM000322
CM000320
CM000318
CM000316
AFL NO.
CM000165
CM000166
CM000167
CM000168
CM000169
CM000170
CM000171
CM000172
CM000173
CM000174
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
OUTPUT PORT
COUPLING RATIO (PORT)
20
10
5
50
40
30
20
10
5
10
5
50
40
30
40
30
20
10
5
50
01
50
40
30
20
80
90
95
50
60
70
80
90
95
90
95
50
60
70
60
70
80
90
95
50
02
50
60
70
80
INSERTION LOSS
(IL) PORT 01
3.3
4.3
5.5
7.3
10.3
13.3
10.3
13.3
3.3
4.3
5.5
7.3
10.3
13.3
10.3
13.3
3.3
4.3
5.5
7.3
TYP
3.3
4.3
5.5
7.3
4.0
5.2
6.4
8.3
11.5
14.6
11.5
14.6
4.0
5.2
6.4
8.3
11.5
14.6
11.5
14.6
4.0
5.2
6.4
8.3
MAX
4.0
5.2
6.4
8.3
INSERTION LOSS
(IL) PORT 02
3.3
2.5
1.5
1.3
0.8
0.5
0.8
0.5
3.3
2.5
1.5
1.3
0.8
0.5
0.8
0.5
3.3
2.5
1.5
1.3
TYP
3.3
2.5
1.5
1.3
4.0
3.3
2.4
1.8
1.1
0.8
1.1
0.8
4.0
3.3
2.4
1.8
1.1
0.8
1.1
0.8
4.0
3.3
2.4
1.8
MAX
4.0
3.3
2.4
1.8
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00091, Revision 5, 9.10.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
128
Optical Coupler Modules
Ordering Information
(cont.)
OUTPUT PORT
COUPLING RATIO (PORT)
I/O PORTS I/O CONN AFL NO.
1 x 3 USC
01
CM000177 33.0
1 x 3
1 x 3
1 x 3
ASC
ULC
ALC
CM000178 33.0
CM000326 33.0
CM000311 33.0
02
33.0
33.0
33.0
33.0
03
33.0
33.0
33.0
33.0
I/O PORTS I/O CONN AFL NO.
1 x 4
1 x 4
USC
ASC
CM000179
CM000180
1 x 4
1 x 4
ULC
ALC
CM000327
CM000312
OUTPUT PORT
COUPLING RATIO (PORT)
01
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
02
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
03
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
04
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
INSERTION LOSS
PORT 01
TYP
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
MAX
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
PORT 02
TYP
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
MAX
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
PORT 03
TYP
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
MAX
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
INSERTION LOSS
PORT 01 PORT 02
TYP
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
MAX
7.7
7.7
7.7
7.7
TYP
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
PORT 03
MAX TYP
7.7
7.7
6.3
6.3
7.7
7.7
6.3
6.3
PORT 04
MAX TYP
7.7
7.7
6.3
6.3
7.7
7.7
6.3
6.3
MAX
7.7
7.7
7.7
7.7
I/O
PORTS
1 x 8
1 x 8
1 x 8
1 x 8
I/O
CONN AFL NO.
USC CM000181
ASC
ULC
ALC
CM000182
CM000346
CM000347
OUTPUT PORT
COUPLING RATIO (PORT)
INSERTION LOSS
PORT 01 PORT 02 PORT 03 PORT 04
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 TYP MAX TYP MAX TYP MAX TYP MAX
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
9.3
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
11.4
9.3
9.3
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
11.4
11.4
I/O
PORTS
1 x 8
1 x 8
1 x 8
1 x 8
I/O
CONN AFL NO.
USC
ASC
ULC
ALC
CM000181
CM000182
CM000346
CM000347
OUTPUT PORT
COUPLING RATIO (PORT)
INSERTION LOSS
PORT 05 PORT 06 PORT 07 PORT 08
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 TYP MAX TYP MAX TYP MAX TYP MAX
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
9.3
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
11.4
9.3
9.3
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
9.3
11.4
11.4
11.4
Insertion loss (IL) includes connector loss and Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) across operating temperature over the Optical Bandpass.
*** Additional split ratios available upon request.
129
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00091, Revision 5, 9.10.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
Optical Splitter Shelf
The LightLink LanSystem
™
Optical Splitter Shelf provides a convenient in-rack solution to combine/split optical signals in a passive optical network. With 1x16, 1x32 and
2x32 options available, the splitter shelf also features a Planar Lightwave Circuit (PLC) allowing a signal to be split into either 16 or 32 channels in a 1U rack-mountable housing. The 2x32 option provides a filter WDM concatenated to a PLC, which allows
1310/1490/1550 nm signal management evenly across 32 channels.
Features
• Telcordia
®
GR-63 NEBS tested housing
• Aluminum Material per ASTMB209
• Universal Mounting Bracket WECO, EIA
• 19" and 23" Rack Mountable
• Rugged construction, ensuring environmental, mechanical and optical integrity
• WDM and PLC fully compliant to
Telcordia GR-1209 and GR-1221
• Low Excess loss
• Low Polarization Dependent Loss
Applications
• PON-FTTx Networks
• CATV links
• DWDM & CWDM systems
• Wide area networks
• Outside plant requirements
Specifications
PARAMETER 1x16 1x32 2x32
Insertion Loss 13.5 ~ 14.3 dB 17.5 - 18.5 dB 17.5 - 19 dB
Uniformity
PDL
Return Loss
Directivity
1.5 dB Typical 1.8 dB Typical 1.8 dB Typical
≤ 0.3 dB
≥ 55 dB
≥ 55 dB
<0.45 dB
≥ 55 dB
≥ 55 dB
<0.45 dB
≥ 40 dB
≥ 50 dB
Fiber Type SMF-28e SMF-28e SMF-28e
Operating Temp -40°C to +85°C -40°C to +85°C -40°C to +70°C
Storage Temp -40°C to +85°C -40°C to +85°C -40°C to +85°C
Operating
Bandwidth
1260 ~ 1650 1260 ~ 1650 1550 nm Band - Port 1 (Pass) 1550 - 1560 nm
1310 + 1490 nm - Port 2 (Reflect) 1260-1360 nm &
1480-1500 nm
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
1x16 Optical Splitter Shelf, ASC inputs/outputs, 1U, textured White
1x32 Optical Splitter Shelf, ASC inputs/outputs, 1U, textured White
2x32 Optical Splitter Shelf, ASC inputs/outputs, 1U, textured White
AFL NO.
FM001000
FM000775
FM000622
130
© 2006, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00094, Revision 4, 10.10.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Optical FTTx Coupler Module
AFL’s Optical FTTx Coupler Module is designed to satisfy requirements utilizing 1550 nm bandwidths in FTTx applications and is specified for FTTx video install-ations. The module features a compact footprint with adapter ports consisting of SC/APC adapter outputs.
Specifications
PARAMETER
Performance
Wavelength
Insertion Loss
PDL
PMD
Return Loss
Directivity
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Optical Power
VALUE
1540-1560 nm
1550 < 3.9 dB
<0.2 dB
< 0.05 ps
> 55 dB
> 55 dB
-40 to +75°C
-40 to +85 °C
0 to 90%
500 mW
PACKAGING
Packaging Size
Fiber Type
Connector Type
Standard Single Width LGX ® Rack Module
Low-Water-Peak Non-Dispersion Shifted SMF-28e
All ports – SC/APC, Green
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Optical FTTx Coupler Module
AFL NO.
CM000072
Dimensions
29.00 mm
1.14"
84.60 mm
3.33"
171.00 mm
6.73"
155.60 mm
6.13"
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
131
© 2004, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00092, Revision 2, 5.24.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Optical FTTx WDM Module
The Optical FTTx WDM Module is designed to satisfy requirements utilizing 1310, 1490 and 1550 nm bandwidths in FTTx applications. The module features a compact footprint with adapter ports consisting of SC (UPC or APC) outputs.
Specifications
PARAMETER
1550 Band – Port 1 (Pass)
1310 + 1490 Band – Port 2 (Reflect)
Insertion Loss
Isolation
PDL
PMD
Return Loss
Directivity
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Optical Power
PACKAGING
Packaging Size
Fiber Type
Connector Type
VALUE
1550-1560 nm
1260-1360 & 1480-1500 nm
1550 < 1.2 dB
1310 + 1490 < 1.2 dB
1550 > 25 dB
1310 + 1490 > 20 dB
<0.2 dB
< 0.2 ps
> 50 dB
> 50 dB
-40 to +75°C
-40 to +85°C
0 to 90%
500 mW
Standard Single Width LGX
®
Rack Module
Low-Water-Peak Non-Dispersion Shifted SMF-28e
Port 3 (Common) – SC/APC
Port 1 (Data) – SC/UPC
Port 2 (Video) – SC/APC
Ordering Information
AFL NO.
CM000043
DESCRIPTION
Optical FTTx WDM Module
Dimensions
29.00 mm
1.14"
84.60 mm
3.33"
171.00 mm
6.73"
155.60 mm
6.13"
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
132
© 2004, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00093, Revision 2, 5.24.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Features
• Flexible packaging options
• Low Excess Loss
• Low PDL
• Monitoring / Tap ports available
• RoHS compliant
Applications
• PON - FTTx Networks
• Access Networks
• CATV Links
RFoG WDM Module
The RFOG WDM module is designed to satisfy wavelength management requirements where 1310, 1490, 1550, 1590 / 1610 nm wavelengths are used in passive optical network applications. This unit is available in traditional LGX
®
module packaging with virtually all connector options supported. Also available is a high density platform delivering unsurpassed ports per rack unit for applications requiring the most efficient use of available rack space.
Specifications
PARAMETER UNIT
Wavelength Range
Insertion Loss
Band Isolation
1310 Band
1490 Band
1550 Band
1590/1610 Band
1310+1490 Port
1550 Port
1590/1610 Port nm dB
1310/1490 Port @ 1550 dB
1310/1490 Port @
1590/1610
1550 Port @ 1310/1490
Wavelength Thermal Stability
Directivity
PDL
PMD
Return Loss
Optical Power Handling
1550 Port @ 1590
1590/1610 Port @
1310/1490/1550 nm/°C dB dB ps dB mW
40
40
30
15
35
SPECIFICATION
MIN
1270
1480
1540
-
1584.5
MAX
1350
1.2
1.4
1.5
1500
1570
1620
50
0.002
0.15
0.10
45
300
Environmental Specifications
PARAMETER
Operation Temperature
Operation Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
UNIT
°C
%RH
°C
%RH
SPECIFICATION
-5 ~ +70
5 ~ 95 not condensed
-40 ~ +85
0 ~ 95 not condensed
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
FILTER WDM,1310+1490/1550+1590/1610,SC/APC
AFL NO.
CM000150
DUAL FILTER WDM,1310+1490/1550+1590/1610,LC/APC CM000151
* Additional configuration available upon request. Contact AFL Customer Service.
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
© 2010, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00099, Revision 1, 5.24.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
133
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
LGX
®
FTTx Splitter Modules
The PON / FTTx splitters provide a convenient in-rack solution to combine or split optical signals in an optical network. Based on PLC technology, these modules offer the network operator high port-to-port uniformity and low insertion loss, as well as a wide operating wavelength range to accommodate future growth needs with new and emerging optical technologies. These products are available in LGX compatible modules.
Features
• Low excess loss
• Low polarization dependent loss
• Flexible LGX packaging options
(* see ordering information below for product size information)
• Telcordia ® GR-1209 or GR-1221 compliant
• SC/APC Connectors
Applications
• PON - FTTx Networks
• Access Networks
• CATV Links
• Wide Area Networks
Performance Specifications
PARAMETER
Insertion Loss (dB) *
Uniformity (dB) *
,
**
PDL (dB) *
,
**
Return Loss (dB)
Directivity (dB)
Operating Temperature (°C)
Storage Temperature (°C)
Package
1X4
<7.4
<0.5
LGX, 1 Slot
1X8
<10.5
<0.8
LGX, 2 Slot
1X16
<13.9
<1.1
<0.3
>55
>55
-40 to +85
-40 to +85
LGX, 3 Slot
1X32
<17.2
<1.5
LGX, 3 Slot
*Operating wavelength range (1260-1650 nm) guaranteed by design. Test report provided at 1310 and 1550 nm.
** Value does not include connector loss.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
1x4 Optical Splitter Module, 1260~1650 nm, Single slot LGX, Black, SC/APC
1x8 Optical Splitter Module, 1260~1650 nm, Dual slot LGX, Black, SC/APC
1x16 Optical Splitter Module, 1260~1650 nm, Triple slot LGX, Black, SC/APC
1x32 Optical Splitter Module, 1260~1650 nm, Triple slot LGX, Black, SC/APC
AFL NO.
CM000474
CM000475
CM000476
CM000477
© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00083, Revision 0, 3.15.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
LGX
®
FTTx WDM Modules
The FTTx WDM Modules are designed to satisfy 1310, 1490 and 1550 nm wavelength management requirements in FTTx passive optical networks. Based on proven thin-film filter technology, these modules offer low overall insertions loss, high wavelength thermal stability and high band isolation, all of which add to network reliability. These products are available in LGX compatible modules of scaling density to meet varying density objectives.
Features
• Low excess loss
• Low polarization dependent loss
• Flexible LGX packaging options
(* see ordering information below for product size and density information)
• Telcordia ® GR-1209 or GR-1221 compliant
• SC/APC Connectors
Applications
• PON - FTTx Networks
• Access Networks
• CATV Links
• Wide Area Networks
Performance Specifications
PARAMETER UNIT
Wavelength Range
Insertion Loss
Band Isolation
Wavelength Thermal Stability
Directivity
PDL
PMD
Return Loss
Optical Power Level
Operation Temperature
Operation Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
1310 Band
1490 Band nm nm
1550 Band
1310+1490 Port nm dB
1550 Port dB
1310/1490 Port @ 1550 dB
1550 @ 1310/1490 Port dB nm/°C dB dB ps dB mW
°C
%RH
°C
%RH
1260
1480
SPECIFICATION
MINIMUM MAXIMUM
1550
1360
1500
1560
1.2
1.4
40
30
0.002
50
0.15
0.1
45
300
-5 to 70
5 to 90
40 to 85
0 to 95
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION AFL NO.
PON WDM Module, 1X, 1310/1490+1550, Single slot LGX, Black, SC/APC CM000478
PON WDM Module, 2X, 1310/1490+1550, Single slot LGX, Black, SC/APC CM000479
PON WDM Module, 4X, 1310/1490+1550, Dual slot LGX, Black, SC/APC CM000480
PON WDM Module, 6X, 1310/1490+1550, Triple slot LGX, Black, SC/APC CM000481
© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00084, Revision 1, 5.26.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Double-width LGX 118 package shown
Dense WDM (DWDM) Modules
AFL’s Dense WDM modules (DWDM) are designed using proven thin-film filter technology featuring low insertion loss, high isolation, and superior environmental stability. DWDM modules are available in 2, 4, 8, and 16 channel configurations, with 100 GHz and 200
GHz spaced central wavelength options on the ITU-T Grid in the C-Band (1528 nm-1568 nm) and L-Band (1568 nm-1610 nm). All DWDM modules are factory assembled in a thin cassette package or a rugged LGX ® cassette with most common industry standard connector options to meet varying system requirements.
Features
• Telcordia
®
qualified components
• 100 GHz & 200 GHz ITU-T channel spacing
• 2, 4, 8 and 16 channel configurations
• Most industry standard connectors
• Low insertion loss
• High isolation
• Epoxy-free optical path
Applications
• CATV Systems
• Sensor Systems
• 10G Ethernet Systems
• Metro Optical Networks
• Metro Access Networks
Specifications
PARAMETER
Ports
Center Wavelength
Passband @ 0.5 dB
Passband
UNIT
nm nm nm
VALUE
100 GHZ DWDM
2 4
1531-1561 (CH. 20-58)
>0.25
±0.11
Passband Flatness
Insertion Loss (Typ.)
Insertion Loss (Max.) dB dB dB
<0.5
1.4
1.8
Adjacent Channel Isolation dB
Non-Adjacent Channel Isolation dB
>25
>45
Wavelength Thermal Stability nm/°C <0.001
1.6
2.0
IL Thermal Stability
Return Loss
PMD
PDL
Directivity
Operation Temperature
Storage Temperature
LGX 118 Package
Thin Cassette Package
8
2.6
3.2
16
3.8
4.5
200 GHZ DWDM
2 4
1530-1560 (CH. 21-59)
>0.6
±0.25
<0.5
1.4
1.8
>25
>45
<0.002
1.6
2.0
8
2.6
3.2
16
3.8
4.5
db/°C <0.005
dB >45 ps dB dB
°C
°C mm
<0.10
<0.10
>50
-5 to +65
<0.005
<0.10
<0.20
<0.007
<0.10
<0.20
<0.007
<0.15
<0.25
<0.005
>45
<0.10
<0.10
>50
-5 to +65
<0.005
<0.10
<0.20
<0.007
<0.10
<0.20
<0.007
<0.15
<0.25
-40 to +85
Single-width Single-width Double-width Triple-width
-40 to +85
Single-width Single-width Double-width Triple-width
88.9x50.8x8.3
120x80x13 130x87x13 150x115x13 88.9x50.8x8.3 120x80x13 130x87x13 150x115x13
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
136
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00050, Revision 1, 5.24.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Dense WDM (DWDM) Modules
Ordering Information
DWDM —
04
—
Channel Count
02 = 2 Channel
04 = 4 Channel
08 = 8 Channel
16 = 16 Channel
5
Package/Pigtail
1 = Thin Cassette,
1 Meter Pigtail
3 = Thin Cassette,
3 Meter Pigtail
5 = Thin Cassette,
5 Meter Pigtail
L = LGX 118
—
1
Spacing
1 = 100 GHz
2 = 200 GHz
—
20
47
48
49
50
43
44
45
46
39
40
41
42
35
36
37
38
Start Channel
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
31
32
33
34
27
28
29
30
55
56
57
58
51
52
53
54
—
24
48
49
50
51
44
45
46
47
40
41
42
43
36
37
38
39
End Channel
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
32
33
34
35
28
29
30
31
56
57
58
59
52
53
54
55
—
ASC
Connectors
ASC = SC/APC
USC = SC/UPC
ALC = LC/APC
ULC = LC/UPC
X = No connectors
—
ISP
137
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00050, Revision 1, 5.24.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Double-width LGX 118 package shown
Features
• Telcordia
®
qualified components
• 20 nm channel spacing
• 2, 4, 8, and 16 channel configurations
• Most industry standard connectors
• Low insertion loss
• High isolation
• Custom configurations upon request
Applications
• CATV Systems
• Sensor Systems
• 10G Ethernet Systems
• Metro Optical Networks
• Metro Access Networks
Coarse WDM Modules (CWDM)
AFL’s Coarse WDM modules are designed using proven thin-film filter technology providing high isolation, 20nm channel separation and a high level of thermal stability.
CWDM modules are available in 2, 4, 8, and 16 channel configurations and are factory assembled in a thin cassette or rugged LGX ® cassette with industry standard connector options to meet varying system requirements. An optional 1310 nm Mux/Demux Upgrade
Port is available to allow seamless integration of legacy voice, video, and data services.
Specifications
PARAMETER
Ports
Center Wavelength
Passband @ 0.5 dB
Passband
Passband Flatness
Insertion Loss (Typ.)
UNIT VALUE
nm nm nm dB dB
2
1271-1611
> 14
± 6.5
< 0.5
1.4
Insertion Loss (Max.)
Adjacent Channel Isolation dB dB
1.8
> 30
Non-Adjacent Channel Isolation dB > 45
Wavelength Thermal Stability nm/°C < 0.002
4
1.6
2.0
8
1.8
2.5
16
4.3
5.0
IL Thermal Stability
Return Loss
PMD
PDL
Directivity
Operation Temperature
Storage Temperature
LGX 118 Package
Thin Cassette Package
Options mm
1310 Channel Wavelength
1310 Channel Isolation nm dB
1310 Channel Insertion Loss dB dB
°C
°C db/°C < 0.005
dB ps dB
> 45
< 0.10
< 0.10
> 50
-5 to +65
-40 to +85
Single-width
< 0.005
< 0.10
< 0.15
< 0.007
< 0.15
< 0.20
< 0.008
< 0.15
< 0.25
Single-width Double-width Triple-width
88.9 x 50.8 x 8.3 120 x 80 x 13 130 x 87 x 13 150 x 115 x 13
2% Tap, 1310 Upgrade
1260-1360
40 minimum
1.3 maximum
* Includes Connectors
Ordering Information
CWDM —
04
Channel Count
02 = 2 Channel
04 = 4 Channel
08 = 8 Channel
16 = 16 Channel
—
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
5
Package/Pigtail
1 = Thin Cassette,
1 Meter Pigtail
3 = Thin Cassette,
3 Meter Pigtail
5 = Thin Cassette,
5 Meter Pigtail
L = LGX 118
—
1271
Start Wavelength (nm)
1431
1451
1471
1491
1511
1531
1551
1571
1591
1271
1291
1311
1331
1351
1371
1391
1411
—
1331
End Wavelength (nm)
1451
1471
1491
1511
1531
1551
1571
1591
1611
1291
1311
1331
1351
1371
1391
1411
1431
—
B
—
Options
U = 1310 Upgrade Port
T = 2% Tap Port
X = No Option
B = 1310 Upgrade Port
and 2% Tap Port
ASC
Connectors
ASC = SC/APC
USC = SC/UPC
ALC = LC/APC
ULC = LC/UPC
X = No connectors
—
ISP
© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00049, Revision 2, 5.24.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
138
Fiber Management
1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel
LightLink LANSystem
Specifications
• Designed around Telcordia
®
GR-63NEBS
• Aluminum construction per ASTMB209
• Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white
• Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility
• Standard density: up to 18-fiber
• High density: up to 36-fiber
• LGX 118 compatible
• Standard cable stub location is right rear exiting upward
• 1RU Patch and Splice Panel holds up to three splice tray kits
LightLink LANSystem
1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel
The AFL 1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 36 fibers is desired.
The panel design is based on a 1 rack unit height and is provisioned with three LGX
®
118 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates, XFM
®
optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein.
Standard 1RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly.
Standard 1RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and splice trays.
Features
• Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise, and co-location environments
• Most common connector styles and types available
• Compatible with industry standard equipment frames
• Modular design
• Slide-out tray with relief cut-outs for simplified connector access
• Optional splice tray kit for on site conversion to patch and splice panel
• Optional front door key lock for heightened protection of internal components
Dimensions
DEPTH (A)
IN INCHES
13.51
WIDTH (B)
IN INCHES
17.00
HEIGHT (C)
IN INCHES
1.75
Applications
• Telecommunications closets
• Data Centers
• Customer Premise
• LAN / WAN Networks
• Central Offices / Headends
• Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals
• FTTH / FTTB Networks
RACK
UNITS
1
CAPACITY
18 / 36
UNLOADED
WEIGHT
4 lbs.
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00069, Revision 5, 3.5.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
139
LightLink LANSystem
1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel
Ordering Information
Select the seven digit AFL panel part number, specify the color, and choose the loading character desired.
When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required in meters.
Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC).
AFL NO.
FM001344
Color
B
Loading
Charactor
S
Cable Stub
Length (M)
0010
W = White
B = Black
E = Empty
H = Half-loaded with adapters
L = Loaded with adapters and
pigtails (Patch and Splice
only)
S = Preterminated with tight
buffered CPC cable stub
(Riser) (Patch only)
R = Preterminated with OSP
loose tube cable stub
(Patch only)
0002 = 2 meters
0004 = 4 meters etc.
Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 12 PSC adapters (2 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length.
Ordering Information
CONFIGURATION
CON012P—1 RU PATCH PANELS—12 FIBERS—LGX118
EMPTY
12 PSC adapters (2 Six Packs)
12 UST adapters (2 Six Packs)
12 PST adapters (2 Six Packs)
6 UDL (dup) adapters (2 Three Packs)
6 PDL (dup) adapters (2 Three Packs)
12 ASC adapters (2 Six Packs)
12 UFC adapters (2 Six Packs)
AFL NO.
FM001038
FM001344
FM001346
FM001347
FM001353
FM001354
FM001352
FM001349
12 USC (ZR) adapters (2 Six Packs)
12 AFC adapters (2 Six Packs)
CON024HD—1 RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS—24 FIBERS—LGX118
FM001351
FM001350
24 UST adapters (2 Twelve Packs)
24 PST adapters (2 Twelve Packs)
12 PDL (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs)
12 USF (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs)
12 ASF (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs)
FM001355
FM001356
FM001348
FM001357
FM001358
CNS012P—1U PATCH AND SPLICE PANELS—12 FIBERS—LGX118
EMPTY
12 PSC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray
12 UST adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray
12 PST adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray
6 UDL (dup) adapters (2 Three Packs), Splice Tray
FM001328
FM001323
FM001329
FM001325
FM001334
6 PDL (dup) adapters (2 Three Packs), Splice Tray
12 ASC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray
12 UFC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray
FM001335
FM001333
FM001330
12 USC (ZR) adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray
12 AFC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray
FM001332
FM001331
CNS024HD—1 RU HIGH-DENSITY PATCH & SPLICE PANELS—24 FIBERS—LGX118
24 UST adapters (2 Twelve Packs), Splice Tray
24 PST adapters (2 Twelve Packs), Splice Tray
12 USF (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray
12 ASF (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray
FM001336
FM001337
FM001338
FM001339
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
Splice Tray Kit: Single Fusion, 12 fiber, 1RU Patch Panel Standard Density
(1 splice tray)
Splice Tray Kit: Single Fusion, 12 fiber, 1RU Patch Panel High Density
(2 splice trays)
Ribbon Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 1RU Patch Panel Standard
Density (1 splice tray)
Ribbon Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 1RU Patch Panel High Density
(2 splice trays)
Kit, Lock, for CON/CNS Panels
AFL NO.
FM002826-1
FM002826-2
FM002826-1R
FM002826-2R
FM001318
Connector/Adapter Key
TYPE
ASC
ASF
PSC
PSF
USC (PB)
USC (ZR)
USF
PST
UST
AFC
PFC
UFC
ADL
PDL
PLC
UDL (ZR)
UDL (PB)
ULC
DESCRIPTION
SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM
SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM
SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM
LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM
LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
Notes:
1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified.
2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00069, Revision 5, 3.5.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
140
2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel
Specifications
• Designed around Telcordia
®
GR-63NEBS
• Aluminum construction per ASTMB209
• Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white
• Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility
• Standard density: up to 36 fiber
• High density: up to 72 fiber
• LGX 118 compatible
• Standard cable stub location is right rear exiting upward
• 2RU Patch and Splice Panel holds up to four splice tray kits
LightLink LANSystem
2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel
The AFL 2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 72 fibers is desired.
The panel design is based on a 2 rack unit height and is provisioned with three
LGX
®
118 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates,
XFM optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein.
Standard 2RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly.
Standard 2RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and splice trays.
Features
• Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise, and co-location environments
• Most common connector styles and types available
• Compatible with industry standard equipment frames
• Modular design
• Slide-out tray with relief cut-outs for simplified connector access
• Optional splice tray kit for on site conversion to patch and splice panel
• Optional front door key lock for heightened protection of internal components
Applications
• Telecommunications closets
• Data Centers
• Customer Premise
• LAN / WAN Networks
• Central Offices / Headends
• Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals
• FTTH / FTTB Networks
Dimensions
DEPTH (A)
IN INCHES
13.51
WIDTH (B)
IN INCHES
17.00
HEIGHT(C)
IN INCHES
3.50
RACK
UNITS
2
* 72 fiber capacity not available in Patch and Splice configuration.
CAPACITY
36 / 72*
UNLOADED
WEIGHT
5 lbs.
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
141
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00070, Revision 5, 3.5.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightLink LANSystem
2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel
Ordering Information
Select the seven digit AFL panel part number, specify the color, and choose the loading character desired.
When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required in meters.
Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC).
AFL NO.
FM001411
Color
B
Loading
Charactor
S
Cable Stub
Length (M)
0010
W = White
B = Black
E = Empty
H = Half-loaded with adapters
L = Loaded with adapters and
pigtails (Patch and Splice
only)
S = Preterminated with tight
buffered CPC cable stub
(Riser) (Patch only)
R = Preterminated with OSP
loose tube cable stub
(Patch only)
0002 = 2 meters
0004 = 4 meters etc.
Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 24 PSC adapters (4 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length.
Ordering Information
CONFIGURATION
CON024P—2 RU PATCH PANELS—24 FIBERS—LGX118
EMPTY
24 PSC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX (Beige)
24 UST adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX
24 PST adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX
12 UDL (dup) adapters (4 Three Packs) 118 LGX (Blue)
12 PDL (dup) adapters (4 Three Packs) 118 LGX (Beige)
24 ASC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX (Green)
24 UFC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX
24 USC (ZR) adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX (Blue)
24 AFC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX
CNS024P—2U PATCH AND SPLICE PANELS—24 FIBERS—LGX118
EMPTY
24 PSC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray
24 UST adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray
FM001414
FM001411
FM001412
24 PST adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray
12 UDL (dup) adapters (4 three Packs)118 LGX , Splice tray
12 PDL (dup) adapters (4 three Packs)118 LGX , Splice tray
24 ASC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray
24 UFC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray
24 USC (ZR) adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray
24 AFC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray
FM001413
FM001419
FM001420
FM001418
FM001415
FM001417
FM001416
AFL NO.
FM001029
FM001433
FM001434
FM001435
FM001441
FM001442
FM001439
FM001436
FM001438
FM001437
Notes:
1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified.
2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.
Accessories
DESCRIPTION AFL NO.
Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04 (1 splice tray) FM002827-1
Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04 (2 splice trays) FM002827-2
Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04 (3 splice trays) FM002827-3
Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04 (4 splice trays) FM002827-4
Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04, Ribbon
(1 splice tray)
FM002827-1R
FM002827-2R Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04, Ribbon
(2 splice trays)
Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04, Ribbon
(3 splice trays)
Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04, Ribbon
(4 splice trays)
FM002827-3R
FM002827-4R
Kit, Lock, for CON / CNS Panels FM001318
Connector/Adapter Key
TYPE
ASC
ASF
UST
AFC
PFC
UFC
ADL
PDL
PSC
PSF
USC (PB)
USC (ZR)
USF
PST
PLC
UDL (ZR)
UDL (PB)
ULC
DESCRIPTION
SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM
SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM
SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM
LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM
LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00070, Revision 5, 3.5.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
142
3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel
Specifications
• Telcordia
®
GR-63 NEBS Tested
• Aluminum construction per ASTMB209
• Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white
• Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility
• Standard density: up to 48-fiber
• High density: up to 96-fiber
• LGX 118 compatible
• Standard cable stub location is right rear exiting upward
LightLink LANSystem
3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel
The AFL 3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 96 fibers is desired. The panel design is based on a 3 rack unit height with a master plate that is provisioned with nine
LGX ® 118 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates, XFM ® optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein.
Standard 3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly.
Features
• Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise, and co-location environments
• Most common connector styles and types available
• Compatible with industry standard equipment frames
• LGX compatible master plate (118 mm)
• Modular design
• Provides maximum protection of optical components
Applications
• Telecommunications closets
• Data Centers
• Customer Premise
• LAN / WAN Networks
• Central Offices / Headends
• Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals
• FTTH / FTTB Networks
Dimensions
DEPTH (A)
IN INCHES
11.00
WIDTH (B)
IN INCHES
17.00
HEIGHT (C)
IN INCHES
5.25
RACK
UNITS
3
FIBER
CAPACITY
48/96
UNLOADED
WEIGHT
8.4 lbs.
MATERIAL
GAUGE
2.03 mm
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
143
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00077, Revision 5, 5.27.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightLink LANSystem
3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel
Ordering Information
Select the seven digit AFL part number you need, specify black or white, and choose the loading character desired.
AFL NO.
C211291
When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required in meters.
Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC).
Color
B
W = White
B = Black
Loading
Charactor
S
Cable Stub
Length (M)
0010
E = Empty
H = Half-loaded with adapters
S = Preterminated with tight
buffered CPC cable stub
(Riser) (Patch only)
R = Preterminated with OSP
loose tube cable stub
(Patch only)
0002 = 2 meters
0004 = 4 meters etc.
Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 48 PSC adapters (8 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length.
Configuration Part Numbers
All cable clamps offered separately so that customers may choose the correct clamp for their application.
CONFIGURATION
CON048P—3 RU PATCH PANELS—48 FIBERS—LGX118
EMPTY
48 USC (PB) adapters (8 Six Packs)
48 PSC adapters (8 Six Packs)
48 UST adapters (8 Six Packs)
48 PST adapters (8 Six Packs)
24 UDL (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs)
24 PDL (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs)
48 ASC adapters (8 Six Packs)
48 UFC adapters (8 Six Packs)
48 USC (ZR) adapters (8 Six Packs)
48 AFC adapters (8 Six Packs)
48 ULC adapters (8 Six Packs)
AFL NO.
C211291
C211300
C211309
C211336
C211345
FM000181
FM000182
C213928
C213916
C213923
C213919
C213934
24 PSF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs)
24 USF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs)
24 ASF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs)
FM000183
FM000184
FM000185
48 MTRJ adapters (8 Six Packs) FM000186
CON096HD—3 RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS—96 FIBERS—LGX118
96 UST adapters (8 Twelve Packs)
96 PST adapters (8 Twelve Packs)
48 UDL (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs)
FM000187
FM000188
C211349
48 PSF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs)
48 PDL (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs)
48 USF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs)
48 ASF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs)
C211313
C211360
FM000189
FM000190
Notes:
1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified.
2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.
Connector/Adapter Key
TYPE
ASC
PFC
UFC
ADL
PDL
PLC
UDL (ZR)
UDL (PB)
ULC
ASF
PSC
PSF
USC (PB)
USC (ZR)
USF
PST
UST
AFC
DESCRIPTION
SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM
SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM
SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM
LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM
LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00077, Revision 5, 5.27.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
144
4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel
Specifications
• Telcordia ® GR-63 NEBS Tested
• Aluminum construction per ASTMB209
• Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white
• Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility
• Standard density: up to 72-fiber
• High density: up to 144-fiber
• LGX 118 compatible
• Standard cable stub location is right rear exiting upward
LightLink LANSystem
4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel
The AFL 4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 144 fibers is desired.
The panel design is based on a 4 rack unit height with a master plate that is provisioned with 12 LGX ® 118 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates, XFM
®
optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein.
Standard 4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly.
Features
• Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise, and co-location environments
• Most common connector styles and types available
• Compatible with industry standard equipment frames
• LGX compatible master plate and footprint (118 mm)
• Modular design
• Provides maximum protection of optical components
Applications
• Telecommunications closets
• Data Centers
• Customer Premise
• LAN / WAN Networks
• Central Offices / Headends
• Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals
• FTTH / FTTB Networks
Dimensions
DEPTH (A)
IN INCHES
11.00
WIDTH (B)
IN INCHES
17.00
HEIGHT (C)
IN INCHES
7.00
RACK
UNITS
4
FIBER
CAPACITY
72/96/144
UNLOADED
WEIGHT
9 lbs.
MATERIAL
GAUGE
2.03 mm
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
145
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00071, Revision 6, 5.27.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightLink LANSystem
4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel
Ordering Information
Select the seven digit AFL panel part number, specify the color, and choose the loading character desired.
When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required in meters.
Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC).
AFL NO.
C211381
Color
B
W = White
B = Black
Loading
Charactor
S
Cable Stub
Length (M)
0010
E = Empty
H = Half-loaded with adapters
S = Preterminated with tight
buffered CPC cable stub
(Riser) (Patch only)
R = Preterminated with OSP
loose tube cable stub
(Patch only)
0002 = 2 meters
0004 = 4 meters etc.
Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 72 PSC adapters (12 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length.
Ordering Information
CONFIGURATION
CON072P—4 RU PATCH PANELS—72 FIBERS—LGX118
EMPTY
72 USC (PB) adapters (12 Six Packs)
72 PSC adapters (12 Six Packs)
72 UST adapters (12 Six Packs)
72 PST adapters (12 Six Packs)
36 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)
36 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)
72 ASC adapters (12 Six Packs)
72 UFC adapters (12 Six Packs)
72 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Six Packs)
72 AFC adapters (12 Six Packs)
72 ULC adapters (12 Six Packs)
36 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)
36 USF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)
36 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)
72 MTRJ adapters (12 Six Packs)
AFL NO.
C211372
C211381
C211390
C211417
C211426
FM000191
FM000192
C213955
C213941
C213952
C213946
C213959
FM000193
FM000136
FM000194
FM000195
CON096P—4 RU PATCH PANELS—96 FIBERS—LGX118
EMPTY
96 USC (PB) adapters (12 Eight Packs)
96 PSC adapters (12 Eight Packs)
96 UST adapters (12 Eight Packs)
96 PST adapters (12 Eight Packs)
96 ASC adapters (12 Eight Packs)
96 UFC adapters (12 Eight Packs)
96 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Eight Packs)
96 AFC adapters (12 Eight Packs)
96 MTRJ adapters (12 Eight Packs)
FM000344
FM000202
FM000203
C213964
FM000204
C213982
C213970
C213977
C213973
FM000205
Notes:
1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified.
2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.
CONFIGURATION AFL NO.
CON144HD—4 RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS—144 FIBERS—LGX118
EMPTY
72 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)
72 ADL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)
FM000344
C211432
FM000345
72 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)
72 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)
72 USF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)
72 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)
144 UST adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
144 PST adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
144 UFC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
144 USC (PB) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
144 ASC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
C211396
C211439
FM000196
FM000197
FM000198
FM000199
FM000200
FM000133
FM000201
Connector/Adapter Key
TYPE
ASC
ASF
AFC
PFC
UFC
ADL
PDL
PLC
PSC
PSF
USC (PB)
USC (ZR)
USF
PST
UST
UDL (ZR)
UDL (PB)
ULC
DESCRIPTION
SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM
SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM
SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM
LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM
LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00071, Revision 6, 5.27.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
146
5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel
Specifications
• Telcordia
®
GR-63 NEBS Tested
• Aluminum construction per ASTMB209
• Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white
• Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility
• Standard density: up to 144-fiber
• High density: up to 288-fiber
• LGX 170 compatible
• Standard cable stub location is right rear exiting upward
LightLink LANSystem
5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel
The AFL 5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 288 fibers is desired.
The panel design is based on a 5 rack unit height with a master plate that is provisioned with twelve LGX
®
170 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates, XFM
®
optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein.
Standard 5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly. High density panels utilize two
144 fiber stubs for 288 terminations.
Features
• Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise,and co-location environments
• Most common connector styles and types available
• Compatible with industry standard equipment frames
• LGX compatible master plate (170 mm)
• Modular design
• Provides maximum protection of optical components
Applications
• Telecommunications closets
• Data Centers
• Customer Premise
• LAN / WAN Networks
• Central Offices / Headends
• Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals
• FTTH / FTTB Networks
Dimensions
DEPTH (A)
IN INCHES
11.00
WIDTH (B)
IN INCHES
17.00
HEIGHT (C)
IN INCHES
8.75
RACK
UNITS
5
FIBER
CAPACITY
144/288
UNLOADED
WEIGHT
9 lbs.
MATERIAL
GAUGE
2.03 mm
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
147
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00080, Revision 6, 5.27.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightLink LANSystem
5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel
Ordering Information
Select the seven digit AFL panel part number, specify the color, and choose the loading character desired.
When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required in meters.
Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC).
AFL NO.
C211462
Color
B
W = White
B = Black
Loading
Charactor
S
Cable Stub
Length (M)
0010
E = Empty
H = Half-loaded with adapters
S = Preterminated with tight
buffered CPC cable stub
(Riser) (Patch only)
R = Preterminated with OSP
loose tube cable stub
(Patch only)
0002 = 2 meters
0004 = 4 meters etc.
Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 144 PSC adapters (12 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length.
Ordering Information
CONFIGURATION AFL NO.
CON144P—5 RU PATCH PANELS—144 FIBERS—LGX170
EMPTY C211453
144 USC (PB) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
144 PSC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
144 UST adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
C211462
C211471
C211498
144 PST adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
72 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)
72 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)
144 ASC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
144 UFC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
144 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
C211507
FM000206
FM000207
C214009
C213995
C214006
72 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)
72 USF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)
72 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)
144 MTRJ adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
FM000208
FM000209
FM000210
FM000211
CON288HD—5 RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS (USES TWO 144 STUBS)—LGX170
144 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
144 ADL (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
144 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
144 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
144 USF (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
144 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)
C211511
FM000346
C211522
C211475
FM000212
FM000213
Notes:
1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified.
2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.
Connector/Adapter Key
TYPE
ASC
ASF
AFC
PFC
UFC
ADL
PDL
PLC
PSC
PSF
USC (PB)
USC (ZR)
USF
PST
UST
UDL (ZR)
UDL (PB)
ULC
DESCRIPTION
SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM
SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM
SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM
LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM
LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00080, Revision 6, 5.27.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
148
6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel
LightLink LANSystem
6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel
The AFL 6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 96 fibers is desired. The two panel design is based on a 6-rack unit height comprised of a 3RU Termination Patch Panel and a 3RU
Optical Splice Shelf. The 3RU Termination Patch Panel is provisioned with nine LGX ® 118 compatible mounting positions. The 3RU Optical Splice Shelf utilizes two STF-48 telescoping splice drawers.
Standard 6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays.
Specifications
• Designed around Telcordia
®
GR-63NEBS
• Aluminum construction per ASTMB209
• Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white
• Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility
• Standard density: up to 48-fiber
• High density: up to 96-fiber
• Fiber storage capacity—one meter per spliced fiber (3 mm jacket)
• Uses two STF-48 telescoping splice drawers
• Two panel package—3U patch, 3U splice
• Nine LGX 118 mm positions
Features
• Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise and co-location environments
• Most common connector styles and types available
• Compatible with industry standard equipment frames
• LGX-compatible master plate (118 mm)
• Modular design
• Compact and versatile method of organizing splicing and connectivity
• Provides maximum protection of optical components
Applications
• Telecommunications closets
• Data Centers
• Customer Premise
• LAN / WAN Networks
• Central Offices / Headends
• Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals
• FTTH / FTTB Networks
Dimensions
DEPTH (A)
IN INCHES
11.00
WIDTH (B)
IN INCHES
17.00
HEIGHT (C)
IN INCHES
10.5
RACK
UNITS
6
FIBER
CAPACITY
48/96
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
149
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00073, Revision 5, 5.27.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightLink LANSystem
6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel
Ordering Information
Select the seven-digit AFL panel part number, specify the color and choose the loading character desired.
Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with, master plate, adapter plates, 48 USC adapters (8 Six packs), splice drawer (48 and up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp.
AFL NO.
C211543
Color
B
Loading
Charactor
S
W = White
B = Black
E = Empty
H = Half-loaded with adapters
L = Loaded with adapters and pigtails
Empty - Includes master plate, mounting hardware, cable clamp.
Unloaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), hardware, cable clamp.
Loaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp.
Configuration Part Numbers
CONFIGURATION AFL NO.
CNS048P—6U PATCH & SPLICE PANELS
(1 EA. 3U PATCH, 3U SPLICE)
—LGX118
EMPTY
48 USC (PB) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position)
48 PSC adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position)
C211534
C211543
C211552
48 UST adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position)
48 PST adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position)
C211579
C211588
24 UDL (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000234
24 PDL (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000235
48 ASC adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C210928
48 UFC adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C210913
48 USC (ZR) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position)
AFC adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position)
C210922
C210917
ULC adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C210931
24 PSF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000236
24 USF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000237
24 ASF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000238
48 MTRJ adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000239
CNS096HD—6U HIGH DENSITY PATCH & SPLICE PANELS—LGX118
96 UST adapters (8 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawer 2-48 position)
96 PST adapters (8 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position)
FM000240
FM000241
48 UDL (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C211594
48 PSF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C211558
48 PDL (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C211601
48 USF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000242
48 ASF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000243
Notes:
1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified.
2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
STF-48 Telescoping Splice Drawer
Connector/Adapter Key
TYPE
ASC
ASF
PSC
PSF
USC (PB)
USC (ZR)
USF
PST
UST
AFC
PFC
UFC
ADL
PDL
PLC
UDL (ZR)
UDL (PB)
ULC
DESCRIPTION
SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM
SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM
SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM
LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM
LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
AFL NO.
911442-00-00
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00073, Revision 5, 5.27.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
150
7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel
Specifications
• Designed around Telcordia
®
GR-63NEBS
• Aluminum construction per ASTMB209
• Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white
• Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility
• Standard density: up to 72-fiber
• High density: up to 144-fiber
• Fiber storage capacity—one meter per spliced fiber (3 mm jacket)
• Uses three STF-48 telescoping splice drawers
• Two panel package—4U patch and
4U splice
• 12 LGX 118 mm positions
LightLink LANSystem
7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel
The AFL 7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 144 fibers is desired.The two panel design is based on a 7 rack unit height comprised of a 4RU Termination Patch
Panel and a 3RU Optical Splice Shelf.The 4RU Termination Patch Panel includes a master plate that is provisioned with 12 LGX ® 118 compatible mounting positions.The 3RU
Optical Splice Shelf utilizes three STF-48 telescoping splice drawers.
Standard 7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays.
Features
• Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise, and co-location environments
• Most common connector styles and types available
• Compatible with industry standard equipment frames
• LGX-compatible master plate (118 mm)
• Modular design
• Compact and versatile method of organizing splicing and connectivity
Dimensions
DEPTH (A)
IN INCHES
11.00
WIDTH (B)
IN INCHES
17.00
HEIGHT (C)
IN INCHES
12.25
• Provides maximum protection of optical components
Applications
• Telecommunications closets
• Data Centers
• Customer Premise
• LAN / WAN Networks
• Central Offices / Headends
• Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals
• FTTH / FTTB Networks
RACK UNITS
7
FIBER CAPAC-
ITY
72/144
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
151
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00074, Revision 6, 5.27.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightLink LANSystem
7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel
Ordering Information
Select the seven-digit AFL number, specify the color and choose the loading character desired.
Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with master plate, adapter plates,
48 USC adapters (8 Six packs), splice drawer (48 and up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp.
AFL NO.
C211624
Color
B
Loading
Charactor
L
W = White
B = Black
E = Empty
H = Half-loaded with adapters
L = Loaded with adapters and pigtails
Empty - Includes master plate, mounting hardware, cable clamp.
Unloaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), hardware, cable clamp.
Loaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp.
Ordering Information
CONFIGURATION AFL NO.
CNS072P—7U PATCH & SPLICE PANELS
(1 EA. 4U PATCH, 3U SPLICE)
—LGX118
EMPTY C211615
72 USC (PB) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211624
72 PSC adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211633
72 UST adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position)
72 PST adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position)
C211660
C211669
36 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000244
36 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000245
72 ASC adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C210958
72 UFC adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C210946
72 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C210953
72 AFC adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C210949
72 ULC adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C210964
36 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000246
36 USF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000247
36 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000248
72 MTRJ adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000249
CONFIGURATION AFL NO.
CNS144HD—7RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS
(1 EA. 4U PATCH, 3U SPLICE)
—LGX118
72 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211673
72 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211637
72 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211684
72 USF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000250
72 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000251
144 UST adapters (12 Twelve Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000252
144 PST adapters (12 Twelve Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000253
144 UFC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000254
144 USC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000255
144 ASC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000256
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
STF-48 Telescoping Splice Drawer
AFL NO.
911442-00-00
CNS096P—7U PATCH & SPLICE PANELS
(1 EA. 4U PATCH, 3U SPLICE)
—LGX118
EMPTY
96 UST adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position)
96 UFC adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position)
C210967
C210971
C210976
96 AFC adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position) C210982
96 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position) C210985
96 ASC adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position) C210989
96 MTRJ adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position) FM000257
Notes:
1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified.
2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.
Connector/Adapter Key
TYPE
ASC
ASF
DESCRIPTION
SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
PSC
PSF
SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM
USC (PB) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM
USC (ZR) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
USF SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
PST ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
UST
AFC
PFC
ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
UFC
ADL
PDL
FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM
PLC LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
UDL (ZR) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
UDL (PB) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM
ULC LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00074, Revision 6, 5.27.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
152
8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel
Specifications
• Designed around Telcordia ® GR-63NEBS
• Aluminum construction per ASTMB209
• Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white
• Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility
• Standard density: up to 144-fiber
• Fiber storage capacity—one meter per spliced fiber (3 mm jacket)
• Uses three STF-48 telescoping splice drawers
• Two panel package Standard Density:
5U patch and 3U splice
• 12 LGX 170 mm positions
LightLink LANSystem
8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel
The AFL 8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 144 fibers is desired. The standard density, two panel design is based on an 8 rack unit height comprised of a 5RU
Termination Patch Panel and a 3RU Optical Splice Shelf. The 5RU Termination Patch Panel includes a master plate that is provisioned with twelve LGX
®
170 compatible mounting positions. The 3RU Optical Splice Shelf utilizes three STF-48 telescoping splice drawers.
Standard 8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays.
Features
• Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise, and co-location environments
• Most common connector styles and types available
• Compatible with industry standard equipment frames
• LGX compatible master plate (170 mm)
• Modular design
• Compact and versatile method of organizing splicing and connectivity
Dimensions
PANEL VERSION
Standard
DEPTH (A)
IN INCHES
11.00
WIDTH (B)
IN INCHES
17.00
• Provides maximum protection of optical components
Applications
• Telecommunications closets
• Data Centers
• Customer Premise
• LAN / WAN Networks
• Central Offices / Headends
• Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals
• FTTH / FTTB Networks
HEIGHT (C)
IN INCHES
14.00
RACK
UNITS
8
FIBER CAPACITY
144
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
153
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00076, Revision 5, 5.27.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightLink LANSystem
8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel
Ordering Information
Select the seven-digit AFL number, specify the color and choose the loading character desired.
Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with, master plate, adapter plates, 144 USC adapters (12 Twelve packs), splice drawer
(48 and up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp.
AFL NO.
C211705
Color
B
Loading
Charactor
L
W = White
B = Black
E = Empty
H = Half-loaded with adapters
L = Loaded with adapters and pigtails
Empty - Includes master plate, mounting hardware, cable clamp.
Unloaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), hardware, cable clamp.
Loaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp.
Configuration Part Numbers
CONFIGURATION AFL NO.
CNS144P—8U PATCH & SPLICE PANELS
(1 EA. 4U PATCH, 3U SPLICE)
—LGX170
EMPTY C211696
144 USC (PB) adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211705
144 PSC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211714
144 UST adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211741
144 PST adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211750
72 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000258
72 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000259
144 ASC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211021
144 UFC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211007
144 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000260
72 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000261
72 USF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000262
72 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000263
144 MTRJ adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000264
Notes:
1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified.
2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.
Accessories
DESCRIPTION
STF-48 Telescoping Splice Drawer
Connector/Adapter Key
TYPE
ASC
ASF
PSC
PSF
DESCRIPTION
SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM
USC (PB) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM
USC (ZR) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
USF SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
PST
UST
AFC
ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
PFC
UFC
ADL
FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
PDL
PLC
LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM
LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM
UDL (ZR) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM
UDL (PB) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM
ULC LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM
AFL NO.
911442-00-00
154
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00076, Revision 5, 5.27.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Poli-MOD
®
Patch and Splice Module
12-Fiber SC/UPC Configuration
Poli-MOD
®
Patch and Splice Module
AFL's new Poli-MOD is an innovative patch and splice module, which offers an inventive and effective means to accommodate up to 24 fiber interconnections in an industry-standard, single-slot LGX ® 118 footprint. The new Poli-MOD offers a unique and robust way to secure cable without the need for time-wasting, tie-wrap alternatives.
Additionally, the module leverages a creative snap-in splice sleeve cradle to securely manage both single and ribbon fiber arrangements. These features provide the capacity to outfit a standard 4RU rack-mount panel with up to 288-fiber interconnections.
The Poli-MOD is also offered in an arrangement that supports the low loss budget requirements of Distributed Antenna System (DAS) networks. This is accomplished through the elimination of an interconnection point while providing a robust splicing environment for rack and wall-mount panel applications.
Features
• 24-fiber interconnection capacity
• LGX 118 compatibility (single-slot module)
• Effective and time-saving cable mounting mechanism (no tie-wraps necessary)
• Inventive splice sleeve cradle
• Available in SC, LC, ST and FC connector arrangements
• Organized fiber routing
• Fixed solution, no moving parts
• Multi-directional cable entry access
• DIN rail mountable (with DIN Mount Kit)
DAS Poli-MOD
Applications
• Telecommunications Closets
• Data Centers
• Customer Premise
• Local Area Networks
• Wide Area Networks
• Central Offices
• Hub Sites
• Cabinets
• Remote Terminals
• Distributed Antenna Systems (DAS)
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
155
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00089, Revision 3, 5.18.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Poli-MOD
®
Patch and Splice Module
Ordering Information
Example: PM-L-12-ASC-0-S-01
PM L 12 ASC
Configuration
E = Empty (Splicing Only)
H = Half Loaded
(Adapter Plate only)
L = Loaded
(Adapter Plate & Pigtails)
D = DAS Poli-MOD
1
Fiber/Connector Count
06 = 6 Fibers/Connectors
12 = 12 Fibers/Connectors
24 = 24 Fibers/Connectors 2
XX = Empty
1. DAS Poli-MOD requires specialty packaging and is packaged as "1 Poli-MOD per box" ONLY.
2. 24 Fibers/Connectors are only available in a LC Duplex configuration.
3. Angle and Ultra-Polished connector types are only available with single-mode fiber configurations.
Connector Type 3
ASC = Angle-Polished SC
USC = Ultra-Polished SC
PSC = Multimode SC
ALC = Angle-Polished LC
ULC = Ultra-Polished LC
PLC = Multimode LC
UST = Ultra-Polished ST
PST = Multimode ST
AFC = Angle-Polished FC
UFC = Ultra-Polished FC
PFC = Multimode FC
XXX = Empty
Connector Color Codes
CONNECTOR
APC (Angled Polish Connector)
UPC (Ultra Polish Connector)
PC-OM1
PC-OM2
PC-OM3 / PC-OM4
COLOR
Green
Blue
Beige
Black
Aqua
0
Fiber Type
0 = Single-mode
(G.657.A1 BIF)
1 = 62.5 μm (OM1)
2 = 50 μm (OM2)
3 = 50 μm (OM3)
4 = 50 μm (OM4)
X = Empty
S
Fiber Arrangement
S = Single/Standard
R = Ribbon
3 = 3 mm, 3 meter DAS
X = No Fiber
(Half Loaded or Empty)
01
Packaging
01 = 1 Poli-MOD per box*
06 = 6 Poli-MODs per box
12 = 12 Poli-MODs per box
Poli-MOD Kits/Accessories
DESCRIPTION
Poli-MOD Cable Mounting Clip Kit
Poli-MOD Spiral Wrap Kit
Fusion Splice Sleeve, FP-03, 40 mm
Adapter Bracket for Mounting Single Poli-MOD
Corning CCH and PCH 145 mm Adapter Bracket
DIN Mount Kit, LGX ® 118
AFL NO.
FM003053
FM003280
S000206
FM000948-B
FM001636
FM003394
Dimensions
6.07 in. (154 mm)
1.14 in.
(29 mm)
4.14 in.
(105 mm)
5.12 in.
(130 mm)
156
© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00089, Revision 3, 5.18.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Pigtail Assemblies for Patch and Splice Panels
Pigtail Assemblies for Patch and Splice Panels
AFL’s pigtail assemblies help eliminate labor-intensive field termination, yet guarantee reliable performance. Featuring a unified construction allowing for easy fiber identification and rapid installation, these assemblies are built to exceed all TIA and Telcordia requirements.
Splicer Connector Specifications
PARAMETER
Cable Type
Insertion Loss
Return Loss
Operating Temperature (900 µm Fiber Coating)
PVC
Nylon
TPEE
VALUE
250 µm, 900 µm
< 0.15 dB
> 40 dB
-40ºC to 75ºC
0ºC to 75ºC
-25ºC to 75ºC
Ordering Information
POLISH
FIBER
TYPE
CONNECTOR INTERFACE AFL NO.
SC
CPC PIGTAIL KITS, 3 METER, 12-FIBER
ST
APC
UPC
PC
PC
PC
SMF C152906-0003 —
LC
CS007719-0003
SMF C165943-0003 C152671-0003 C223369-0003
62.5 µm C165463-0003 C223366-0003 C223373-0003
50 µm CS007672-0003 CS007674-0003 CS007676-0003
50 µm LO CS007673-0003 CS007675-0003 CS007677-0003
PC
PC
PC
900 µm TIGHT-BUFFERED PIGTAIL KITS, 3 METER, 12-FIBER
APC
UPC
SMF
SMF
C223312-0003
C223492-0003
— CS003981-0003
CS003979-0003 CS001037-0003
62.5 µm
50 µm
CS000386-0003
CS001373-0003
50 µm LO CS003056-0003
CS002150-0003 CS002067-0003
CS002136-0003 CS002081-0003
CS003980-0003 CS003058-0003
Jumper Specifications
PARAMETER
Insertion Loss
SM
MM
Return Loss
SM
MM
Cable Bend Radius
Standard
Bend Insensitive
Durability
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature max max max max min min
VALUE
LC
0.3
0.5
-55.0 dB
-20.0 dB
<30 mm
<15 mm
200 cycles
-40ºC to +85ºC
-40ºC to +85ºC
SC
0.3
0.5
-55.0 dB
ST
0.5
0.5
-55.0 dB
FC
0.3
0.5
-55.0 dB
LC-APC
0.3
-65.0 dB
SC-APC
0.5
-65.0 dB
MT
0.75
0.6
-55.0 dB
-20.0 dB
500 cycles
157
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00096, Revision 4, 4.21.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
XFM
®
MPO Optical Cassettes
AL
PA
TC
H & SPLICE EN
CLO
SU
IC
Fiber Optic Cable
Applications
• Data centers
• LAN, WAN and SAN
• Interoffice cross-connects
• Campus environments
Xpress Fiber Management
®
(XFM)
MPO Optical Cassettes
AFL’s Xpress Fiber Management Optical Cassette product line is a family of preterminated fanout modules that streamline the deployment of optical network infrastructure.
The primary function of these products is to break out multi-fiber ribbon connectors to simplex or duplex style connectors for connection to adjacent network elements.
The Xpress Fiber Management Optical Cassette solution features low-loss MPO style trunk cable assemblies. These cassettes are available in the industry standard LGX ® footprint as well as a selection of Corning Cable Systems ™ footprints to support embedded base installations. All modules feature a durable powder coat finish, and are compatible with all 1U-4U LANSystem platforms. All modules are clearly labeled with a silk-screened "A" and "B" positioning reference to ensure proper polarity is maintained in the network, referenced to the polarity convention being deployed.
Features
• 12- and 24- port configurations
• ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 compliant
• Single-slot LGX packages
• Compatible with LANSystem and WME hardware
• Available in black with rear
MPO connection(s)
• SMF, 62.5 µm MMF and
50 µm MMF supported
• SC- and LC-MPO standard configurations
• ST- and FC-MPO configurations available on special order
Optical Performance Data
PARAMETER
Max IL (dB)
Typical IL (dB)
Reflectance (dB)
LC - MPO
1.15
0.6
-55
Single-mode Fiber (OS1)
LCAPC - MPO
1.15
0.6
-65
Notes:
1. Single-mode IL test wavelengths 1310 nm and 155 0nm
2. Multimode IL test wavelengths 850 nm and 1300 nm
3. Single-mode RL test wavelengths 1310 nm and 1550 nm
4. Multimode RL test wavelengths 850 nm and 1300 nm
SC - MPO
1.3
0.6
-55
SCAPC - MPO
1.3
0.6
-65
ST - MPO
1.3
0.6
-55
Technical Specifications:
1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3
2. Telcordia ® GR-326-CORE compliant single fiber connectors
3. Telcordia GR-1435-CORE compliant multi-fiber connectors
Ordering Information
FIBER COUNT,
CONNECTOR
OPTION
12F, LC
24F, LC
12F, SC
12F, ST
SINGLE-MODE
UPC - MPO
(MALE, APC)
APC - MPO
(Male, APC)
FM000090-B FM001477-B
FM000691-B FM001653-B
FM000087-B FM001465-B
FM000093-B N/A
MULTIMODE
50 µm LOMMF OM4
PC - MPO
(Male, PC)
FM000273-B
62.5 µm OM1
PC - MPO
(Male, PC)
FM000092-B
FM000692-B FM000663-B
FM000272-B
FM000274-B
FM000089-B
FM000095-B
Multimode Fiber
(OM1, OM2 and 50 µm Laser Optimized)
LC - MPO SC - MPO ST - MPO
1.15
0.6
-30
1.3
0.6
-30
1.3
0.6
-30
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
© 2003, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00117, Revision 5, 6.4.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
158
AL
PA
TC
H & SPLICE EN
CLO
SU
IC
Fiber Optic Cable
Xpress Fiber Management
®
(XFM)
MPO Optical Cassettes
Ordering Information – Accessories
DESCRIPTION
145 mm Adapter Bracket
AFL NO.
FM001636
NOTE: Allows standard LGX modules, such as AFL’s Poli-Mod Interconnect Module and the XFM Optical Cassette, to be mounted into existing Corning Cable Systems
™
CCH series and PCH series racks and wall mount products.
Dimensions
128.0
28.9
104.6
130.0
ADAPTERS SHOWN
FOR REFERENCE ONLY
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
159
© 2003, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00117, Revision 5, 6.4.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Thin Film Filter (TFF) Compact Series CWDM
CWDM 4-Channel Mini Module
CWDM 8-Channel Mini Module
Thin Film Filter (TFF) Compact Series CWDM
AFL’s TFF compact series CWDM modules deliver reliable performance and flexibility in every network application – from cellular backhaul and metro Ethernet to access and security. With its reduced package size, this new outside plant CWDM module has added flexibility, making deployment options more convenient.
This CWDM series is based on proven Thin Film Filter technology, offering low insertion loss and high thermal stability over the entire outside plant operating temperature range. Numerous configurations are available to meet unique needs and support new or existing network architectures. Typical options include a variety of configurations
(mux, demux, and balanced), upgrade ports (1310, C-Band, and others), test / monitoring ports and multiple termination options.
Features
• Low insertion loss
• Compact size
• High thermal stability
• Telcordia GR-1221-CORE compliant
• RoHS 6/6 compliant
Applications
• CWDM systems
• Metro ethernet / access networks
• Cellular backhaul networks
Specifications
PARAMETER
Operating Wavelength
Channel Spacing
Center Wavelength
Pass Band
1310 Upgrade Port Pass Band
1310 Upgrade Port Insertion Loss
CWDM Channel Insertion Loss
CWDM Adjacent Channel Isolation
CWDM Non-adjacent Channel
Isolation
PDL
PMD
Return Loss
Directivity
Maximum Input Power
Package Size
Operating Temperature
UNIT
nm nm nm nm nm dB dB dB dB dB ps dB dB mW
Mm
°C
WITHOUT UPGRADE
PORT WITH 1310 NM UPGRADE PORT
4 Channel 8 Channel 4 Channel 8 Channel
≤ 2.0
—
—
≤ 0.1
≤ 2.5
20
Customer specified
± 6.5
1270~1350
1.0
60 (l) x 35 (w) x 6 (d)
* Actual optical specifications will vary based on product configuration
1. Higher and lower channel counts available
1471~1611
≥ 30
≥ 45
≤ 0.2
≤ 2.6
≤ 0.25
≤ 3.4
≥ 45
≥ 50
≤ 300
70 (l) x 45 (w) x 9 (d)
-40 ~ +85
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
160
© 2010, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00048, Revision 1, 10.30.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Interchangeable Splice Trays for Fiber Optic Splice Closures and Fiber Enclosures
LG-410
LL-4848
LG-500
Optical Splice
Trays
LL-2448-485
LG-600
LL-2448
LL-400s
LL-400b
© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00133, Revision 0, 8.5.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Aerial Weathertight Splice Closures
LightGuard
®
(LG) Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures
LightGuard
®
Aerial Weathertight
Fiber Optic Splice Closures
The AFL family of Aerial Weathertight Splice Closures is designed to provide a cost-effective solution for your aerial splicing needs.
Quality engineering reduces the installation time, training and complexity associated with fiber splicing in the field. The closures have all been designed to be installed without the need for special tools, heat, adhesives, drills or any powered equipment.
Durable and easy to install, these closures will improve productivity, reduce labor expenses and last the life of the plant.
Features member tie downs provide for cable additions without disturbing those previously installed grommet design provides for a weathertight and insect seal and require only a common can wrench for installation
•
®
GR-771 aerial weathertight closure requirements
Specifications
PARAMETER
Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass,
Mechanical
Splice Tray Capacity - Single, Mass
Cable Ports
Cable Entrance
Cable Sizes (O.D.)
LG-410-U-0
72, 288, 36
3, 2
4-8
In-line, Butt
4 @ 0.3-0.8"
LG-420-U-0
12, 48, 12 n/a, n/a
4-6
In-line (taut sheath)
4 @ 0.3-0.8"
LG-500-U-0
96, 288, 36
3, 2
4-8
In-line, Butt
4 @ 0.3-0.83"
Up to 8 with Dual Grommet Kits
4 @ 0.3-0.65"
4 @ 0.3-0.5"
Up to 6 with Dual Grommet Kits
2 @ 0.3-0.77"
2 @ 0.3-0.65"
2 @ 0.3-0.5"
CLOSURE TEST
1, 2
Cable Retention (100 lbs.)
Impact Resistance (0-40 °C)
Chemical Resistance
Cable Flexing
Dust (Weather Tightness)
Driving Rain
Rodent Test
Dimensions
(L x W x D) in. (cm)
Weight lbs. (kg)
Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
36.00 x 8.00 x 4.00
(91.44 x 20.32 x 10.16)
8.5 (3.86)
Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
36.00 x 8.00 x 4.00
(91.44 x 20.32 x 10.16)
8.5 (3.86)
Note 1: Tested to Telcordia GR-771-Core and Aerial Strand requirements
Note 2: Not all Telcordia tests are listed due to space constraints; All closures are designed and tested to appropriate aerial test requirements
Up to 8 with Dual Grommet Kits
4 @ 0.3-0.65"
4 @ 0.3-0.5"
Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
27.00 x 8.25 x 4.00
(68.58 x 20.96 x 10.16)
6.4 (2.90)
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
LG-600-U-0
288, 1152, 96
12, 8
6-12 (6 per end)
In-line, Butt
6 @ 0.4-1.04"
Up to 12 with Dual Grommet
Kits
6 @ 0.4-0.87"
6 @ 0.5"
Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
27.00 x 11.25 x 7.50
(68.58 x 28.58 x 19.05)
18 (8.16)
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00065, Revision 5, 2.3.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
162
LG-410 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure
Features cable ports (expandable to eight cable entrances) mass or mechanical splicing system and requires only a common can wrench for installation rating required by Telcordia to meet Telcordia ® aerial and
UV resistance requirements
LightGuard
®
410 Aerial Weathertight
Fiber Optic Splice Closure
The AFL LightGuard (LG) 410 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for small to medium count fiber splicing (< 72 single or 288 mass) in aerial applications and provides additional fiber bundle storage with its extended length design and requires only a common can wrench for installation.
Specifications
PARAMETER
Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical
Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single, Mass
Cable Entrance Configuration
Cable Ports
Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.)
Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm)
Weight - lbs. (kg)
VALUE
72, 288, 36
3, 2
In-line, Butt
4-8
4 @ 0.3-0.8"
Up to 8 with Dual Grommet Kits
4 @ 0.3-0.65"
4 @ 0.3-0.5"
36.00 x 8.00 x 4.00 (91.44 x 20.32 x 10.16)
8.5 (3.86)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Aerial Weathertight Universal Fiber Optic Splice Closure, up to 72 Single fusion splices, 4 cable ports expandable to 8. Equipped w/ 4 self sealing ports, (2) grounding terminals and standard length aerial hangars.
Does not include splice trays or cable grounding kits.
Closure Extension Kit - Used to join multiple closures for extended sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers
Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 24 Single fused fibers
(maximum of 3 trays in LG-410)
Universal Splice Tray - Stores 24 Single fusion or 4 Mass fusion sleeves/48 Fibers (maximum of 2 trays in LG-410)
Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 4 Mass fusion sleeves/48 fibers
(maximum of 2 trays in LG-410)
Single Fusion Splice Tray Stores 48 Single Fused Fibers
6-Port Grommet Kit
Dual Grommet Cable Expansion Kit - Includes (2) LG-400 Dual
Grommets and Cable Hardware
Dual Grommet Replacement Kit - Includes: (10) Dual Grommets for the
LG-400 Series Closures
Grommet Replacement Kit, Kit - Includes: (10) Standard (single port)
Grommets for the LG-400 Series Closures
Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG
Extended Aerial Hanger Kit
Adjustable Aerial Hanger Bracket Kit
MODEL NO.
LG-410-U-0
LG-400/500
LL-2400
LL-2448
LL-4800
LG-400-S
AFL NO.
FC000022
911499-00-00
91710-06
911289-00-02
91711-07
LL-2448-48S FA000045
LG-400/500
LG-400/LG-500
Dual Grommet Kit
FC000573
911386-00-01
LG-400-Dual-Kit 911495-00-00
911496-00-00
CGH-4 FC000024
LG-400/500 911497-00-00
LG-400/500/600 FC000572
* See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00135, Revision 4, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
163
LG-420 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure
Features
• Four individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports (expandable to six cable entrances)
• Taut Sheath splice module accommodates up to twelve fusion splices and supports storage of up to twelve optical connector adapters
• Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system and requires only a common can wrench for installation
• Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia
• Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia
®
aerial and UV resistance requirements
• Protective channel allowing taut fibers or bundles to pass through the closure
• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed
LightGuard
®
420 Aerial Weathertight
Fiber Optic Splice Closure
The AFL LightGuard (LG) 420 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed to allow for Taut Sheath (no slack) splicing in aerial applications such as repairing cable sheath and fibers or providing mid-span access. A common can wrench is only required for installation.
Specifications
PARAMETER
Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical
Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single, Mass
Cable Entrance Configuration
Cable Ports
Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.)
Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm)
Weight - lbs. (kg)
VALUE
12, 48, 12 n/a, n/a
In-line (taut sheath)
4-8
4 @ 0.3-0.8"
Up to 6 with Dual Grommet Kits
2 @ 0.3-0.8"
2 @ 0.3-0.65"
2 @ 0.3-0.5"
36.00 x 8.00 x 4.00 (91.44 x 20.32 x 10.16)
8.5 (3.86)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Aerial Weathertight Universal Taut Sheath Splice Closure -
Includes: (2) 6 fiber single fusion splice organizers, (2) grounding terminals and 4 individual self sealing ports. Expandable to 8 cable ports.
Does not include cable grounding kits.
Closure Extension Kit - Used to join multiple closures for extended sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers
Dual Grommet Cable Expansion Kit - Includes (2) LG-400 Dual
Grommets and Cable Hardware
Dual Grommet Kit - Includes (10) Dual Port Grommets
Grommet Replacement Kit, Kit - Includes: (10) Standard (single port)
Grommets for the LG-400 Series Closures
Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG
Extended Aerial Hanger Kit
Adjustable Aerial Hanger Bracket Kit
MODEL NO.
LG-420-U-0
LG-400/500
AFL NO.
FC000023
911499-00-00
LG-400/LG-500
Dual Grommet Kit
911386-00-01
LG-400-Dual-Kit 911495-00-00
LG-400-S 911496-00-00
CGH-4
LG-400/500
FC000024
911497-00-00
LG-400/500/600 FC000572
* See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
164
© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00136, Revision 5, 1.5.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LG-420 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Closure
(FC000099 Model)
Features
• Four individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports:
- 2 express ports
- 2 multi-drop ports
• Up to 16 connections with use of
LGX
®
118 duplex adapters
• Special multi-drop grommet and cable retention
• Special lock-out interior enclosure
• (2) 8-pack adapter plates
• Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system and requires only a common can wrench for installation
• Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia
• Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia
®
aerial and UV resistance requirements
• Protective channel allowing taut fibers or bundles to pass through the closure
• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed
LightGuard
®
420 FTTx Aerial Weathertight
Fiber Optic Splice Closure
The AFL LightGuard (LG) 420 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures are designed to allow for Taut Sheath (no slack) splicing in aerial applications such as FTTx access networks. The LG-420 FTTx provides access for 1 to 16 subscriber drops and requires only a common can wrench for installation.
Specifications
PARAMETER
Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single
Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single
Cable Entrance Configuration
Cable Ports
Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.)
Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm)
Weight - lbs. (kg)
VALUE
Up to 32
1, n/a
In-line (taut sheath)
2 - express 2 - multi-drop
0.3-0.77" express
0.22-0.38" drop
36.00 x 8.00 x 4.00 (91.44 x 20.32 x 10.16)
8.5 (3.86)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure for FTTx applications–
Includes: splice tray to accommodate up to 32 single fusion splices,
(2) Blank adapter bulkheads (SC style), (2) Grounding terminals and 4 individual self-sealing ports. With an LGX118 footprint can connect up to 16 subscribers. Special interior lock out protrective closure. Does not include cable grounding kits.
Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure with Grounding Kit for FTTx applications – Includes: splice tray to accommodate up to
32 single fusion splices, (2) Blank adapter bulkheads (SC style), (2)
Grounding terminals and 4 individual self-sealing ports. With an
LGX118 footprint can connect up to 16 subscribers. Special interior lock out protrective closure.
Closure Extension Kit - Used to join multiple closures for extended sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers
Dual Grommet Cable Expansion Kit - Includes (2) LG-400 Dual
Grommets and Cable Hardware
Dual Grommet Kit - Includes (10) Dual Port Grommets
Grommet Replacement Kit, Kit - Includes: (10) Standard (single port)
Grommets for the LG-400 Series Closures
Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG
Extended Aerial Hanger Kit
Adjustable Bracket
MODEL NO.
LG-420-U-FTTx
LG-420-FTTx
LG-400/LG-500
LG-400/LG-500
Dual Grommet Kit
911386-00-01
LG-400-Dual-Kit 911495-00-00
LG-400-S 911496-00-00
CGH-4
LG-400/LG-500
LG-400/LG-500
AFL NO.
FC000099
FC000206
911499-00-00
FC000024
911497-00-00
FC000572
* See Accessory Specifications.
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00137, Revision 5, 12.4.14
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
165
LG-500 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure
Features
• Four individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports
• Splice trays available for single, mass or mechanical splicing
• Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system and requires only a common can wrench for installation
• Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia
• Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia
®
aerial and UV resistance requirements
• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed
LightGuard
®
500 Aerial Weathertight
Fiber Optic Splice Closure
The AFL LightGuard (LG) 500 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for small to medium count fiber splicing (< 96 single, 288 using LL-2448-48S splice tray or 288 mass) in aerial applications. Compact in design for congested aerial construction. and requires only a common can wrench for installation.
Specifications
PARAMETER
Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical
Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single, Mass
Cable Entrance Configuration
Cable Ports
Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.)
Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm)
Weight - lbs. (kg)
VALUE
96, 288, 36
3, 2
In-line, Butt
4-8
4 @ 0.3-0.77"
Up to 8 with Dual Grommet Kits
4 @ 0.3-0.65"
4 @ 0.3-0.5"
27.00 x 8.25 x 4.00 (65.58 x 20.96 x 10.16)
6.4 (2.90)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION MODEL NO.
Aerial Weathertight Universal Compact Splice Closure - Includes:
(4) cable retention kits, (2) grounding terminals, (4) self sealing ports and standard aerial hangars. Does not include splice trays or cable grounding kits.
Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 24 single fused fibers
(maximum of 3 trays in LG-500)
Universal Splice Tray - Stores 24 Single Fusion, 4 Mass fusion sleeves/48 fibers or 12 Mechanical (maximum of 2 trays in LG-500)
Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 4 Mass fusion sleeves/48 fibers
(maximum of 2 trays in LG-500)
Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 12 Mass fusion sleeves/144 fibers
(maximum of 2 trays in LG-500)
Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 48 Single Fused Fibers
Dual Grommet Kit - Includes: (2) small grommets and hardware
Dual Grommet Kit - Includes: (10) Dual Port Grommets
Closure Extension Kit - Used to join multiple closures for extended sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers
Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG
Extended Aerial Hanger Kit
Adjustable Aerial Hanger Kit Bracket Kit (included with closure)
LG-500 6-Port Drop Cable Kit
LG-500-U-0
LL-2400
LL-2448
LL-4800
LL-4848
LL-2448-48S
Dual Grommet Kit
LG-400-Dual-Kit
LG-400/500
CGH-4
LG-400/500
LG-400/500/600
6-Port Drop Kit
* See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications.
AFL NO.
FC000026
91710-06
911289-00-02
91711-07
911437-00-02
FA000045
911386-00-01
911495-00-00
911499-00-00
FC000024
911497-00-00
FC000572
FC000573
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
166
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00138, Revision 4, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LG-500 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures
Features
• Four individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports:
- 2 express ports
- 2 multi-drop ports
• Up to 12 connections with use of LGX
®
118 duplex adapters
• Special multi-drop grommet and cable retention
• Special lock-out interior enclosure
• (2) 6-pack adapter plates
• Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system
• Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia
™
• Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia aerial and
UV resistance requirements
• Protective channel allowing taut fibers or bundles to pass through the closure
• Rural Utilities Service (RUS)-listed
LightGuard
®
500 FTTx Aerial Weathertight
Fiber Optic Splice Closures
The AFL LightGuard (LG) 500 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures are designed to allow for fiber splicing in aerial applications such as FTTx access networks.
The LG-500 FTTx provides cable entry and connectivity for one to 12 subscriber drops.
Specifications
PARAMETER
Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single
Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single
Cable Entrance Configuration
Cable Ports
Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.)
Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm)
Weight - lbs. (kg)
VALUE
Up to 32
1, N/A
In-line
2 express
2 multi-drop
0.3-0.77" express
0.22-0.38" drop
27.00 x 8.3 x 4.00 (68.6 x 21 x 10.2)
6.4 (2.9)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure includes splice tray accommodating up to 32 single fusion splices, (2) blank SC-style adapter bulkheads, (2) grounding terminals and (4) individual self-sealing ports. Connects up to 12 subscribers with an LGX
®
118 footprint. Special interior lock out protective closure. Does not include cable grounding kits.
Closure extension kit joins multiple closures for extended sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers
Dual grommet cable expansion kit includes (2) LG-400 dual grommets and cable hardware
Cable grounding harness includes (4) harness 8" #6 AWG
Extended aerial hanger kit
Adjustable bracket
LG-500 6-port drop cable kit
MODEL NO.
AFL NO.
LG-500-U-FTTx FC000899
LG-400/LG-500 911499-00-00
LG-400/LG-500
Dual Grommet Kit
CGH-4
911386-00-01
FC000024
LG-400/LG-500 911497-00-00
LG-400/LG-500 FC000572
6-Port Drop Kit FC000573
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
167
© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00139, Revision 2, 12.13.13
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LG-600 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure
Features
• Six individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports (expandable to twelve cable entrances)
• Splice trays available for single, mass or mechanical splicing
• Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system and requires only a common can wrench for installation
• Integrated grounding clamp through aerial hangers
• Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia
• Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia
®
aerial and UV resistance requirements
• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed
LightGuard
®
600 Aerial Weathertight
Fiber Optic Splice Closure
The AFL LightGuard (LG) 600 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for high count fiber splicing (< 288 single or 1152 mass) in aerial applications where a cost-effective high cable entry closure is desired and requires only a common can wrench for installation.
Specifications
PARAMETER
Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical
VALUE
288, 1152, 96
Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical 12, 8, 8
Cable Entrance Configuration In-line, Butt
Cable Ports
Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.)
4-8
6 @ 0.4-0.87"
Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm)
Weight - lbs. (kg)
Up to 12 with Dual Grommet Kits
6 @ 0.4-0.87"
6 @ 0.5"
27.00 x 11.25 x 7.50 (68.58 x 28.58 x 19.05)
18 (8.16)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Aerial Weathertight Universal High Capacity Splice Closure -
Includes: (4) cable retention kits, (2) gounding terminals, (6) self sealing ports and standard length aerial hangars. Does not include splice trays or cable grounding kits.
Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 24 Single fused fibers
(maximum of 12 trays in LG-600)
Universal Splice Tray - Stores 24 Single Fusion or 4 Mass fusion sleeves/48 fibers (maximum of 8 trays in LG-600)
Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 4 Mass fusion Sleeves/48 fibers)
(maximum of 8 trays in LG-600)
Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 12 Mass fusion sleeves /144 fibers
(maximum of 6 trays in LG-300)
Single Fusion Splice Tray to Accommodate 48 Splices
Dual Grommet Expansion Kit - Includes: (2) Dual Grommets, (1)
CSM retention clamp, cable retention clamp and cable spacer
Grommet Replacement Kit - Includes: (10) LG-600 Grommets
Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG
Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit
Adjustable Aerial Hanger Bracket Kit
SC 6-Pack Adapter Bracket
Multi-drop Cable Entry Kit - Allows six cable entries 0.23-0.48"
* See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications.
MODEL NO.
LG-600-U-0
LL-2400
LL-2448
LL-4800
LL-4848
LL-2448-48S
LG-600-DCEK
LG-600-S-Kit
CGH-4
LG-600
LG-400/500/600
LG-600
MDG-600
AFL NO.
FC000029
91710-06
911289-00-02
91711-07
911437-00-02
FA000045
911406-00-00
91918-00
FC000024
91990-00
FC000572
FM001212
FC000352
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
168
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00140, Revision 4, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LG-600 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Closure
Features
• Six individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports; 2 express ports, 4 drop ports
• Up to 24 FTTx drops
• Up to 12 adapters using the
LG-600 expansion kit and SC 6-pack adapter brackets
• Special multi-drop grommets and cable retention
• Integrated aerial splicing work tray
• Splice trays available for single or mass splicing
• Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system and requires only a common can wrench for installation
• Integrated grounding clamp through aerial hangers
• Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia
• Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia
®
aerial and UV resistance requirements
• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed
* See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications.
LightGuard
®
600 FTTx Aerial Weathertight
Fiber Optic Splice Closure
The AFL LightGuard (LG) 600 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for express slack loop fiber access splicing in aerial applications where up to
24 customer fiber drops are required. Installation only requires a common can wrench.
Specifications
PARAMETER
Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass
Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm)
Weight - lbs. (kg)
VALUE
24, 48
(see FTTx Expansion Kit description in table below)
Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical 2, 2, 2
Cable Entrance Configuration In-line, Butt
Cable Ports
Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.)
6
2 @ 0.4-0.87"
24 @ 0.23-0.48"
27.00 x 11.25 x 7.50 (68.58 x 28.58 x 19.05)
18 (8.16)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Aerial Weathertight Universal High Capacity FTTx Splice Closure -
Includes: (6) cable retention kits, (2) grounding terminals, (6) self sealing ports and standard length aerial hangars. Does not include splice trays or cable grounding kits.
Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 12 Single fused fibers
Universal Splice Tray - Stores 12 Single Fusion or 4 Mass fusion sleeves/48 fibers
Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 4 Mass fusion Sleeves/48 fibers)
Dual Grommet Expansion Kit - Includes: (2) Dual Grommets, (1) CSM retention clamp, cable retention clamp and cable spacer
Single Port Grommet Kit - 2 Grommets and LSM Hardware
Single Cable Entry Grommet Kit
Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG
Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit
Multi-drop Cable Entry Kit - Allows six cable entries 0.23-0.48"
FTTx Expansion Kit - Includes: Stacker Module (1) LG-600 SC-6-Pack
Bracket. Allows use of standard splice trays LL2400, 2448, 2448-48S, and 4848 plus 5 trays up to 120 single, 288 mass.
MODEL NO.
LG-600-FTTx
LL-2450
LL-1248
SEG-600-1
SEG-600
CGH-4
LG-600
MDG-600
LG-600-FTTx
AFL NO.
FC000291
91957-00
911221-00-00
LL-4850 91958-00
LG-600-DCEK 911406-00-00
FC000623
FC000356
FC000024
91990-00
FC000352
FC000620
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00141, Revision 4, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
169
LightGuard
®
Aerial Splice Closure Accessories
Dual-port Grommet Kit
Dual- and Multi-port Grommet Kits for LG-400/LG-500/LG-600
For use with the LG-600 Aerial Weathertight Closure. Remove the single-port grommet set from the closure and replace with the multi-port grommet set when drops are required.
Retention hardware included.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Dual-port Grommet Kit for LG-400/LG-500
Diameter for large port is 0.375" - 0.65"; small port, 0.27" - 0.5"
Dual Grommet Expansion Kit - Includes: (2) Dual Grommets, (1) CSM retention clamp, cable retention clamp and cable spacer
Dual Grommet Replacement Kit - Includes: (10) Dual Grommets for the
LG-400 Series Closures. Diameter for large port is 0.375" - 0.65"; small port, 0.27" - 0.5"
Grommet Replacement Kit, Kit - Includes: (10) Standard (single port)
Grommets for the LG-400 Series Closures. Diameter from 0.3" - 0.82"
Grommet Replacement Kit - Includes: (10) LG-600 Grommets
Diameter from 0.5" - 1.0"
Multi-port Grommet Kit for LG-400/LG-500. Diameter up to 0.365"
Multi-port Grommet Kit for LG-600. Diameter from 0.67" to 0.475"
AFL NO.
911386-00-01
911406-00-00
911495-00-00
911496-00-00
91918-00
FC000573
FC000352
Multi-port Grommet Kit
Single-port Grommet Kit for LG-600 FTTx
For use with the LG-600 Aerial Weathertight Closure. Remove the multi-port grommet set from the closure and replace with the single-port grommet set when installing a branch cable. Hardware included.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Single-port Grommet Kit for LG-600 FTTx
Single Cable Entry Grommet Kit LG-600 Hardware
AFL NO.
FC000623
FC000356
Adjustable Aerial Hanger Brackets
For use with all Aerial Weathertight Closures (LG-410, LG-420, LG-420 FTTx, LG-500,
LG-600 and LG-600 FTTx). This pair of hanger brackets is shipped from the factory with all weathertight closures. Purchase separately for closures installed over existing utilities.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Adjustable Aerial Hanger Brackets
AFL NO.
911497-00-00
© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00119, Revision 2, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
170
LightGuard
®
Aerial Splice Closure Accessories
(cont.)
SC 6-Pack Bracket for LG-600
Installs at each end of the stacker module in the LG-600. Allows up to (12) SC connectors or (24) LC connectors (using duplex connectors) to be installed in the closure. Snaps in place or use self-tapping screws to secure.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
SC 6-Pack Bracket Kit for LG-600
SC 6-Pack Adapter Bracket
AFL NO.
FM001294
FM001212
Expansion Kit for LG-600 FTTx
Expansion kit includes a Stacker Tray Module and one LG-600 SC-6-Pack Bracket to allow for up to six SC connections or 12 LC duplex connections. An additional bracket may be used to increase connectivity to 12 SC or 24 LC connections using duplex adapters.
Allows increasing splices with LL-2400, LL-2448 and LL-2448-48S splice trays.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Expansion Kit for LG-600 FTTx
AFL NO.
FC000620
Cable Grounding Harness
For use with all Aerial Weathertight Closures (LG-410, LG-420, LG-420 FTTx, LG-500,
LG-600 and LG-600 FTTx).
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG
AFL NO.
FC000024
Aerial Hanger Kits
For use with all Aerial Weathertight Closures (LG-410, LG-420, LG-420 FTTx, LG-500,
LG-600 and LG-600 FTTx).
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Extended Aerial Hanger Kit
Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit
AFL NO.
911497-00-00
91990-00
© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00119, Revision 2, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
171
LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays
AFL’s LightLink series of Fiber Optic Splice Trays offers a variety of unique and flexible splice and storage possibilities. They are available in industry standard config urations (single, mass).
Features
• In-line or butt splice capability (see model descriptions)
• Pre-formed radiuses maintain bend requirements
• Interlocking base and cover provides tray stability without the use of a bolt
• Extended finger guides easily store and route loose fiber or ribbon
Ordering Information—Splice Trays for Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures
DESCRIPTION
Single Fuse: 32
Mass Fuse: N/A
6.300" (L) x 2.730" (W) x 0.829" (H)
MODEL NO.
LL-2425
AFL NO.
FC000053
LG-55-U
Max trays: 1
Single: 32
Mass: N/A
LG-150-U
N/A
LG-250-U
N/A
LG-350-U
N/A
Single Fuse: 12
Mass Fuse: N/A
7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)
LL-2450 91957-00 N/A
Max Trays: 4
Sinlge: 48
Mass: N/A
N/A N/A
Single Fuse: N/A
Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber)
7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)
LL-4850 91958-00 N/A
Max Trays: 4
Single: N/A
Mass: 32 (384 fiber)
N/A N/A
Single Fuse: 12
Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber)
7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)
LL-1248 911221-00-00 N/A
Max Trays: 4
Single: 48
Mass: 48 (384 fiber)
N/A N/A
Single Fuse: 24
Mass Fuse: N/A
12.542" (L) x 4.042" (W) x 0.390" (H)
LL-2400 91710-06 N/A N/A
Max Trays: 5
Single: 120
Mass: N/A
Max Trays: 13
Single: 312
Mass: N/A
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays
(cont.)
Ordering Information—Splice Trays for Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures
DESCRIPTION
Single Fuse: 60
Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)
12.000" (L) x 5.125" (W) x 0.485" (H)
MODEL NO. AFL NO.
LL-7644 FA000044
LG-250-U
N/A
LG-350-U
Max Trays: 6
Single: 360
Mass: 72 (864 fiber)
LG-350-AC
N/A
LG-350XL-U
N/A
Single Fuse: 24
Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber)
12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)
LL-2448 911289-00-02 Max Trays: 3
Single: 72
Mass: 12 (144 fiber)
Mechanical: 36
Max Trays: 8
Single: 192
Mass: 32 (384 fiber)
Mechanical: 96
N/A
Single Fuse: 48
Mass Fuse: N/A
12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)
LL-2448-48S FA000045
Max Trays: 3
Single: 144
Mass: N/A
Max Trays: 8
Single: 384
Mass: N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Single Fuse: N/A
Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)
12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)
LL-4848 911437-00-02 Max Trays: 3
Single: N/A
Mass: 36 (432 fiber)
Max Trays: 8
Single: N/A
Mass: 96 (1152 fiber)
N/A
Single Fuse: 96
Mass Fuse: 24 (288 fiber)
15.950" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)
LL-4896 911676-00-02 N/A
Max Trays: 5
Single: 480
Mass: 120 (1440 fiber)
N/A
N/A
Max Trays: 9
Single: 864
Mass: 216 (2592 fiber)
Single Fuse: 60
Mass Fuse: N/A
12.000" (L) x 5.125" (W) x 0.485" (H)
LL-7060 FA000042 N/A
Max Trays: 6
Single: 360
Mass: N/A
N/A N/A
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays
(cont.)
Ordering Information – Splice Trays for LG-350 and LG-350XL-U Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures
DESCRIPTION
Single Fuse: N/A
Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)
12.000" (L) x 5.125" (W) x 0.485" (H)
MODEL NO.
LL-7144
AFL NO.
FA000043
LG-350-U
Max Trays: 6
Single: 360
Mass: 72 (864 fiber)
LG-350-AC
N/A
LG-350XL-U
N/A
Single Fuse: 36
Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)
8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)
LL-4808L-R FA000037
N/A Max Trays: 4
Single: 144
Mass: 48 (576 fiber)
N/A
Single Fuse: N/A
Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)
8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)
Single Fuse: 36
Mass Fuse: N/A
8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)
LL-4808 R
LL-4808 L
FA000020
FA000021
N/A
N/A
Single Fuse: N/A
Mass Fuse: 24 (288 fiber)
15.950" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)
LL-4896 R FA000022
Max Trays: 5
Single: N/A
Mass: 120 (1440 fiber)
N/A
Single Fuse: 96
Mass Fuse: N/A
15.950" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)
LL-4896 L FA000023
Max Trays: 5
Single: 480
Mass: N/A
N/A
Max Trays: 4
Single: N/A
Mass: 48 (576 fiber)
N/A
Max Trays: 4
Single: 144
Mass: N/A
N/A
Max Trays: 9
Single: N/A
Mass: 216 (2592 fiber)
Max Trays: 9
Single: 864
Mass: N/A
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays
(cont.)
Ordering Information – Splice Trays for Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures
DESCRIPTION
Single Fuse: 24
Mass Fuse: N/A
12.542" (L) x 4.042" (W) x 0.390" (H)
MODEL NO. AFL NO.
LL-2400 91710-06
LG-410-U
Max Trays: 4
Single: 96
Mass: N/A
LG-420-U FTTx
N/A
LG-500-U
Max Trays: 4
Single: 96
Mass: N/A
LG-500-U FTTx
N/A
Single Fuse: 32
Mass Fuse: N/A
6.300" (L) x 2.730" (W) x 0.829" (H)
LL-2425 FC000053 N/A
Max Trays: 1
Single: 32
Mass: N/A
N/A
Max Trays: 1
Single: 32
Mass: N/A
Single Fuse: 24
Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber)
12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)
LL-2448 911289-00-02 Max Trays: 3
Single: 72
Mass: 12 (144 fiber)
Mechanical: 36
N/A
Single Fuse: 12
Mass Fuse: N/A
7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)
LL-2450 91957-00 N/A N/A
Max Trays: 3
Single: 72
Mass: 12 (144 fiber)
Mechanical: 36
N/A
N/A N/A
Single Fuse: N/A
Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)
12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)
LL-4848 911437-00-02 Max Trays: 3
Single: N/A
Mass: 36 (432 fiber)
N/A
Single Fuse: N/A
Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber)
7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)
LL-4850 91958-00 N/A N/A
Max Trays: 3
Single: N/A
Mass: 36 (432 fiber)
N/A
N/A N/A
Single Fuse: 12
Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber)
7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)
LL-1248 911221-00-00 N/A N/A N/A N/A
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays
(cont.)
Ordering Information – Splice Trays for Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures
DESCRIPTION
Single Fuse: 24
Mass Fuse: N/A
12.542" (L) x 4.042" (W) x 0.390" (H)
MODEL NO.
AFL NO.
LL-2400 91710-06
LG-500-U-FTTx-ISO LG-600-U
N/A
Max Trays: 12
Single: 288
Mass: N/A
LG-600
FTTx
Max Trays: 2
Single: 48
Mass: N/A
LG-600-U-FTTx-ISO
N/A
Single Fuse: 32
Mass Fuse: N/A
6.300" (L) x 2.730" (W) x 0.829" (H)
LL-2425 FC000053 N/A N/A N/A N/A
Single Fuse: 24
Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber)
12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)
LL-2448
Single Fuse: 12
Mass Fuse: N/A
7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)
LL-2450
911289-00-02 N/A
91957-00
Max Trays: 1
Single: 12
Mass: N/A
Max Trays: 8
Single: 192
Mass: 32 (384 fiber)
Mechanical: 12
N/A
N/A N/A
N/A
Max Trays: 2
Single: 24
Mass: N/A
Single Fuse: N/A
Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)
12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)
LL-4848
Single Fuse: N/A
Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber)
7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)
LL-4850
911437-00-02 N/A
91958-00
Max Trays: 1
Single: N/A
Mass: 8 (96 fiber)
Max Trays: 8
Single: N/A
Mass: 96 (1152 fiber)
N/A
N/A N/A
N/A
Max Trays: 2
Single: N/A
Mass: 16 (192 fiber)
Single Fuse: 12
Mass Fuse: 8 (96)
7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)
LL-1248 911221-00-00 Max Trays: 1
Single: 12
Mass: 8 (96 fiber)
N/A N/A
Max Trays: 2
Single: 24
Mass: 16 (192 fiber)
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays
(cont.)
Ordering information – Splice Trays for Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures
DESCRIPTION
Single Fuse: N/A
Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber)
12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)
MODEL NO.
LL-4800
AFL NO.
91711-07
LG-410-U
Max Trays: 3
Single: N/A
Mass: 12 (144 fiber)
LG-500-U
Max Trays: 3
Single: N/A
Mass: 12 (144 fiber)
LG-600-U
Max Trays: 8
Single: N/A
Mass: 32 (384 fiber)
Ordering Information—Splice Trays for Fiber Optic Enclosures
DESCRIPTION
Single Fuse: 24
Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber)
Mechanical : 12
12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)
MODEL NO.
LL-2448
AFL NO.
LL-400B WITH
INTERCONNECT
911289-00-02 Max Trays: 4
Single: 96
Mass: 16 (192 fiber)
Mechanical: 48
LL-400B WITHOUT
INTERCONNECT
Max Trays: 6
Single: 144
Mass: 24 (288 fiber)
Mechanical: 72
LL-400SX WITH
2 LGX ® PLATES
Max Trays: 3
Single: 72
Mass: 12 (144 fiber)
Mechanical: 36
LL-400SX WITHOUT
LGX PLATES
Max Trays: 9
Single: 216
Mass: 36 (432 fiber)
Mechanical: 108
Single Fuse: 48
Mass Fuse: N/A
12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)
LL-2448-48S FA000045
Max Trays: 4
Single: 192
Mass: N/A
Max Trays: 6
Single: 288
Mass: N/A
Max Trays: 3
Single: 144
Mass: N/A
Max Trays: 9
Single: 432
Mass: N/A
Single Fuse: N/A
Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)
12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)
LL-4848 911437-00-02 Max Trays: 4
Single: N/A
Mass: 48 (576 fiber)
Max Trays: 6
Single: N/A
Mass: 72 (864 fiber)
Max Trays: 3
Single: N/A
Mass: 36 (432 fiber)
Max Trays: 9
Single: N/A
Mass: 108 (1296 fiber)
Single Fuse: N/A
Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber)
12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531 (H)
LL-4800 91711-07
Max Trays: 4
Single: N/A
Mass: 16 (192 fiber)
Max Trays: 6
Single: N/A
Mass: 24 (288 fiber)
Max Trays: 3
Single: N/A
Mass: 12 (144 fiber)
Max Trays: 9
Single: N/A
Mass: 108 (1296 fiber)
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays
(cont.)
Ordering Information—Splice Trays for Fiber Optic Enclosures
DESCRIPTION
Single Fuse: N/A
Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)
12.000" (L) x 5.125" (W) 0.485" (H)
MODEL NO.
LL-7144
AFL NO.
FA000043
LL-500 WITH
2 LGX PLATES
N/A
LL-500 WITHOUT LGX
PLATES
N/A
LL-580
Max Trays: 2
Single: N/A
Mass: 24 (288 fiber)
Single Fuse: 60
Mass Fuse: 12 (144)
12.000" (L) x 5.125" (W) 0.485" (H)
LL-7644 FA000044 N/A N/A
Max Trays: 2
Single: 120
Mass: 24 (288 fiber)
Single Fuse: 36
Mass Fuse: N/A
8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)
LL-4808 L FA000021
Max Trays: 3
Single: 108
Mass: N/A
Max Trays: 7
Single: 252
Mass: N/A
N/A
Single Fuse: N/A
Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)
8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)
LL-4808 R FA000020
Max Trays: 3
Single: N/A
Mass: 36 (432 fiber)
Max Trays: 7
Single: N/A
Mass: 84 (1008 fiber)
N/A
Single Fuse: 36
Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)
8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)
LL-4808L-R FA000037
Max Trays: 3
Single: 108
Mass: 36 (432 fiber)
Max Trays: 7
Single: 252
Mass: 84 (1008 fiber)
Max Trays: 2
Single: 72
Mass: 24 (288 fiber)
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays
(cont.)
Ordering Information – Splice Tray for Splicing Cabinets and Shelves
DESCRIPTION
Telescoping Splice Tray - Stores up to 48 single fusion sleeves or
12 mass fusion sleeves (144 fibers). For use in the following products:
LL-300, LL-288/576, LL-720/1440, OTSS-SYS1, OSS-SYS2 and OSS-SYS1.
MODEL NO.
STF-48
FTTx Splice Tray - Stores up to 2 single fusion sleeves.
For use in the following products:
ONT-760XL, ONT-3000 and CG-1500
Bare Fiber Splice Tray - Stores up 24 single fusion fibers without sleeves. For use in the following products:
Any product that accepts the LL-2400 splice tray
—
—
Ordering Information—Splice Tray Accessories
DESCRIPTION
40 mm Fiber Protection Fusion Splice Sleeves, Telcordia ® compliant (50 pcs. per bag)
60 mm Fiber Protection Fusion Splice Sleeves, Telcordia
®
compliant (50 pcs. per bag)
Single Fusion Splice Chip - 6 splices per chip. (10 pcs. per kit)
Single Fusion Splice Chip - 12 splices per chip. (10 pcs. per kit)
Single Fusion Splice Chip - 24 splices per chip. (10 pcs. per kit)
Mass Fusion Splice Chip - 4 splices per chip. (10 pcs. per kit)
AFL NO.
S000206
S000065
FA000034
FC000657
91745-02
FA000088
Mechanical Fusion Splice Tape (10 pcs. per kit)
Core Tube Cable Fiber Router for routing fiber up to 8 directions. For all central core tube sizes.
FA000089
FC000008
Loose Tube or Ribbon Router for routing fiber up to 6 directions. For all Loose Tube and up to 12 fiber Ribbon. FC000070
Dimensions
LL-2448 and LL-4848 Splice Trays
LL-1248, LL-2450 and LL-4850 Splice Trays
LL-2400 Splice Tray
AFL NO.
911442-00-00
DM000445
C184190
LL-4896 Splice Tray LL-2425 Splice Tray OEE Splice Tray
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Features
• Tamper-Proof Packaging
• Fits in all AFL enclosures
• No additional trays required
• Color-coded transportation tubing
• Telcordia GR-1209 and
1221-CORE Compliant
LightLink Splitter Trays
The LightLink Splitter Trays are a packaged system that include factory-preinstalled
PLC splitters and splicing trays which easily fit within AFL’s LG Series Closures,
LL Series Wall Mount Cabinets and pedestals. These AFL splitter trays feature 1x4,
1x8, 1x16 or 1x32 planar technology with optical characteristics that include low insertion loss, high uniformity, and excellent environmental stability. The products are
Telcordia
®
GR-1209 and GR-1221-CORE compliant ensuring longevity and durability in an Outside Plant application.
The splitter couplers are factory-preinstalled and secured within the AFL splice trays.
The trays are tamper-proof to prevent unwanted entry. With the lengthy transition tubing preinstalled, the device fibers are routed into the splice trays (included as part of the package) to help complete installations in a timely manner. No additional trays are required reducing material costs.
Optical Specifications
PARAMETER
Wavelength Range
Max. Insertion Loss
Max. Uniformity
VALUE
1 X 4 1 X 8 1 X 16 1 X 32
1260 - 1650 nm 1260 - 1650 nm 1260 - 1650 nm 1260 - 1650 nm
7.5
10.7
14.0
17.4
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.7
PDL (dB) Max.
Return Loss
0.3
50.0
Operating Temperature (°C) -40 to 85
0.3
50.0
-40 to 85
0.3
50.0
-40 to 85
0.3
50.0
-40 to 85
This tray has capacity for up to 24 single fusion splices and are stackable with each other and other similar AFL splice trays.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
LightLink Splitter
LightLink Splitter
LightLink Splitter
LightLink Splitter
LightLink Splitter
AFL NO.
CM000799
FC000571
FC000539
FC000538
FC000537
SIZE
Tray PKG 1x2
Tray PKG 1x4
Tray PKG 1x8
Tray PKG 1x16
Tray PKG 1x32
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
180
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00148, Revision 4, 3.7.13
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Fiber Optic Splice Closures
LightGuard
®
Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures
LightGuard
®
Sealed Fiber Optic
Splice Closures
AFL LightGuard Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures are designed to simplify splice management and maintenance. Intuitive engineering design reduces the installation time and complexity associated with fiber splicing in the field. No heat, adhesives, drills or powered equipment for installation or re-entry are required, just simply use a common 216 can wrench to access and install cable. LightGuard closures are durable, easy-to-install and will increase productivity, reduce labor expenses, and last the life of your plant.
Features
• Supports stranded loose tube, Uniflex
®
or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations
• Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity
• Fully kitted with all parts to install cables
• Designed and tested to Telcordia
®
GR-771 requirements
• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed
Specifications
DESCRIPTION
Splice Capacity (Max.) -
Single, Mass, Mechanical
Number of Splice Trays (Max.) -
Single, Mass, Mechanical
Cable Entrance Configuration
Cable Ports
Cable Sizes (Max. O.D.)
LG-55-U-0
24, n/a, n/a
1, n/a, n/a
In-line / Butt
2
2 @ 0.60" (splice)
2 @ 0.77" (ground / bond)
LG-150-U-0
48, 144, 24
4, 3, n/a
Butt
5
5 @ 0.62"
LG-250-U-0
96, 288, 36
1
MODEL
LG-350-U-0
384, 1152, 108
2
4, 2, 3 12, 8, 8
Butt
5
5 @ 0.62"
Butt
5
3 @ 0.80"
2 @ 1.00"
Testing
- Cable Retention (100 lbs)
- Water Resistance (waterhead)
- Impact Resistance (0-40 °C)
- Chemical Resistance
- Cable Flexing
Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm)
Passed
20 ft.
Passed
Passed
Passed
14.00 x 4.00
(35.60 x 10.16)
3.0 (1.36)
Passed
20 ft.
Passed
Passed
Passed
18.25 x 8.75
(46.36 x 22.23)
10.5 (4.76)
Passed
20 ft.
Passed
Passed
Passed
19.00 x 8.75
(48.26 x 22.23)
11.5 (5.23) Weight - lbs. (kg)
NOTES: 1. For the LG-250-U-0; 36 mechanical splices only using the LL-2448 splice tray.
2. For the LG-350-U-0; 108 mechanical splices only using the LL-2448 splice tray.
Passed
20 ft.
Passed
Passed
Passed
28.00 x 10.00
(71.12 x 25.40)
14 (6.35)
350-AC
144, 288, 36
4, 3
LG-350XL-U-0
864, 2592, 288
9, 9, n/a
Butt
2 (Express Grommets)
3 (4-Drop Grommets)
2 @ 1.0"
12 @ 0.312" Flat or
0.250" Round
Butt
5 (7 using dual port grommet Express sides)
3 @ 1.25"
2 @ 1.35"
Passed
20 ft.
Passed
Passed
Passed
20 x 10
13 (5.89)
Passed
20 ft.
Passed
Passed
Passed
31.00 x 12.00
(78.74 x 30.48)
25 (11.34)
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00064, Revision 6, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
181
Peel and Seal Grommet Systems for Sealed Fiber Optic Closures
Expandable to support various cable diameters
Ease of installation (no tapes, washers, or glue)
LightGuard
®
Peel and Seal Grommet
Systems for Sealed Fiber Optic Closures
AFL’s cable sealing grommet technology for the LightGuard (LG) Sealed Fiber Optic
Closures improves sealing technology utilitizing MULTICENTRIC ® Grommets that do away with time consuming tasks such as installing washers and messy sealing tapes for cable entry. MULTICENTRIC
®
Grommets are designed to accept a wide range of cable diameters, eliminating the need to stock a variety of diameter-specific grommet kits.
Conversion kits for old LG-100, LG-200, and LG-300 closures allows for “Peel and Seal" grommet technology to be used without changing out the existing closure.
Features
• All Peel and Seal Grommet Systems support loose tube, core tube, dielectric and armored cable designs
• Installation and re-entry using common hand tools
• Accepts a wide range of cable diameters
• Fast and easy to install
• Fits existing AFL LightGuard sealed closures
• Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity
• Full conversion kits and dual cable entry port kits
• Designed and tested to Telcordia ® GR-771 & RUS 515 closure requirements
Multiple layers of sealing protection
Single Dual Quad
Ordering information
SEALED CLOSURE FULL CONVERSION KITS (SINGLE AXIS CABLE ENTRY)
DESCRIPTION
3 Port Drop Grommet (LG-150/250)
Dual Express Grommets for LG-350
Quad Express Grommets for LG-350
Single Cable Grommet Kit, Drop Port
4 Port Drop Grommet (LG-350 / LG-350-AC)
LG-350 Express Single Cable Grommet Kit
LG-350 Drop Single Cable Grommet Kit
AFL NO.
FC000655
FC000337
FC000421
FC000628
FC000422
FC000726
FC000727
MULTICENTRIC is a registered trademark of the Mar-Don Corporation.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
182
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00001, Revision 6, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Sealed Splice Closures and Accessories
LG-55 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
LightGuard
®
55 Sealed Fiber Optic
Splice Closure
Designed with versatility in mind, the LightGuard (LG) 55 sealed closure from AFL offers a variety of solutions including repair and distribution splicing, grounding for Fiber-inthe-Loop applications, and for use as an isolation gap with armored cables. This closure accepts stranded loose tube, Uniflex
®
or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations and can be utilized in a butt or in-line configuration.
The LG-55 closure incorporates a unique cable clamp design sealing the cable, allowing both of the cover halves to be removed without disturbing the contents. In addition,
AFL’s Peel & Seal Grommet System
™
is incorporated to ensure a tight fit on various cable diameters, fully sealing the closure and protecting the fiber while eliminating cumbersome tape and washers – making installation fast and easy.
Features
• Accommodates cables to 0.77" O.D. for splicing and grounding / bonding
• Incorporates the Peel & Seal Grommet
System, fully sealing the closure
• Includes removable, integral central splicing module and individual cable retention clamps
• Requires only a common can wrench for installation
Inline Repair Closure (IRC) for repair of flat or round drop cables
Specifications
PARAMETER VALUE
Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 24, n/a, n/a
Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 1, n/a, n/a
Cable Entrance Configuration
Cable Ports
Cable Sizes (Max. O.D.)
Dimensions – (L x D) in. (cm)
Weight – lbs. (kg)
In-line / Butt
2 (3 using dual cable entry port kit)
2 @ 0.60" (for in-line splice configuration)
2 @ 0.77" (for in-line ground / bond configuration)
2 @ 0.45" (for butt splice configuration)
14 x 4 (34.30 x 10.16)
3.0 (1.36)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
LG-55 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure – 24 fusion splice capable and includes (2) cable kits for sealing / retention,
(2) Cable Grounding Kits, (1) Dual Cable Entry Port Kit and a grounding terminal. Splice tray not included.
MODEL NO.
LG-55-U-0
AFL NO.
FC000034-PS
LG-55 In-line Repair Closure LG-55-IRC
LG-55 with Stainless Steel Hardware for Harsh Environments LG-55-U-SS
LG-55 Splice Tray – Stores 24 single fusion splices and includes base, cover, (3) eight-position splice holders and tie-wraps. Maximum of (1) tray in the LG-55.
Dual Cable Entry Port Kit – Allows two cables to enter closure from each cable port. Includes one dual port cable grommet to increase the closure to four ports.
LL-2425
FC000793-PS
FC000711
FC000247
Dual Cable Entry Port Kit FC000337
Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp (one kit required per cable entry)
Cable Grounding Harness Kit – Includes (4) 8" long ground harnesses constructed of #6 AWG conductor.
CGH-1
CGH-4
FC000003
FC000024
183
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00003, Revision 6, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LG-55-SC Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
LightGuard
®
55-SC
Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
AFL’s LightGuard (LG) 55-SC sealed closure retains all the features of the LG-55, but includes a unique patching system that utilizes pre-terminated SC fiber assemblies or field installable connectors such as the FAST
™
SC.
An innovative solution that can be used to facilitate a link between traffic control cabinets and entrance cables, the LG-55-SC closure allows for rapid restoration and minimal damage to a fiber optic cable should an impact disable the cabinet. A breakable tie wrap secures the pre-connectorized cable to one side of the closure (traffic control cabinet), while the main entrance cable is secured with a more rugged cable clamp, allowing the system to separate during a damaging impact.
Features
• Durable cover assembly that provides protection for all internal components and acts as an interface / anchor to the cable clamps
• Unique cable clamp seal to anchor the cable to the cover assembly
• Movable sheath retention bracket keeps cable bends at a minimum
• Accommodates up to four SC/UPC connectors
• Utilizes AFL’s Peel & Seal Grommet System
™
, ensuring a tight fit on various cable diameters while eliminating cumbersome tape and washers
• Requires only a common can wrench for installation
Specifications
PARAMETER
Maximum Cable Diameter
Minimum Cable Diameter
Maximum Cable Entry
Overall Dimensions
VALUE
0.65"
0.30"
2 ports (one each end)
14" Length x 4" Diameter
Ordering Information
MODEL NO.
LG-55-SC
Dual Cable Entry Port Kit – Allows two cables to enter closure from each cable port. Includes one dual port cable grommet to increase the closure to four ports.
Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp
(one kit required per cable entry).
Cable Grounding Harness Kit – Includes (4) 8" long ground harnesses constructed of #6 AWG conductor.
AFL NO.
FC000481-PS
FC000337
FC000003
FC000024
184
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00018, Revision 6, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LG-150 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
Features
• Supports stranded loose tube, Uniflex
® or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations
• Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench
• Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity
• Fully kitted with all parts to install five cables
• Designed and tested to Telcordia ®
GR-771 requirements
• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed
LightGuard
®
150
Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
The LightGuard (LG) 150 is a sealed dome closure designed for small count fiber splicing
(< 48 single or 192 mass) in a butt configuration. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-150 is ideal for express or ring applications and requires only a common can wrench for installation.
Specifications
PARAMETER
Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical
Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical
Cable Entrance Configuration
Cable Ports
Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. - Min. O.D.)
Dimensions – (L x D) in. (cm)
Weight – lbs. (kg)
VALUE
48, 192, n/a
4, 3, n/a
Butt
5
5 (0.62" - 0.30")
18.25 x 8.75 (46.36 x 22.23)
10.5 (4.76)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
LG-150 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure – 48 Single or 192 mass fusion capable, includes (5) cable kits for sealing / retention and a grounding terminal. Cable Grounding Kits, hanger brackets and splice trays not included.
LL-2450 Splice Tray – Stores (12) single fusion splices, includes base, cover, (2) six position single splice holders and tie-wraps.
Maximum of (4) splice trays in the LG-150.
LL-4850 Splice Tray – Stores (8) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (2) four position ribbon splice holders and tie-wraps.
Maximum of (4) splice trays in the LG-150.
LL-1248 Splice Tray – Stores (12) single fusion splices or
(4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (2) six position single splice holders, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (4) splice trays in the LG-150.
MODEL NO.
LG-150-U-0
LL-2450
LL-4850
LL-1248
AFL NO.
FC000001-PS
91957-00
91958-00
911221-00-00
3-Flat Drop Grommet Kit – For use with standard flat drop cable Flat Drop Grommet Kit FC000655
Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp. One kit needed per cable entry. For use with LG-150/250/350.
CGH-1 FC000003
CGH-5 FC000040 Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) – Includes harness and hose clamp. For use with LG-150/250/350.
Universal Aerial Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with
LG-150/250/350.
Universal Hanger FC000006
Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with
LG-150/250/350.
Pole or Wall Mount Bracket – For use with LG-150/250/350.
Extended Offset Hanger FC000208
PWK FC000592
OPGW Bracket FC000683 OPGW Cable Bracket Kit for use when installing Sealed Closures
(LG-150 / LG-250 / LG-350) to OPGW Cable. See details in
Accessory section on page 13.
1X6 Fiber Router Kit
O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-150/250.
LLAS-200-12SC Terminal Adapter. Used with LG-150 and
LG-250. See details in Accessory section on page 14.
Router
O-Ring Replacement
LLAS-200-12SC
FC000070
FC000004
FC000068
* See Accessory Specifications.
See Splice Tray Specifications.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00029, Revision 6, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
185
LG-250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
Features
• Supports stranded loose tube, Uniflex
® or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations
• Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench
• Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity
• Fully kitted with all parts to install five cables
• Designed and tested to Telcordia
®
GR-771 requirements
• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed
* NOTE: When using LL-2448-48S capacity increases
to 144 single splices. Capacity is cable OD driven.
* See Accessory Specifications.
See Splice Tray Specifications.
LightGuard
®
250
Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
The LightGuard (LG) 250 is a sealed dome closure designed for medium count fiber splicing (< 96 single or 288 mass) in a butt configuration. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-250 is ideal for express or ring applications and requires only a common can wrench for installation.
Specifications
PARAMETER
Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical
Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical
Cable Entrance Configuration
Cable Ports
Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. - Min. O.D.)
Dimensions – (L x D) in. (cm)
Weight – lbs. (kg)
VALUE
96, 288, 48
4, 2, 4
Butt
5
5 (0.62" - 0.30")
19 x 8.75 (48.26 x 22.23)
11.5 (5.23)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
LG-250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure – 96 Single or 288 mass fusion capable, includes (5) cable kits for sealing / retention and a grounding terminal. Cable Grounding Kits, hanger brackets and splice trays not included.
MODEL NO.
LG-250-U-0
AFL NO.
FC000002-PS
LL-2400 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (4) trays in the LG-250.
LL-2448 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion or (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (3) trays in the LG-250.
LL-4800 Splice Tray – Stores (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (10) trays in the LG-300XL.
LL-4848 Splice Tray – Stores (12) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twelve position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (1) tray in the LG-250.
Single Fusion Splice Tray for 48 Single Fused Fiber*
Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp. One kit needed per cable entry. For use with LG-150/250/350.
Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) – Includes harness and hose clamp. For use with LG-150/250/350.
LL-2400
LL-2448
LL-4800
LL-4848
LL-2448-48S FA000045
3-Flat Drop Grommet Kit – For use with standard flat drop cable Flat Drop Grommet Kit FC000655
OPGW Cable Bracket Kit
OPGW cable.
for use only when installing closure on OPGW Bracket FC000683
1X6 Fiber Router Kit Router FC000070
CGH-1 FC000003
CGH-5
91710-06
911289-00-02
91711-07
911437-00-02
FC000040
O-Ring Replacement
Universal Hanger
FC000004
FC000006
O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-150/250
Universal Aerial Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with
LG-150/250/350
Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with
LG-150/250/350.
Pole or Wall Mount Bracket – For use with LG-150/250/350
Terminal Adapter – Houses 12 SC bulkhead adapters, for use with LG-150/250
Extended Offset Hanger
PWK
LLAS-200-12SC
FC000208
FC000592
FC000068
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00078, Revision 6, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
186
MuxGuard
®
250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
Features
• Factory pre-installed devices
• Factory pre-installed transition tubes with fibers routed to appropriately designated bandwidth splice trays
• Color-coded transition tubes
• Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench
• Fully sealed to protect fiber, splices and devices
• Fully kitted with all parts to install five cables
• Designed and tested to Telcordia
®
GR-771 requirements
• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed
MuxGuard
®
250
Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
The MuxGuard 250 is a sealed dome closure designed with pre-installed Thin Film Filter
(TFF) Compact Series CWDMs or DWDMs that allow for MUXing and DEMUXing within the same closure. The closure is also equipped with pre-installed splice trays that keep the bandwidth signals separated from each other, thus preventing accidental signal loss during maintenance activities. All fibers from the WDMs are routed to the appropriate splice tray through color-coded transition tubes. The closures are available with
4-channel or 8-channel units. As with other LG Series Sealed Closures, these closures require no tools for re-entry, and each closure may be padlocked as necessary.
Specifications
PARAMETER
Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single
Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single
Cable Entrance Configuration
Cable Ports
Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. - Min. O.D.)
Dimensions – (L x D) in. (cm)
Weight – lbs. (kg)
VALUE
96
4
Butt
5
5 (0.70" - 0.30")
19 x 8.75 (48.26 x 22.23)
11.5 (5.23)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
MuxGuard 250 Sealed Closure
LL-2448 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion or (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twentyfour position single splice holder, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (3) trays in the LG-250.
MODEL NO.
LG-250-CWDM-8-301 (1471-1611)
LG-250-CWDM-8-301-121-500
LL-2448
1X6 Fiber Router Kit Router
O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-150/250 O-Ring Replacement
Universal Hanger Universal Aerial Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with LG-150/250/350
Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with
LG-150/250/350.
Extended Offset Hanger
Pole or Wall Mount Bracket – For use with
LG-150/250/350
Terminal Adapter – Houses 12 SC bulkhead adapters, for use with LG-150/250
PWK
LLAS-200-12SC
* See Accessory Specifications.
See Splice Tray Specifications.
AFL NO.
FC000800
FC000803
911289-00-02
FC000070
FC000004
FC000006
FC000208
FC000592
FC000068
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
187
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00085, Revision 6, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LG-350 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
LG-350 with LLAS-300-24SC
LightGuard
®
350
Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
The LightGuard (LG) 350 is a sealed dome closure designed for large count fiber splicing
(< 384 single or 1152 mass) in a butt configuration. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-350 is ideal for express, ring or long haul applications and requires only a common can wrench for installation.
Features
• Supports stranded loose tube, Uniflex ® or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations
• Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench
• Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity
• Fully kitted with all parts to install five cables
• Designed and tested to Telcordia
®
GR-771 requirements
• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed
Specifications
PARAMETER VALUE
Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 480, 1152, 108
Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 12, 8, 8
Cable Entrance Configuration
Cable Ports / Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. - Min. O.D.)
Dimensions – (L x D) in. (cm) / Weight - lbs. (kg)
Butt
5 / 7 (using dual cable configuration for Express ports)
2 Express (1.00" - 0.40") 3 Drop (0.80" - 0.30")
28.0" x 10.0" (71.12 x 25.40) / 14 (6.35) continued on next page
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
188
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00103, Revision 6, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightGuard
®
350
Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
(cont.)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
LG-350 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure – 384 single fusion or 1152 mass fusion capable, includes (5) cable kits for sealing / retention (single and dual calbe configurations for express ports) and a grounding terminal. Cable Grounding Kits, hanger brackets and splice trays not included.
LL-2400 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder and tiewraps. Maximum of (12) trays in the LG-350.
LL-2448 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion or (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (8) trays in the LG-350.
LL-4800 Splice Tray – Stores (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of
(10) trays in the LG-300XL.
LL-4848 Splice Tray – Stores (12) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twelve position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps.
Maximum of (6) trays in the LG-350.
LL-4896 Splice Tray – Stores (96) single fusion splices or (24) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (16) six position single splice holders, (6) four position ribbon splice holders and tie-wraps. Maximum of (5) trays in the LG-350.
LL-2448-48S Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion splices. May be installed in the LG-250, LG-350, LG-350-XL, LG-410, LG-500,
LG-600 Splice Closures, the LL-400B and LL-400S Distribution Enclosures and the LL-2400 Pedestal.
LL-7644 Universal Splice Tray – Stores (60) single fusion splices or (288) mass fusion splices or a combination of both in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray. For use with the LG-350 and LG-350XL Closures.
LL-7060 Splice Tray – Stores (60) single fusion splices in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray. For use with the LG-350 and LG-350XL Closures.
LL-7144 Splice Tray – Stores (288) mass fusion splices in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray. For use with the LG-350 and LG-350XL Closures.
4-Flat Drop Grommet Kit – For use with standard flat drop cable and round cable up to 0.256" O.D.
Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp. One kit needed per cable entry. For use with LG-150/250/350.
Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) – Includes harness and hose clamp. For use with LG-150/250/350.
O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-350.
Universal Aerial Strand Hanger Kit – For use with LG-150/250/350.
Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with LG-150/250/350.
Pole or Wall Mount Bracket – For use with LG-150/250/350.
OPGW Cable Bracket Kit for use only when installing closure on OPGW cable.
1X6 Fiber Router Kit
Terminal Adapter – Houses 24 SC bulkhead adapters, for use with LG-350
Terminal Adapter – Empty plate
MODEL NO.
LG-350-U-0
LL-2400
LL-2448
LL-4800
LL-4848
LL-4896
LL-2448-48S
LL-7644
LL-7060
LL-7144
AFL NO.
FC000009-PS
91710-06
911289-00-02
91711-07
911437-00-02
911676-00-02
FA000045
FA000044
FA000042
FA000043
Flat Drop Grommet Kit FC000422
CGH-1
CGH-5
O-Ring LG-300
FC000003
FC000040
912231-00-00
Universal Hanger FC000006
Extended Offset Hanger FC000208
PWK
PGW Bracket
FC000592
FC000683
Router
LLAS-300-24SC
LLAS-350-96LC
FC000070
FC000069
FC000736
* See Accessory Specifications.
See Splice Tray Specifications.
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
189
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00103, Revision 6, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LG-350-AC Drop Access Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
Features
• Less than 20" overall length; ideal for small hand-holes
• Supports standard loose tube, outside plant ribbon and Uniflex
® fiber optic cables in both dielectric and armored configurations
• Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench
• Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices, ensuring longevity
• Fully kitted with all parts to install two cables and up to 12 drops
• Designed and tested to Telcordia ®
GR-771 requirements
• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) listed
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
LightGuard
®
350-AC Drop Access
Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
AFL’s LightGuard (LG) 350-AC sealed dome closure is intended for utilization in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required and space may be limited.
Designed for "drop access" applications providing access for up to 12 drops, this closure is also versatile enough to be used for splicing up to 144 single splices in a butt configuration. Ideal for Fiber-to-the-Home installations in small hand-hole applications, the LG-350-AC requires only a common can wrench for installation.
Specifications
PARAMETER
Splice Capacity (Max.) – single, mass
Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – single, mass
Cable Entrance Configuration
Cable Ports
Cable Sizes (O.D.)
Dimensions (L x D) – inches (cm)
Weight - lbs. (kg)
VALUE
144, 432
4, 3
Butt
5 Ports (14 cables total using flat-drop grommets)
Express Side – 2 (0.4"–1.0")
Drop Side – 12 (0.31" flat-drop or 0.25" round)
19.8" x 10.0" (50.3 x 25.4)
12 (5.44)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Dome Closure, 144 single fusion capable (with additional trays), 5 cable entry kits for sealing and retention (2-single port for express and 3-quad port for drop), ground terminal, (1) LL-4808L splice tray.
No cable grounding or hanger brackets are included
Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores up to 36 single fused fibers
(maximum of 4 trays in LG-350-AC)
Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores up to 144 mass fused fibers
(maximum of 4 trays in LG-350-AC)
Single Cable Branch Grommet Kit
Cable Grounding Kit - For LG-150/250/350
5 Cable Grounding Kits - For LG-150/250/350
O-Ring Replacement Kit for the LG-350
Universal Aerial Strand Hanger kit - For LG-150/250/350
Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit - For LG-150/250/350
Pole or Wall MT Bracket for use with LG150/250/350
OPGW Cable Bracket Kit
MODEL NO.
LG-350-AC
LL-4808L
LL-4808R
Branch Grommet Kit
CGH-1
CGH-5
O-Ring LG-300
Universal Hanger
AFL NO.
FC000412
FA000021
FA000020
FC000628
FC000003
FC000040
912231-00-00
FC000006
Extended Offset Hanger FC000208
PWK FC000592
OPGW Bracket FC000683
* Unit available for Mass/Ribbon utilization. Consult customer service for details.
* See Accessory Specifications.
See Splice Tray Specifications.
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00118, Revision 6, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
190
LG-350XL Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
Features
• Can accommodate up to 7 cables
• Supports stranded loose tube,
Uniflex
®
or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations
• Flanged O-Ring and T-bolt V-band for increased protection
• Oversized basket allows multiple configurations of slack storage
• Requires only a common can wrench for installation
LightGuard
®
350XL
Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
The LightGuard (LG) 350XL is a sealed dome closure designed for large count fiber splicing
(up to 864 single or 2592 mass) in a butt configuration. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-350XL requires only a common can wrench for installation.
Specifications
PARAMETER VALUE
Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 864, 2592, 288
Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 9, 9, 9
Cable Entrance Configuration
Cable Ports / Cable Sizes (Max. O.D.)
Butt
5 ports / 7 with Dual Express Grommet
Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm) / Weight - lbs. (kg)
Express Port
Single 1.18" - 0.40"
Double 0.56" - 0.44"
Drop Port
Single 1.08" - 0.30"
31.0" x 12.0 (78.74 x 30.48) / 25 lbs. (11.3 kg)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
LG-350XL Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure – 864 single fusion or 2592 mass fusion capable, includes (5) cable kits for sealing / retention (single and dual cable configurations) and a grounding terminal. Cable Grounding Kits, hanger brackets and splice trays not included
LL-4896 Splice Tray – Stores (96) single fusion splices or (24) 288 mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (16) six position single splice holders, (6) four position ribbon splice holders and tie-wraps. Maximum of (9) trays in the LG-350XL
LL-2400 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder and tie-wraps.
Maximum of (12) trays in the LG-350XL.
LL-2448 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion or (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (8) trays in the LG-350XL.
LL-4800 Splice Tray – Stores (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (10) trays in the LG-300XL.
LL-4848 Splice Tray – Stores (12) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twelve position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (10) trays in the LG-350XL.
LL-2448-48S Splice Tray – Stores (48) single fusion splices. May be installed in the
LG-250, LG-350, LG-350-XL, LG-410, LG-500, LG-600 Splice Closures, the LL-400B and LL-400S Distribution Enclosures and the LL-2400 Pedestal.
LL-7060 Splice Tray – Stores (60) single fusion splices in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray. For use with the LG-350 and LG-350XL Closures.
LL-7144 Splice Tray – Stores (288) mass fusion splices in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray. For use with the LG-350 and LG-350XL Closures.
LL-7644 Universal Splice Tray – Stores (60) single fusion splices or (288) mass fusion splices or a combination of both in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray. For use with the
LG-350 and LG-350XL Closures.
LG-350XL Dual Axis Express Grommet
Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) – Includes harness and hose clamp.
For use with LG-350XL
O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-300XL
Strand Mount Hanger Bracket – For use with LG-300XL
1X6 Fiber Router Kit
MODEL NO.
LG-300XL-U-0
LL-4896
LL-2400
LL-2448
LL-4800
LL-4848
LL-2448-48S
LL-7060
LL-7144
LL-7644
AFL NO.
FC000010-PS
911676-00-02
91710-06
911289-00-02
91711-07
911437-00-02
FA000045
FA000042
FA000043
FA000044
Dual Axis Exp
Cable Bonding
Kit - 300XL
FC000664
FC000041
O Ring - 300XL FC000016
XL Hangar Bracket 912215-00-00
Router FC000070
* See LL4896 Splice Tray Specifications.
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00134, Revision 7, 11.22.13
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
191
LG-700 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
LightGuard
®
700 Sealed Fiber Optic
Splice Closure
With a capacity for up to 288 single fusion or 432 mass fusion splices, AFL’s LightGuard
(LG) 700 in-line sealed closure is suitable for use in underground and aerial applications.
The LG-700 hosts a dry, permanent peripheral grommet seal that allows for easy re-entry, eliminating the need for a re-entry kit. The closure is equipped with eight cable entry ports (four at each end of the closure), which allows for additional cables to be installed without disturbing previously installed cables. The 3/8" stainless steel captive bolts require only a standard nut driver or 216 tool for installation or re-entry. The LG-700 features a grounding system that may be used for common or isolated/grounding applications.
Features
• Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia
®
• Dry, permanent peripheral grommet seal allows for easy re-entry
• Space for large amounts of buffer tubing with tie downs for organization and installation
• Eight cable entry ports; previously installed cables are not disturbed when installing additional cables
• Common or isolated grounding/bonding
• Designed and tested to Telcordia GR-771 requirements
Specifications
PARAMETER
Splice Capacity (Max.) – single, mass
Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – single, mass
Cable Entrance Configuration
Cable Ports
Cable Sizes (O.D.)
Dimensions (L x D) – inches (cm)
Weight - lbs. (kg)
VALUE
288, 432
12, 9
In-line, Butt
8 Ports
4 @ 0.77"
4 @ 1.00"
24.5" x 10.7" x 4.7" (62.2 x 25.4 x 11.9)
8.5 (3.85)
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
LG-700 Bonded Sealed In-line/Butt Closure - Equipped with (3) cable sealing/retention kits, (3) cable bonding kits, (2) single fusion splice trays
Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 24 single fused fibers, base, cover,
(1) twenty-four position fusion splice holder, tie-wraps.
Universal Splice Tray - Stores 24 single fused fibers or 4 mass fusion sleeves (48 fibers), base, deep cover, tie-wraps.
Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 12 mass fusion sleeves (144 fibers) Base, deep cover, (1) twelve position mass sleeve holder, tie-wraps.
MODEL NO.
LG-700
LL-2400
LL-2448
LL-4848
AFL NO.
911605-00-00
91710-06
911289-00-02
911437-00-02
192
© 1998, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00128, Revision 6, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LightGuard
®
Sealed Splice Closure Accessories
Closure Stand for Sealed Dome Closures
Table top closure stand to be used for the LG-150/250/350/350XL closures. Can be clamped or permanently fastened to a table top to hold the closure in place during installation or maintenance. The clamp pivots 180° to allow accessibility to both sides of the frame and all cable entry ports.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Closure Stand for Sealed Dome Closures
AFL NO.
FC001176
Dual Express Grommets for LG-350XL
Used on the express side of the LG-350XL closure for installing additional branches. Use the drop ports for the express cable while the express ports may be used to introduce small branch cables. Minimum cable diameter is 0.380" - 0.560".
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Dual Express Grommets for LG-350XL
AFL NO.
FC000688
Dual Express Grommets
Quad Express Grommets
Dual and Quad Express Grommets for LG-350
Used on the express side of the LG-350 closure for installing additional branches. Use the drop ports for the express cable while the express ports may be used to introduce small branch cables. A 4-drop flat grommet may be used if drops are also required. Cable diameter for dual grommets is 0.26" - 0.44"; for quad, 0.24" - 0.382".
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Dual Express Grommets for LG-350
Quad Express Grommets for LG-350
AFL NO.
FC000337
FC000421
4-Port Flat Drop Grommet Kit for LG-350/LG-350-AC
Used with the LG-350 and LG-350-AC Sealed Closures. Allows for quick addition of drop cables as required. Simply replace the drop port grommets with this grommet kit and install standard flat drop cable or round cable up to 0.25" in diameter.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
4-Port Flat Drop Grommet Kit for LG-350/LG-350-AC
AFL NO.
FC000422
© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00120, Revision 3, 4.14.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
193
LightGuard
®
Sealed Splice Closure Accessories
(cont.)
Single Cable and 3-Port Flat Drop Grommet Kit for
LG-150/LG-250
Used with the LG-150 and LG-250 Sealed Closures. Allows for quick addition of drop cables as required. Simply replace the drop port grommets with this grommet kit. Both closures will accept standard flat drop cable or round cable up to 0.250" in diameter.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Single Cable Grommet Kit for the LG-150/LG-250
3-Port Flat Drop Grommet Kit for the LG-150/LG-250
AFL NO.
FC000704
FC000655
Single Cable Grommet Kits for LG-350-AC and LG-350
Used with the LG-350-AC when a branch cable is required with the drop cables. May also be used for with the LG-350 as replacement grommets. Simply remove the flat drop grommet and replace with the single cable grommets.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Single Cable Grommet Kit, Drop Port for LG-350-AC
Express Single Cable Grommet Kit for LG-350
Drop Single Cable Grommet Kit for LG-350
AFL NO.
FC000628
FC000726
FC000727
OPGW Cable Bracket for LG-150/LG-250/LG-350
Attaches to the outer grounding studs of the LG-150/LG-250 or LG-350 Sealed
Closures. Stainless steel hose clamps secure the OPGW cable to the bracket preventing twisting or movement.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
OPGW Cable Bracket for the LG-150/LG-250/LG-350 for 2 cables.
OPGW Cable Bracket Kit for use when installing Sealed Closures
(LG-150/LG-250) to 4 OPGW Cables.
OPGW Cable Bracket Kit for use when installing Sealed Closures (LG-350) to
4 OPGW Cables.
AFL NO.
FC000683
FC000746
FC000747
Pole/Wall Mount Bracket for LG-150/LG-250/LG-350
Used with the LG-150, LG-250, LG-350 and LG-350-AC to secure the closures onto poles or walls in a vertical orientation. Slots on the brackets allow for strapping onto steel or cement poles.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Pole/Wall Mount Bracket for LG-150/LG-250/LG-350/LG-350-AC
AFL NO.
FC000592
© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00120, Revision 3, 4.14.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
194
LightGuard
®
Sealed Splice Closure Accessories
(cont.)
Universal Aerial Bracket and Extended Offset Bracket
Used with the LG-150, LG-250, LG-350 and LG-350-AC for mounting on aerial or messengers.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Universal Aerial Bracket for LG-150/LG-250/LG-350/LG-350-AC
Extended Offset Bracket
AFL NO.
FC000006
FC000208
Enlarged to show detail
Strand Mount Hanger Bracket for LG-350XL
Used with the LG-350XL.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Strand Mount Hanger Bracket – For use with LG-350XL
AFL NO.
912215-00-00
Cable Ground Kits
Used with the LG-150, LG-250 and LG-350.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp.
One kit needed per cable entry. For use with LG-150/250/350.
AFL NO.
FC000003
Cable Grounding Harness Kit – Includes (4) 8" ground harnesses constructed of #6 AWG conductor FC000024
Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) – Includes harness and hose clamp.
For use with LG-150/250/350.
FC000040
O-Ring Replacement Kits
Used with the LG-150, LG-250, LG-350 and LG-350XL.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-150/250
O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-300XL
O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-350.
AFL NO.
FC000004
FC000016
912231-00-00
1x6 Cable Router Kit
Used with the LG-150, LG-250, LG-350 and LG-350-AC.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
1X6 Cable Router Kit
AFL NO.
FC000070
© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00120, Revision 3, 4.14.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
195
LightLink Terminal Adapters for Sealed Closures
LLAS-200-12SC
LightLink Fiber Optic Terminal Adapters for Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures
The LightLink Access Solution (LLAS) Terminal Adapters provide the interconnect and/or demarcation of optical fibers for Fiber-to-the-Node (FTTN), Fiber-to-the-Home (FTTH),
Fiber-to-the-Premise (FTTP) and Fiber-to-the-Curb (FTTC) applications. The adapter plates are designed to be used in conjunction with AFL Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures and convert the standard closure design into an FTTX or demarcation type fiber optic splice closure. The adapter plates provide mounting positions ranging from six to 24 SC-style bulkheads (depending on the model). The interconnection and routing of 900 µm SC pigtails with pre-connectorized SC drop cables is managed through routing rings on the terminal adapter. Three versions are available and are matched to the LG-150, LG-250 and LG-350 series sealed fiber optic splice closures.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Terminal Adapter for LG-150/250 Sealed Splice Closure
Terminal Adapter for LG-350 Sealed Splice Closure
Terminal Adapter – Empty plate
MODEL NO.
LLAS-200-12SC
LLAS-300-24SC
LLAS-350-96-LC
Terminal Adapter – with Installed SCAPC (48) LLAS-350-96-LC
Terminal Adapter – with Installed SCUPC (48) LLAS-350-96-LC
Terminal Adapter – with Installed LCUPC Duplex SC Foot Print (48) LLAS-350-96-LC
Terminal Adapter – with Installed LCAPC Duplex SC Foot Print (48) LLAS-350-96-LC
AFL NO.
FC000068
FC000069
FC000736
FC000737
FC000738
FC000739
FC000765
Blank bulkhead adapter plate and routing rings are included.
SC bulkheads, SC pigtails (900 µm) and SC pre-connectorized drop cable may be ordered separately.
Accessories Ordering
DESCRIPTION
(1) Small Flange SC/UPC Bulkhead adapter (Blue)
(1) Small Flange SC/APC Bulkhead adapter (Green)
(1) Pigtail - SC/UPC Connector with (1) meter 900µm fiber
(1) Pigtail - SC/APC Connector with (1) meter 900µm fiber
AFL NO.
C058475
C147880
C146507-0001
C203278-0001
LLAS-300-24SC
LLAS-200-12SC LLAS-300-24SC
LLAS-350-96LC
196
© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00155, Revision 4, 10.8.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
OptiNID
®
500 Optical Demarcation Closure
The OptiNID (OPN) 500 is an optical demarcation closure designed for use in either indoor or outdoor environments. Small form factor for FTTH demarcation applications, the closure is capable of housing up to six bulkhead adapters in one 118 LGX
® compatible adapter plate, and is equipped with an integrated splice tray, which holds up to six single fusion splices. The OPN-500 can be either wall or pole-mounted.
Features
• Weather-resistant thermoplastic alloy
• Self-latching, hinged cover design allows easy access without loose parts
• Capacity for one 118 LGX compatible adapter plate
• Provider override for customer lock
• 3/4" NPT conduit fitting, compression cable fittings or grommeted entry ports
Specifications
PARAMETER VALUES
Dielectric Strength Minimum 2500 Vrms for 1 minute
High Temperature Storage/Mold Stress °F (°C) 14 days at 159 (70.55)
Temperature Cycling with Humidity °F (°C) 150 day cycling from 40-140 (4.44-60) with 95% RH
Impact Test °F (°C) -40 (-40), 5 ft/lbs on all external surfaces
Drop Test °F (°C)
Rain
-40 (-40), 5 ft onto concrete surface four times
24 hours at 10 psi
UV Resistance (Days Exposed)
Salt Fog (Days Exposed)
Flammability
Chemical Resistance
30 Days at 100°F and 95% RH
Material
60 per ASTM-G26-84
60 per ASTM-BLL7-90
UL94-5V
Resists chipping and/or cracking when subject to house paint, wasp spray, sulfuric acid, kerosene and sodium hydroxide
UL ® listed flame retardant thermoplastic alloy
Dimensions (H x W x D) in. (cm)
Cable Entrance in. (cm) diameter - Input
Covers
6.3 x 7.8 x 2.0 (15.7 x 19.7 x 5.0)
1 x 3/4” NPT (1.130”), 2 x 1/2” NPT (0.875”)
Standard, molded-in snap finger and "F" termination
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
BASE PRODUCT
1,2
AFL NO.
OptiNID OPN-500, No Adapters DM001021
OptiNID OPN-500, 1 x SC/UPC Adapter DM000550
OptiNID OPN-500, 1 x SC/APC Adapter
OptiNID OPN-500, 6 x SC/UPC Adapters
OptiNID OPN-500, 6 x SC/UPC Adapters, 6 x 1 m 900 μm Pigtails
ACCESSORIES
3
DM000766
DM000871
DM001109
Heyco M3234 Compression Fitting, 18 mm to 11 mm Grip (includes 4) – Left Port Only DM001171
Kit, Six-Position Splice Chip, (includes 10) DM000870
Notes:
1. All standard OPN-500 configurations come equipped with a ¾” NPT fitting, rubber grommet and
Heyco 3231 compression fitting, along with a splice chip for six single fusion splices.
2. Contact AFL customer service for additional configurations.
3. See OptiNID Accessory Page for additional kits.
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00160, Revision 5, 6.7.13
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
197
OptiNID
®
760XL Optical Demarcation Closure
OPN-760XL with optional security cover kit
OPN-760XL with 3/4" Pipe Fitting Transition Kit
OptiNID
®
760XL
Optical Demarcation Closure
The OptiNID (OPN) 760XL is an optical demarcation closure designed for use in either indoor or outdoor environments. It is capable of housing up to 24 bulkhead adapters in two 118
LGX
®
compatible adapter plates and is equipped with a splice tray (LL-2425), which holds up to 24 single fusion splices. The OPN-760XL can be either wall or pole-mounted.
Features
• Capacity for up to two 118 LGX compatible adapter plates
• Rugged weather-resistant thermoplastic alloy
• Self-latching, hinged cover design allows easy access without loose parts
• Slip-in grommets allow pre-connectorized cable deployment
• Provider override is provided so that technician can override customer lock
• Security cover option available
Specifications
PARAMETER VALUES
Dielectric Strength Minimum 2500 Vrms for 1 minute
High Temperature Storage/Mold Stress °F (°C) 14 days at 159 (70.55)
Temperature Cycling with Humidity °F (°C)
Impact Test °F (°C)
Drop Test °F (°C)
Rain
UV Resistance (Days Exposed)
Salt Fog (Days Exposed)
Flammability
Chemical Resistance
30 Days at 100 °F and 95% RH Subject to:
150 day cycling from 40-140 (4.44-60) with 95% RH
-40 (-40), 5*/lbs on all external surfaces
-40 (-40), 5* (12.7 cm) onto concrete surface 4 times
24 hours at 10 psi
60 per ASTM-G26-84
60 per ASTM-BLL7-90
UL94-5V
Resists chipping and/or cracking when subject to: house paint, wasp spray, sulfuric acid, kerosene and sodium hydroxide
Material
Dimensions (H x W x D) in. (cm)
Cable Entrances in. (cm) diameter—Input
Covers
UL ® listed flame retardant thermoplastic alloy
13 x 13 x 3.75 (32.5 x 32.5 x 9.5)
4 x 0.875 (2.2)—3/4" conduit
Standard – molded-in snap finger and 3/8" hex head fastener
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
BASE PRODUCT 1,2
OptiNID OPN-760XL, No Adapters, No Security Cover
OptiNID OPN-760XL, No Adapters, Security Cover
ACCESSORIES
3
3/4" Pipe Fitting Transition Kit (includes 2)
OPN-760XL Security Cover Kit
OPN-760XL Pole Mounting Kit
AFL NO.
DM001000
DM001022
Notes:
1. All standard OPN-760XL configurations come equipped with four slip-in rubber grommets and
a splice tray equipped for 32 single fusion splices.
2. Contact AFL customer service for additional configurations.
3. See OptiNID Accessory Page for additional kits.
DM001174
DM000923
DM000927
3/4" Pipe Fitting Transition Kit
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00161, Revision 5, 3.18.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
198
OptiNID
®
1224 Optical Demarcation Closure
The OptiNID-1224 is an optical demarcation closure designed for use in either indoor or outdoor environments. It is capable of housing up to 36 bulkhead adapters in three 118 LGX
® compatible adapter plates and comes equipped with a splice tray (LL-2425), which holds up to
32 single fusion splices. The OPN-1224 can be either wall or pole-mounted.
Features
• Capacity for up to three 118 LGX compatible adapter plates
• Weather-resistant thermoplastic alloy
• Self-latching, hinged cover design allows easy access without loose parts
• Self-sealing individual entrance ports prevent water and insects from entering
• Provider override is provided so that technician can override customer lock
Specifications
PARAMETER
Dielectric Strength
VALUES
Minimum 2500 Vrms for 1 minute
High Temperature Storage/Mold Stress °F (°C) 14 days at 159 (70.55)
Temperature Cycling with Humidity °F (°C) 150 day cycling from 40-140 (4.44-60) with 95% RH
Impact Test °F (°C) -40 (-40), 5*/lbs on all external surfaces
Drop Test °F (°C)
Rain
UV Resistance (Days Exposed)
Salt Fog (Days Exposed)
Flammability
Chemical Resistance
30 Days at 100°F and 95% RH
Material
Dimensions (H x W x D) in. (cm)
Cable Entrances in. (cm) diameter - Output
Cable Entrances in. (cm) diameter - Input
Covers
-40 (-40), 5* (12.7 cm) onto concrete surface 4 times
24 hours at 10 psi
60 per ASTM-G26-84
60 per ASTM-BLL7-90
UL94-5V
Resists chipping and/or cracking when subject to: house paint, wasp spray, sulfuric acid, kerosene and sodium hydroxide
UL ® listed flame retardant thermoplastic alloy
12.25 x 12 x 5.25 (22.80 x 22.80 x 7.60)
5 x 0.625 (1.5)
2 x 0.75 (1.5), 1 x 0.250 (0.6) (ground wire)
Standard - molded-in snap finger and "F" termination
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
OptiNID OPN-1224, Splice Tray, No Adapter Plate Or Adapters
AFL NO.
DM000183
LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.
199
© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00159, Revision 3, 6.14.13
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Hermetic Fiber Assemblies
Hermetic Fiber Assemblies are designed to meet today’s environmental sealing requirements for optical components used in military, telecommunication and sensing applications. The assembly is designed to integrate hermetic functionality (metalized and non-metalized), mechanical robustness, optical integrity and performance into a single package. Termination options include high-performance connectors, capillaries, lensed fibers and bare fiber endfaces.
Features
• Metalized SM or Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers
• Kovar ferrule construction for thermal stability and device attachment ease
• Hermetic seals greater than
10-8 cc/sec helium
• Standard and custom designs available
• Guaranteed polarization alignment throughout assembly for PM-based designs
• Rugged construction designed to meet
Telcordia and Military mechanical/environmental requirements
Specifications
METALIZATION PROPERTY
Coating Type
Coating Thickness
Gold
Nickel
Dimensional Tolerances
Metalization Length
Fiber Tip Length (non-metalized 125 µm)
Metalization/250 µm Overcoat Length
Physical Properties
Metal-Glass Adhesion
Hermeticity
Pull Strength (Kovar ferrule-to-fiber)
Solder Compatibility
Operating Temperature
Fiber Types
Applications
• Laser Packages (LDs, Source Lasers, etc.)
• Military Components
• DWDM Components
• Modulators
• Attenuators
• Sensors
• Fiber Optic Gyros
SPECIFICATION AND LIMITS
Nickel/Gold
0.1 to 0.2 µm
4.0 + 1 µm
3.0 to 40.0 + 1.0 mm
0.2 to 20.0 + 1.0 mm
0 to 5 mm
> 1Kg
< 10-9 ATM cc/sec He
> 1Kg
SnPb, InAg, AuSn
-40ºC to + 85ºC
PANDA/PM, SM, MM
200
© 2002 AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00060, Revision 2, 1.17.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Specialty Fiber Optic Cable
MiniBend
™
Fiber Optic Component
For Downhole Double-ended Systems and Optical Connectivity
The MiniBend miniature fiber optic component employs a revolutionary technology that will change the way you plan and engineer the fiber management in your oil or gas well.
This patented technology allows for a single strand of multimode or single-mode fiber to be formed at a 180° bend with a 1 mm fiber bend diameter, saving valuable real estate.
Features
• Elegant, low profile solution for achieving downhole fiber optic double-ended system
• Provides low-loss sub-millimeter bends for miniaturizing fiber components and circuits
• No stress with the small bend radii
• Bi-directional
• Mechanically and environmentally robust
• Small and protective package
Dimensions
Applications
• Downhole fiber optic turnaround
• Fiber management systems
• Modulators, splitters, circulators, connectors and polarizers
• Circuit boards and back planes
• Compact test instrumentation and sensors
Specifications
PARAMETER
Item Number
Fiber Coating Type
Operation Wavelength Range
Insertion Loss
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Body Size
Fiber Tail Length
Straight Pull
VALUE
DNS-1574 DNS-1575
50 µm multimode carbon mid-temperature acrylate
50 µm multimode carbon/polyimide
900 to 1340 nm, 1430 to 1600 nm
< 0.2 dB at 1310 nm of wavelength at room temperature
0 to 150°C 0 to 200°C
-60 to 85°C
Outside Diameter = 2.2 mm +/-0.1, Length = 15 mm +/-0.3
> 0.5 m
500 g
DNS-1885 single-mode carbon mid-temperature acrylate
DNS-1890 single-mode carbon/polyimide
1280 to 1340 nm, 1430 to 1600 nm
< 0.3 dB at 1550 nm of wavelength at room temperature
0 to 150°C 0 to 200°C
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
201
© 2004, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00079, Revision 2, 9.16.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Specialty Fiber Optic Cable
Applications
• Umbilical Cables
• Downhole Cables for Oil & Gas
• Towed Arrays
• High Temperature Cables
• Hybrid Cables
• Sensor Cable
• OPGW
Stainless Steel Fiber Optic Tubes
As the inventor and owner of the technology for placing optical fibers into stainless steel tubes, AFL offers a range of tube sizes and fiber counts for a variety of applications.
Each tube is flooded with a thixotropic filling compound and hermetically sealed to protect the enclosed fibers from environmental degradation. This product is sometimes referred to as FIST (Fiber in Steel Tube) or FIMT (Fiber in Metal Tube).
Jacket Options
AFL can encapsulate any of our stainless steel tubes with any of the following polymers:
• Hytrel
™
• Santoprene ™
• Polyethylene
• Polypropylene
• Nylon
• PVDF
Cable Components
Outer Jacket
Fiber
Stainless Steel Tube
Specifications (without jacketing)
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
15
16
17
5
6
3
4
1
2
OPTION
NUMBER
8
8
6
8
3
4
MAXIMUM
FIBER COUNT
8
12
16
16
16
24
36
48
60
72
72
OUTSIDE
DIAMETER inches (mm)
0.046 (1.17)
0.052 (1.32)
0.071 (1.80)
0.074 (1.88)
0.078 (1.98)
0.079 (2.01)
0.082 (2.08)
0.092 (2.34)
0.094 (2.39)
0.098 (2.49)
0.106 (2.69)
0.118 (3.00)
0.125 (3.18)
0.134 (3.40)
0.142 (3.61)
0.150 (3.81)
0.156 (3.96)
INSIDE
DIAMETER inches (mm)
0.036 (0.91)
0.042 (1.07)
0.055 (1.40)
0.058 (1.47)
0.062 (1.57)
0.063 (1.60)
0.066 (1.68)
0.076 (1.93)
0.078 (1.98)
0.082 (2.08)
0.090 (2.29)
0.102 (2.59)
0.109 (2.77)
0.119 (3.02)
0.126 (3.20)
0.134 (3.40)
0.140 (3.56)
Available in Stainless Steel 304, 316 and Incoloy 825. Others sizes and materials available on request.
WALL
THICKNESS inches (mm)
0.005 (0.127)
0.005 (0.127)
0.008 (0.200)
0.008 (0.200)
0.008 (0.200)
0.008 (0.200)
0.008 (0.200)
0.008 (0.200)
0.008 (0.200)
0.008 (0.200)
0.008 (0.200)
0.008 (0.200)
0.008 (0.200)
0.008 (0.200)
0.008 (0.200)
0.008 (0.200)
0.008 (0.200)
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
202
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00021, Revision 2, 9.20.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Specialty Fiber Optic Cable
Traditional Downhole Cable
Traditional Downhole cable from AFL is designed to perform in the well and withstand elevated temperatures, high pressure and corrosive environments. The cable is customized to the customer’s specifications in order to maximize performance at the best possible price. AFL’s Traditional Downhole cable is targeted to < 150°C offshore and land-based wells where ruggedness is essential.
Features
• Customized to customer specifications
• Up to 150°C
• Up to 20,000 psi operating pressure
• Loose tube design
• Hydrogen scavenging gel
Cable Components
Outer Stainless Steel Tube
Polyprolylene Inner Jacket
Inner Stainless Steel Tube
Fiber
Hydrogen Scavenging Gel
Outer Encapsulation
Options and Specifications
PARAMETER
Inner Stainless Steel Tube Diameter
Outer Tube Diameter
Outer Tube Wall Thickness
Outer Tube Material
Fiber Coating
Gel Types
Diameter
Polymer Options
Operating Temperature
Operating Pressure Limit
VALUE
0.125"
0.250"
0.028", 0.035", 0.049"
Stainless Steel 316L, Incoloy
™
825
Carbon Polyimide, Silicon/PFA, Pure Silica Core and others
No gel, standard gel, hydrogen scavenging gel
11 mm x 11 mm square, 11 mm round
Polypropylene, PVDF, Nylon, Santoprene ™
-40°C to 150°C
0 to 20,000 psi
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
203
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00084, Revision 2, 9.16.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Features
• Small diameter
• Low weight
• Redundant hermetic seal
• Encapsulation options
• Lower cost
• Patent pending
Specialty Fiber Optic Cable
Low Profile Downhole Cable
AFL’s unique offering for shallow, land-based wells provides the best combination of ruggedness and size for the price. AFL will customize the design to meet the customer’s needs in order to maximise their return on investment.
Cable Components
Outer Tube
Inner Tube
Fiber
Hydrogen Scavenging Gel
Inside Tube
Options and Specifications
PARAMETER
Outer Tube Diameter
Tube Wall Thickness
Tube Material
Fiber coating
Gel types
Polymer options
STAINLESS STEEL 316L OPTION
Weight
Tensile
Collapse pressure
Bend radius (dynamic)
INCOLOY
™
825 OPTION
Weight
Tensile
Collapse pressure
Bend radius (dynamic)
ENCAPSULATION OPTION
Diameter
Weight
Santoprene
™
Polypropylene
PVDF
Nylon
VALUE
DOUBLE TUBE TRIPLE TUBE
0.125
0.016
Stainless Steel 316L, Incoloy
™
825
0.125
0.024
Carbon Polyimide, Silicon/PFA, Pure Silica Core and others
No gel, high temperature gel, hydrogen scavenging gel
Polypropylene, PVDF, Nylon, Santoprene
™
21 lbs / 1,000 ft
760 lbs
30,000 psi
12.6"
22 lbs / 1,000 ft
814 lbs
21,000 psi
12.6"
1/4"
15 lbs / 1,000 ft
14 lbs / 1,000 ft
28 lbs / 1,000 ft
16 lbs / 1,000 ft
28 lbs / 1,000 ft
1,060 lbs
44,000 psi
12.6"
28 lbs / 1,000 ft
1,134 lbs
32,000 psi
12.6"
For specifications or questions regarding these cables please contact Dean Yamasaki 864-433-5390 or email [email protected].
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00078, Revision 3, 3.12.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
204
Specialty Fiber Optic Cable
High Temperature Downhole Cable
AFL’s unique solution for applications > 150°C is a three-layer design with the secondary layer being 0.040" thick aluminum. Research indicates hydrogen permeability through aluminum is 100 times less than stainless steel resulting in an extended life for the optical fiber. The all metal design eliminates concerns with polymers at elevated temperatures and provides for stable, predictable performance.
Features
• Hydrogen resistant
• All metal construction
• Tight tolerances
• 300°C temperatures and beyond
• Loose tube design
• Patent pending
Cable Components
Options and Specifications
PARAMETER
Inner Stainless Steel Tube Diameter
Outer Tube Diameter
Outer Tube Wall Thickness
Outer Tube Material
Weight Stainless Steel 316L
Incoloy
™
825
Fiber Types
Fiber Coating
Gel Types
Polymer Options
Operating Temperature
Operating Pressure Limit
VALUE
0.094"
0.250"
0.028"
Stainless Steel 316L, Incoloy ™ 825
142 kg/km
144 kg/km
Single-mode, Multimode, Pure Silica Core Single-mode
Polyimide, Carbon Polyimide, Silicon/PFA, Gold, Aluminum, Copper
No gel, high temperature gel, hydrogen scavenging gel
Polypropylene, PVDF, Nylon, Santoprene
™
-40°C to 300°C, higher upon request
0 to 20,000 psi
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
205
© 2008-2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00077, Revision 2, 9.9.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Features
• Hermetic Stainless Steel Tube
• High Strength Wire
• Polyethylene Jacketed
• Hydrogen scavenging gel
• Long lengths
• In-line splice technology
• Proven technology
• Long life expectancy
• Custom Jacket Colors
Specialty Fiber Optic Cable
Fiber Optic Component for Umbilical Cable
AFL’s Fiber Optic Component for Umbilical Cable is designed for subsea umbilical applications. AFL is the technology owner for hermetic stainless steel tubes which are the key building block for subsea cables. AFL provides customized designs to meet the most stringent requirements. AFL’s Fiber Optic Component is suitable for depths of 10,000 feet and beyond.
Cable Components
Outer Jacket
Armor Wires
Stainless Steel Tube
Inner Jacket
Optical Fiber
Options and Specifications
PARAMETER
Number of Fibers
Fiber
Stainless Steel Tube Sizes
Stainless Steel Tube Types
Armor
Fiber Colors
Unit Weight
Overall Diameter
VALUE
Up to 96
Single-mode, Multimode, 100 or 200 kpsi proof test
1.8 mm to 3.8 mm
304 or 316L Stainless Steel
16 x 1.02 mm (0.040") wires, a range of tensile specifications are available
EIA 598 or customer specification
150 to 300 kg/km
6 mm to 16 mm
Storage Temperature Range
Operating Temperature Range
Breaking Load
-40 to +85°C
-40 to +85°C
Up to 25 kN (dependant on armor selection)
Bend Radius (design dependent) 120 mm to 320 mm
Cable Marking To customer specification
For specifications or questions regarding these cables please contact Dean Yamasaki 864-433-5390 or email [email protected].
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00073, Revision 3, 3.12.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
206
BU Series Braided Armored Breakout Cable
Fiber Optic Cable
Temperature Range
Operating: - 46ºC to + 85ºC
Installation: - 20ºC to + 85ºC
Storage: -57°C to 85°C
Braided Armored Deployable
Tight Buffered Cable
AFL Armored Deployable Tight Buffered Cables are ideal for use in installations where extreme environmental conditions are present. With the addition of a wire braid embedded within the jacketing system, these cables are highly resistant to damage caused by repetitive impacts, high flex, crush, and abrasion as well as other harsh conditions. By utilizing AFL's tight buffered fiber technology field, termination is simplified.
Features
• Cut resistant polyurethane outer jacket
• Highly flexible construction allows for multiple deployments
• Performance in wide temperature range
• High impact and crush resistance
• Durable in high traffic areas
• Water and UV resistant
• Multiple jacket colors available
• Capable of supporting all Multi-Gigabit
Ethernet Protocols
Applications
• Field deployment in abusive environments
• High traffic areas
• Security and sensing applications
• High Flex Applications
• Installations in industrial environments
• Temporary installation of critical communications lines where quick retrieval and re-use is necessary
Cable Components
Tight Buffered Fiber
Bronze Braiding
Aramid Yarn
Inner TPU Jacket
Outer TPU Jacket
Ordering Information
NOMINAL
DIAMETER
AFL NO.
XU00130180#-BB
XU00258180#-BB
FIBER
COUNT
1
2
INCHES
0.26
.374
XU00458180#-BB
XU00661180#-BB
XU01270180#-BB
4
6
12
.374
.386
.421
Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice
MM
6.6
9.5
9.5
9.8
10.7
Replace asterisk () in AFL number with number corresponding below.
5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link
™
600
6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link ™
9 = Single-mode
300
K = SM Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive
* Other fiber types available.
NOMINAL
WEIGHT
LBS/1,000 FT KG/KM
42.4
82.5
82.5
64
124
124
85.5
104.7
128
156
250 (1112)
325 (1450)
325 (1450)
325 (1450)
394 (1750)
TENSION
INSTALLATION
LBS (N)
LONG TERM
66 (290)
66 (290)
66 (290)
66 (290)
79 (350)
MINIMUM
BEND RADIUS
INCHES (CM)
2.6 (6.6)
3.7 (9.5)
3.7 (9.5)
3.8 (9.8)
4.2 (10.7)
Replace pound sign (#) in AFL number with number corresponding below.
G = 500 µm Coated Optical Fiber
H = 250 µm Coated Optical Fiber
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
207
© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00119, Revision 0, 1.8.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Tactical Cable
Fiber Optic Cable
Tactical Tight Buffered Cable
AFL Tactical Tight Buffered Cables are ideal for use in installations where extreme environmental conditions are present. Designed to be deployed and retrieved in the field, AFL’s Tactical Tight Buffered Cables are highly resistant to damage caused by repeated impacts or harsh conditions.
Features
Cut resistant, Flame Retardant
Polyurethane outer jacket
Highly flexible construction allows for multiple deployments
All aramid strength members
Performance in wide temperature range
High impact and crush resistance
Durable in high traffic areas
MIL-PRF-46291 qualified fiber available (-RH designation)
Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA
568-B3, Telecordia GR-409-CORE,
ANSI/ICEA S-83-596 and
ANSI/ICEA S-104-696
Two- and four-fiber cables designed to meet MIL-PRF-85045
Temperature Range
Operating: -56ºC to +85ºC
Installation: -20ºC to +85ºC
Applications
Field deployment in abusive environments
Temporary installation of critical communications lines where quick retrieval and re-use is necessary
Cable Components
Specifications
CHARACTERISTIC
Tensile and elongation
Operating tensile strength
Low-temp flexibility
Cyclic flexing
Crush resistance
Impact
Temperature cycling
Temperature/humidity cycling
Life aging
Freezing water immersion
Polyurethane outer jacket aramid strength member
250 µm or 500 µm optical fiber
900 µm Elastomeric Tight Buffer
High Traffic areas
Security and Sensing applications
Broadcast deployments
Installations in harsh environments
TEST PROCEDURE
EIA/TIA-455-33
EIA/TIA-455-33
EIA/TIA-455-37
EIA/TIA-455-104
EIA/TIA-455-41
EIA/TIA-455-25
EIA/TIA-455-3
EIA/TIA-455-5 Method B
EIA/TIA-455-4
EIA/TIA-455-98
PERFORMANCE
2000
2000 N/cm
200
-46°C to 85°C
Ordering Information
AFL NO.
XU00130180G
XU00258180G
XU00458180G
FIBER
COUNT
1
2
4
NOMINAL DIA.
INCHES
NOMINAL WT.
MAXIMUM TENSILE LOAD
LBS (N)
MINIMUM BEND RADIUS
INCHES (CM)
(MM) LBS/1000FT (KG/KM) INSTALLATION LONG TERM INSTALLATION LONG TERM
0.12
0.23
0.23
Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice
(2.9)
(5.8)
(5.8)
5.4
21.5
21.5
(8)
(32)
(32)
250 (1112)
375 (1668)
375 (1668)
75 (334)
150 (667)
150 (667)
1.5 (3.8)
3.25 (8.3)
3.25 (8.3)
1.25 (3.2)
2.25 (5.7)
2.25 (5.7)
Replace asterisk (
) in AFL number with number corresponding below.
5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link
™
600
6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link
™
300
9 = Single-mode
K = SM Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive
Fiber Notes/Options
G = Elastomer over 500 µm
– RH = Indicates Radiation Hardened Fiber
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
© 2007, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00066, Revision 2.5 9.20.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
208
Fiber Optic Cable
Non-Armored Security Cable
Acting as the backbone for most of today’s fiber based systems, stranded fiber optic cables play a critical role in the high speed network. AFL’s Non-Armored Security fiber optic cables are designed to provide high fiber counts with the flexibility and versatility required for today’s most demanding installations. Our cables feature fiber counts up to 288, compliance with EIA/TIA and REA/RUS PE-90, and are S-Z stranded for easy mid-span access. Industry standard designs combined with innovative technologies, such as a dry core product, yield a world class cable that will support today’s and tomorrow’s technological needs.
Cable Components
Product Applications
• Security Sensing
• Long Haul Networking
• Building Interconnections (Campus
LAN)
• Trunking Lines Direct to
Telecommunications Closet
• Local Loop
• Distance Learning
• Distribution
• Intrabuilding Backbones
Temperature Range
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . .-40ºC to +70ºC
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-40ºC to +75ºC
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . .-30ºC to +70ºC
Mechanical Data
MAXIMUM LENGTHS*
FIBER
COUNT
6 - 60
72 - 96
108 -120
132 - 144
216
288
FEET
24,600
17,700
14,100
SINGLE-MODE
METERS
7,500
5,400
4,300
11,500
9,500
8,500
3,500
2,900
2,600
* Longer lengths may be available upon request.
Optical Information
FIBER TYPE
(6) 62.5/125 GIGA-Link™ 300
(8) 62.5/125 GIGA-Link™ 1000
(5) 50/125 GIGA-Link™ 600
(7) 50/125 GIGA-Link™ 2000
(9) Single-mode
MAXIMUM ATTENUATION
(dB/km)
850 nm 1300 nm 1550 nm
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
N/A
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.4
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0.3
Gigabit Ethernet Minimum Link Distances are based on “bandwidth”/modal dispersion constraints.
Actual link distances may be constrained by attenuation, depending on specific loss budget.
OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN. BANDWIDTH
(MHz•km)
850 nm 1300 nm
200
350
500
500
N/A
600
600
500
800
N/A
FEET
24,600
17,700
14,100
11,500
9,500
8,500
MULTIMODE
METERS
7,500
5,400
4,300
3,500
2,900
2,600
GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN. LINK
DISTANCE (METERS)
850 nm 1300 nm
300
500
600
750
N/A
550
1000
600
2000
N/A
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00080, Revision 1, 1.18.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Fiber Optic Cable
Non-Armored Security Cable
Ordering Information
PART
NUMBER
FIBER
COUNT
NUMBER OF
TUBES/FIBERS
L
E
006C5T21N1
6
LE012C5T21N1
12
LE018C5T21N1 18
LE024C5T21N1
24
LE030C5T21N1
30
LE036C5T21N1 36
1w/6 (4 fillers)
1w/12 (4 fillers)
1w/12,1w/6 (3 fillers)
2w/12 (3 fillers)
2w/12,1w/6 (2 fillers)
3w/12 (2 fillers)
LE048C5T21N1
48
LE060C5T21N1
60
LE072C6T21N1 72
4w/12 (1 filler)
5w/12 (no fillers)
LE084C8T21N1 84
LE096C8T21N1
LE120CAT21N1
96
LE108CAT21N1 108
120
LE132CCT21N1 132
6w/12 (no fillers)
7w/12 (1 filler)
8w/12 (no fillers)
9w/12 (1 filler) l0w/12 (no fillers)
11w/12 (1 filler)
LE144CCT21N1 144
LE216CIT21N1
216
12w/12 (no fillers)
18w/12 (no fillers)
LE288COT21N1
288 24w/12 (no fillers)
Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice
NOMINAL
DIAMETER
INCHES
0.51
0.51
0.60
0.67
0.67
0.74
0.74
0.82
0.87
0.51
0.51
0.53
0.60
0.51
0.51
0.51
0.51
12.9
12.9
15.2
17.0
17.0
18.9
18.9
20.8
22.0
12.9
12.9
13.9
15.2
12.9
12.9
12.9
12.9
NOMINAL WEIGHT
MM LBS/1,000FT KG/KM
80
80
118
149
149
179
84
84
95
118
179
217
241
84
84
84
84
Fiber Types – Replace asterisk () in part number with number corresponding to desired fiber type below.
5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600
7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000
6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300
8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000
9 = Single-mode
Q = Non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode
120
120
176
222
222
269
269
303
360
125
125
141
176
125
125
125
125
MAXIMUM TENSILE LOAD MINIMUM BEND RADIUS
LBS (N)
SHORT
TERM
600 (2670)
600 (2670)
LONG TERM
200 (890)
200 (890)
INCHES (CM)
SHORT
TERM
10.2 (26.0)
10.2 (26.0)
LONG TERM
5.1 (12.9)
5.1 (12.9)
600 (2670)
600 (2670)
600 (2670)
600 (2670)
600 (2670)
600 (2670)
600 (2670)
600 (2670)
600 (2670)
600 (2670)
600 (2670)
600 (2670)
600 (2670)
600 (2670)
600 (2670)
200 (890)
200 (890)
200 (890)
200 (890)
200 (890)
200 (890)
200 (890)
200 (890)
200 (890)
200 (890)
200 (890)
200 (890)
200 (890)
200 (890)
200 (890)
10.2 (26.0)
10.2 (26.0)
10.2 (26.0)
10.2 (26.0)
10.2 (26.0)
10.2 (26.0)
10.6 (27.0)
12.0 (30.4)
12.0 (30.4)
13.4 (34.0)
13.4 (34.0)
14.9 (37.8)
14.9 (37.8)
16.4 (41.6)
17.3 (44.0)
5.1 (12.9)
5.1 (12.9)
5.1 (12.9)
5.1 (12.9)
5.1 (12.9)
5.1 (12.9)
5.3 (13.4)
6.0 (15.2)
6.0 (15.2)
6.7 (17.0)
6.7 (17.0)
7.5 (18.9)
7.5 (18.9)
8.2 (20.8)
8.7 (22.0)
Reel Information
ITEM
Reel Height
Reel Width Outside
Reel Width Inside
Drum Diameter
Arbor Hole Diameter
Reel Weight With Lagging
INCHES
42
36
32
23
3
180 lbs
REEL A
CM
106.7
91.4
81.6
58.7
7.9
82 kg
INCHES
58
38
32
28
3
420 lbs
REEL B
CM
147.3
96.5
81.3
71.1
7.9
191 kg
AFL provides ADSS cable on three standard sizes of non-returnable wooden reels. Non-standard reel sizes are available upon request.
INCHES
66
42
36
36
3
685 lbs
REEL C
CM
167.6
106.7
91.4
91.4
7.9
311 kg
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00080, Revision 1, 1.18.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Temperature Range
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . -40ºC to + 70ºC
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40ºC to + 75ºC
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . .0ºC to + 70ºC
Uniflex
®
Security Cable
Product Applications
• Security Sensing
• Service (Drop) Cables
• Building Interconnections
(Campus LAN)
Cable Components
• Connectorized Trunking Cables
• Distance Learning
• Distribution outer jacket inner jacket strength member buffer tube optical fiber water blocking gel ripcord termite resistant jacket
Mechanical Data
MAXIMUM LENGTHS*
FIBER
COUNT
2 - 12
* Longer lengths may be available.
FEET
SINGLE-MODE
METERS
20,000 6,000
FEET
20,000
MULTIMODE
METERS
6,000
Ordering Information
ITEM
NUMBER
FIBER
COUNT
NOMINAL DIAMETER
INCHES (MM)
LE00221100N1
LE00441100N1
LE00661100N1
LE00881100N1
LE010A1100N1
LE012C1100N1
8
10
12
2
4
6
0.38 (9.7)
Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice
NOMINAL WEIGHT
MINIMUM BEND RADIUS
INCHES (CM)
LBS/1,000FT (KG/KM) SHORT TERM LONG TERM SHORT TERM LONG TERM
51 (76)
MAXIMUM TENSILE LOAD
LBS (N)
600 (2670)
Fiber Types – Replace asterisk () in part number with number corresponding to desired fiber type below.
5 = 50/125µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600
7 = 50/125µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000
6 = 62.5/125µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300
8 = 62.5/125µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000
9 = Single-mode
Q = Non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode
200 (890) 6.3 (16.0) 3.1 (8.0)
© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00086, Revision 1, 1.18.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
211
Fiber Optic Cable
Simplex Cable
Simplex fiber optic cables provide the strength and flexibility required for today’s fiber interconnect applications. AFL offers the broadest selection of simplex cordage including
Plenum, Riser and LSZH, available in all diameters. Our simplex cable is tested to meet
Telcordia GR-326 when used in connectorized assemblies. AFL provides customized performance with regard to jacket stiffness and flexibility, diameter, print legend, jacket color and tight buffer strippability. The easy strip option allows removal of up to one meter of 900 µm material without stripping the fiber’s 250 µm coating. Compliant with
Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS).
Features
• Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA
568-133 and Telcordia GR-409-CORE
• Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC
(RoHS)
• LSZH meets the requirements of
IEC 61034-1, 61034-2, 60332-1-1,
60332-1-2, 60754-1, 60754-2
Applications
• Building Interconnections (Campus LAN)
• Trunking Lines Direct to
Telecommunications Closet
• Fiber patch panels within communications closets
• Long Haul Networks
• Links between electronic equipment and fiber patch panels
• Connectorized patch cords for cross connect applications
Cable Components tight buffered fiber
(900 µm buffer) aramid yarn outer jacket
Mechanical Data
AFL NO.
FIBER
COUNT
NOMINAL
DIAMETER
PLENUM
RISER
LSZH
SP001
301001
SP001
241001
SP001
201001
SP001
161001
SA001
301001
SR001
241001
SR001
201001
SR001
161001
SE001
30100E
SE001
24100E
SE001
20100E
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.11 (2.9)
0.09 (2.4)
0.08 (2.0)
0.06 (1.6)
0.11 (2.9)
0.09 (2.4)
0.08 (2.0)
0.06 (1.6)
0.11 (2.9)
0.09 (2.4)
0.08 (2.0)
Please specify fiber type when ordering (see below)
1 = 100/140 µm multimode fiber
5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600
7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000
6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300
8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000
9 = 9/125 µm single-mode
L = 50/125 µm multimode Laser-Link 300 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet
K = Single-mode Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive
RISER
WEIGHT
PLENUM
—
LBS/1000 FT
(KG/KM)
6 (9)
—
—
5 (7)
3 (5)
—
5 (7)
3 (5)
3 (4)
2 (3)
—
—
—
2 (2)
5 (7)
3 (5)
3 (4)
—
—
—
—
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
TENSION
LBS (N)
INSTALLATION
LONG
TERM
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
Contact Customer Service for special fiber types/performance needs.
BENDING RADIUS
INCHES (CM)
INSTALLATION
2.0 (5.0)
LONG
TERM
1.2 (3.0)
2.0 (5.0)
2.0 (5.0)
2.0 (5.0)
2.0 (5.0)
2.0 (5.0)
2.0 (5.0)
1.2 (3.0)
1.2 (3.0)
1.2 (3.0)
1.2 (3.0)
TEMPERATURE RANGE
OPERATING/
INSTALLATION
0°C to +70°C
1.2 (3.0)
1.2 (3.0)
-20°C to +70°C
STORAGE
-40°C to
+75°C
-40°C to
+75°C
2.0 (5.0)
2.0 (5.0)
2.0 (5.0)
2.0 (5.0)
1.2 (3.0)
1.2 (3.0)
1.2 (3.0)
1.2 (3.0)
0°C to +70°C -40°C to
+75°C
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
212
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00063, Revision 3, 9.27.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Fiber Optic Cable
Simplex Cable
Specifications
CORE SIZE/ FIBER TYPE
(6) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 300
(8) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 1000
(5) 50 Giga-Link™ 600
(7) 50 Giga-Link™ 2000
(A) 50 Laser-Link 150
(L) 50 Laser-Link 300
(C) 50 Laser-Link 550
(K) SM Futureguide SR-15e
Bend Insensitive (ITU
G.657.A)
(9) SM
(1) 100/140 Multimode
ISO/
IEC
OM1
OM1
OM2
OM2
OM2
OM3
OM4
OS2
OS2
MAXIMUM ATTENUATION (DB/KM)
850 NM
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
N/A
N/A
5.5
1300 NM
1.2
1.2
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.5
0.5
3.5
1550 NM
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0.5
0.5
N/A
Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-B3 / Telcordia GR-409-CORE
OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN.
BANDWIDTH (MHZ•KM)
850 NM
200
350
500
500
700
1500
3500
N/A
1300 NM
600
600
500
800
500
500
550
N/A
N/A
100
N/A
100
EMB c
(MHZ•KM)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
950
2000
4700
N/A
GIGABIT ETHERNET
MIN. LINK DISTANCE
(METERS)
850 NM 1300 NM
300 550
500 1000
600
750
800
600
2000
550
1000
1040
N/A
550
550
5000
10 GIGABIT ETHERNET
MIN. LINK DISTANCE
(METERS)
850 NM 1300 NM
32 —
65 —
82
110
150
—
—
—
300
550
N/A
—
—
10,000
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5,000
N/A
N/A
N/A
10,000
N/A
Maximum Cable Length - Reel Size
ITEM
Reel/Box Height (inches)
Reel/Box Outside Width
(inches)
Drum Diameter (inches)
Reel Weight (lbs)
CAPACITY: METERS (FEET)
Simplex 1.6
Simplex 2.0
Simplex 2.4
Simplex 3.0
FIBER BOX*
15.13
13.0
8.0
6.0
—
—
—
914 (3,000)
REEL Z
14.0
12.0
8.0
7.0
5,000 (16,404)
3,500 (11,483)
—
—
REEL A
16.0
15.0
8.0
10.0
5,000 (16,404)
5,000 (16,404)
4,000 (13,123)
2,500 ( 8,202)
REEL B
24.0
17.0
12.0
23.0
—
—
5,000 (16,404)
5,000 (16,404)
* Add suffix "– XMFBOX" to cable AFL number to specify "Fiber-In-A-Box" solution. "X" indicates length of cable in thousands of feet. Only available in standard lengths as indicated in chart above.
EXAMPLE: SP0019301001–3MFBOX
Would be the resulting AFL number for 3,000 feet of SP001
*
301001 cable with 9/125 µm single-mode fiber and the Fiber-In-A-Box solution. Refer to Fiber-In-A-Box data at front of catalog.
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
213
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00063, Revision 3, 9.27.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Fiber Optic Cable
Applications
• Communications closet to wall outlet
• Wall outlet to desk
• Connectorized patchcords for intercon- nect and cross-connect applications
• Easy interface to ESCON
®
, FDDI, and various other duplex connectors
Cable Components
Zipcord DUAL-Link
Zipcord, Dual-link and Micro-Dual Cable
Zipcord, DUAL-link and Micro-Dual cables provide links to the future for such protocols as FDDI, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, ATM, and Fibre Channel. Connections are easy to terminate with this flexible, two-fiber design. AFL offers the broadest selection of duplex cordage including Plenum, Riser and LSZH in all diameters. LSZH jacketed cables are OFNR listed.
One design for global companies that don’t want to maintain multiple cable types for varying global standards. Compliant with Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS).
Features
• Print legend customization
• Jacket color (12 standard colors available)
• Tight Buffer strippability (easy strip option allows removal of up to 1 meter of 900 µm material without stripping the fiber’s 250 µm coating)
• Ruggedized Duplex designs for transport from communications closet to wall outlet
• Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA
568-133 and Telcordia GR-409-CORE
• LSZH meets the requirements of
IEC 61034-1, 61034-2, 60332-1-1,
60332-1-2, 60754-1, 60754-2
• Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC
(RoHS)
Micro-Dual Ruggedized Duplex
Mechanical Data
CABLE
TYPE
Zipcord
RISER
AFL NO.
PLENUM LSZH
ZA002301001 ZP002301001 ZE00230100E
ZR002241001 ZP002241001 ZE00224100E
ZR002201001 ZP002201001 ZE00220100E
ZR002161001 ZP002161001 —
Micro-Dual DR00220100B DP00220100B DE00220100B
DUAL-Link DA002481001 DP002481001 DE00248100E
DR002281001 DP002281001 DE00228100E
DR002241001 DP002241001 DE00224100E
Ruggedized
Duplex
RR002301001 RP002241001 —
2
2
2
2
2
2
FIBER
COUNT
2
2
2
NOMINAL
DIAMETER
INCHES
(mm)
0.11 x 0.22
(2.9 x 6.0)
0.09 x 0.19
(2.4 x 4.8)
0.08 x 0.16
(2.0 x 4.0)
0.06 x 0.12
(1.6 x 3.2)
0.08 (2.0)
0.19 (4.8)
0.11 (2.8)
0.094 (2.4)
0.185 x 0.30
(4.7 x 7.6)
WEIGHT
RISER PLENUM
LBS/
1000 FT
(kg/km)
LBS/
1000 FT
(kg/km)
10 (15) 12 (18)
TENSION
LBS (N)
INSTALLATION
22 (100)
LONG
TERM
7 (30)
7 (10)
5 (8)
4 (6)
3 (5)
13 (20)
5 (7)
3 (5)
34 (50)
9 (14)
7 (10)
7 (6)
5 (7)
17 (20)
6 (9)
5 (7)
—
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
Please specify fiber type when ordering (see below)
5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600
7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000
6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300
8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000
9 = 9/125 µm single-mode
L = 50/125 µm multimode Laser-Link 300 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet
Contact Customer Service for special fiber types/performance needs
BENDING RADIUS
INCHES (CM)
INSTALLATION
LONG
TERM
2.0 (5.0)
2.0 (5.0)
2.0 (5.0)
2.0 (5.0)
1.2 (3.0)
3.1 (7.2)
2.0 (5.0)
2.0 (5.0)
2.8 (7.1)
1.2 (3.0)
1.2 (3.0)
1.2 (3.0)
1.2 (3.0)
0.78 (2.0)
2.0 (7.2)
1.2 (3.0)
1.2 (3.0)
1.9 (4.7)
TEMPERATURE RANGE
OPERATING/
INSTALLATION
STORAGE
PLENUM:
0°C to
+70°C
RISER:
-20°C to
+70°C
-40°C to
+75°C
K = Single-mode Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00067, Revision 4.1, 11.26.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
214
Fiber Optic Cable
Zipcord, Dual-link and Micro-Dual Cable
Specifications
CORE SIZE/ FIBER
TYPE
(6) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 300
(8) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 1000
(5) 50 Giga-Link™ 600
(7) 50 Giga-Link™ 2000
(A) 50 Laser-Link 150
(L) 50 Laser-Link 300
(C) 50 Laser-Link 550
(K) SM Futureguide SR-15e
Bend Insensitive (ITU
G.657.A)
(9) SM
(1) 100/140 Multimode
ISO/
IEC
OM1
OM1
OM2
OM2
OM2
OM3
OM4
OS2
OS2
MAXIMUM ATTENUATION (DB/KM)
850 NM
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
N/A
3.5
3.5
3.5
N/A
5.5
1300 NM
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.5
1.2
1.5
1.2
0.5
3.5
1550 NM
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0.5
0.5
N/A
OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN.
BANDWIDTH (MHZ•KM)
850 NM
200
350
500
500
700
1500
3500
N/A
Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-B3 / Telcordia GR-409-CORE
N/A
100
1300 NM
600
600
500
800
500
500
550
N/A
N/A
100
EMB c
(MHZ•KM)
N/A
N/A
950
2000
4700
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN.
LINK DISTANCE (METERS)
850 NM
300
500
600
750
800
1000
1040
N/A
1300 NM
550
1000
600
2000
550
550
550
5000
N/A
N/A
5,000
N/A
10 GIGABIT ETHERNET
MIN. LINK DISTANCE
(METERS)
850 NM 1300 NM
32 —
65
82
110
150
300
550
N/A
—
—
—
—
—
—
10,000
N/A
N/A
10,000
N/A
Maximum Cable Length - Reel Size
ITEM
Reel/Box Height (inches)
Reel/Box Outside Width (inches)
Drum Diameter (inches)
Reel Weight (lbs)
CAPACITY: Meters (Feet)
Zipcord 1.6mm
Zipcord 2.0mm
Zipcord 2.4mm
Zipcord 3.0mm
DUAL-Link 2.4mm
DUAL-Link 2.8mm
DUAL-Link 4.8mm
Ruggedized Duplex
FIBER BOX*
15.13
13.0
8.0
6.0
—
—
—
914 (3,000)
—
—
305 (1,000)
—
REEL A
16
15
8
10
4,500 (14,764)
2,850 (9,350)
2,000 (6,562)
1,250 (4,100)
4,000 (13,123)
2,500 (8,200)
900 (2,953)
—
REEL B
24
17
12
23
—
5,000 (16,400)
5,000 (16,400)
4,000 (13,123)
5,000 (16,400)
5,000 (16,400)
3,200 (10,500)
1,500 (4,921)
REEL C
30
15.25
12
34
—
—
—
5,000 (16,400)
—
—
4,500 (14,764)
2,500 (8,200)
* Add suffix "– XMFBOX" to cable AFL number to specify "Fiber-In-A-Box" solution. "X" indicates length of cable in thousands of feet. Only available in standard lengths as indicated in chart above.
EXAMPLE: ZA0029301001–3MFBOX
Would be the resulting AFL number for 3,000 feet of ZA002 * 301001 cable with 9/125 µm single-mode fiber and the Fiber-In-A-Box solution. Refer to Fiber-In-A-Box data at front of catalog.
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
215
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00067, Revision 4.1, 11.26.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
FIB
ER
OPTIC CABL
E
Fiber Optic Cable
RIBBON-Link
®
Cable
RIBBON-Link cables combine high fiber density in a small diameter, flexible package. These cables can be terminated with 12 or 24 fiber multi-fiber connectors or the fibers can be fanned out and terminated individually. Plenum, Riser and LSZH options are all UL listed.
Features
• Fiber counts up to 48 with unitized, zip configuration construction
• Maximum of two 12-fiber ribbons per unit
• Skew matched ribbons available (<10,
<6, <5, <4, <3, <2, <1.2 ps/meter)
• Easy interface to MT and MTP based connectors as well as today’s newest ribbon connectors (12- or 24-fiber ferrules)
• Ruggedized versions with additional jacketing are available
• Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA
568-A / GR-409-CORE
• Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC
(RoHS)
Applications
• Direct interface to computers with the use of “backplane” style fiber connectors
• High density interconnection to wall outlets or patch panels with ribbon connector interfaces
• “Micro-diameter” fanout cables utilizing standard industry fiber connectors
(ST, SC, FC, LC, MT-RJ.)
• VSR OC-192/OC-768 Interface based on parallel fiber optics
Cable Components
24-Fiber Single Pod outer jacket fiber subunit aramid yarn
Specifications
CORE SIZE/ FIBER TYPE
ISO/
IEC
(6) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 300
OM1
(8) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 1000 OM1
(5) 50 Giga-Link™ 600
(7) 50 Giga-Link™ 2000
OM2
OM2
(A) 50 Laser-Link 150
(L) 50 Laser-Link 300
OM2
OM3
(C) 50 Laser-Link 550
(K) SM Futureguide SR-15e
Bend Insensitive
(9) SM
(1) 100/140 Multimode
OM4
OS2
OS2
MAXIMUM ATTENUATION
(DB/KM)
OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN.
BANDWIDTH (MHZ•KM)
850 NM 1300 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM
3.5 1.2 N/A 200 600
3.5 1.2 N/A 350 600
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
N/A
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.5
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0.5
500
500
700
1500
3500
N/A
500
800
500
500
550
N/A
N/A
5.5
0.5
3.5
0.5
N/A
N/A
100
Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-B3 / Telcordia GR-409-CORE
N/A
100
EMB c
(MHZ•KM)
950
2000
4700
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
24-Fiber Dual Pod
N/A
N/A
GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN.
LINK DISTANCE (METERS)
850 NM 1300 NM
300 550
500 1000
600
750
800
1000
1040
N/A
600
2000
550
550
550
5000
10 GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN.
LINK DISTANCE (METERS)
850 NM 1300 NM
32 —
65 —
82
110
150
300
550
N/A
—
—
—
—
—
10,000
5,000
N/A
N/A
N/A
10,000
N/A
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00062, Revision 2, 9.27.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
216
FIB
ER
OPTIC CABL
E
Fiber Optic Cable
RIBBON-Link
®
Cable
Mechanical Data
CABLE
TYPE
PLENUM
(PVDF)
RIBBON-
LINK
(single pod)
WP004141012 WK004141012 WR004141012 WE004141012
WP006161012 WK006161012 WR006161012 WE006161012
WP008181012 WK008181012 WR008181012 WE008181012
WP0121C1012 WK0121C1012 WR0121C1012 WE0121C1012
WP0241D1012 WK0241D1012 WR0241D1012 WE0241D1012
RIBBON-
LINK
(dualpod)
WP008241012
WP012261012
WP016281012
WP0242C1012
ROUND
RIBBON
(simplex)
WP002301012
WP004301012
PLENUM
(PVC)
—
—
—
—
—
—
AFL NO.
RISER LSZH
WR008241012 WE008241012
WR012261012 WE012261012
WR016281012 WE016281012
WR0242C1012 WE0242C1012
WR002301012 WE002301012
WR004301012 WE004301012
FIBER
COUNT
4
6
8
12
24
8
12
16
24
2
NOMINAL
DIAMETER WEIGHT
INCHES
(MM)
LBS/
1000 FT
(KG/KM)
0.08 x 0.16
(2.1 x 4.0)
0.08 x 0.16
(2.1 x 4.0)
0.08 x 0.16
(2.1 x 4.0)
0.08 x 0.18
(2.1 x 4.6)
0.10 x 0.18
(2.5 x 4.6)
0.08 x 0.32
(2.1 x 8.2)
0.08 x 0.32
(2.1 x 8.2)
0.08 x 0.32
(2.1 x 8.2)
0.08 x 0.36
(2.1 x 9.2)
0.11 (2.9)
7.5 (11)
7.5 (11)
7.5 (11)
8 (12)
8.7 (13)
15 (22)
15 (22)
15 (22)
15 (24)
5 (7)
4 0.11 (2.9) 5 (7)
Please specify fiber type when ordering (see below)
5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600
7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000
6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300
8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000
9 = 9/125 µm single-mode
L = 50/125 µm multimode Laser-Link 300 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet
K = Single-mode Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive
Contact Customer Service for optical performance specifications and for additional mechanical specifications.
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
22 (100)
TENSION
LBS (N)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
7 (30)
BENDING RADIUS
INCHES (CM)
TEMPERATURE RANGE
LONG
TERM
OPERATING/
INSTALLATION STORAGE
2.4 (6.0)
2.4 (6.0)
2.4 (6.0)
2.7 (6.9)
2.7 (6.9)
2.4 (6.0)
2.4 (6.0)
2.4 (6.0)
2.7 (6.9)
2.0 (5.0)
2.0 (5.0)
1.6 (4.0)
1.6 (4.0)
1.8 (4.6)
1.2 (3.0)
1.2 (3.0)
1.6 (4.0)
1.6 (4.0)
1.6 (4.0)
1.8 (4.6)
1.8 (4.6)
1.6 (4.0)
RISER:
-20°C to
+70°C
PLENUM:
0°C to
+70°C
-40°C to
+75°C
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
217
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00062, Revision 2, 9.27.11
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Cable Components
Fiber Optic Cable
Multi-Unit Circular Premise Cable
Multi-Unit Circular Premise Cables are for use in applications requiring fiber counts between 18 and 144 fibers. Unitized construction allows for ease of fiber identification and rapid installation.
Applications
• Head-end termination to a fiber
"backbone"
• Termination of fiber rack systems
• Multi-floor deployment where select fibers are used at each floor
• Intrabuilding "backbones"
Features
• Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-A
/ GR-409-CORE
• Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC
(RoHS)
• Hybrid constructions are available
Mechanical Data
CABLE
TYPE
RISER
AFL NO.
PLENUM
FIBER
COUNT
CPC with 6
Fiber
Subunits
CPC with 12
Fiber
Subunits
CR018441001 CP018441001
CR024441001 CP024441001
CR036441001 CP036441001
CR024551001 CP024551001
CR036551001 CP036551001
CR048551001 CP048551001
CR060551001 CP060551001
CR072551001 CP072551001
CR096551001 CP096551001
CR144551001 CP144551001
Please specify fiber type when ordering (see below)
5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600
7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000
6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300
8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000
9 = 9/125 µm single-mode
L = 50/125 µm multimode Laser-Link 300 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet
K = Single-mode Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive
Contact Customer Service for special fiber types/performance
18
36
48
60
72
96
144
24
36
24
NOMINAL
DIAMETER
INCHES (MM)
0.55 (13.3)
0.55 (13.3)
0.62 (15.6)
0.30 x 0.52 (7.6 x 13.2)
0.61 (15.4)
0.61 (15.4)
0.76 (19.3)
0.76 (19.3)
0.90 (22.8)
1.0 (25.4)
WEIGHT
RISER
LBS/1000FT
(KG/KM)
PLENUM
LBS/1000FT
(KG/KM)
121 (180) 134 (200)
121 (180)
147 (220)
57 (86)
120 (180)
120 (180)
184 (275)
184 (275)
281 (420)
288 (430)
134 (200)
171 (255)
62 (92)
134 (200)
134 (200)
211 (315)
211 (315)
295 (440)
302 (450)
TENSION
LBS (N)
INSTALLATION
300 (1320)
LONG
TERM
150 (660)
300 (1320)
300 (1320)
300 (1320)
300 (1320)
300 (1320)
300 (1320)
300 (1320)
300 (1320)
300 (1320)
150 (660)
150 (660)
150 (660)
150 (660)
150 (660)
150 (660)
150 (660)
150 (660)
150 (660)
Temperature Specifications
CABLE TYPE
PLENUM
RISER
TEMPERATURE RANGE
OPERATING/
INSTALLATION
0°C to +70°C
-20°C to +70°C
BENDING RADIUS
INCHES (CM)
INSTALLATION
LONG
TERM
8.3 (20.0) 5.5 (13.3)
8.3 (20.0)
9.2 (23.4)
5.0 (12.0)
9.1 (23.1)
9.1 (23.1)
10.4 (26.4)
11.4 (29.0)
13.5 (34.2)
15.0 (38.1)
5.5 (13.3)
6.2 (15.6)
4.0 (10.0)
6.1(15.4)
6.1 (15.4)
6.9 (17.6)
7.6 (19.3)
9.0 (22.8)
10.0 (25.4)
STORAGE
-40°C to +75°C
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00060, Revision 3, 6.18.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
218
Fiber Optic Cable
Multi-Unit Circular Premise Cable
Specifications
CORE SIZE/ FIBER
TYPE ISO/
IEC
(6) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 300 OM1
(8) 62.5 Giga-Link™
1000
OM1
(5) 50 Giga-Link™ 600
OM2
(7) 50 Giga-Link™ 2000 OM2
(A) 50 Laser-Link 150
OM2
(L) 50 Laser-Link 300
(C) 50 Laser-Link 550
OM3
OM4
(K) SM Futureguide
SR-15e Bend Insensitive
(ITU G.657.A)
(9) SM
(1) 100/140 Multimode
OS2
OS2
MAXIMUM ATTENUATION (DB/KM)
850 NM
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
N/A
N/A
5.5
1300 NM
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.5
1.5
1.2
1.2
0.5
3.5
1550 NM
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0.5
0.5
N/A
OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN.
BANDWIDTH (MHZ•KM)
850 NM
200
350
500
500
700
1500
3500
N/A
Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-B3 / Telcordia GR-409-CORE
N/A
100
1300 NM
600
600
500
800
500
500
550
N/A
N/A
100
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
950
2000
4700
N/A
EMB c
(MHZ•KM)
GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN.
LINK DISTANCE (METERS)
850 NM
300
500
1300 NM
550
1000
600
750
800
1000
1040
N/A
600
2000
550
550
550
5000
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5,000
N/A
Cable Length - Reel Size
ITEM
Reel Height (inches)
Reel Outside Width (inches)
Drum Diameter (inches)
Reel Weight (lbs)
CAPACITY: METERS (FEET)
18 Fiber CPC
24 Fiber CPC
36 Fiber CPC (6F subunits)
36 Fiber CPC (12F subunits)
48 Fiber CPC
60 Fiber CPC
72 Fiber CPC
96 Fiber CPC
144 Fiber CPC
REEL F
42
36
23
148
2,300 (7,546)
2,300 (7,546)
1,600 (5,250)
1,500 (4,921)
1,500 (4,921)
1,250 (4,100)
1,000 (3,280)
—
—
REEL G
60
36
30
287
2,500 / (8,200)
2,500 / (8,200)
2,500 / (8,200)
—
—
1,500 / (4,921)
1,500 / (4,921)
1,500 / (4,921)
1,300 / (4,265)
10 GIGABIT ETHERNET
MIN. LINK DISTANCE
(METERS)
850 NM
32
1300 NM
—
65 —
82
110
150
300
550
N/A
—
—
—
—
—
10,000
N/A
N/A
10,000
N/A
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
219
© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00060, Revision 3, 6.18.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Fiber Optic Cable
Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cable
AFL’s Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cables are perfectly suited for rugged applications and installations requiring increased performance. Available in 2 to 12 fiber counts, these cables feature a UV- and fungal-resistant semi-pressure extruded outer jacket.
The individual sub-units measure 2.5 mm, allowing for ease of field termination, and use water-blocking aramid which further protects the tight-buffered fiber.
Features
• Fungus, water and UV-resistant PVC jacket featuring SP extrusion technology
• Riser-rated with water-blocked sub-units
• Sub-units and tight buffer available in a variety of colors
• Tested to meet or exceed GR-409-CORE and ICEA-S-104-696
• Compliant to Directive
2002/95/EC (RoHS)
• MSHA approved for mining applications
Cable Components
2-Fiber
PVC outer jacket
2.4 mm water-blocked simplex sub-unit
- 900 µm buffered fiber
- water swellable aramid yarn strength members
- PVC jacket strength member (2) ripcord
12-Fiber
Applications
• Harsh Environment
• Mining
• Industrial
• Campus Environment
PVC outer jacket
2.5 mm simplex sub-unit
- 900 µm buffered fiber
- water swellable aramid yarn strength members
- PVC jacket upjacketed FRP center strength member ripcord
Mechanical Data
AFL NO.
BX002251801
BX004251801
BX006251801
FIBER
COUNT
2
4
NOMINAL
DIAMETER
INCHES (MM)
0.30 (7.5)
0.32 (8.2)
WEIGHT
LBS/1000FT (KG/KM) INSTALLATION
TENSION
LBS (N)
LONG TERM
32 (49)
37 (55)
6 0.38 (9.6) 54 (80)
BX008251801 8 0.44 (11.1)
2.4 mm water-blocked simplex sub-unit
75 (111)
BX012251801 12 0.57 (14.5) 165 (245)
- water swellable aramid yarn strength members
2.9 mm sub-units are also available.
strength member (2)
Please specify fiber type when ordering (see below)
300 (1335)
450 (2000)
750 (3360)
1000 (4450)
1425 (6360)
150 (667)
185 (825)
375 (1680)
BENDING RADIUS
INCHES (CM)
INSTALLATION LONG TERM
3.8 (9.6)
3.9 (9.9)
4.8 (12.2)
2.5 (6.4)
3.2 (8.1)
3.8 (9.7)
425 (1750)
570 (2535)
6.6 (16.8)
8.5 (21.6)
- water swellable aramid yarn strength members
4.4 (11.2)
5.7 (14.5)
- PVC jacket
Temperature Specifications ripcord
PARAMETER VALUE
5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600
7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000
6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300
8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000
9 = 9/125 µm single-mode
L = 50/125 µm multimode Laser-Link™ 300 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet
K = Single-mode Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive
Storage
Operating
Installation
-40°C to +70°C
-40°C to +70°C
-20°C to +70°C
Contact Customer Service for special fiber types/performance needs.
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00051, Revision 3, 5.28.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
220
Fiber Optic Cable
Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cable
Specifications
CORE SIZE/
FIBER TYPE
(6) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 300
(8) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 1000
(5) 50 Giga-Link™ 600
(7) 50 Giga-Link™ 2000
(A) 50 Laser-Link™ 150
(L) 50 Laser-Link™ 300
(C) 50 Laser-Link™ 550
(K) SM Futureguide SR-15e
Bend Insensitive (ITU G.657.A)
(9) SM
(1) 100/140 Multimode
ISO/
IEC
OM1
OM1
OM2
OM2
OM2
OM3
OM4
OS2
OS2
MAXIMUM ATTENUATION
(DB/KM)
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
N/A
N/A
5.5
1.2
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.5
0.5
3.5
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0.5
0.5
N/A
Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-B3 / Telcordia GR-409-CORE
OVERFILL LAUNCH
MIN. BANDWIDTH
(MHZ•KM)
850 NM 1300 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM
3.5 1.2 N/A 200 600
350
500
500
700
1500
3500
N/A
N/A
100
600
500
800
500
500
550
N/A
N/A
100
EMBc
(MHZ•KM)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
950
2000
4700
N/A
GIGABIT ETHERNET
MIN. LINK DISTANCE
(METERS)
10 GIGABIT
ETHERNET MIN. LINK
DISTANCE (METERS)
850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM
300 550 32 —
500 1000 65 —
600
750
800
1000
1040
N/A
600
2000
550
550
550
5000
82
110
150
300
550
N/A
—
—
—
—
—
10,000
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5,000
N/A
N/A
N/A
10,000
N/A
Cable Length - Reel Size
ITEM
Reel Height (inches)
REEL F
42
Reel Outside Width (inches) 36
Drum Diameter (inches)
Reel Weight (lbs)
CAPACITY: METERS (FEET)
23
148
4 Fiber Breakout
6 Fiber Breakout
8 Fiber Breakout
12 Fiber Breakout
2,500 / (8,200)
2,500 / (8,200)
2,500 / (8,200)
1,600 / (5,250)
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
221
© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00051, Revision 3, 5.28.15
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Cletop -S Series
Cletop Series
Cletop Cassette Cleaner Series
The Cletop connector cleaner is a rugged palm-sized cleaner that offers exceptional performance with a proven track record. The choice of many leading manufacturers and telecom carries worldwide for nearly 20 years – Cletop is a name you can rely on.
Why Clean Fiber Connectors?
• Pits and scratches are often caused by dirt
• Dust, dirt, oils, etc. are everywhere and will migrate to exposed connector end-faces
• Dirty connectors attenuate signal levels and can increase digital bit error rates
• Always clean both connectors when mating / unmating to avoid contamination transfer
Cletop Cassette Cleaner Options
• Cletop Series - Original version (proven reliability)
• Cletop –S Series - Second generation cleaner offering the same Cletop cleaning performance with “Drop-in” replacement tape cartridge and ergonomic design that works equally well for left or right handed operators
• Type A and -SA - Designed for single 2.5mm ferrules (SC, FC, ST, & D4)
• Type B and -SB - Cleans SC, SC2, FC, ST ® , DIN, D4, MU, LC, MT, MPO/MTP ® without pins, MT-RJ without pins
• Type MPO - Accepts MPO/MTP connectors with pins
• Type MT-RJ - Accepts MT-RJ connectors with pins
Features
• Compact and lightweight design is ideal for use in laboratories, assembly lines, or in the field
• Consistent cleaning results without IPA alcohol, which is toxic, flammable, and leaves a residue on fiber ends (white haze)
• Excellent anti-static properties for static sensitive applications and to minimize reattachment of dust to ferrule after cleaning
• Simple push button shutter operation exposes cleaning tape only when in use – minimizing unwanted dust
• Replaceable and cost effective cleaning tape
• Over 400 wipes per tape
222
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. 8500-00-2000 Revision 1E, 2014-10-29
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Cletop Cassette Cleaner Series
Specifications
Size
Weight
130 x 75 x 40 mm (5.1 x 3.0 x 1.6 in)
160 g/0.35 lb
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
CLETOP – S SERIES
Cletop -SA with Blue Tape
Cletop -SB with Blue Tape
Cletop -SB with White Tape
Replacement Tape Type S - Blue
Replacement Tape Type S - White
CLETOP ORIGINAL SERIES
Cletop Type A with Blue Tape
Cletop Type A with White Tape
Cletop Type B with Blue Tape
Cletop Type B with White tape
Cletop for MT-RJ with pins (White Tape)
Cletop for MPO/MTP with pins (White Tape)
Replacement Tape Blue
Replacement Tape White
AFL NO.
8500-10-0020MZ
8500-10-0029MZ
8500-10-0016MZ
8500-10-0021MZ
8500-10-0017MZ
8500-10-0027MZ
8500-10-0011MZ
8500-10-0028MZ
8500-10-0014MZ
8500-10-0032MZ
8500-10-0033MZ
8500-10-0012MZ
8500-10-0015MZ
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. 8500-00-2000 Revision 1E, 2014-10-29
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
223
MU/LC
Mini-100 MU/LC
Mini-500 MU/LC
SC/ST/FC
ODC
Mini-100 SC, ST, FC
Mini-500 SC, ST, FC
224
One-Click
®
Cleaner Series
Features
• Cleans connectors on jumpers and in adapters
• Low cost per clean
• Effective on a variety of contaminates including dust and oils
• Ergonomic, comfortable design with single action cleaning
• Automatic advance ensures each clean is performed with fresh cleaning tape
• Compliant with EU/95/2002/EC Directive (RoHS)
• Compact One-Click Cleaner Mini versions available
• Available with enlarged cleaning area up to 2 mm
• Duplex LC version available
• MPO/MTP version available
The Original One-Click Cleaner
The One-Click Cleaner is an easy-to-use option for cleaning connectors on jumpers and in adapters. Simply insert the One-
Click Cleaner into an adapter and push until an audible “click” is heard. The One-Click Cleaner uses the mechanical push action to advance an optical grade cleaning tape while the cleaning tip is rotated to ensure the fiber end-face is effectively, but gently cleaned. The One-Click Cleaner is a must-have for field technicians. Small enough to fit in a shirt pocket and a great addition to cleaning kits. Save your wrist – no more twist!
Rugged ODC
®
Version
With the increasing demand of Outdoor Connector (ODC) plug and socket styles, the ODC One-Click Cleaner, which cleans the ferrules in ODC plug, socket and 1.25 mm ferrules, is an essential cleaning tool for WiMax Base Station, Fiber-to-the-Antenna,
Broadcasting and Surveillance Video technicians.
Compact One-Click Cleaner Mini
Offering the same technology and performance as the original, the One-Click Cleaner is now available in a smaller, more compact size, which allows for cleaning of connectors in tighter places. Its smaller size also makes it a great addition to test kits and cleaning kits. The One-Click Mini that is offered by AFL as a low cost solution with 100+ cleans per unit is now also available with same 500+ cleans per unit as the standard One-Click. The
One-Click Mini is an effective, easy-to-use cleaning solution for
SC, ST, FC, LC, MU and TFOCA connectors.
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. 8500-05-2000 Revision 1H, 2014-10-30
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
One-Click
®
Cleaner Series
One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5
The One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 has an enlarged cleaning area to clean more of the connector end-face. Cleaning up to a 2 mm diameter area of the connector end-face, the One-Click Cleaner
Ultra 2.5 is a superior cleaner for SC, ST, and FC connectors.
One-Click Cleaner D-LC (Duplex LC)
Reduce cleaning time with the new One-Click Cleaner D-LC.
Offering the same performance and easy-to-use one-click technology as the original, the One-Click Cleaner D-LC cuts cleaning time in half by effectively cleaning both LC connectors of a duplex LC at one time. 500+ duplex LC cleans per cleaner
(1000+ LC connector cleans).
D-LC (Duplex LC) 2.5 Ultra
One-Click Cleaner MPO
One-Click Cleaner MPO
Designed to clean MPO and MTP ® multi-fiber connectors used in
Data Centers and other high density optical networks, the new
One-Click Cleaner MPO is a revolutionary push-type cleaner, which simplifies cleaning of the ferrule end-face of both MPO/
MTP exposed connectors and connectors in adapters. As with all One-Click Cleaners, the One-Click Cleaner MPO uses the innovative push-to-clean design. The mechanical push action advances the optical grade cleaning tape while effectively and gently cleaning the end-face of the connector.
Ordering Information
MODEL
One-Click SC, ST, FC
One-Click MU/LC
One-Click ODC
One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC
One-Click Mini-100 MU/LC
One-Click Mini-500 SC, ST, FC
One-Click Mini-500 MU/LC
One-Click Ultra Cleaner 2.5
One-Click D-LC
One-Click MPO
DESCRIPTION
One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500 cleans)
LENGTH
172 mm (6.88 in)
One-Click Cleaner MU/LC (500 cleans) 172 mm (6.88 in)
One-Click Cleaner ODC (outdoor connector, 500 cleans) 172 mm (6.88 in)
One-Click Cleaner Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100 cleans)
One-Click Cleaner Mini-100 MU/LC (100 cleans)
One-Click Cleaner Mini-500 SC, ST, FC (500 cleans)
BASE AFL NO.
17.5 x 17.5 mm (0.7 x 0.7 in) 8500-05-0001MZ
17.5 x 17.5 mm (0.7 x 0.7 in) 8500-05-0002MZ
17.5 x 17.5 mm (0.7 x 0.7 in) 8500-05-0004MZ
120.65 mm (4.75 in) 17.5 x 30.2 mm(0.7 x 1.2 in) 8500-05-0005MZ
120.65 mm (4.75 in) 17.5 x 30.2 mm(0.7 x 1.2 in) 8500-05-0006MZ
120.65 mm (4.75 in) 17.5 x 30.2 mm(0.7 x 1.2 in) 8500-05-0009MZ
One-Click Cleaner Mini-500 MU/LC (500 cleans)
One-Click Ultra Cleaner 2.5 SC, ST, FC
(enlarged cleaning area, 500 cleans)
120.65 mm (4.75 in) 17.5 x 30.2 mm(0.7 x 1.2 in) 8500-05-0010MZ
203.2 mm (8 in)
One-Click Ultra Cleaner D-LC (Duplex LC, 500 cleans x 2) 195 mm (7.7 in)
22.2 x 33.3 mm (0.8 x 1.3 in) 8500-05-0007MZ
18 x 30 mm (0.7 x 1.2 in) 8500-05-0008MZ
One-Click Cleaner MPO (MPO/MTP ® , 500 cleans) 203.2 mm (8 in) 19 x 44.5 mm (0.8 x 1.8 in) 8500-05-0030MZ
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. 8500-05-2000 Revision 1H, 2014-10-30
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
225
Type 2.5 mm
Type 1.25 mm
Cletop Adapter Cleaning Sticks
Cletop (ACT) adapter cleaning sticks are an easy to use efficient means of cleaning fiber optic connectors in adapters and cleaning adapter alignment sleeves. Cletop sticks are available in sizes for most common commercial connectors (ST, SC , FC, LC, MU), military connectors, and LEMO connectors for video applications. When connectors need to be cleaned inside adapters, you can rely on the Cletop stick.
Features
• Easy to use and efficient. Delivers a consistently high level of cleaning performance
• Easy to clean ferrule end-faces inside the plug-in fiber optic connectors and various adapters
• Lightweight and safe to use. Compact and disposable
• Suitable for cleaning inside adapters for dust control
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
ACT-01 — 2.5 mm Cletop Sticks (Box of 200)
ACT-02 — 1.25 mm Cletop Sticks (Box of 200)
ACT-03 — 2.0 mm Cletop Sticks (Box of 200)
Double-ended 2.0/2.5 mm Cletop Sticks (Box of 100)
CONNECTORS
FC, SC, ST, D4
LC, MU
Military termini, high definition television camera connectors such as LEMO
AFL NO.
8500-10-0024MZ
8500-10-0022MZ
8500-10-0023MZ
8500-10-0030MZ
Recommended Cleaning Procedure for ACT Cleaning Sticks
Procedure:
1. Insert: Ensure that stick is held straight when inserting into sleeve.
2. Load: Apply sufficient pressure
(approximately 600-700 g) to ensure ferrule is a little depressed in sleeve.
3. Rotate: Rotate stick clockwise 4-5 times while ensuring direct contact with ferrule end-face is maintained.
Notes:
1. Number of possible wipes:
- Maintenance (repair): approximately 1 use
- Equipment construction: 4 uses (max.)
2. FCC2 Fluid will improve cleaning performance.
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780
226
©2015, AFL, all rights reserved. ACT1-00-2000 Revision 1F, 2015-02-24
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Applications
• Dual-head design permits wet and dry cleaning in one swab
• Solvent and chemical resistant, not physically altered by solvent contact
• Designed to work with FCC2 Fiber
Connector Cleaner
• Most connectors cleaned the first time
CCT - Connector Cleaning Tips
AFL is pleased to offer a unique technology in fiber connector end-face cleaning. Rather than a fabric-covered or foam-covered stick, we are offering a molded cleaning tip that will trap contamination and wick cleaning solvents from bulkhead connectors. The cleaning tip is a molded, sintered polymer that is both porous and pliable conforming to virtually any fiber end-face polish geometry while trapping and absorbing contaminants.
Features
• Molded sintered polymer construction assures perfect bulkhead fit and consistent performance with each cleaning tip
• No fibers, binders, adhesives or outgassing that may contaminate the connector
• Traps and holds liquid and particle contaminants in an absorbent open cell matrix ranging from 10-25 microns
• The elastic cleaning head enhances entrapment of particles and oils, while allowing the tip to conform to virtually any fiber end-face geometry (8 degree, domed polish, etc.)
• Very absorbent
• US and Foreign patents pending
Tip Configurations
• CCTS and CCTX series: cleaning tip is exposed for cleaning ferrule end-faces in alignment sleeves that are recessed within sockets or bulkhead adaptors.
• CCTP series: cleaning tip is recessed in the “straw” for cleaning exposed ferrules and termini (jumpers). Fits 2.5 mm and smaller ferrules.
Ordering Information
Cleaning tips are available for most common commercial and Mil Spec ferrule sizes.
SIZE
(diameter of ferrule or termini)
2.5 mm
2.5 mm
2.0 mm
2.0 mm
1.6 mm
1.6 mm
1.25 mm
1.25 mm
MT ferrule
MT ferrule
TYPE
Pin
Socket
Pin
Socket
Pin
Socket
Pin
Socket
Pin
Socket
* Registered Trademark of TYCO Electronics Corp.
COMMENTS
Examples: SC, ST, FC, etc.
Examples: SC, ST, FC, etc.
Mil T 29504/14 For Mil C 28876
Mil T 29504/15 For Mil C 28876
Mil T 29504/04 For Mil C 38999
Mil T 29504/05 For Mil C 38999
Examples: LC, MU
Examples: LC, MU
Examples: MPO
,
MPX
®
*
Examples: MPO
,
MPX
®
*
AFL NO.
CCTP-25-0900
CCTS-25-0900
CCTP-25-0900
CCTS-16-0900
CCTP-25-0900
CCTS-16-0900
CCTP-25-0900
CCTS-12-0900
CCTX-MT-0900
CCTX-MT-0900
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. CCT0-00-2000 Revision 1F, 2014-10-29
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
227
FCC2 Enhanced Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid
FCC2 Enhanced Fiber Connector Cleaner is a nonflammable, environmentally safe, residue-free solvent engineered to clean fiber connector end-faces and bare fiber before field terminating or fusion splicing. The 3-way dispenser is intended for easy one-handed use with fiber wipes, convenient wetting of CCT connector cleaning tips, and spray nozzle functionality. Packaged in unique, spill-proof containers, it can be shipped with connector cleaning and termination kits so technicians avoid wasting time sourcing a cleaner locally. Offering high purity and fast consistent cleaning, FCC2 was developed with and is packaged by Micro Care Corporation, a world leader in cleaning solvents.
Features
• Not Hazardous/Not Regulated for all modes of transport, including air cargo
• Unique dispenser for use with AFL Connector Cleaning Tips and FiberWipes
• Up To 400+ cleanings per can
• Dries without a residue, unlike alcohol
• Dissipates static charge
• Safe on all surfaces including soft plastics
Applications
• Cleans all types of connector end-faces
• Cleans bare fiber before field terminating or fusion splicing
• Removes oils, salts, dust, dirt and uncured epoxies
• Safe on glass, ceramic, metal, plastic optical fiber
• Compact size fits easily into tool kits, instrument cases, termination kits, and inspection kits
• Perfectly cleans all optic components
EU RoHS and WEEE Compliant
FCC2 is certified as a lead-free product and meets RoHS and WEEE standards.
Health and Safety Data
Flashpoint (TCC)
Weight
Safety Rating
NFPA
HMIS:
Transportation
None
3 oz / 85 g
Nonflammable
Health: 3 | Fire: 1 | Instability: 0
Health: 1 | Flammability: 1 | Physical: 0
Not regulated
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid in 3 oz / 85 g can
Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid , Case of 12 cans
AFL NO.
FCC2-00-0902
FCC2-00-0903
© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. FCC2-00-2000 Revision 1F, 2015-01-22
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
228
FCP2-00-0900 Basic Cleaning Kit
FCPR-00-0900 Refill for Basic Cleaning Kit
FCP2-01-0900 Basic Cleaning and Inspection Kit
FCP2-02-0900 Basic Cleaning, Inspection & Test Kit
1400-01-0095PZ Carry Case
Field Portable Duffle Bag Cleaning Kits
The FCP2 kits offer a complete selection of fiber optic cleaning products for field cleaning of connector end-faces in a convenient duffle bag style carry case.
The Basic Cleaning Kit includes FCC2 cleaning fluid, One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC and
MU connectors, FiberWipes
™
and a Cletop SB. The carry case has room to add additional cleaning supplies, inspection scope, or test equipment. FCP2 kit options are available with inspection, loss testing and MPO/MPT cleaning capabilities.
FCC2 Fiber Connector Cleaner
FCC2 is a nonflammable, environmentally safe, residue-free solvent engineered to clean fiber connector end-faces. A new and improved design of the 3-way dispenser intended for easy one-handed use with fiber wipes, convenient wetting of CCT connector cleaning tips, and spray nozzle functionality. Packaged in unique, spill-proof containers, it can be shipped with tool kits so technicians avoid wasting time sourcing a cleaner locally.
• New 3-way dispenser in one convenient package
• Electrically conductive, FCC2 neutralizes “particle cling” by releasing ionic bonds that bind contaminates to the fiber end-face
• Double-filtered to 0.2 microns, this optical grade solvent leaves no residue when drying
• Less drying time than IPA Alcohol
• Low odor, nonflammable
• Ozone safe, environmentally safe, US EPA SNAP approved
• Not Hazardous/Not Regulated for all modes of transport, including air cargo
• Excellent for cleaning light oils, salts, moisture, fingerprints, dust, lint, grime, flux residues and uncured epoxies
• With rapid drying time, the FCC2 is essential when cleaning connectors in adapters where airflow is minimal
One-Click Cleaner
The One-Click Cleaner is an easy-to-use option for cleaning connectors on jumpers and in adapters. Simply insert the One-Click Cleaner into an adapter and push until an audible “click” is heard. The One-Click Cleaner uses the mechanical push action to advance an optical grade cleaning tape while the cleaning tip is rotated to ensure the fiber end-face is effectively, but gently cleaned.
• Cleans connectors on jumpers and in adapters
• Ergonomic, comfortable design with single action cleaning
• Precise mechanical action delivers consistent cleaning results
• Low cost per clean
• Effective on a variety of contaminates including dust and oils
• Automatic advance ensures each clean is performed with fresh cleaning tape
• Compliant with EU/95/2002/EC Directive (RoHS)
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. FCP2-10-2000 Revision 1C, 2014-10-29
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
229
Field Portable Duffle Bag Cleaning Kits
FiberWipes
™
Specifically designed to remove and trap common contaminants found in fiber optic installations, FiberWipes provide superior cleaning results from material that is stronger and more absorbent, yet softer than traditional cellulose wipes. Packaged in a clean room, the fabric is considered “fiber optic grade”.
• Cleaning optical fibers prior to termination or splicing
• Cleaning fiber optic connector end-faces
• Cleaning lenses, mirrors, and other optical surfaces
• Small package footprint ideal for a laboratory or field use
• Rugged 90-wipe mini-tub keeps wipes clean and dry prior to use
• Solvent safe; may be moistened to provide wet/dry cleaning
• Instructions for use on the side of the tub
Cletop Cassette Cleaner
The Cletop connector cleaner is a rugged palm-sized cleaner that offers exceptional performance with a proven track record. The choice of leading manufacturers and telecom carries worldwide for nearly 20 years – Cletop is a name you can rely on.
• Compact design is ideal for use in labs, assembly lines, or in the field
• Consistent cleaning results without IPA alcohol, which is toxic, flammable, and leaves a residue on fiber ends (white haze)
• Excellent anti-static properties for static sensitive applications and to minimize reattachment of dust to ferrule after cleaning
• Simple push button shutter operation exposes cleaning tape only when in use – minimizing unwanted dust
• Replaceable and cost effective cleaning tape
• Over 400 wipes per tape
Ordering Information
Basic Cleaning and Inspection Kit
This kit adds inspection capabilities to the Basic Cleaning Kit with an OFS300-200 inspection scope. The kit includes OFS300-200 inspection scope, One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB and convenient duffle bag carry case.
Basic Cleaning, Inspection and Test Kit
Adds inspection along with multimode and single-mode loss test capabilities. The kit includes OFS300-200 inspection scope, CSM1-2 contractor series power meter, CSS1-MM contractor series multimode light source, CSS1-SM contractor series single-mode light source,
One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB and convenient duffle bag carry case.
DESCRIPTION
Basic Cleaning Kit with Carry Case
Refill for Basic Cleaning Kit
(no Carry Case)
Basic Cleaning Kit with MPO Cleaners and Carry Case
Basic Cleaning and Inspection Kit
Basic Cleaning, Inspection and Loss
Test Kit
Carry Case
INCLUDES AFL NO.
One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB and Carry Case FCP2-00-0900
One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB FCPR-00-0900
One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC, and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB, MPO/MTP
Cleaner and Carry Case
OFS300-200 inspection scope, One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC, and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid,
FiberWipes, Cletop SB
OFS300-200 inspection scope, CSM1-2 power meter, CSS1-MM multimode light source, CSS1-SM single-mode light source, One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC, and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB
Field Portable Duffle Bag Cleaning Supplies Carry Case
FCP2-00-0901
FCP2-01-0900
FCP2-02-0900
1400-01-0095PZ
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. FCP2-10-2000 Revision 1C, 2014-10-29
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
FiberWipes
FiberAide 1
Features
• Lint free
• Sized for fiber and connector cleaning
• Robust and tear-resistant
FiberWipes is a trademark of MicroCare Corporation.
FiberAide 1 is patent pending.
FiberWipes
™
New Material – New Packaging – Superior Wipes
Specifically designed to remove and trap common contaminants found in fiber optic installations, FiberWipes provide superior cleaning results from material that is stronger and more absorbent, yet softer than traditional cellulose wipes. Packaged in a clean room, the fabric is considered “fiber optic grade”. FiberWipes are available in rugged mini-tubs (90 wipes) or in hermetically sealed individual packages (FiberAide 1) and are the perfect size for tool kits and test kits.
Applications
• Cleaning optical fibers prior to termination or splicing
• Cleaning fiber optic connector end-faces
• Cleaning lenses, mirrors, and other optical surfaces
FiberWipes
• Small package footprint ideal for a laboratory or field use
• Rugged 90-wipe mini-tub keeps wipes clean and dry prior to use
• Octagonal cover minimizes rolling distance if dropped
• Solvent safe; may be moistened to provide wet / dry cleaning
• Instructions for use on the side of the tub
FiberAide 1
• Hermetically sealed wipes remain uncontaminated and ready for use
• Foil backed wipes protect skin from cleaning solvents and cable gel
• Packaging contains no glues to leach out
• Button hole for placement on panel board or keychain
• Ideal for shipping with OEM equipment to prevent contamination of fiber surfaces at installation
• Solvent safe; may be moistened to provide wet / dry cleaning
• Pictorial instructions on each package
Specifications
PRODUCT
FiberWipes
FiberAide 1
WIPE SIZE
4.25” W x 2” H
2.75” W x 1.5” H
PACKAGE SIZE
3” Dia x 3” H
4.25” W x 2.75” H
PACKAGE WEIGHT
2.6 oz
0.6 oz / 10 packets
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
FiberWipes – case of 24 mini-tubs (2160 total wipes, 90 wipes per mini-tub)
FiberAide 1 – case of 600 packets (60 bundles, 10 packets per bundle)
AFL NO.
9000-03-0026MZ
9000-03-0027MZ
International Sales and Service Contact Information
Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts
© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. FOW1-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2014-10-29
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
231
Fiber Optic Tool Kits
As the leader in fiber optic training, The Light Brigade
®
, AFL's training division, understands the special tool needs of technicians and what it takes to do the job in a safe, efficient, and effective manner. Our tool kits were developed with the insight and feedback from experts in the industry. We include options for these tool kits that allow technicians to order variations based on personal preferences without driving up the cost of the kits with unnecessary or redundant tools.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Tool Kit including The Light
Brigade branded bag and listed tools
AFL NO.
T-KCP
Cable Preparation Tool Kit
A basic tool kit designed for fiber optic cable preparation and closure/enclosure preparation for splicing inside or outside. It is also for loose tube or premise cable applications where the right tool is needed to strip, clean, and prepare fiber optic cable for splicing and termination.
Included Items
PART NO. DESCRIPTION
T-2CCS Fiber cable sheath stripper
BRAND
Ideal
T-2CK
T-2CS
Cable knife
Cable slitter
Ripley
Ripley
Ripley T-2CW
T-2CXC
T-2KV
T-2RT
T-2SC
Multi-socket can wrench
Cable cutters
Kevlar
™
shears with pouch
Ripley
Ripley
Ideal buffer cutting tool Ideal
Splicer’s scissors Ripley
PART NO. DESCRIPTION BRAND
T-3MS
T-3NP
T-3SDP
T-3SDS
T-3SR
Miller strippers
6" needle nose pliers
Screwdriver—Phillips
Ripley
Husky
Stanley
Screwdriver—standard Stanley
Seam ripper Clauss
T-3TM
T-5ETB
12' tape measure Stanley
Electrical tape—black 3M
Sharpie T-5SPM Permanent marker — black
T-5STB Small tool bag
12" x 11" x 9"
LBI
www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780
© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-5-00001, Revision 0, 4.3.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Tool Kit including The Light
Brigade branded bag and listed tools
AFL NO.
T-KERM
Emergency Restoration Tool Kit
A specialized tool kit designed for loose tube outside plant applications where fiber optic cable damage has occurred and a quick repair kit is needed to support emergency restoration. Includes hand tools for fiber cable preparation and closure preparation, mechanical splices, and a basic cleaver.
Included Items
PART NO. DESCRIPTION BRAND
S-D2501
Universal Fibrlok assembly tool
3M
S-D2509 Fibrlok II cap lifter tool 3M
S-D2529-6
Universal Fibrlok—
Package of 6
3M
OFS
Ideal
T-1VL
T-2CCS
T-2CK
T-2CS
Staple cleaver
Fiber cable sheath stripper
Cable knife
Cable slitter
T-2CW
Multi-socket can wrench
T-2CXC Cable cutters
T-2KV
Kevlar pouch
™ shears with
Ripley
Ripley
Ripley
Ripley
Ripley
PART NO. DESCRIPTION
T-2SC Splicer’s scissors
T-3LP
T-3MS
T-3NP
T-3SDP
T-3SDS
T-3SR
T-3TM
T-5ETB
T-5SPM
T-5STB
8” lineman pliers
Miller strippers
6” needle nose pliers
Screwdriver – Phillips
Screwdriver – standard
Seam ripper
12’ tape measure
Electrical tape – black
BRAND
Ripley
Husky
Ripley
Husky
Stanley
Stanley
Clauss
Stanley
3M
Permanent marker – black Sharpie
Small tool bag
12” x 11” x 9”
LBI
Master Splicer Tool Kit
An all-inclusive master tool kit specifically designed for fiber optic cable preparation and closure/enclosure preparation. It is also for loose tube or premise cable applications where the right tool is needed to strip, clean and prepare fiber optic cable for splicing and termination. Includes specialized tools needed to do mid-cable access procedures and prepare special fiber optic cables such as OPGW, ADSS, MicroCable, and armored loose tube for splicing or termination.
Ordering Information
DESCRIPTION
Tool Kit including The Light
Brigade
®
branded bag and listed tools
AFL NO.
T-KMS
Included Items
PART NO. DESCRIPTION BRAND
T-2BC
T-2CCS
Small bolt cutters—
OPGW strands 14"
Workforce
Fiber cable sheath stripper Ideal
T-2CKSC Cable knife and scissors Ripley
T-2CW Multi-socket can wrench tool
Ripley
T-2CXC
T-2KV
Cable cutters
Kevlar pouch
™
shears with
T-2OPGW Mini SST pipe cutter—
1/8" to 5/8"
Ripley
Ripley
JHL
T-2RT
T-3JP
T-3MS
Ideal buffer cutting tool Ideal
8" joint pliers Husky
Miller strippers
T-3MSAT MSAT mid-span access tool
Ripley
Ripley
www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780
PART NO. DESCRIPTION
T-3SDP Screwdriver—Phillips
T-3SDS
T-3SR
T-3TM
T-5ETB
T-5ETBL
T-5ETG
T-5ETR
T-5HSG
T-5SPM
T-HS-
Assort
T-5LTB
Screwdriver—standard
Seam ripper
12' tape measure
Electrical tape—black
Electrical tape—blue
BRAND
Stanley
Stanley
Clauss
Stanley
3M
3M
Electrical tape—green 3M
Electrical tape—red 3M
Heat shrink gun
Permanent marker— black
Wagner
Sharpie
Heat tubes
1/8", 1/4", 1/2", 1" (6" segments)
Large tool bag—
11" x 17" x 10"
LBI
© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-5-00001, Revision 0, 4.3.12
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423
OEM and Specialty Products
Training Available from
Light Brigade
®
Since 1987, The Light Brigade has trained more than 50,000 technicians, installers, engineers, and designers from a wide variety of industries: telephony, broadband cable, utilities, media broadcast, industrial, manufacturing, mining, government, and aerospace, along with the various branches of the military.
Whether your application is a small local telephone network, a complex fiber to the home network, a sophisticated military facility, or an undersea oil explorationsite, The Light Brigade can provide critical training for your personnel to lower operating cost and improve installation efficiency.
Instructors
Our professional instructors and technicians are technically skilled and have a variety of real world practical experience in all aspects of fiber optics. With experience in applications such as communications, signaling, security, and network control, our instructors provide valuable insight into the design, installation, and operation of state-of-the-art fiber optic systems.
Hands-on Training
By having extensive hands-on sessions in each training class, our attendees learn fiber optics by doing rather than by watching. Attendees spend class time building, testing, or troubleshooting an actual fiber optic system. In each of our courses, the ratio of students to instructors during the hands-on sessions ensures that there is direct personal interaction and attention to each student.
Technology-based
In our training classes, you receive an objective viewpoint, not a sales pitch. We teach fiber techniques that are applicable to any product, and select the best available equipment and supplies from many different manufacturers. You can choose to develop your skills using our state-of-the-art equipment and accessories, or bring your own to learn how to use it more effectively.
Relevant
Our course materials are constantly updated to stay in step with current and emerging technologies. All of our materials and techniques are written and taught based on the latest standards, recommendations, and codes from ANSI, ITU, TIA/EIA, IEEE,
IEC, Telcordia, MSHA, NEC, NESC, and others.
Continuing Support
To ensure continued long-term support, we offer technical assistance to our class attendees. If you have a question or need help after the class is over, our staff is there to help.
Certification Options
Light Brigade Certificate of Completion
Everyone who completes one of our courses will receive a Light Brigade
Certificate of Completion, signed by the course instructor. This certificate specifies the content and total number of instructional hours for both the classroom and hands-on portions and is traceable to the class attended.
Third-party Credits and Certification
Many of our classes are eligible for independent certifications through third-party industry organizations and groups. These certifications are typically progressive levels and show competency in hands-on skills and technical knowledge. See individual course details for more information.
In addition, many of our courses are eligible for BICSI Continuing
Education Credits (CECs), SCTE recertification units (RUs), and IMSA
Technical Advancement Recognition Points (TARPs).
C
TR
O
NIC
S TECH
N
IC
IA
A
S S O
C I A T I O
N
Electronics
Technicians
Association (ETA)
International
Municipal Signal
Association (IMSA)
Fiber Optic
Association
(FOA)
Utilities
Telecom
Council
Building Industry
Consulting Service
International, Inc. (BICSI)
Certified Fiber to the Home
Professional
Society of Cable
Telecommunications
Engineers
(206) 575-0404 • (800) 451-7128 • www.lightbrigade.com
www.AFLglobal.com
CAT-01201 6.10.2015
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 5 Laser Splicing Sytem
- 7 FSM-100M and FSM-100P Fusion Splicers
- 9 Fujikura 70S Fusion Splicer
- 11 Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer
- 13 Fujikura 19S Fusion Splicer
- 15 Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer
- 17 Fujikura 70R Fusion Splicer
- 19 Fujikura 19R Fusion Splicer
- 21 Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer
- 23 CT-30 Fiber Cleaver
- 24 CT-32 Precision Fiber Cleaver
- 25 CT-38 Precision Fiber Cleaver
- 26 CT-100 Fiber Cleaver
- 27 CT-105 & CT-106 Fiber Cleavers
- 30 AutoCleaver
- 31 AutoCleaver LDF
- 35 AutoCleaver S1 -80 µm / S1-125 µm
- 36 AutoCleaver S
- 38 Hot Jacket Strippers
- 40 High Tensile Stripper
- 41 USC-03 Ultrasonic Cleaner
- 42 FSR-05, FSR-06 and FSR-07 Optical Fiber Recoaters
- 51 ProofTester
- 52 Fiber Arrangement Tool
- 52 Ribbon Forming Adhesive
- 53 Splice Protection Sleeves
- 55 Cotton Swabs
- 55 Temporary Joining Tools
- 56 M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR
- 62 OFL280-10x FlexTester OTDR
- 68 M710 Multifunction OTDR
- 72 DFS1 Digital FiberScope
- 76 NS and NSR Series Fiber Optic Network Simulators
- 77 OTDR Fiber Rings
- 79 OPM1 Optical Power Meter
- 81 OPM4-FTTx PON Power Meter
- 83 OPM5 and OPM4 Optical Power Meters
- 86 VOA6-SM Variable Optical Attenuator
- 88 C850 Compact QUAD OTDR with QUAD OLS and OPM
- 92 C860 QUAD OTDR and Certification Test Kit
- 96 C880 QUAD Certification Test Kit
- 99 Connector Specifications
- 100 Simplex Cable Assemblies
- 101 Bend Insensitive Cable Assemblies
- 102 Two-Fiber Cable Assemblies
- 103 LC Uniboot Cable Assemblies
- 104 Quad Cable Assemblies
- 105 Circular Premise Cable (CPC) Assemblies
- 106 Trunk Cable Assemblies
- 108 SC Angled Pigtail Assemblies
- 109 Node Cable Assemblies
- 110 LightLink Fiber Receiver Service Cable Assemblies (FRSC)
- 112 Cable Assemblies
- 114 Future Access Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable for MDU Applications
- 115 Splice and Distribution Enclosure
- 117 Field-Installable Connectors
- 119 Universal Tool Kit
- 120 Field-Installable Connectors
- 121 MPO Field-Installable Connectors
- 123 Tool Kit and Accessories
- 124 SpliceConnect with Tool Kit
- 125 Buildout Attenuators
- 126 Wideband Couplers
- 127 Ruggedized Wideband Couplers
- 128 Wavelength Division Multiplexer Couplers
- 129 Planar Couplers
- 130 Optical Coupler Modules
- 132 Optical Splitter Shelf
- 133 Optical FTTx Coupler Module
- 134 Optical FTTx WDM Module
- 135 RFoG WDM Module
- 136 FTTx Splitter Modules
- 137 FTTx WDM Modules
- 138 Dense WDM (DWDM) Modules
- 140 Coarse WDM Modules (CWDM)
- 141 1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel
- 143 2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel
- 145 3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel
- 147 4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel
- 149 5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel
- 151 6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel
- 153 7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel
- 155 8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel
- 157 Patch and Splice Module
- 159 Pigtail Assemblies for Patch and Splice Panels
- 160 MPO Optical Cassettes
- 162 Thin Film Filter (TFF) Compact Series CWDM
- 163 and Fiber Enclosures
- 165 LG-410 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure
- 166 LG-420 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure
- 167 LG-420 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Closure
- 168 LG-500 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure
- 169 LG-500 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures
- 170 LG-600 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure
- 171 LG-600 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Closure
- 172 Aerial Splice Closure Accessories
- 174 LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays
- 182 LightLink Splitter Trays
- 183 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures
- 184 Peel & Seal Grommet Systems for Sealed Fiber Optic Closures
- 185 LG-55 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
- 186 LG-55-SC Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
- 187 LG-150 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
- 188 LG-250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
- 189 250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
- 190 LG-350 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
- 192 LG-350-AC Drop Access Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
- 193 LG-350XL Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
- 194 LG-700 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure
- 195 Sealed Splice Closure Accessories
- 198 LightLink Terminal Adapters for Sealed Closures
- 199 500 Optical Demarcation Closure
- 200 760XL Optical Demarcation Closure
- 201 1224 Optical Demarcation Closure
- 202 Hermetic Fiber Assemblies
- 204 Stainless Steel Fiber Optic Tubes
- 205 Traditional Downhole Cable
- 206 Low Profile Downhole Cable
- 207 High Temperature Downhole Cable
- 208 for Umbilical Cable
- 210 Tactical Tight Buffered Cable
- 211 Non-Armored Security Cable
- 213 Security Cable
- 214 Simplex Cable
- 216 Zipcord, Dual-link and Micro-Dual Cable
- 218 Cable
- 220 Multi-Unit Circular Premise Cable
- 222 Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cable
- 224 Cletop Cassette Cleaner Series
- 226 Cleaner Series
- 228 Cletop Adapter Cleaning Sticks
- 229 CCT - Connector Cleaning Tips
- 231 Field Portable Duffle Bag Cleaning Kits
- 234 Fiber Optic Tool Kits
- 234 Cable Preparation Tool Kit
- 235 Emergency Restoration Tool Kit
- 235 Master Splicer Tool Kit